Author: Хведченя Л.В. Хорень Р.В
Tags: общие вопросы лингвистики, литературы и филологии языки мира грамматика английский язык фонетика лексика
ISBN: 985-06-0412-3
Year: 1998
Text
Л. Б. ХБВДЧЕНЯ
Р. Б. ХОРЕНЬ
Л
ишимский
для
ЯЗЫК
ПОСТУПАЮЩИХ
В ВУЗЫ
9-е издание, переработанное
и дополненное
КАНТРОП1ТПТ
ЭКЗЭМПЛЯР
Минск
"Вышэйшая школа"
1998
Библиотека НИПП
Инв.№
УДК 802.0(075.4)
ББК 81.2 Англ я729
Х-30
Хведченя Л. В., Хорень Р. В.
Английский язык для поступающих в вузы. —
9-е изд., перераб. и доп. - Мн.: Выш. шк., 1998. -
431 с.
ISBN 985-06-0412-3. J
Пособие включает 3 раздела: фонетика, грамматика, лек-
сика. Каждый раздел наряду с необходимым теоретическим
материалом содержит большое, количество тренировочных
упражнений, способствующих прочному усвоению темы. В
приложение включены тексты для аудирования, чтения и
пересказа. В конце книги приводятся ключи к упражнениям.
В 9 издании переработан и дополнен раздел «Грамматика»,
внесены изменения в тексты устных тем, расширен раздел
«Ключи к упражнениям».
Предназначено для поступающих в вузы. Может быть ис-
пользовано всеми, кто интересуется английским языком.
УДК 802.0(075.4)
ББК 81.2 Англ я729
ISBN 985-06-0412-3
©Л. В. Хведченя, Р. В Хорень, 1993
© Изменения. Л. В. Хведченя, Р. В. Хорень,1998
© Издательство «Вышэйшая школа», 1998
ПРЕДИСЛОВИЕ
Настоящее пособие может рассматриваться как одно
из звеньев, обеспечивающих преемственность обучения
в системе «школа — неязыковой вуз». Оно представляет
собой коррективно-повторительный курс английского
языка и предназначено прежде всего для абитуриентов,
готовящихся к поступлению в высшие учебные заведе-
ния, а также лиц, желающих самостоятельно восстано-
вить и систематизировать свои знания по языку в рам-
ках нормативной грамматики, фонетики и устной речи.
Пособие может также использоваться для аудитор-
ной работы на подготовительных отделениях и курсах,
а при необходимости — на начальном этапе обучения в
вузе, что обеспечит основу для постепенного перехода к
вузовскому курсу.
Ориентация на самостоятельную работу определила
структуру пособия: учебный материал представлен в
нем не поурочно, а поаспектно, в виде трех основных
разделов (фонетика, грамматика, лексика). По мнению
авторов, такая презентация материала отличается боль-
шей системностью, упорядоченностью и удобством в
пользовании. Для самоконтроля и самокоррекции в
конце пособия приводятся ключи к наиболее трудным
упражнениям по грамматике и фонетике.
Коррективно-фонетический раздел (6 уроков) пред-
ставлен в объеме, достаточном и необходимом для отра-
ботки произносительных навыков, правил чтения букв
и буквосочетаний, интонационных особенностей анг-
лийского языка. Все фонетические явления рассматри-
ваются в сопоставлении с русскими, что также обуслов-
лено исходной установкой на самостоятельное изучение.
Задания по практической фонетике основываются на
базе системы тренировочных упражнений, предусмат-
ривающих не только коррекцию звуков и букв, но и
интонационную отработку основных грамматических
конструкций, фраз, текстов, диалогов.
Грамматический раздел содержит достаточно под-
робный комментарий по основным разделам морфоло-
з
гии, а также включает тему «Структура предложения».
Ставя задачу практического овладения грамматикой,
большое внимание уделяется выполнению тренировоч-
ных упражнений, способствующих усвоению основных
грамматических структур. Большинство предлагаемых
упражнений рекомендуется выполнять письменно. Это
обеспечит более вдумчивый и сосредоточенный анализ,
разовьет навыки письма.
Лексический курс состоит из 25 уроков, в соответст-
вии с количеством тем на вступительных экзаменах.
Каждый урок содержит базовый текст устной темы с
необходимыми пояснениями и тематическим словарем,
а также ряд лексических упражнений. Упражнения
расположены по принципу нарастания языковых труд-
ностей. Первые пять-шесть упражнений являются обя-
зательными для прочного усвоения темы. Последующие
включают лексический материал, способствующий ее
более глубокой, расширенной проработке. Этот матери-
ал имеет коммуникативно-речевую направленность и
представлен в виде дополнительных текстов, коротких
диалогов, разнообразных заданий по развитию навыков
устной речи. Тексты подобраны из оригинальной лите-
ратуры и частично адаптированы. Задания к ним зачас-
тую условны, так как основную цель авторы видели в
насыщении пособия оригинальным текстовым материа-
лом, оставляя за абитуриентом либо преподавателем
право использовать его по своему усмотрению.
При ранжировке школьного лексического минимума
использован основополагающий в отечественной и зару-
бежной лингвистике принцип системной организации
лексики. Все слова распределены по тематическим по-
лям. Как показывает практика, это обеспечивает их бо-
лее быстрое и прочное запоминание по сравнению с ал-
фавитным расположением.
Девятое издание пособия значительно переработано и
дополнено в соответствии с изменениями в программе
для поступающих в высшие учебные заведения Белару-
си. Расширен раздел «Грамматика», внесены изменения
в тексты устных тем, дополнен раздел «Ключи к уп-
ражнениям».
Авторы
4
Английский алфавит
(The English Alphabet)
Печатные буквы В письме Название буквы Печатные буквы В письме Название буквы
Аа Аа [ei] Nn Nn [en]
Bb Bb [bi:] Oo Oo [ou]
Сс Сс [si:] Pp Pp [pi]
Dd Dd [di:] Qq Qq [kju:]
Ее Ее [i:] Rr Rr [а; (Г)]
Ff Ff [ef] Ss Ss [es]
Gg Qg [d3i] Tt Tt [ti:]
Hh Hh [eitj] Uu Uu [ju]
li li [ai] Vv Vv [vi:]
Jj Ji [dsei] Ww Ww 'dAblju:
Kk Kk [kei] Xx Xx [eks]
Ы LI [el] Yy Yy [wai]
Mm Mm [em] Zz Zz [zed]
ФОНЕТИКА
УРОК 1
ОБЩИЕ СВЕДЕНИЯ О ЗВУКОВОМ СТРОЕ И
ОРФОГРАФИИ АНГЛИЙСКОГО ЯЗЫКА
В любом языке слова состоят из звуков и букв. Бук-
вы используются в письменной речи, а звуи — в устной.
Адекватное соотношение звуков и букв в большинст-
ве языков отсутствует, что обусловливает определенные
различия между написанием и произношением. Особен-
но велико это различие в английском языке, где орфо-
графия не изменялась примерно с XV века, а звуковая
форма претерпела с тех пор значительные изменения.
Количество звуков в английском языке намного пре-
вышает количество букв: 26 букв передают 441 звука.
Следовательно, одна и та же буква в разных положени-
ях может обозначать разные звуки, и, наоборот, один и
тот же звук может изображаться разными буквами и
буквосочетаниями. Все это требует от изучающего язык
прочного изначального овладения правилами чтения, а
также знания фонетической транскрипции.
Под фонетической транскрипцией понимается меж-
дународная система условных графических обозначе-
ний звуков, где каждому конкретному звуку соответ-
ствует один определенный знак. Чтобы не смешивать
буквы со знаками транскрипции, последние берутся в
квадратные скобки [ ]. Фонетическая транскрипция
слов в словарях дается вслед за орфографическим обо-
значением слова, например: garden ['ga:don]. Двоеточие
[:] после гласного звука указывает на его долготу.
Знак ['] в транскрипции является обозначением
словесного ударения и ставится перед ударным слогом.
В зависимости от количества слогов слова разделяются *
основное расхождение между количеством букв и звуков наблю-
дается в системе гласных (6 букв - 20 звуков).
6
на односложные (red, snow), двусложные (report, public)
и многосложные (beautiful, important).
В двусложных словах ударным является, как
правило, второй слог с конца, в трехсложных - третий
(ударение, однако, не падает на приставку: re' cover, а'
lone). Многосложные слова могут иметь два ударения:
основное и второстепенное ('possi' bility, 'eti' mology).
Обучение чтению в английском языке невозможно
без знания правил слогоделения. Основные из них сво-
дятся к следующему:
1. В слове столько слогов, сколько в нем гласных.
Например: my, sea1, num-ber, fa- mi-ly.
2. Слог может составить одна гласная. Например: а-
tom, i-tem.
3. Слог образуют сочетания гласных с буквами 1 и г,
если за ними следует немое - е. Например: ta-ble, а-
cre, ti-tle.
4. Если на границе слогораздела имеется одна
согласная буква, то он отходит ко второму слогу, если
две или более, то первая относится к первому слогу, а
остальные - ко второму. Например: sys~tern, un-cle,
ap-ple.
Тренировочные упражнения
1. Назовите буквы в следующих словах:
what, young, chalk, page, switch, social, bridge,
mouth, knife, just, quarter, union, why, vegetable, par-
ents, experiment, yesterday, pleasant, accept, resources,
conquering, space.
2. Прочитайте следующие слова, обращая внимание
на соотношение количества букв и звуков:
friend [frend] bright [brait] colour [”кл1э] weather [’weds] daughter ['do:ta] caught [ko:t] though [Sou] earth [э::0] ought [o:t] wheat [wi:t] whose [hu:z] knock [пэк] photo ['foutou] except [ik' sept]
буквосочетания гласных образуют один слог
7
3. Напишите в транскрипции следующие интерна
ционалъные слова. Сравните их произношение с соот-
ветствующими русскими эквивалентами.
system, politics, democracy, secretary, president, con-
gress, telegram, process, method, progress, organization,
block, discussion, delegation, tourist, group, party, offi-
cial, visit, museum, stadium, attack, theatre, ballet, ope-
ra, clerk, occupation, engineer, economist, cooperate, in-
tensity, export, basis, test.
4. Прочитайте следующие слова, определив в них
ударные слоги.
composition, education, examination, able, ability, pos-
sibility, simplicity, monopoly, advantageous, electricity,
polytechnic, territory, atmosphere, European, Japanese,
memorandum, correspondent, nationalization, administra-
tion, constitution, technological, philosophical, revolu-
tionary, refrigerator, disapprove, personality, opportu-
nity.
5. Разделите следующие слова на слоги.
polish, university, history, stumble, settle, letter,
energy, arrive, development, Russia, advantage, assistant,
numerous, announce, important, necessary, attempt, po-
tato, existence, departure, monument, passenger, enter,
worry, mistake, invite, cold.
6. Прочитайте следующие пары слов. Обратите
внимание на изменение ударения в однокоренных сло-
вах. принадлежащих к различным частям речи.
п
culture ['kAltJo]
economy [i:'konomi]
history ['histarij
policy ['polisi]
industry ['indostri]
theory ['eiari]
revolution ['revo'lujJCa)^
nation ['neif(a)n]
a
cultural ['kftltjaral]
economical ['itko'nomikal]
historical [his' torikal]
political [pa'litikal]
industrial [in'd as trial]
theoretical [Oia'retikal]
revolutionary
['reva'lu: J(a)nari]
national ['naej(o)nl]
8
V
n
export [eks'pa;t]
import [im'pa:t]
organize [Za:ganaiz]
demonstrate ['demanstreit]
coordinate [kou'o:dineit]
illustrate filastreit]
integrate ['intigreit]
export ['ekspa:t|
import ['impo:t]
organisation
['a:ganai'zeij(a)n]
demonstration
['demans'treif(a)n ]
coordination
[kou'a:di'neij(a)n ]
illustration ['ilas'treij(a)n]
integration [inti'greij(a)n]
Упражнения в чтении
1. Прочитайте и запомните:
а) названия дней недели:
The Days of the Week
Sunday ['sAndi]
Monday ['mAndi]
Tuesday ftju:zdi]
Wednesday ['wenzdi]
Thursday ['0a:zdi]
Friday ['fraidi]
Saturday ['saetadi]
б) названия месяцев года:
The Months of the Year
January ['djaenjuari]
February ['februari]
March [mo:tf]
April ['eipril]
May [mei]
June [dsu:n]
July [dju:'lai]
August ['a:gast]
September [sap'temba]
October [ok'touba]
November [nou'vemba]
December [di'semba]
в) названия городов:
The Names of the Cities
Moscow ['maskou]
London [TAndan]
Washington ['wojirjtan]
New York ['nju:'ja:k]
Tokyo ['toukiou]
Warsaw ['wa:sa:]
Ottawa ['atewa]
St. Petersburg
[snt'pi:tazba;g]
9
2. Отработайте чтение вопросительных слов. За-
помните их значение.
what [wot] - что, какой (-ая, -ое, -ие)
who [hu:] - кто
which [witj] - который, какой
whose [hu:z] — чей, чьи
whom [hum] - кому
where [wea] - куда, где
when [wen] - когда
why [wai] - почему
how [hau] - как
на первый (суффикс -ty без-
3. Прочитайте следующие цифры. Обратите вни-
мание, что у числительных от 13 до 19 основное уда-
рение падает на второй слог -teen, а у числительных,
обозначающих десятки,
ударный ).
'thir' teen - 'thirty
'four' teen - 'forty
'fif' teen - 'fifty
'six' teen —'sixty
'seven' teen — 'seventy
'eigh'teen — 'eighty
'nine'teen - 'ninety
4. Прочитайте, используя данные модели.
а) 1+4=5 One and four is five. (One plus four equals
five).
10 - 3 = 7 Ten minus three is seven.
11+ 3 = 14
15+5 = 20
83+17=100
19-2 = 17
14-2 = 12
100-50 = 50
8-1= 7
6+6=12
77-17 = 60
19 + 1 = 20
13+4 = 17
20+60 = 80
6) - What’s the time?
- It’s eight o'clock. (It’s eight sharp.)
It’s a quarter past eight.
It’s half past eight.
It’s a quarter to nine.
11.00, 11.15, 11.50, 12.05, 12.30, 5.15, 8.20, 9.00,
4.20, 4.40, 6.10, 6.50, 7.15, 10.45.
10
Задания для самоконтроля
1. Поставьте ударение в следующих интернацио-
нальных словах. Сравните его с ударением в соответ-
ствующих русских эквивалентах.
history, philology, synonym, antonym, symphony, in-
stitute, college, faculty, mathematics, physics, biology,
geography, cosmic, cosmonaut, tractor, bracelet, Belaru-
sian, Spanish, English, minus, contract, product, football,
problem, automatically.
2. Напишите следующие известные вам слова в
транскрипции:
please, school, seven, text, book, piano, yes, enjoy,
teacher, born, study, learn, coffee, three, winter, easy,
third, tour, air.
УРОК 2
ОСОБЕННОСТИ ФОНЕТИЧЕСКОГО СТРОЯ
АНГЛИЙСКОГО ЯЗЫКА
Фонетический строй английского языка существенно
отличается от фонетического строя русского языка, что
вызывает определенные трудности при овладении про-
изношением. Основные различия определяются наличи-
ем специфических звуков, отсутствующих в родном
языке, характерными артикуляционными и произноси-
тельными навыками, интонационным своеобразием.
ПРОИЗНОШЕНИЕ ГЛАСНЫХ
Особенностью произношения гласных является деле-
ние их на долгие и краткие.
К долгим гласным относятся [i:], [а:], [э:], [и:], [э:], а
также образуемые ими дифтонги [ei],[ai], [ou], [oi], [io],
[еэ], [иэ].
К кратким - [i], [е], [эе], [о], [и], [л], [э].
Соблюдение правила долготы и краткости гласного
является обязательным в английском языке, ибо любая
замена может привести к искажению смысла. Например:
11
ship [Jip] - корабль, sheep [fi:p] - овца. В русском язы-
ке долгота не имеет смыслоразличительной функции.
Все долгое гласные в английском языке произносятся
энергично и одинаково напряженно на всем протяже-
нии звука.
В английском языке гласный звук может переда-
ваться на письме сочетанием двух букв. Например:
[i:] - ее, еа, meet, tea; [u:], [u] - oo: food, book.
Английские гласные могут образовывать дифтонги и
трифтонги, т.е. звуки, состоящие из двух и трех
элементов, например: [at], [аиэ], [хэ]. Они произносятся
слитно в пределах одного слога и с ударением на первом
элементе. В русском языке сочетания типа ай, ой, ей
являются сочетаниями гласного с согласным.
И, наконец, в английском языке есть гласные звуки
[э:] и [эе], отсутствующие в русском.
Краткая сравнительная характеристика английских
и русских гласных звуков приводится ниже.
[i:] - произносится примерно как протяжный рус-
ский звук [и] в слове иволга.
[i] - произносится примерно как краткий звук [и ] в
слове игра.
[е] - произносится примерно как [э] в словах эти,
жесть.
[ж] - средний между [э ] и [а], напоминает мягкий а
в слове дятел.
[л] - произносится как неударный звук [а] в слове
казак. В английском языке обычно находится под уда-
рением.
[а:] — похож на удлиненный [а-а] в слове ка-ак, но
образуется более глубоко в ротовой полости.
[э] — произносится примерно как краткий звук [о] в
слове мост.
[э:] - произносится примерно как протяжное [о] в
слове порт.
[э:] - долгий звук, средний между [о] и [э]. Напоми-
нает звук [е] в слове Гёте.
[э] — краткий, неударный звук, произносится при-
мерно как неударное [о] в слове почет.
[и] - произносится примерно как [у] в слове тук.
12
[u:] - соответствует примерно русскому звуку [у],
произнесенному протяжно: у-уголъ.
[ai] — близок русскому [ай] в слове дай.
[ei] — близок русскому [ей] в слове лей.
[oi] - близок русскому [ой] в слове бой.
[аи] - близок русскому [ау] в слове пауза.
[ои] — близок русскому [оу] в слове клоун.
[io] - сочетание [и] и [э] с ударением на [и]. Прибли-
зительно [иэ].
[иэ] - сочетание [у] и [э] с ударением на [у]. Прибли-
зительно [уэ].
[еэ] - сочетание звука [е] и [э]. Примерно произно-
сится [эа].
Тренировочные упражнения
1. Отработайте чтение гласных звуков:
[i:] - meal, cheese, we, be, please, easy, even, speak,
feel.
[i] - sit, regret, become, event, market, pocket, money.
[e] — test, centre, lesson, bed, breath, entrance,
weather.
[э:] - her, term, turn, burn, first, girl, world, learn,
myrtle.
[0] - doctor, farmer, answer, perhaps, permit, affair,
sentence.
[a:] - part, large, class, pass, plant, ask, chance, after.
[л] — funny, sun, son, love, month, cover, front, London,
[ju:] - new, you, few, University, union, Europe, due.
2. Прочитайте следующие слова. Помните, что их
значение может зависеть от правильного произноше-
ния долгих и кратких звуков.
[К] lead wheat cheeks seek feel neat eat
Ш lid wit chicks sick fill knit it
[а:] lark charm barn harm cart dark bard
[Л] luck chum bun hum cut duck bud
[и:] pool fool food lose cool wound boot
[и] pull full foot look cook would book
[э:] chalk court port horse board raw walk
[о] chock cot pot hostel body wrong wash
13
3. Сопоставьте произношение звуков [к], [i], [е], [ае],
[а]. Обратите внимание на разницу в написании и
значении слов.
[к] - [i] [k] - [e] [k] - [o:] [e] -
teen tin see set we were men man
heat hit meal melt see sir bed bad
heal hill meet met team term pen pan
beat bit read red weak work send sand
peak pick lead led teen turn lend land
seat sit even event niece nurse then than
4. Сопоставьте произношение звуков [а:], [о:], [л], [о].
[a:] - [o:] [а:] - [o] [A] - [Э]
car core sharp shop sun song
star store last lost cut cot
far for heart hot none non
mark more clerk clock dull doll
park pork dark dock but bottle
farm form bark box front from
5. । Сопоставьте произношение монофтонгов и диф-
тонгов.
[e] - [ei] [ж| - [ei] [эе] - [ai] [i] - [ai]
men main tack take hat hight pin pine
pen pain sat sate fat fight film fine
wet wait cat Kate sad side myth my
sell sail fat fate man mine fifth five
pepper paper plan plane dad died typical type
[o] - [oi] [o] - [ou] [л] - [ou] [a] - [ou]
pot point not no love low burn bone
spot spoilt god go done dole turn tone
John join hot home son snow learn alone
toss toys stock stone London lonely curly cosy
joy joint rock robe another alone first phone
olive oil top tope front froze work woke
14
Упражнения в чтении
1. Прочитайте следующие служебные слова, учиты-
вая возможность произнесения гласной через ней-
тральный звук:
a, and, as, at, can, could, does, for, from, must, of,
shall, some, the, them, to, was, were, would.
2. Отработайте произношение определенного the
[do], [di] и неопределенного а [э], ап [ап] артиклей в
разных позициях.
a planet, a theatre, a historic event, a foreign visitor, а
busy street, a small house, a nice flat, a clever man;
an arm, an engineer, an experiment, an address, an ex-
ample, an answer, an interesting book, an absent-minded
man;
the distance, the ballet, the cheapest, the same, the
whole, the rest, the seventeenth, the century, the Volga,
the United States;
the University, in the evening, the assistance, the elder
son, the early years, the adults, on the agenda.
3. Прочитайте слова, обращая внимание на произ-
ношение гласных букв в ударном и заударном слоге.
а - factory, planet, animal, attack, attempt
i - limit, building, similar, activity
e - medicine, enemy, entrance, editor, centre, pencil
о - story, orange, economy, column
u/y - money, Monday, study, upper, sunny, colour
4. Прочитайте следующие предложения, обращая
внимание на произношение дифтонгов, долгих и крат-
ких гласных. Найдите их русские эквиваленты.
Seeing is believing.
Greek meets Greek.
On Monday we start Russian classes.
The less men think the more they talk.
Fortune favours fools.
First come first served.
Come and look at the monkeys.
Put the cups in the cupboard.
It is written in simple English, isn’t it?
15
Dad cannot catch that.
Mary’s hair is fair.
Cromer is quite a quiet place.
It really seems to be clearing.
During August there were fewer viewers.
Late nights make me tired.
5. Выразительно прочитайте стихотворение.
by Berta RHudelson
If many men knew
What many men know,
If many men went
Where many men go,
If many men did
What many men do,
The world would be better -
I think so; do you?
Задание для самоконтроля
1. Распределите слова по трем колонкам в зависи-
мости от позиционной долготы гласного:
[laik] [fain] [э:] ['kouzi] [frAnt] ['pensl] [ski:] [kAt] [went]
[ti:6] [did] [rouz] [leit] [0km] [fond] [fam] [ко:] [si:] [frej]
[neim] ['oupan] [du:] [ais] [buk] [fog] ['bAto] [switf] [fo:k]
['foiti] [tram] [best] [fast] [ ti:tfo] [ri:d] [кзер] [dres] [tent]
[tan] [taun] [meik].
УРОК 3
ОСОБЕННОСТИ ФОНЕТИЧЕСКОГО СТРОЯ
АНГЛИЙСКОГО ЯЗЫКА
ПРОИЗНОШЕНИЕ СОГЛАСНЫХ
В фонетической системе английских согласных 24
звука (20 букв). Они делятся на глухие и звонкие, мно-
гие имеют соответствующие пары.
Звонкие согласные: [b] [d] [g] [v] [d] [z] [j] [dj] [m] [n]
[01 И M [Л [w]-
Глухие согласные: [p] [t] [k] [f] [6] [s] [J] [tj] [h].
Некоторые английские согласные очень близки к
русским, например [b], [р], [v], [f], [g], [k], [m]. Единст-
венное различие состоит в том, что они, как и все анг-
16
лийские согласные, произносятся более напряженно и
энергично, а [р], [k], [t] в позиции перед гласной с при-
дыханием.
Другие звуки [t], [d], [s], [z], [1], [n] отличаются от
соответствующих русских по месту артикуляции. При
произнесении английских звуков кончик языка нахо-
дится у альвеол (бугорков над верхними зубами) , а
язык утолщен, в то время как в русском язык занимает
плоское положение, а кончик его находится у передних
верхних зубов. Таким образом, первые являются альве-
олярными, вторые - дентальными. Преобладание альве-
олярных согласных придает специфический оттенок
английской речи.
Существуют некоторые различия в произношении
звуков [/], [j], [г] и др. Кроме того, в английском языке
есть ряд специфических согласных, не имеющих соот-
ветствия в русском языке. Это [w], [д], [6], [h], [dj], [g].
Английские согласные характеризуются также ря-
дом других особенностей:
а) им не свойственна палатализация (смягчение). В
любом положении они читаются твердо, в то время как
в русском языке есть и твердые и мягкие звуки, напри-
мер: мел - мель;
б) звонкие согласные на конце слова не оглушаются.
Оглушение может повлечь за собой изменение смысла.
Сравните: dead [ded] - мертвый и debt [det] - долг;
в) глухие согласные перед звонкими не озванчивают-
ся, например: English books [igglif 'buks].
Примерная сравнительная характеристика англий-
ских и русских согласных приводится ниже.
[р] — глухой, произносится с придыханием, соответ-
ствует русскому [п].
[Ь] - звонкий, примерно соответствует русскому [б].
[f] - глухой, примерно соответствует русскому [ф].
[v] - звонкий, примерно соответствует русскому [в].
[w] - звук [в], произнесенный одними губами. Губы
округляются, выдвигаются вперед и быстро размыкают-
ся. Подобного звука в русском языке нет.
[t] - глухой, альвеолярный, примерно соответствует
русскому [т].
[d] — звонкий, альвеолярный, примерно соответствует
русскому [д]. _
17 Библиотека Ш-1ПП
Инв.№
[к] — глухой, соответствует русскому [к], произносит-
ся с придыханием.
[g]- звонкий, примерно соответствует русскому [г ].
[п] — примерно соответствует русскому [н].
[д ] - носовой звук. При произнесении звука [д] зад-
няя стенка языка смыкается с опущенным мягким не-
бом, и воздух проходит через носовую полость.
[s] - примерно соответствует русскому [с].
[z] - примерно соответствует русскому [з].
[j] - примерно соответствует русскому [ж ], произно-
сится с большей мягкостью.
[ds] - соответствует русскому [дж] в слове джигит.
[J] - соответствует русскому [ш], но произносится
более мягко.
[ш] - соответствует русскому [ч], но произносится тверже.
[0] - глухой, межзубный. Подобного звука в русском
языке нет.
[д] - звонкий, межзубный. Подобного звука в рус-
ском языке нет.
[г] - произносится как русский [р], только без вибрации.
[1] - соответствует русскому [л], альвеолярный.
[h] - выдох, напоминающий слабо произнесенный
звук [х].
[j] - напоминает русский звук [й], но губы смыкают-
ся плотнее, воздух проходит через полость носа.
Тренировочные упражнения
1. Прочитайте следующие слова по вертикали и по
горизонтали, уделяя внимание произношению соглас-
ных и гласных звуков.
гласные согласные
[Ь] [r] [s] [t] [w] И
[i:] bee reach sea tea weak lead
[i] big rich sin tip wit lip
[е] beg red sell tell wet leg
[аг] bag ran sat tab wag land
[Л] but run sun tub won luck
[э] box wrong song top wash lock
[ei] bake rain save take wait late
[ai] bite rise side time wine lie
18
2. Отработайте произношение следующих соглас-
ных.
[Л m (31 №1 [h] [j]
ship chess usual jam his horse yet
shoes cheese vision Jane her house you
shop culture measure January high hill yellow
share fetch pleasure George his hope yesterday
finish match decision badge her husband year
3. Сопоставьте произношение звонких и глухих зву-
ков.
[Pl - [b] [k] - [g] [fl - [d]
pea bea crew grew try dry
pie buy sick fog true drew
pap pub dock dog Kate laid
pride bride pick big set said
cap cab come gum built build
[fl - [v] [5] " [6] [s] [2]
fame vain though throw docks dogs
few view those third said zed
safe save this fifth peace please
leaf leave that thin cease seize
knife knives without teeth niece knees
4. Отработайте произношение следующих звуков.
[tr] tram tree try street strong [pr] proud pretty present spring opera [kr] cry crowd cruel critic crown [tw] twice twelve twenty twist twins [kw] quick queen quarter quite question [t]-[d] at this but that just this what’s this what’s that
[v-w-w- -v] [d- z— z-d] [d- z— z— 0- s]
very well this is is this this is that thing
win victory that is is that that is the truth
wet weather there is is there those three months
warm wind there was was there these thousands of
thanks
19
5. Прочитайте словосочетания, обратите внимание
на связующий элемент [г] в положении между гласны-
ми.
there_is
thereare
whereis
forexample
for_instance
faraway
for a moment
near_it
a sisterora brother
Упражнения в чтении
1. Прочитайте слова и словосочетания. Следите за
тем, чтобы, глухие согласные перед звонкими не озвон-
чались, а звонкие перед глухими не оглушались.
a) Englishbooks, British guests. sit_down, hot_day,
meetDad, top_marks, light_box, black gate, with-
out_danger, make_noise.
6) Tom’s_pen, father’s_thing, children’stoys,
Ann’sflat, five_sisters, with_fish, planet_Jupiter
['djmpita].
2. Прочитайте предложения и фразы со связующим
[г] на стыке слов.
moreimportant
more_active
a pen or a pencil
a new oran old lab
a big or_a_small house
a worker or a student
a doctor or an engineer
the floor_is brown
the door_is white
they are_old
there_is a pen on the table
what colour_is the pen?
where_is the pencil?
what is there_on the shelf?
3. Прочитайте слова. Обратите внимание на сле-
дующее:
а) произношение окончания множественного числа
-s у имен существительных; б) суффикса притяжа-
тельного падежа ‘s; в) окончания -s(es) глаголов 3 ли-
ца ед. числа.
a) [s] - lake - lakes, plate - plates, book - books, sport -
sports, shop — shops, test — tests, street — streets.
[z] - boy - boys, store - stores, stone - stones, plan -
plans, star - stars, thing - things, chair - chairs.
[iz] — house — houses, dish — dishes, watch — watches,
box - boxes, class — classes, bus — buses, page - pages.
20
6) [s] — Mike’s flat, student’s decision, students’ deci-
sion, accountant’s papers.
[z] - girl’s doll, engineer’s map, country’s flag, this
year’s plan, people’s will, this family’s friends.
[iz] - Max’s books, Mr.Fox’s car, Mrs.Patch’s hus-
band.
в) [s] - speaks, helps, sits, breaks, costs, eats, writes,
fights, keeps, makes, sleeps, translates.
[z] - reads, leaves, gives, goes, becomes, says, drives,
flies, knows, pays, spoils, sends, tells.
[iz] — teaches, freezes, kisses, discusses, loses, watches,
sneezes.
4. Прочитайте следующие слова. Обратите внима-
ние на произношение окончания -ed у глаголов прошед-
шего времени.
[d] - moved, solved, lived, smiled, played, seemed,
shaved, closed, answered, opened, considered, joined, en-
joyed, carried, occupied, recognized, examined, organized,
turned.
[id] — translated, visited, waited, elected, consisted,
studied, decided, intended, founded, wanted, crowded,
surrounded, wounded, landed, included, greeted, reflected,
represented.
[t] - asked, worked, walked, helped, liked, missed, dis-
cussed, furnished, passed, reached, picked, published, an-
nounced, placed, developed, finished.
5. Прочитайте следующие предложения несколько
раз, отрабатывая произношение гласных и согласных
звуков.
We were very worried.
She was wearing silver ear-rings.
Where’s the railway timetable?
What are you quarrelling about?
We won by three goals to nil.
When will you get back?
6. Прочитайте несколько раз, ускоряя темп.
I wonder whether the weather in the North
Is worse than the weather in the South.
21
Задания для самоконтроля
1. Запишите парами следующие слова, значение ко-
торых в устной речи зависит от правильного произ-
ношения гласных и согласных звуков.
a) luck, pull, pan, bad, man, bird, send, seats, live,
feel.
6) fill, leave, seeds, sand, men, bed, pen, lack,
board, pool.
2. Дайте транскрипцию следующих слов.
engineer, wife, worker, son, our, their, who, whose,
where, pair.
УРОК 4
ПРАВИЛА ЧТЕНИЯ ГЛАСНЫХ БУКВ
И БУКВОСОЧЕТАНИЙ
Правильное чтение на английском языке основано
на умении распознавать положение, в котором встре-
чается буква в каждом отдельном случае, и правиль-
но произнести соответствующий звук. Это достигает-
ся сознательным усвоением правил чтения гласных и
согласных, а также систематической тренировкой в
чтении и артикуляции.
ПРАВИЛА ЧТЕНИЯ ГЛАСНЫХ
Чтение гласных зависит от ряда факторов:
1) от типа слога, в котором она стоит (открытый, за-
крытый и т.п.);
2) от того, является она ударной или безударной;
3) от ее положения среди других букв, т.е. сколь-ко и
какие буквы следуют за ней или предшествуют ей.
ЧТЕНИЕ ГЛАСНОЙ В БЕЗУДАРНОМ СЛОГЕ
Схематично правила чтения гласных в безударном
положении могут быть представлены следующим обра-
зом:
22
а again [a'gein], servant ['savant]
О [Э] U control [kan'troul], second ['sekand] product ['prodakt], difficult ['difikalt]
U - [ju:] institute ['institju:t], unite [ju: 'nait]
О - [OU] е metro ['metrou], photo ['foutou] become [bi'kAm], decide [di'said]
1 ш У smallest ['smalist], darkness ['daiknis] city ['siti], library ['laibrari]
е - [а] перед п + согласная: students ['stju:dant]
е + конечная 1, п = [-] seven ['sevn]
i + конечная 1 = [-] pupil ['pju:pl]
о + конечная n = [—] lesson ['lesn]
ЧТЕНИЕ ГЛАСНОЙ В УДАРНОМ СЛОГЕ
Существуют четыре типа ударного слога. В каждом
из них одна и та же гласная читается по-разному.
I тип - открытый, оканчивающийся на гласную. На-
пример: tea, note.
II тип - закрытый, оканчивающийся на согласную.
Например: plan, fun.
Ill тип — слог, где за ударной гласной следует буква
«г». Например: turn, firm, car, sport.
IV тип - слог, где за ударной гласной с буквой «г» сле-
дует еще одна гласная. Например: parents, here, fire, pure.
Ударная гласная в открытом слоге читается так, как
называется в алфавите, т.е. преимущественно дифтон-
гом. В закрытом слоге ей соответствует краткий звук.
Сравните:
открытый слог закрытый слог
[ei] a [a]
[i=l e [е]
[ai] i [i]
[ou] о [□]
[ju:] u [л]
[ai] У [i]
23
В третьем типе чтения сочетания e+r, i+r, u+r, у+
+ г передают звук [а], а+r читается как [о:], а о+г как
[а]. Четвертый тип чтения представлен дифтонгами и
трифтонгами. Сравните:
гласная + г гласная + г + гласная
[а:] а [£Э]
[□:] о [□:]
[э:] i [aia]
[«] е [1Э]
[«] и [jua]
[а] У [aia]
Таблица чтения ударных и безударных гласных
Гласная I II III IV Безударный слог
(откры- тый) тип слога (закры- тый) тип слога (гласная + г) тип слога (гласная +г+е) тип слога
А а [ei] make [ж] cat [a] car [ЕЭ] share [9] ago
Е е [i:J we [е] bed [a] her [io] here [Э] [i] absent, darness
Ii/Yy [ai] time type [i] sit system [a] girl [aio] fire tyrant [i] music city
U и [ju:] tube [A]' cup [a] burn [jus] cure [э] [ju:] success, unite
О о [ou] note [0] not [a] short [a] more [э], [ou] confer, metro
Тренировочные упражнения
1. Прочитайте следующие слова по вертикали, а за
тем по горизонтали, отрабатывая правила чтения глас-
ных в различных типах слога.
24
Аа
[ei] [аг] [a:] [£Э] [o]
name tram hard share ago
late can car rare about
lake map dark care sofa
game stand start compare above
plane plan party prepare historical
fate factory farm hare legal
Ее •
[i:] [e] [э:] [io] [i] [o]
he get her here begin
she egg term mere return
we fell verb sphere ticket
be let serve material sister
week tent prefer serial present
repeat ten person period absent
Ii/Yy
[ai] [i] [Э] [aia] [i]
time it sir fire engine
type ill bird lyre sorry
my syntax girl hire family
mine milk dirty wire music
fly system Byrn tired public
fine wish myrtle satire English
Uu
[ju] [Л] [a] [jus] [o]
tune cup burn pure success
student under burst cure difficult
use fun turn lure upon
union uncle return curious product
human butter Turkey during cucumber
pupil supper furniture secure luxury
Oo
[ou] [o] И [o:] [ou]
home not or ore tomato
hope god nor more photo
note clock North shore metro
nose fond sport explore potato
rose dog lord before negro
smoke shop short store zero
25
2. Прочитайте следующие слова и сгруппируйте их
в 4 колонки по правилам чтения гласных букв в удар-
ном слоге. Проверьте себя, руководствуясь таблицей
чтения гласных букв.
evening, morning, square, Rome, China, comrade,
spring, summer, winter, duty, art, picture, try, enter,
hurry, tired, write, report, well, prepare, whole, return,
scenery, difficult, department, combine, time, during,
term, parents, hope, spoke, store.
Чтение буквосочетаний гласных
Буква Буквосочетания Звук Примеры
А а a+ir [£Э] air, hair, chair, pair, fair
ay, ai [ei] play, pay, say, day, to- day, aim, rain, paint, main, nail
а + п plant, branch, can’t
а + f after, craft
a+s + grass, class, fast, task
согласная [о:]
а + th path, rather, father
а + 1 '' half, palm
а + 11 all, ball, tall, call, small
а + 1k [о:] chalk, talk, walk
w + аг war, warm, award, warn, reward
w(h) + а [WO] was, what, want, wash,watch
aw [□:] law, saw, draw, straw- berry
а + nge [ei] change, strange, ex- change
au (gh) [□:] author, autumn, daughter
Ее ее, еа И see, meet, tree, green, street, feel, sea, meat, tea, team, peace
еа + d, th, 1th [е] head, dead, bread, death, health
но: [i:] read, lead, reader, leader
26
Буква Буквосочетания Звук Примеры
еа + г + согл. [э:] earn, earth, early, learn
ear, еег [ia] hear, near, ear, clear, dear, fear
ew [ju:] new, knew, newspaper, few
ei [i] ceiling, receive, de- ceive, seize '
er (в суффиксе) [9] worker, driver, painter
еу (под ударением) но: [ei] they, grey, obey key [ki:]
еу (в неударном слоге) [i] money, hockey, trolley
li ie (перед согласной) [i:] field, piece, niece, brief, chief
ie (в конце слова) [ai] lie, tie, die
igh [ai] night, fight, high, sigh, sight, flight
i + nd [ai] kind, find, mind, blind
но: [i] wind, window
i + Id [ai] mild, child, (но: child- ren)
Oo oo + n, 1 [u:] moon, soon, too, spoon, cool, fool
oo + k [u] look, book, took, cook
ou [au] house, round, out, about
но: [u] should, could
ough + t [□:] bought, thought, fought, brought
oa [ou] coat, boat, soap, road, toast
ow (в середине слова) [au] town, brown, down, power, powder
ow (в конце слова) [ou] window, slow, row, snow, grow
27
Буква Буквосочетание Звук Примеры
но: [аи] now, how
оу ——- oi — [oi] boy, toy, noise, voice, soil choice, coin, boil
o+ld [ои] old, cold, sold, hold, told, bold
our [□:] four, court, course, your, fourth
our, ower о + m + П s' + v / + tli [аиэ] [Л] our, hour, shower, flower, tower, power some, come, among, money son, won, wonderful, front glove, love, lovely mother, brother, other
ho: [и] prove, move, move- ment, improvement
OUS [Э] famous, dangerous, various
or [9] doctor, tractor, con- ductor
Uu ue [ju:] due, sue, hue
после r, 1 [и:] true, blue
ure — в открытом слоге после -s [иэ] sure, surely
но: [и] sugar
u - в закрытом слоге после f, Р, ь [и] full, push, bush, bull
в открытом слоге после г, j [и:] rule, June, jubilee, rumour
Yy перед гласной в начале слова [j] yes, yet, year, yester- day
в безударном положении на конце слова [i] city, money, holiday, lady, lazy, fifty, se- venty
28
Тренировочные упражнения
1. Отработайте чтение следующих буквосочетаний.
Звук Буква и буквосочетания
е ее эа ie ei
[i:l we he she these week seek meet see weak field speak piece mean niece sea chief receive deceive seize ceiling
a+r a+th a+ss,st a+sk,sp a+lf,lm a+nt,nd
[а:] far hard star park father rather bath path pass ask half grass task calm last grasp palm past mask calf plant can't grant demand
o+r(e) a+ll,lk au(aw) au(gh) ough+t wa+r
[□:] short door floor more all fall chalk small author daughter fought war because taught brought warm draw caught bought warn saw launch thought wardrobe
о oa ow о + st, Id
[ou] stone nose whole spoke boat road soap goal low cold know old show most window told
ou ow oi [oi] oy
[au] found round out South how now down town boil boy coin toy soil joy spoil enjoy
i/У igh i+ld i+nd i+ gn
[ai] fine life sky try fight light night high child kind mild find wild mild blind mind sign design designer
a ai ay ey eigh
[ei] make lake take date rain wait main paint day grey say they may obey play eight weigh neighbour
29
e + r i + r u + r ea+r w+ or
her first fur early work
[э:] term third burn year word
person shirt turn earn world
serve skirt curtain learn worth
u o+ m,n,v,th ou oo+d ou+gh[f]
lunch son young blood enough
[л] cup some country rough
but love couple tough
must mother trouble
о oo ou(gh) oo+r[ua] ou+r
do moon group poor tour
[u:] who spoon rouble moor tourist
move too through
a+re air ere ear ear/eer[ia] ere
[еэ] parents pair there bear near here
spare hair where pear dear mere
2. Прочитайте, сравнивая произношение звуков и на-
писание слов.
[io] - [ЕЭ] [a] - [ou] [u] - [ua]
ear air girl goal took tour
beer bear work woke shook sure
hear hair burn bone put poor
dear dare turn tone could cruel
appear a pair earn own should assure
[wa] - [wo:] [wo] [wu] - [WA]
were war was woman won
work warm want wood worry
world wore wash wool wonder
worst water watch wolf wonderful
3. Прочитайте следующие слова и объясните, по ка
ким правилам они читаются.
coffee, gone, watch, would, room, look, woman, push,
dull, who, hook, school, buy, bye, ice, frighten, country,
learn, coat, York, after, compare, their, dear, fuel, give,
put, cut, child.
30
Упражнения в чтении
1. Прочитайте следующие пословицы и поговорки,
определите их русские эквиваленты. Следите за про-
изношением звуков: [au], [ai], [aia], [ei], [л], [io].
Out of sight, out of mind.
Fight fire with fire.
From the frying pan into the fire.
It’s never too late to learn.
Never judge from appearances.
2. Подготовьте фонетическое чтение текста.
MEALS
We have three meals a day: breakfast, dinner and sup-
per. We usually do not have lunch. As a rule we have
bread and butter, eggs, ham or sausage for breakfast. We
also drink a cup of tea or coffee. I like strong coffee. I
don’t like coffee with milk. On week days we have our
dinner at the canteen. The canteen is near our office. It’s
a self-service canteen. Usually we take salad, soup, beef-
steak with vegetables or potatoes. For dessert we take
stewed fruit. I do not have coffee for dinner. I have milk
or tea. When we come home from work we have our sup-
per: fish or meat, cheese, bread, butter and tea. We try
to obey the rule: “Eat at pleasure, drink with measure”.
3. Подготовьте выразительное чтение стихотво-
рения.
WORK
by Sir Cecil Spring-Rice
“I am busy”, said the sea.
“I am busy. Think of me,
Making continents to be.
“I am busy”, said the sea.
“I am busy”, said the rain.
When I fall, it is not in vain;
Wait and you will see the grain.
“I am busy”, said the rain.
“I am busy”, said the air.
“Blowing here and blowing there,
Up and down and everywhere.”
31
“I am busy”, said the sun.
“All my planets, every one,
Know my work is never done
I am busy”, said the sun.
Упражнения для самоконтроля
1. Прочитайте вслух следующие слова, укажите,
как читаются гласные буквы в зависимости от ме-
стоположения в слове. Проверьте себя по таблицам
чтения гласных букв и буквосочетаний.
А а
[ ] [ ] [ ] [] [ ] [ ] [ ] []
same land large salt watch father share above
plate fact farm all wash ask chair about
place act car fall was past pair ago
space factory garden talk what after rare legal
Е е
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
be send person here begin
meet tent certainly dear between
meat rest perfect tear behind
seat seven prefer mere teacher
li Yy
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
time rich shirt tired police fly lady yes
try finish bird hire unique type already yard
child till firm retire machine by system yellow
night pillow first fire prestige my ready yarn
Oo Uu
[ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ] [ ]
hope long son more do cut bush music
home got come for who cup full future
rope fond love morning whose plus put tune
snow song month before move sun pull Cuba
2. Запишите парами слова, имеющие различное на
писание, но одинаковое звучание:
32
our, meat, peace, cent, knew, too, sea, there, whole,
fool, be, flower, week, their, see, two, new, sent, piece,
meet, hole, full, hour, flour, weak, bee.
УРОК 5
ПРАВИЛА ЧТЕНИЯ СОГЛАСНЫХ БУКВ
И БУКВОСОЧЕТАНИЙ
Чтение согласной определяется ее положением среди
других букв. Вне буквосочетаний только три согласные
из 20 имеют по два варианта чтения: с = [s], [k]; g = [g],
[ds]; s = [s], [z].
Многие согласные, однако, входят в состав различ-
ных буквосочетаний и в зависимости от этого по-разно-
му читаются. Так, например, сочетание th может чи-
таться как [6] в начале и конце знаменательных слов:
thin [Oin], bath [ba:0] и как [б] в служебных словах, на-
речиях, местоимениях, а также в позиции между двумя
гласными: with [wi6], the [бэ], clothes [kloudz].
Полный перечень буквосочетаний, в том числе и со-
четаний согласных с гласными, приведен в таблице.
Буква и бук- восо- чета- ние Звук Примечание Примеры
вь [Ь] bus, but, about, better, butter, by, book, bed, bag, bad
bt [t] в гонце слова debt, doubt
Is] перед е, i, у face, city, cinema, cycle, since, ice, space, centre
Сс [k] в остальных слу- чаях cap, cat, cut, cry, copy, capital, come, close, clock
[J] перед безударной гласной ocean, social, special, musician, ancient, racial
сс [ks] перед е, i, у accept, success, accent, accident
2 Зак. 2112
33
Буква и бук- восо- чета- ние Звук Примечание Примеры
[k] в остальных слу- чаях occur, according, accomplish, accumulate, occupy, occasion
ch tch [V] chess, rich, cheese, chop, much, match, kitchen, watch, catch
ch [k] в словах грече- ского происхож- дения school, architect, chemistry, character, archiology, technical
[J] в словах фран- цузского проис- хождения machine, machinery, machinist
ck [k] black, sick, back, pack, neck, check
Dd [d] date, made, end, decide, old
[-] перед согласны- ми grandmother, handsome, handkerchief
dg №] bridge, knowledge, judge, sledge
Ff [f] five, if, finish, face, family
fieri [fn] often, soften
Gg №1 перед е, i, у page, change, gymnasium, stage но: [g] ~ give, begin
[g] в остальных слу- чаях go, green, grey, grow
gh [-] weight, eight, bought, brought, fought, daughter
[f] после аи, ои в словах: laugh, enough, cough
gn [n] в начале и в конце слова foreign, sign
34
Буква и бук- восо- чета- ние Звук Примечание Примеры
Hh [h] [-] he, his, here, have, home, hundred, husband hour, honour, honest, exhibition
Kk [k] kill, keep, king, kitchen, kiss
kn [n] в начале слова know, knee, knife, knock
LI [1] lake, late, light, listen, leg
alm, alf, alk [-] talk, calm, half, chalk
Mm [m] miss, meal, seem, team
mb mn [m] в конце слова climb, bomb, comb autumn, column
Nn [n] never, number, nobody, next, notice
ng [Q] в конце слова sing, song, interesting, thing
nk [Qk] drink, bank, ink, tank, thank
Pp [p] pen, pencil, pupil, publish, top
Ph [f] в словах грече- ского происхож- дения phone, physics, philoso- phy, philologist, sym- phony, phase
Qu [kw] queen, question, quick, quite, queue
[k] в словах фран- цузского проис- хождения unique, technique
35
Буква и бук восо- чета- ние Звук Примечание Примеры
Rr [Г] red, ready, rain, sorry, mirror, trip
Ss [S] в начале слова но: [Л после глухих со- гласных see, sea, son, sun, stand, stop sugar, sure maps, cats, books, hats, caps
[2] после звонких согласных и гласных pens, bags, days, girls, boys these, cheese, please, nose, rose
ss [s] class, pass, success, kiss, miss
[J] перед безудар- ным слогом Russian
ssion [J(8)n] session, discussion, comission, opression
sion tsnl в конце слова decision, conclusion, revision, invasion, confu- sion, television
sure [Зэ] pleasure, treasure, leisure, measure
sh (Л she, ship, fish, shop, short
SC [S] перед е, i, у science, scientist, scene, scenery
sten [sn] listen, fasten
stle [si] whistle, wrestling
Tt [t] ten, twenty, table, sit, teeth
th [6] Id] thing, thank, three, tooth this, those, with, without, weather
36
Буква и бук- восо- чета- ние Звук Примечание Примеры
tion [J(9)n] demonstration, revolution, dictation, translation, attention
ture [tfa] picture, future, lecture, culture, nature, feature, furniture
Vv [v] live, leave, voice, move, vase
Ww [w] win, want, water, wind, twins
wh [w] when, where, why, what, which, white, whisper, while
wh+o [h] who, whom, whose, whole
wr [r] wrong, write, writer, wrestling
Xx [ks] в конце слова и перед согласны- ми box, fox, six, taxi, text, excuse, exercise
[gz] перед ударной гласной examination, example, exist, exact
Zz [z] lazy, zone, zero, zoo, zoo- logy
Тренировочные упражнения
1. Обозначьте выделенные буквы и буквосочетания
знаками фонетической транскрипции:
Russian, initial, social, lecture, watch, discussion, de-
cision, science, taxi, example, mouth, this, quarter, thing,
comb, girls, caps, days, cheese, whose, what, wrong,
bought, know, gentle, gate, accident, handsome, debt,
phase, listen, whistle, zoo, solemn, designer, mechanic, of-
ten.
37
2. Напишите в транскрипции следующие слов:
task, calmly, jar, meant, crisp, bath, exercise, archi-
tect, dialogue, characteristic, grandfather, sure, sugar,
within, wolf.
3. Напишите, какие буквы и буквосочетания дают
звуки:
[t/]» [/]> [()]» [6], [d], [Jn], [t/э], [39], [aia], [is], [еэ].
Упражнения в чтении
1. Прочитайте следующие предложения, обращая
внимание на произношение согласных звуков.
1. Which is which?
2. Charlie doesn’t know chalk from cheese.
3. Not much of a catch.
4. Goodness gracious!
5. You’ve found elephant on the moon.
6. Eat at pleasure, drink with measure.
7. Conversation is a pleasure, but it wants leisure.
8. Little friends may prove great friends.
2. Подготовьте фонетическое чтение текста.
TCHAIKOVSKY IN ENGLAND
P. I. Tchaikovsky first visited England in 1861.
“London is very interesting”, he wrote to his father in St.
Petersburg, “but it makes a rather gloomy impression”.
Twenty-seven years later Tchaikovsky arrived in London
to begin his first foreign tour. His concerts were marked
by the London press as an important event. In the fol-
lowing year he visited London again and his fourth and
final visit was in the last year of his life. It was in 1893.
On the 50th anniversary of the foundation of the Cam-
bridge University Musical Society Tchaikovsky with the
Norwegian composer Edvard Grieg, the French composer
Saint-Sadns and some other European composers were
elected as Doctors of Music.
In 1884 Tchaikovsky began to study English. Later he
mentioned that his progress was considerable and that he
could quite easily read Dickens in the original.
38
Упражнения для самоконтроля
1. Определите буквосочетания согласных в следую-
щих словах и напишите их транскрипцию.
writer, literature, profession, sandwich, square, chemi-
cals, century, association, foreigner, photographer, which,
want, chalk, special, quantity, class, half, psychological,
fashion.
2. Выпишите слова, в которых буква s читается
как звук [s], буква с читается как [s], а буква g — как
[д].
see, reads, finds, keeps, vessel, list, space, climate,
mice, cat, fence, scene, clean, pencil, chance, gate, gentle,
girl, ago, register, gymnasium, guest, guide, liquid.
3. Выпишите из списка слова со звуком [к].
cheap, cheese, chemistry, technique, city, scheme,
equipment, kitchen, know, Kate, clever, economic, centre,
cow, box, exam, cycle, car, scan, except, succeed.
УРОК 6
АНГЛИЙСКАЯ ИНТОНАЦИЯ
Интонация - это сложное единство нескольких ком-
понентов, главными из которых являются мелодика и
фразовое ударение.
Мелодика — это последовательное изменение тона го-
лоса при произнесении слов в предложении. Наиболее
заметное изменение тона голоса происходит в конце
предложения (ср. вопросительные и повествовательные
предложения), а также в эмоционально окрашенной ре-
чи.
В английском языке имеются две основные речевые
мелодии, два тона: нисходящий и восходящий.
Нисходящий тон выражает законченность высказы-
вания, категоричность. Он характерен для повествова-
тельных и повелительных предложений, а также вопро-
сительных предложений, начинающихся с вопроситель-
39
кого слова. Первый ударный слог произносится самым
высоким тоном, далее происходит плавное понижение
тона, и последний ударный слог произносится с резким
падением голоса.
Графически падение тона обозначается стрелкой, об-
ращенной вниз.
Например: Му 'sister is a ^.student.
Восходящий тон выражает незаконченность выска-
зывания, отсутствие категоричности. Он употребляется
при перечислении, в общих вопросах, требующих ответа
♦да» или жнет», в первой части альтернативных вопро-
сов, а также в конце смысловых групп, на которые де-
лятся для облегчения произношения длинные предло-
жения. Кроме того восходящий тон употребляется при
вежливом обращении в приветствиях, выражениях бла-
годарности и т. п.
Графически он обозначается стрелкой, направленной
вверх и стоящей перед ударным слогом. Например: 'Do
you 'want to 'enter the Uni-/versify?
При восходящей мелодии наблюдается плавное по-
нижение тона от первого ударного слога, но последний
ударный слог произносится с повышением тона.
Фразовым ударением называется выделение тех или
иных слов в предложении. В английском языке ударе-
нием выделяются, как правило, знаменательные слова:
существительные, прилагательные, глаголы, числитель-
ные, наречия, вопросительные и указательные место-
имения. Неударными бывают служебные слова: артик-
ли, союзы, предлоги, вспомогательные глаголы.
Например: I must 'go to the 'library to 'take this '\book.
Ударные слова в предложении произносятся через
примерно одинаковые промежутки времени и образуют
вместе с окружающими их безударными словами так
называемую ритмическую группу.
Например: I 'live in the 'centre of "\Moscow.
Ритмичность ударения придает плавность и мело-
дичность английской речи.
Ритмические группы следует отличать от смысловых
групп. Последние представляют собой отрезки предло-
жения, объединенные общим смыслом. Каждая смысло-
вая группа отличается от предыдущей изменением ме-
лодии и паузой, обозначаемой вертикальной чертой.
40
Например: Му 'new /friend foften 'spends
his/holidays 'travelling about the Xcountry.
Совпадение ритмических и смысловых групп в пред-
ложении — явление довольно частое, но не обязательное.
Тренировочные упражнения
1. Прочитайте следующие предложения с нисходя-
щим тоном.
a) 'This is a Xpen. It is a Xgood pen.
'These are Xbags. They are 'Marge.
'That is an Xapple. It’s a "Med apple.
There is a 'picture on the Xwall.
There were 'many Xpeople in the hall.
'Ann is a Xstudent. 'She is my "Xfriend.
She is not Xmarried. 'Ann will 'be a Xteacher.
b) ComeXin. 'ComeXhere. 'SitXdown, please.
StandXup. 'GoXout. 'BeXquick. 'Take theXpen. 'Don’t
beXlate. 'Don’tXtell me about it. 'Don’tXcry. 'Let’sXdo
it. 'Let’s 'go to theXpark. 'Let meXhelp you. 'Let
themXwait a little.
c) 'What’sXthis? 'Who’sXthat? 'What’s yourXname?
HowXold are you? 'Where are youXfrom? 'When were
youXborn? 'What is yourXmother? 'What are you Xin-
terested in? 'Where do youXlive? 'How manyXchildren
have you? 'Why don’t you 'want to come atX5?
2. Прочитайте следующие предложения с восходя-
щим тоном.
a) 'Is this оУpencil? 'Is this a/black pencil? 'Are 'the-
se/pens? 'Are 'those 'pens/too? 'Is this/salt? 'Is there
any ./butter on the plate? 'Do you 'want to/eat? 'Have
you ever 'been to St.-/Petersburg? 'Did you 'come
home-/late yesterday?
6) А/picture, a-/book and a/"pen are on theXtable.
There is a/table, six-/chairs and anXarmchair in this
room. I Tike to play/1 football, /‘volleyball, /basketball
andXhandball. In the/South I’ll /swim, Tie in the/sun
and 'playXvolleyball.
41
в) On the -/ wall | opposite the У window | there is a
large'Nmap. On they shelves | you can 'find many
ybooks | in 'all 'foreign^languages. ТЬеУapples | that
are on they plate | are ripe. У Canada | which is
situ ated to the North of У America | is a "Nbig country.
3. Прочитайте, обращая внимание на интонацию
альтернативных и расчлененных вопросов.
a) Is this aybed or a'Nsofa? 'Are theseybooks or
"^notebooks? 'Is this aygood or a'Xbad car? Are the-
seybig houses or Ismail ones? 'Is the 'dayyiong or
'Nshort? 'Is the 'schooiynew or'Nold? Is there а У TV set
or a'Nradio-set in the room?
6) He is a ^foreigner, yisn’t he?
You are'Snot a Londoner, У are you?
Your 'friend has just 'returned from'NLondon, У hasn’t he?
You’ll 'do your'Nbest, У won’t you?
4. Отработайте чтение фраз, выражающих просьбу.
'Say it аУ gain. 'СотеУ here. 'Will you 'open the У window?
'СотеУт. 'Let’sygo there. Give me уоигУЬоок, please.
5. Обратитесь с просьбой к своему собеседнику, ис-
пользуя данную модель:
— 'Give те your У pen, please.
- 'Неге уоиУаге. ('Here ityis).
- 'Thank you.
— 'Not atyall. (Don’tymention it).
Упражнения в чтении
1. Отработайте чтение фраз, обозначающих при-
ветствие и прощание.
Good'Nmorningl
Good afternoon!.
Good'Nevening!
'How do you"Ndo!
He'Nllo!
'\Hi.
Good- УЬуе!
So У long.
See you У soon (later).
See you to У morrow.
'Good У night!
'Bye-У bye.
2. Отработайте чтение фраз, выражающих благо-
дарность, и возможные ответы на них.
'Ч Thank | you.
'Thank you very'Nmuch.
'That’s "\nice of У you.
You are 'very^kind.
Thank you for
'Npleasure.
I’m 'very'Ngrateful to
you.
6) 'Not at'Nall. 'Don’t
"Nmention it.
'That’s all'Nright.
'That’s O.^K.
'No 'trouble at'Sall.
It’s a 'Npleasure for me.
You are ^welcome.
Спасибо.
Большое спасибо.
Это мило с вашей стороны.
Вы так добры (любезны).
Благодарю вас за достав-
ленное удовольствие.
Я вам очень благодарна.
Не стоит благодарности.
Ну, что вы. Не стоит бла-
годарности.
Мне это не трудно.
Мне это доставляет удо-
вольствие.
Пожалуйста, не стоит бла-
дарности.
3. Отработайте чтение следующих фраз общения.
Употребите их в своих ситуациях.
a) Ex'Ncuse me, (please).
Ex'Ncuse me, (for) a mo-
ment.
(I am) "\sorry.
'\Pardon. I 'beg your
'Npardon.
Please, ac'cept my
a'Npologies.
No at "Nall.
It’s all-right.
'Never'Nmind.
Простите меня. Извините
меня.
Простите, я на минутку
(выйду).
Простите. Виноват.
Простите. Прошу проще-
ния.
Примите мои извинения.
Не стоит.
Все в порядке.
Не имеет значения.
42
43
4. Отработайте чтение диалога, соблюдая задан
ную интонацию.
Lena: Ann: He’Nllo, У Ann. He'Nllo, come'Xin. 'Glad to"4see you. Don’t 'mind the'Nmess. I’m 'doing ту^Чгоот.
Lena: Ann: 'Can 1УЬе1р you? 'What am I to'Sdo? If you don’t ymind | you may 'dust the 'books in theybookcase | while T 'put 'everything in its Ур1асе | and 'clean the'Sfloor.
Lena: Oh, you 'have Tots of'Nbooks here. 'Have you 'ready many of them?
Ann: "NMost of them. You yknow | I’m 'very 'fond of Ebooks.
Lena: By they way | 'do you Tike this 'book by Jack У London?
Ann: Which one? “Martin ^Eden? 'Oh, "Nyes, I "\love it.
Lena: Ann: Lena: 'Can IУ borrow it from you? ^4Sure you can. 'XThank you. 'Meanwhile I’ve'Nfinished. Now the 'room 'looks quite "N tidy. 'Is there 'any- thingyelse to do?
Ann: "N'Nothing else. Thank you. Now we may 'go to the^cinema. There is an 'interesting'Nfilm on. It be' gins at 'twelve^sharp.
Lena: That’s a'Nnice idea, in'Чdeed. Come'Non then.
5. Прочитайте стихотворение, соблюдая заданную
интонацию.
SONG OF THE TRAIN by David Me. Cord
"\Clickety- У clack 'Clickety- У clackety.
'Wheels on they track 'Click-ety
'This is they way '\Clack.
They be' gin to attack: у clickety-'Чclack.
'Click-ety-У clack, 'Over the^crack
'Click-ety-Уclack, 'Faster andy faster
44
The 'song of theXtrack.
У Clickety- X clack.
У Clickety- X clack.
У Clickety- Xclackety.
У Clackety
XClack.
6. Подготовьте фонетическое чтение текста.
'Pavel isX30. On У May |, the 'day of his У birth | his
friendyNick | came to 'visityhim and hisXfamily. He
'brought an 'interestingXbook as а У present andXsaid:
“Many 'happy 'returns of theXday”. 'Pavel thanked him.
He said: “It’s a 'longytime I 'saw youXlast. HowXare
you?” I’m/fine, Xthanк you”, answered Nick. 'Then they
hadXtea together.
After У tea | the 'friends were 'talking about the 'fine
ytimes | they 'spent to ygether | when 'they wereX
young. They 'also 'talked for a long 'time aboutypolitics |
and the 'economic 'situation in ourXcountry.
'Late atynight | Nick said: “It’s time foryme to 'go
Xhome. 'Come andXsee me soon”. The 'friends 'shook
У hands and 'said good-X bye.
Упражнение для самоконтроля
В соответствии с правилом разметьте фразовое ударе-
ние и отработайте чтение следующих предложений.
а) Р.: Hello, AnnI
A.: Good evening, Peter! How are you?
P.: Fine, thanks, and you?
A.: I’m fine too, thank you.
P.: How’s your friend Lena?
A.: She is very well, thanks.
b) - Is Nick in Minsk?
- No, he is a long way from here.
- He is either in Kiev or in Moscow.
- Really? I thought he was in Minsk.
c) - Our flat is in a new nine-storeyed building in
Skaryna Avenue. As there are nine storeys in the building
it has a lift. Our flat is on the second floor. There are
three rooms, a kitchen, a bathroom and a hall in it. The
largest room is the sitting-room. There is a bookcase in
the corner with many books in it. Near it there is a sofa.
At the opposite wall you can see a TV-set.
45
СУЩЕСТВИТЕЛЬНОЕ
(The Noun)
ГРАММАТИКА
ЧАСТИ РЕЧИ
В английском языке имеются те же части речи, что
и в русском: имя существительное (the Noun), имя при-
лагательное (the Adjective), местоимение (the Pronoun),
числительное (the Numeral), глагол (the Verb), наречие
(the Adverb), предлог (the Preposition), союз (the
Conjunction), междометие (the Interjection).
Кроме того, в английском языке есть частицы (the
Particles), артикли (the Articles), неличные формы гла-
гола (the Verbals).
О частях речи в рифме
A noun is the name of anything
As School, Garden or King.
Adjectives tell the kind of Noun
As Great, Small, Pretty, White or Brown.
Instead of noun the pronoun is,
As Mine, Yours, Our and His.
Verbs tell of something being done -
To Read, Count, Laugh, Carry or Run.
How things are done the adverbs tell
As Slowly, Quickly, Ill or Well.
Conjunctions join the words together,
As Men and Women, Wind and Weather.
The Preposition stands before
A noun as In or Through a door.
The interjection shows surprise,
As — Oh, How prettyl Ah! How wise!
The little words you often see
Are articles — A, An, and The.
The whole are called the Parts of Speech
Which reading, writing, speaking teach.
ОБЩИЕ СВЕДЕНИЯ
По своему обобщенному лексическому значению су-
ществительные обозначают предметы и вещества
(a window, milk), живые существа (a man, a bird), отвле-
ченные понятия и явления (rain, work, beauty).
Как и в русском языке, все существительные англий-
ского языка делятся на имена собственные (Ann, Minsk)
и имена нарицательные, которые в свою очередь под-
разделяются на исчисляемые (table, problem) и неис-
числяемые (water, time), вещественные (wood, oil) и от-
влеченные (impression, surprise). Кроме того, имеется
класс собирательных существительных, таких как
team, group, army, party.
Существительные могут иметь при себе слова-опре-
дители. К ним относятся: артикли (a, an, the), место-
имения, прилагательные, а также другие существи-
тельные в притяжательном и общем падеже, которые в
этом случае соответствуют по значению прилагательным.
Например:
Не goes in for winter
sports.
I shall never forget my
school years.
Peter’s mother is a good
teacher.
Он занимается зимними
видами спорта.
Я никогда не забуду свои
школьные годы.
Мать Петра хорошая учи-
тельница.
В предложении существительные могут выполнять
следующие функции:
1) подлежащего
Moscow is the capital of Russia.
2) дополнения (прямого или косвенного)
The teacher gave the book to his pupils.
3) предикатива
This is my brother. He is a student.
4) различных обстоятельств
I am busy in the evening. I went to the cinema.
5) определения
We were in the town park yesterday.
46
47
В английском языке существительные имеют грам-
матические категории числа, падежа, но не имеют кате-
гории рода. Существительные, обозначающие лиц муж-
ского пола, заменяются местоимением he (он), женского
пола — местоимением she (она). Названия животных,
птиц, а также все неодушевленные предме-ты обозна-
чаются местоимением it (он, она, оно).
Как правило, род существительного определяется по
контексту. Иногда понятие рода вкладывается в зна-
чение слова (actor — actress, aunt — uncle), либо вво-
дится указатель на пол в виде дополнительных слов.
Например: a boy-friend — друг, a schoolgirl — школь-
ница, a she-wolf — волчица, a Tom-cat — кот.
КАТЕГОРИЯ ЧИСЛА СУЩЕСТВИТЕЛЬНЫХ
Исчисляемые существительные, как правило, имеют
форму и единственного, и множественного числа. В
единственном числе существительные не имеют ника-
ких окончаний. Форма множественного числа обра-
зуется с помощью окончания -s (-es), которое про-
износится как [z] после гласных и звонких согласных:
(boys [boiz], tables [teiblz], как [s] после глухих со-
гласных: (cats [kaets], books [buks]) и как [iz] после ши-
пящих и свистящих: benches ['bentfiz], bushes ['bujiz].
На письме конечная буква у, стоящая после согласной,
принимает окончание множественного числа -es, а сама
изменяется на букву i. Например: a family — families, а
story — stories, a lady — ladies. Если буква -у стоит по-
сле гласной, то при прибавлении окончания -s она оста-
нется без изменений: a play — plays, a day — days.
Ряд существительных в английском языке обра-
зуют форму множественного числа не по общему пра-
вилу.
Например:
a) man — men
woman — women
child — children
tooth — teeth
foot — feet
mouse — mice
goose — geese
мужчина, человек — муж-
чины, люди
женщина — женщины
ребенок — дети
зуб — зубы
ступня — ступни
мышь — мыши
гусь — гуси
48
6) swine — swine
sheep — sheep
fish — fish
deer — deer
в) knife — knives
life — lives
wife — wives
leaf — leaves
свинья — свиньи
овца — овцы
рыба — рыбы
олень — олени
нож — ножи
жизнь — жизни
жена — жены
лист — листья.
Некоторые существительные могут употребляться
в форме только единственного либо множественного
числа.
В единственном числе употребляются неисчисляемые
существительные, такие как money — деньги, sugar —
сахар, hair — волосы, business — дело, information —
информация, сведения, fruit — фрукты, progress —
прогресс, успехи, news — новость, новости, peace —
мир, love — любовь, knowledge — знание, знания, ad-
vice — совет, советы, furniture — мебель.
Your money is not enough У вас недостаточно денег,
to buy this dress. чтобы купить это платье.
The news is very impor- Новости очень важны для
tant for us. нас.
Только во множественном числе употребляются обо-
значения предметов, состоящих из двух и более частей.
Например: trousers — брюки, glasses — очки, scissors —
ножницы, shorts — шорты, а также clothes — одежда,
goods — товары, riches — богатства и др. Все они согла-
суются с глаголом во множественном числе:
The trousers are out of Эти брюки не модные,
fashion.
The scissors were lying on Ножницы лежали на по-
the shelf. лке.
Собирательные существительные, обозначающие груп-
пу как единый коллектив, согласуются с глаголом в
форме единственного числа. Если же такие существи-
тельные обозначают отдельных представителей группы,
то глагол-сказуемое употребляется в форме множествен-
ного числа.
49
His family is not very
large.
His family are at the
table.
Его семья не очень боль-
шая.
Его семья (все члены) -
за столом.
Однако такие собирательные существительные, как
people — люди, police — полиция и cattle — скот, все-
гда употребляются с глаголом только во множест-
венном числе:
The police are looking Полиция ищет вора.
for the thief.
КАТЕГОРИЯ ПАДЕЖА СУЩЕСТВИТЕЛЬНЫХ
В отличие от русского языка в английском имеется
лишь два падежа: общий (the common case) и притя-
жательный (the possessive case). Существительные в
общем падеже не имеют никаких окончаний.
Притяжательный падеж обозначает принадлежность
предмета кому-либо и употребляется преимущественно е
одушевленными существительными и именами собст-
венными. Существительное в притяжательном падеже
является определением к другому существительному и
всегда ставится перед ним. Оно соответствует в русском
языке существительному в родительном падеже или
притяжательному местоимению.
В единственном числе притяжательный падеж обра-
зуется путем прибавления -’s к форме существи-тельного
общего падежа. Например: my sister’s book — книга моей
сестры. При этом -’s произносится по тем же правилам,
что и окончание -s множественного числа существи-
тельных.
Форма притяжательного падежа множественного
числа образуется прибавлением только апострофа (’) по-
сле слова во множественном числе, причем в произно-
шении никакого звука не добавляется. Напри-мер: the
boys’ father, my parents’ house.
Слова, образующие множественное число не по об-
щему правилу, принимают в притяжательном падеже
-’s. Например: children’s toys — детские игрушки, иг-
рушки детей, these women’s husbands — мужья этих
женщин.
50
Кроме одушевленных существительных притяжа-
тельный падеж может употребляться:
а) с существительными, обозначающими названия
стран, городов, судов, самолетов и пр. Например: Britain’s
industry, Moscow’s underground, the ship’s crew.
б) с существительными, обозначающими единицы
времени и расстояние: minute, hour, year, day, week,
moment и др. Например: an hour’s rest, today’s news, a
mile’s distance.
в) с существительными, обозначающими вес, стои-
мость, место. Например: a kilo’s weight, at the baker’s,
ten roubles’ worth.
г) с собирательными существительными: party, army,
government, family и др. Например: Government’s pro-
posals, party’s property.
д) с существительными: country, city, town, nature,
the world, the sun, the moon, the earth, the sea, the
ocean. Например: the town’s park, the world’s first arti-
ficial satellite.
Отношения принадлежности могут быть также вы-
ражены с помощью оборота с предлогом of со всеми
одушевленными и неодушевленными существительны-
ми, кроме имен собственных. Например: my sister’s
book = the book of my sister, this year’s events = the
events of this year; но: Ann’s book, Peter’s friend.
В целом значения русских падежей передаются в
английском языке сочетаниями предлогов of, to, for, by,
with, about с существительными в форме общего паде-
жа, а также порядком слов — определенным располо-
жением слов в предложении и словосочетании.
И. п. Мой брат — студент.
Р. п. столица страны
население города
Д. п. Передай привет
своей сестре.
В. п. Я перевел текст.
Т. п. Эта книга написана
американским писа-
телем.
Му brother is a student.
the capital of the country
the population of the city
Give my regards to your
sister.
I have translated the text.
This book was written by an
American writer.
51
Я не люблю писать
авторучкой.
П. п. Они говорят о новом
фильме.
I don’t like to write with a
fountain-pen.
They are talking about the
new film.
Упражнения
1. Прочитайте и запомните наиболее употреби-
тельные суффиксы и префиксы существительных.
а) -er, -or teacher, editor -ism heroism
-ist scientist, artist -ant assistant
-ess actress, hostess -ence conference
-ment movement, development -ty cruelty,activity
-ance importance, distance -ure culture
-(t)ion translation -ing building
-ity majority, complexity -dom freedom
-y difficulty, energy -ssion discussion
-ian physician, politician -sion revision
-hood childhood, brotherhood -ness happiness
-ship friendship, leadership -ure pressure
-age marriage, passage -ness backwardness
б) re- reconstruction in- information
co- coexistence, coauthor im- impossibility
dis- disagreement, disarmament un- unemployment
mis- misunderstanding il- illiteracy
2. Прочитайте следующие существительные, опре-
делите в них суффиксы и укажите, от каких слов они
образованы:
direction, construction, concentration, collection, so-
cialism, capitalism, heroism, majority, popularity, musi-
cian, technician, neighbourhood, emptiness, cleverness,
appointment, understanding.
3. Образуйте существительные от данных слов, ис-
пользуя словообразовательные суффиксы.
-er, or to organize, to exploit, to work, to read, to sail
-tion to dictate, to decorate, to educate, to connect
52
-ment to improve, to agree, to govern, to develop
-ship friend, member, leader, dictator, fellow
-ing to build, to dance, to draw, to dress, to say
-ist art, science, biology, to type, material
-ness dark, weak, happy, mad, cold, bright
4. Образуйте новые существительные с помощью сло-
вообразовательных префиксов: со, re, mis, ип, dis, im, il:
operation, existence, formation, form, understanding,
fortune, employment, honesty, agreement, morality, lite-
racy.
5. Прочитайте следующие существительные, опре-
делите их составные части, переведите на русский
язык.
boyfriend ear-ring salesgirl armchair passer-by beefsteak basket-ball postman raincoat dining-room ear-phone mother-in-law
6. Образуйте сложные или более слов. существительные от двух
Образец: a house, a wife a housewife
a post, a man a week, an end news, paper a class, a room a birth, a day home, work a tape, a recorder a chair, a man a bed, a room air, craft a side, a board a house, keeping reading, a hall to dine, a room
7. Прочитайте и переведите следующие предложе
ния Образуйте существительные от выделенных слов,
употребив их в предложениях.
Образец: Му father works at a plant. Не is a worker.
1. Му brother drives very well. He is a ...
2. Mary plays the piano well. She is a ...
3. My mother teaches English. She is a ...
4. My friend studies history. He will be a ...
5. He plays chess very well. He is a good ...
6. Beethoven composed many great pieces of music. He
is a great...
53
8. Прочитайте вслух следующие существительные,
запишите форму их множественного числа:
carpet, glass, photo, box, lady, wife, valley, thief, man,
woman, child, foot, tooth, life, handkerchief, tomato,
scarf, sheep, deer, information, fish, coat.
9. Прочитайте и переведите следующие предло
жения. Объясните, в каких предложениях существи-
тельные являются исчисляемыми, а в каких неисчис-
ляемыми.
1. When water freezes, it changes into ice.
Will you bring us two chocolate ices?
2. This vase is made of glass.
I am sorry but I’ve broken a glass.
This old man can read without glasses.
3. Three coffees, please. I like strong coffee.
4. Our school was built of brick.
Can you tell me how many thousands of bricks are
produced at this brick factory every day?
10. Переведите на русский язык следующие сочета-
ния существительных:
a spring day, a month’s holiday, students’ life, the
rocket industry, the phylosophy department, a college
professor, cow’s milk, an iron bridge, the world champi-
onship, Ireland’s wool, working class families, Oxford
University, a school reform, a book shelf, the law faculty,
a football fan, a week’s rest, an automatic station, tourist
camps, summer months, October weather.
11. Переведите на английский язык, обращая внима
ние на способы выражения падежных отношений.
а) 1. Сын моего друга. 2. Сыновья моего друга. 3.
Сын моих друзей. 4. Сыновья моих друзей. 5. Книга
нашего преподавателя. 6. Книги нашего преподавателя.
7. Книга наших преподавателей. 8. Книги наших пре-
подавателей. 9. Друг моей сестры. 10. Друзья моей се-
стры. II. Друг моих родителей. 12. Друзья моих родите-
лей. 13. Словарь этого студента. 14. Словари этого сту-
дента. 15. Словарь этих студентов. 16. Словари этих
студентов. 17. Семья Феликса. 18. Имя врача.
54
б) рисовать карандашом; сказать Диме; дать деньги
друзьям; написать письмо родителям; писать о погоде;
выражение лица; отрезать ножом; открыть глаза; за-
щищать независимость страны; показать перевод учите-
лю; упражнение, выполненное студентами; обед, приго-
товленный мамой; интересоваться искусством; пойти в
парк; посмотреть на картину.
АРТИКЛЬ
(The Article)
ОБЩИЕ СВЕДЕНИЯ
Артикль — это служебное слово, поясняющее суще-
ствительное.
В английском языке два артикля: неопределенный а
(ап) и определенный the. Форма а употребляется перед
существительными единственного числа, начинающи-
мися с согласной буквы, форма ап — с гласной, на-
пример: a season, a pencil; an apple, an hour. Артикль
the употребляется с существительными как единст-
венного, так и множественного числа.
Артикль относится непосредственно к сущест-
вительному, но если у существительного есть опре-
делители, то артикль ставится перед ними. Например:
an old man, a five-storeyed modern building.
Неопределенный артикль при существительном
обычно обозначает, что имеется в виду какой-то не-
определенный, любой предмет из класса однородных
предметов. Например, в предложении “Give me а реп,
please” речь идет о любой ручке, а не о какой-то кон-
кретной. Неопределенный артикль обычно не пере-
водится на русский язык. Иногда ему могут соот-
ветствовать слова один, какой-то. любой. Например:
A small boy came up to
me and asked: “What’s
the time?”
Какой-то маленький маль-
чик подошел ко мне и
спросил: «Который час?»
Определенный артикль при существительном обо-
значает, что имеется в виду определенный конкретный
предмет или явление, выделяемое из ряда подобных ему
55
предметов или явлений. Определенный артикль обычно
не переводится на русский язык; иногда ему соот-
ветствует в русском предложении слова этот, (эти),
тот (те). Например:
Who can answer the
question?
Кто сможет ответить на
(этот) вопрос?
УПОТРЕБЛЕНИЕ НЕОПРЕДЕЛЕННОГО АРТИКЛЯ
1) с исчисляемыми сущест-
вительными, когда они
упоминаются впервые;
2) с существительным, яв-
ляющимся частью сос-
тавного именного ска-
зуемого;
3) с существительным по-
сле оборота there is..., а
так же после it is ...,
this is ...
4) после слов such, quite,
what;
5) с существительными в
роли приложения;
6) перед числительными а
dozen, a hundred, а
thousand, a million; в
выражениях a lot (of), а
great many of;
7) в некоторых оборотах: it is
I can see a book on the ta-
ble.
My brother is a doctor.
He is a clever young man.
There is a new music school
in our street. It is a pen.
This is a pencil.
Tom is such a nice boy.
My grandmother, a school
teacher, is on pension now.
I’ve read a lot about this
author.
a pleasure, as a result, as
a matter of fact, as a rule, to be in a hurry, it’s a pity;
8) в сочетаниях с глаголами to have, to take, to give: to
have a cold, to have a good time, to have a toothache,
to have a rest, to have a smoke, to take a shower, to
give a hand.
УПОТРЕБЛЕНИЕ ОПРЕДЕЛЕННОГО АРТИКЛЯ
1) с существительными в
единственном и множест-
венном числе, когда го-
ворящему ясно, о каком
предмете идет речь;
Неге is the magazine you
want to read.
Open the window, please.
56
2) с существительным, ко-
торое упоминается в
контексте второй раз;
3) когда перед существи-
тельным стоит:
а) порядковое числитель-
ное
б) прилагательное в превос-
ходной степени
в) одно из прилагатель-
ных: following, last,
next, same, very, only
(единственный).
Ho: next door, last week,
last year;
4) когда существительное
имеет при себе уто-
чняющее или ограни-
чивающее определение;
5) с существительными,
обозначающими пред-
меты, единственные в
своем роде: the sun, the
moon, the earth, the sky,
the world, а также в
словосочетаниях: in the
morning, in the after-
noon, in the evening;
6) с исчисляемыми су-
ществительными, обо-
значая весь класс одно-
родных предметов, а не
выделяя один предмет
из ряда ему подобных
но: man, woman);
7) со следующими име-
нами собственными:
а) названиями рек, озер,
океанов, горных цепей,
островов, пустынь
б) названиями некоторых
стран, местностей, сто-
рон света
I saw a new film on TV
yesterday. The film was not
very interesting.
Gagarin was the first cos-
monaut of the world.
Minsk is the largest city in
Belarus.
Answer the following
questions. She is the only
child in the family.
He finished school last
year.
The price of fruit is high
this year.
Somebody is knocking at
the door of our flat.
The sky is blue and the sun
shines brightly in summer.
The ground is covered with
leaves in autumn. I get up
at 7 o’clock in the morning
and go to bed at 11 in the
evening.
The snowdrop is the first
spring flower.
The cow is a domestic ani-
mal.
Man is the highest creation
of nature.
The Thames, the Volga, the
Black Sea, the English
Channel, the Atlantic
Ocean, the Urals
ho: Lake Baikal, Lake Naroch
the United States (the
USA), the Crimea
57
в) названиями некоторых
исторических зданий
(учреждений), музеев,
театров, библиотек, ор-
ганизаций, английских
газет, за исключением
названий университе-
тов и колледжей, кото-
рые имеют в своем на-
звании имя собственное
г) названиями сторон све-
та: the North, the South,
the West, но без артикля:
from North to South,
from East to West;
д) с фамилиями для обозна-
чения всей семьи в це-
лом.
the Kremlin, the British
Museum, the National Ga-
lery, the United Nations
Organization, the Times,
the University of London,
ho: London University, Ox-
ford University, Cambridge
University
He works in the North.
Have you ever been to the
South?
The Browns spend their
holidays in Italy.
ОТСУТСТВИЕ АРТИКЛЯ
Артикль не употребляется:
1) если у исчисляемого
существительного име-
ется определение, вы-
раженное местоиме-
нием (притяжательным,
указательным, вопроси-
тельным, неопределен-
но-личным), именем со-
бственным в притяжа-
тельном падеже или
количественным числи-
тельным;
2) с существительным во
множественном числе,
которые являются ча-
стью именного ска-
зуемого;
3) с неисчисляемыми су-
ществительными, если
они не имеют ограничи-
тельных или уточняю-
щих определителей;
Give me your plan, please
There are some books on
the table. This man is
John’s father. Where is
room six? I have five
English books. Open your
books at page 5 and do
exercise 10.
We are friends. Nick and
Tom are doctors.
Do you like tea of coffee?
Ho: The coffee is cold.
58
4) если существительное
является обращением;
5) перед словами father,
mother, uncle, aunt в
высказываниях членов
семьи;
6) с названиями дней неде-
ли, месяцев и времен
года;
7) перед существительны-
ми breakfast, dinner,
lunch, supper;
Примечание: В конкрет-
ных ситуациях эти суще-
ствительные, также как и
названия дней недели, мо-
гут употребляться с опре-
деленным артиклем.
8) с именами собственными;
Children, don’t speak at the
lesson.
Is Father at home?
Winter begins in December.
My day off is Sunday.
What will you have for
dinner? I have breakfast at
8 o’clock.
I cooked the dinner myself.
Three years ago the summer
was rainy.
Mary, London, Pushkin
Street
My favourite subject is
history. My brother is good
at physics.
9) с существительными,
обозначающими назва-
ния наук и учебных
предметов;
10) в ряде устойчивых сло-
восочетаний:
in time, for example, to be at home, to go home, by bus
(train), at work, at night, at dinner, by heart, for in-
stance, on foot, by chance, out of doors;
to leave (finish) school, to go to bed, to be out of town,
by name, by mistake, at present, from beginning to end,
at first sight, etc.
Упражнения
1. Объясните наличие или отсутствие артиклей пе-
ред существительными в следующих предложениях:
1. This is a pencil. It’s a red pencil. The red pencil is on
the table. 2. I’m a teacher. I’m at home now. This is my
room. The room is large and clean. 3. Open your books at
page thirteen. 4. This is a black tie and that is a white tie.
5. Yesterday I met my friend with a young girl. The girl is
59
a first-year student of the University. She lives on the
second floor in the house not far from us. 6. Summer is
the most beautiful season of the year. There are many
flowers in the fields and gardens everywhere. The flowers
are very beautiful in your garden. 7. Victory Square is in
the centre of Minsk. 8. I live in Kirov Street. 9. The Black
Sea is in the South of our country. 10. I live in the
Republic of Belarus but my friend lives in Moldova.
2. Заполните пропуски артиклями, где это необхо-
димо:
а) 1. ... Volga is ... longest river in ... European part
of ... Russia. 2. I’d like to go on ... excursion to ...
Crimea. 3. There is ... stadium not far from our ... house.
... stadium is ... largest in our town. 4. My brother is ...
pupil of ... 8th form and he wants to become ... engineer.
5. ... chemistry is his favourite subject at ... school. 6. ...
children like ... ice-cream. 7. Can you tell me ... way to ...
theatre? 8. Here is ... book you need. 9. ... walls of our
classroom are yellow. 10. ... butter and ... cheese are
made of ... milk. 11.Which ... fruit do you like: ... apples
or ... oranges? 12. I go to ... bed at 12 o’clock at night.
13. When will you finish ... school? 14. I get up at 7
o’clock in ... morning.
6) 1. ... England has to import ... raw materials, such
as ... timber, ... petroleum, ... wool and others. 2. Many
ships with ... grain, ... oil, ... cotton and other goods
come to ... London along ... river Thames. 3. I usually
drink ... tea with ... sugar. 4. Will you have ... cup of
tea? 5. Pass me ... sugar, please. 6. ... tea is very hot, I’ll
put ... milk in it. Don’t pour milk into my cup, please. I
don’t like ... tea with ... milk. 7. ... Peace is ... life, ...
war is ... suffering and ... death. 8. What ... beautiful
rose! What ... beautiful flowers! 9. Good ... luck! 10. We
shall go to ... theatre ... next week. 11. We shall see ...
new play at ... Belarusian Drama Theatre. 12. Let’s go to
... cinema. 13. They say ... new detective film is on.
3. Переведите на английский язык, обращая внима-
ние на употребление артиклей.
1. Осень — дождливый сезон в Беларуси. 2. Вода и
воздух необходимы для жизни. 3. Вечером я пью чай
60
или молоко, но не кофе. 4. Молоко слишком холодное,
не пей его. 5. Он попросил стакан воды. 6. Это очень
простой вопрос. Школьник может на него ответить. 7. По-
кажи мне статью, которую ты написал. 8. Ивановы уе-
хали на юг сегодня утром. 9. Жаль, я не могу по-
обедать с вами.
ПРИЛАГАТЕЛЬНОЕ
(The Adjective)
ОБЩИЕ СВЕДЕНИЯ
Прилагательные обозначают признаки, качества или
свойства предметов. По своему составу они делятся на
простые (fine, sharp), производные (homeless, unhappy)
и сложные (first-class, good-looking), по значению — на
качественные (big, heavy) и относительные (wooden,
square).
В предложении прилагательные выполняют следую-
щие функции:
1) определения к существительному.
This is a very difficult Это очень трудный вопрос,
question.
2) предикатива, т. е. именной части составного ска-
зуемого.
This question is very Этот вопрос очень труд-
difficult. ный.
Как и в русском языке, некоторые английские при-
лагательные могут субстантивироваться, т. е. употреб-
ляться в значении существительных. В таких слу-чаях
они употребляются с определенным артиклем the и обо-
значают группу лиц, обладающих данным призна-ком:
the rich (богачи, богатые), the poor (бедняки, бед-
ные),the sick (больные), the Russians (русские), the
English (англичане).
Для обозначения определенных лиц употребляются
сочетания прилагательных с существительными. На-
пример:
a poor man — бедняк two poor men — два бедняка
a Russian — русский two Germans — два немца
61
Особенностью прилагательных английского языка
является то, что они не изменяются по падежам, лицам
и числам. Для качественных прилагательных характер-
на, однако, грамматическая категория степеней сравне-
ния.
СТЕПЕНИ СРАВНЕНИЯ ПРИЛАГАТЕЛЬНЫХ
В английском языке различают три степени срав-
нения прилагательных: положительную (the positive
degree), сравнительную (the comparative degree) и пре-
восходную (the superlative degree).
Положительная степень — исходная, не имеющая
никаких окончаний, например: cold, interesting.
Сравнительная и превосходная степени одно- и дву-
сложных прилагательных образуются с помощью суф-
фиксов -er, -est соответственно, а многосложных - при-
бавлением слов тоге и most (с артиклем the). На-
пример:
cold—colder—the coldest
interesting—more interesting—the most interesting
Ряд прилагательных образуют степени сравнения не
по общему правилу:
good—better—the best
bad—worse—the worst
far—farther—the farthest (о расстоянии)
many (much)—more—the most
little—less—the least
Для выражения сравнения существует также целый
ряд конструкций, таких как as ... as (такой же ... как ... ),
not so ... as (не такой ... как ... ), more (less) ... than
(больше (меньше) ... чем), the ... the ... (чем ... тем), the
more ... the less (чем больше ... тем меньше) и др. На-
пример:
Не is as tall as his father.
This text is more difficult
than that one.
The sooner you come the
better.
Он такой же высокий, как
и его отец.
Этот текст не такой труд-
ный, как тот.
Чем раньше ты придешь,
тем лучше.
62
Упражнения
1. Прочитайте и запомните основные словообра-
зовательные суффиксы и префиксы прилагательных.
а) -ful careful, useful -ible possible, horrible
-ant important, distant -able hospitable, eatable
-OUS famous, dangerous -ic historic, poetic
-ed strong-willed, -y rainy, sunny,
talented dirty
-ing interesting, -less hopeless, useless
disappointing -ary revolutionary,
-al cultural, agricultural ordinary
-ent dependent, different -ive impressive
-ish Polish, Spanish -ian Belarusian
б) un- unhappy, ir- irregular,
uncomfortable inter- irrational international
in- independent, indirect post- post-war
im- impossible, immoral pre- pre-revolutionary
dis- discouraging, disappointing
non- non-governmen- tal, non-persis- tent
2. Образуйте прилагательные от следующих слов по
модели.
Образец: саге—careful—careless
use, hope, truth, beauty, rain, peace, help, harm,
colour, thought, meaning, power, tune, delight.
3. Определите, от каких существительных образо-
ваны следующие прилагательные, обозначающие нацио-
нальность.
63
Russian, German, American, Canadian, Rumanian,
Georgian, Lithuanian, English, Spaniard, Frenchman,
Chinese, Japanese.
4. Образуйте сравнительную и превосходную степе-
ни следующих прилагательных:
1) tall, long, short, hot, cold, nice, large, big, wide,
strong, happy, warm, high, heavy, low, hard, busy, easy,
bright;
2) interesting, comfortable, important, necessary,
beautiful, famous, pleasant, popular, wonderful, active,
careful.
5. Переведите следующие предложения.
Mary is as young as Ann.
Pushkin street is as long as Lermontov street.
The Baltic Sea is not so warm as the Black Sea.
This book is not so interesting as that one.
This road is worse than any other.
Football is more popular than basket-ball.
The more you study the better you pass your exams.
The longer is the night, the shorter is the day.
The less we speak English the worse for us.
The earlier you get up the more you can do.
6. Ответьте на вопросы:
a) Are the mountains of the Crimea as high as the
mountains of the Caucasus?
Is the climate of England as mild as that in our
country?
Is the Volga longer than the Don?
Is the Moscow underground the best in the world?
6) Which is the shortest month of the year?
Which is the biggest city in Great Britain?
Which is the most beautiful square in Minsk?
Which season is the coldest?
в) Where is it better to rest: in the South or in the
North?
Where is it better to live: in the city or in the country?
Where is it warmer: in Italy or in Sweden?
Where is it more snow: in the North or in the East of
Asia?
64
7. Ответьте на вопросы по данному образцу.
Образец: — Was your cold bad? — Yes, it was the
worst cold I’ve ever had.
Was your holiday exciting? Was your car powerful?
Was the coffee strong? Was the meal good? Was your
journey comfortable? Was the soup cold? Was the lesson
difficult?
8. Поставьте прилагательные в скобках в нужной
по смыслу форме.
1. Which is (long) day of the year? 2. Winter is (cold)
season. 3. Moscow is (large) than St. Petersburg. 4. My
friend’s car is not so (new) as my car. 5. Where is it
(beautiful), in the mountains or near the sea? 6. It was
(good) meal I’ve ever had. 7. It was (bad) cold I’ve ever
had. 8. In spring the days are (long) than in winter. 9. It
is (cold) today than it was yesterday. 10. The Russian
grammar is (difficult) than the English one. 11. The
Caucasus are (high) mountains in Europe. 12. Friendship
is (strong) than steel. 13. (Long) day has an end.
14. Health is (good) than wealth.
9. Переведите на английский язык.
1. Самые жаркие дни бывают летом. 2. Самая дожд-
ливая погода бывает осенью. 3. Чем больше я читаю,
тем больше я знаю. 4. Март не такой холодный, как
февраль. 5. Математика самый трудный предмет в шко-
ле. 6. Витебск дальше от Минска, чем Орша. 7. Се-
годня также холодно, как и вчера. 8. Лучше позже, чем
никогда. 9. Этот фильм такой же интересный, как и
тот. 10. Аня лучшая студентка в группе. 11. Эта песня
очень популярна сейчас.
МЕСТОИМЕНИЕ
(The Pronoun)
ОБЩИЕ СВЕДЕНИЯ
Местоимение — это часть речи, которая употребляет-
ся вместо имени существительного или других частей
речи, которые определяют существительное.
3 Зак. 2112
65
По своему значению местоимения делятся на не-
сколько групп: личные (personal), притяжательные
(possessive), возвратные (reflexive), указательные (de-
monstrative), неопределенные (indefinite), вопроси-
тельные (interrogative), отрицательные (negative), сое-
динительные (conjunctive), относительные (relative).
ЛИЧНЫЕ МЕСТОИМЕНИЯ
Личные местоимения имеют два падежа: именитель-
ный (the Nominative Case) и объектный (the Objective
Case).
Именительный падеж
I—я
he—он
she-она
it-он (-а, -о)
we-мы
you-ты, вы
they-они
Объектный падеж
те-мне
him-ему
her-ей
it-ему, ей (неод.)
us—нам, нас
you-тебе, вам
them-им
Личные местоимения в именительном падеже выпол-
няют функцию подлежащего и именной части состав-
ого сказуемого.
Не is a lawyer. Он юрист.
It is I (he, we, they и т.д.) Это я (он, мы, они и т.д.)
В разговорной речи местоимение I часто заменяется
формой объектного падежа те, если оно выступает в
роли именной части сказуемого.
Who’s there? — It’s me. Кто там? — Это я.
Личное местоимение it заменяет существительные,
обозначающие неодушевленные предметы, названия
птиц и животных. Кроме того, оно может употреб-
ляться как указательное местоимение в значении «это»
и быть формальным подлежащим в безличных предло-
жениях, а также являться частью эмфатической (усили-
тельной) конструкции it is ... that, it is ... who, которая
переводится именно, только, как раз.
66
It’s a book. It’s interesting.
It was he who helped me.
It was at school that I
learned to write.
Это книга. Она интересная.
Именно он помог мне.
Именно в школе я научилась
писать.
It — как формальное подлежащее не переводится на
русский язык и употребляется в следующих случаях:
а) для обозначения времени и расстояния
It is three o’clock. Три часа.
It is two kilometres to the До города два километра,
city.
б) для обозначения явлений природы, состояния по-
годы, окружающей обстановки.
It is winter.
It is always cold here.
It was dark in the room.
It will rain.
Зима.
Здесь всегда холодно,
В комнате было темно,
Будет дождь.
В объектном падеже местоимения употребляются в
функции прямого и косвенного (предложного и бес-
предложного) дополнения. Если косвенное дополнение
стоит в предложении после прямого, то оно употреб-
ляется с предлогом to.
Give me (косв.)
Give this book
(прямое)
the book, please
(прямое)
to me, please.
(косвен.)
Дайте мне,
пожалуйста,
книгу.
Дайте эту книгу
мне, пожалуйс-
та.
Следует также помнить, что личные местоимения ты
и вы передаются в английском языке одной формой you,
которая согласуется со сказуемым во множественном
числе.
ПРИТЯЖАТЕЛЬНЫЕ МЕСТОИМЕНИЯ
Притяжательные местоимения указывают на принад-
лежность предмета лицу и имеют формы my, your, his,
her, its, our, their, образованные от соответствующих
личных местоимений I, you, he, she, it, we, they.
67
В отличие от русского местоимения свой, употреб-
ляемого со всеми лицами, английские притяжательные
местоимения используются строго в соответствии с
личными местоимениями: I read my book, you read your
book, etc.
Притяжательные местоимения употребляются в фун-
кции определения к существительным. Например:
His friend made some Его друг сделал несколько
mistakes in his dictation, ошибок в своем диктанте.
В случае употребления притяжательного местоиме-
ния без существительного используется специальная фор-
ма, называемая абсолютной:
my - mine
his - his
her - hers
its - its
ous - ours
your - yours
their - theirs
Например:
This book is not mine, Это не моя книга, это твоя,
it’s yours.
Не is an old friend of Это наш старый друг,
ours.
Английскому языку свойственно более частое упо-
требление притяжательных местоимений, чем русскому,
в особенности перед названиями частей тела, одежды и
других предметов, относящихся к лицу. На русский
язык они не переводятся. Например:
Не put his hands into Он сунул руки в карманы,
his pockets.
УКАЗАТЕЛЬНЫЕ МЕСТОИМЕНИЯ
К числу указательных местоимений относятся this,
that, these, those, such и same. Местоимения this (этот)
и that (тот) указывают на предмет в единственном чис-
ле, these (эти) и those (те) — во множественном числе.
Указательные местоимения могут употребляться в
функции а) определения, б) подлежащего, в) допол-
нения. Например:
68
This city is very beautiful.
This is a very beautiful
city.
We know this already.
Этот город очень красив
Это очень красивый
город.
Мы уже знаем это.
ВОЗВРАТНЫЕ МЕСТОИМЕНИЯ
В английском языке возвратные местоимения образо-
ваны от личных:
I—myself she— herself we—ourselves
you—yourself he—himself it—itself you—yourselves they—themselves
Имеется также возвратное местоимение oneself, обра-
зованное от неопределенного местоимения one.
Возвратные местоимения показывают, что действие
направлено на лицо, выраженное подлежащим. Как
правило, они переводятся частицей -сь (-ся), которая
присоединяется к глаголам. Например:
Be careful! Don’t cut
yourself!
He washed and dressed him-
self.
Будь осторожен! He no
режься!
Он умылся и оделся.
ВОПРОСИТЕЛЬНЫЕ МЕСТОИМЕНИЯ
К числу вопросительных местоимений относятся who
(whom), whose, what, which, how many, how much. Bee
они употребляются при образовании вопросительных
предложений, а также в качестве союзных слов при
присоединении придаточных предложений к главному.
Например:
Who is this man? — Klimov Ivan Petrovich.
What is this man? — He is a doctor.
Местоимение who употребляется по отношению к ли-
цам и может иметь форму объектного падежа whom,
характерную для письменной речи. Например:
Who(m) do you see in
the picture?
Кого ты видишь на
картинке?
69
Местоимение which (который) может употребляться
как прилагательное и как существительное. Например:
Which of you knows
English well?
Which apple would you
like best?
Кто из вас хорошо знает
английский язык?
Какое яблоко тебе больше
нравится?
Местоимения how many и how much употребляются
соответственно с исчисляемыми и неисчисляемыми су-
ществительными. Например:
How many pupils are
there in your class?
How much chalk is there
in the box?
Сколько учеников в твоем
классе?
Сколько мела в ящике?
НЕОПРЕДЕЛЕННЫЕ МЕСТОИМЕНИЯ
Наиболее употребительными неопределенными место-
имениями являются следующие: some, any, no, many,
much, few, little, one, other, (another); both, all, every,
each и производные от них somebody, somewhere, so-
mething, anybody, anything, anywhere , nobody, nothing,
nowhere, no more.
Местоимения some, any могут употребляться с ис-
числяемыми существительными во множественном
числе и с неисчисляемыми существительными со зна-
чением «некоторое количество, немного, сколько-ни-
будь». В этом случае они обычно не переводятся. Форма
some и производные от нее употребляются в утвер-
дительных предложениях, форма any1 и её производ-
ные — в отрицательных и вопросительных.
Give me some water, Дай мне, пожалуйства,
please! воды
Is anybody absent today? Сегодня кто-нибудь
отсутствует?
Местоимения many, few, a few употребляются с ис-
числяемыми существительными, much, little, a little —
с неисчисляемыми. Например:
1 Any - в утвердительных предложениях имеет значение любой.
some употребляется в специальных вопросах, а также в общих воп-
росах, выражающих вежливое предложение или просьбу.
70
Many students took part
in the conference.
I have little time left.
Много студентов приняло
участие в конференции.
У меня осталось мало
времени.
Местоимение one употребляется только с исчисляе-
мыми существительными. Предложение, где оно выпол-
няет функцию подлежащего, является неопределенно-
личным. Например:
One must obey the
traffic rules.
Необходимо соблюдать пра-
вила уличного движения.
Выступая в роли существительного, one может иметь
форму множественного числа (ones) и притяжательного
падежа (one’s).
Местоимение other (другой, иной) употребляется как
существительное и прилагательное. В первом случае оно
имеет форму множественного числа (others), а также
притяжательного падежа (other’s); во втором случае —
не меняет свою форму. Например:
I was the first to come.
The others came later.
Я пришел первым. Другие
подошли позже.
Местоимение either имеет утвердительное значение —
один из двух, оба; neither — ни тот, ни другой. Напри-
мер:
I know neither of them. Я не знаю никого из них.
Either he or his friend Или он или его друг no-
will help me. может мне.
Упражнения
1. Переведите следующие предложения на русский
язык, обращая внимание на формы и значения место
имений.
1. Make yourself at home. 2. Have you any money on
you? 3. I don’t want to stay at home. Let’s go somewhere
tonight. 4. Is there anybody in the room? — No, there is
nobody there. 5. Have you anything interesting to read? —
Yes, come to my place. I’ve got some interesting books.
You may take any of them. 6. It’s very dark here. I can-
71
not see anybody. 7. Will you give me some water, please?
8. There is little fresh air in this room. 9. If you ever
have any problems, let me know. 10. Everyone will tell
you the way to the market.
2. Заполните пропуски месте имениями:
a) some, any, no, every или производными от них.
1. You must ask ... to help you in this work. 2. If I
have ... free time, I shall go... tonight. 3. Have you heard ...
about our plan? 4. Did ... see this film yesterday?
5. Did you say ...? — No, I said ... 6. I know ... about it
and he doesn’t know ... about it either. ... knows about it.
б) местоимениями или наречиями much, many, more,
less, (a) little, (a) few.
1. How ... English words do you know? 2. There are ...
parks in our city. 3. They work too ... 4. Does he read ...? —
It’s a pity but he reads too ... 5. I had very ... friends at
school. 6. Do you speak English ....? 7. Hurry up! We
have ... time to waste. 8. Don’t hurry! We have ... time
before the train comes in. 9. I have something to say. May
I have... words with you? 10. Some ... tea, please.
11. Please, try to make... noise. 12. I don’t drink ... cof-
fee. 13. There were not ... people at the stadium yester-
day.
3. Вставьте вместо точек нужное по смыслу мес-
тоимение.
1. I have lost ... pen, may I take ...? 2. If you’ve left ...
dictionary at home, you may take ... 3. These pencils are ...,
take ... if you want. 4. Help ..., please. 5. ... often meet
... here. 6. He always makes dinner ... 7. We have very
many relatives in ... native town. 8. They can do it ...
9. ... of you knows his address? 10. There is ... butter on
the table, but there isn’t ... milk.
4. Переведите на английский язык.
1. Эти карандаши мои, возьмите их, если хотите.
2. Помогите нам, пожалуйста. 3. Я знаю его и его
брата. 4. Мы часто встречаем их здесь. 5. Он всегда
готовит завтрак сам. 6. У нас сегодня много работы.
7. На катке сегодня мало детей. 8. У нас мало черного
хлеба на ужин. 9. Подождите немного, я попрошу кого-
72
либо купить молока и хлеба. 10. Кто-то звонил нам
сегодня и хотел тебе что-то рассказать. 11. Никто ниче-
го не знает об этом. 12. Она ничего не ответила. 13. Я
никого не видел там.
ИМЯ ЧИСЛИТЕЛЬНОЕ
(The Numeral)
Именем числительным называется часть речи, которая
обозначает количество или порядок предметов при счете.
Имена числительные делятся на количественные, отве-
чающие на вопрос «сколько?» и порядковые, отвечаю-
щие на вопрос «который?».
Количественные числительные от 13 до 19 образуют-
ся прибавлением суффикса -teen к основе. Числитель-
ные, обозначающие десятки, прибавляют к основе суф-
фикс -ty. Порядковые числительные кроме первых трех
(first, second, third) образуются прибавлением суффикса
-th или -eth к соответствующим количественным числи-
тельным. Они употребляются с определенным артиклем.
а) 1. one — the first
2. two — the second
3. three — the third
4. four — the fourth
5. five — the fifth
6. six — the sixth
7. seven — the seventh
8. eight — the eighth
9. nine — the ninth
10. ten — the tenth
б) Десятки:
20 twenty—the twentieth
30 thirty — the thirtieth
40 forty — the fortieth
50 fifty — the fiftieth
60 sixty — the sixtieth
70 seventy—the seventieth
80 eighty — the eightieth
90 ninety — the ninetieth
11. eleven — the eleventh
12. twelve — the twelfth
13. thirteen — the thirteenth
14. fourteen— the fourteenth
15. fifteen — the fifteenth
16. sixteen — the sixteenth
17. seventeen — the seventeenth
18. eighteen — the eighteenth
19. nineteen — the nineteenth
20. twenty — the twentieth
Составные числительные:
twenty two—the twenty-
second
thirty-three — the thirty-
third
forty-four — the forty-
fourth
fifty-five — the fifty-fifth
sixty-six — the sixty-sixth
73
в) Числительные от 100 и далее:
100th — the hundredth
101st — the one hundred
and first
200th — the two hundredth
1000th — the thousandth
On Мау 9, 1945
on the ninth of May, nineteen
forty-five
on May the ninth, nineteen forty-
five
100—a (one) hundred
101 —a (one) hundred
and one
200 — two hundred
1000 — (one) thousand
1001 —a (one) thousand and one
3,330 — three thousand three hundred and thirty
2,000,000 — two million
Обратите внимание, что числительные hundred, thou-
sand, million не принимают окончания -s, когда перед
ними стоит другое числительное. Если же эти числи-
тельные обозначают неопределенное количество, они
употребляются во множественном числе с окончанием
-s, за которым следует предлог of. Сравните:
hundreds of sportsmen
thousands of people
millions of books
five hundred sportsmen
10 thousand people
2 million books
Для обозначения номеров домов, комнат, транспорта,
страниц, глав, параграфов, частей книг употребляются
не порядковые, а количественные числительные. Суще-
ствительные в этих случаях употребляются без артикля:
house 5, flat 34, bus 10, chapter 6, page 59, paragraph 1
(one).
ДРОБНЫЕ ЧИСЛИТЕЛЬНЫЕ
1/2 — a (one) half 0.1 — 0 [ou] point one
1/4 — a (one) quarter; 2.45 — two point four five
2/3 — two thirds 35.25 — three five (или:
1 1/2 — one and a half thirty- five) point two five
Для обозначения возраста употребляется следующая
конструкция:
I am seventeen (years old).
Для обозначения времени употребляются следующие
структуры:
It is eleven sharp.
It’s ten past eleven.
It’s a quarter past eleven.
It’s half past eleven.
It’s ten to twelve.
It’s a quarter to twelve.
Ровно одиннадцать.
10 минут двенадцатого.
Четверть двенадцатого.
Половина двенадцатого.
Без десяти двенадцать.
Без четверти двенадцать.
ХРОНОЛОГИЧЕСКИЕ ДАТЫ
Годы в английском языке обозначаются количествен-
ными числительными. Слово year после указанного года
не употребляется, но возможно употребление фразы in
the year перед указываемым годом. Числительное, обо-
значающее год, разбивается на две части — сначала
произносится число сотен, а затем — число десятков и
единиц.
1900 — nineteen hundred in the year 1991
1903 — nineteen three (в офи- in the year 1812
циальном языке nineteen
hundred and three)
Даты обозначаются порядковыми числительными и
читаются следующим образом:
Упражнения
1. Напишите цифрами следующие даты.
a) The tenth of February nineteen seventy-two.
The fifth of April nineteen seventy-five.
The second of May nineteen five.
The first of June nineteen hundred.
6) in (the year) nineteen forty-seven;
in (the year) nineteen hundred seventy-one;
in (the year) eighteen hundred sixty-seven.
II. Прочитайте и переведите следующие предложе-
ния:
1. William Shakespeare was born in 1564 and died in
1616 in Stratford-on-Avon. 2. Shakespeare wrote 37 plays.
3. Jack London was born on the 12th of January 1876 and
74
75
died in 1916. 4. On April 12, 1961 the whole world lear-
ned about Gagarin’s flight into space.
III. Скажите по-английски:
a) 1 сентября 1984 года
7 ноября 1990 года
9 октября 1947 года
11 марта 1951 года
5 июля 1945 года
б) 1 325 543 книги
1 325 учеников
266 дней
около 18 000 студентов
более 1 500 000 человек
менее 1000 страниц
8 мая 1861 года
21 января 1824 года
22 апреля 1907 года
27 июля 1990 года
10 февраля 1972 года
первый автобус
вторая страница
сороковой размер
часть первая
номер десятый
параграф третий
IV. Ответьте на вопросы:
1) When do we celebrate the first day of spring (Vic-
tory Day, New Year’s Day, Christmas, Women’s Day, May
Day, Cosmonautics Day, Independence Day)?
2) When were you born?
3) When was your father (your mother, your sister,
your friend, your cousin) born?
V. Прочитайте следующие слова:
1) количественные числительные:
1, 2, 11, 12, 13, 27, 69, 248, 1000, 1,008, 1,096,
2,355, 3,579;
2) порядковые числительные: 17, 20, 24, 149, 83, 56,
150, 178, 209;
3) хронологические даты: 1975, 1982, 1990, 1991,
2000, 2001, 2500, 2903.
ГЛАГОЛ
(The Verb)
ОБЩИЕ СВЕДЕНИЯ
Глагол — это часть речи, которая обозначает действие
или состояние лица или предмета.
Не works as an engineer. Он работает инженером.
The child is sleeping now. Ребенок спит сейчас.
76
1. Глаголы бывают простые, производные, сложные и
составные.
К простым глаголам относятся глаголы, не имею-
щие в своем составе ни префиксов, ни суффиксов: to sit,
to go, to eat, to come.
Производные глаголы имеют в своем составе суф-
фиксы или префиксы: to deepen, to rewrite.
Наиболее характерные суффиксы глаголов:
-ate: to decorate, to separate, to educate,
-en: to widen, to strengthen, to brighten,
-ize: to memorize, to organize, to dramatize,
-fy: to purify, to satisfy, to justify.
Наиболее характерные префиксы глаголов:
re-: to rebuild, to reread, to re-pay,
dis-: to dislike, to disappear, to disprove,
un-: to unwrap, to unpack, to unlimit,
mis-: to misunderstand, to mistake, to mistrust,
under-: to underline, to undergo, to undertake.
Сложные глаголы в английском языке состоят из
двух основ, но выражают одно понятие: to broadcast, to
whitewash, to kidnap.
Составные глаголы состоят из глагольной основы и
предлога или наречия, которые могут отделяться друг
от друга другими словами. Местоимение в объектном
падеже всегда стоит между глаголом и предлогом (наре-
чием).
Ring me up, please.
Switch on the radio,
please.
Switch the light off.
Позвони мне, пожалуйста.
Включите, пожалуйста,
радио.
Выключите свет.
Многие английские глаголы совпадают по форме с су-
ществительными (реже с прилагательными).
to work - работать work - работа
to play - играть play - пьеса
to dry - сушить dry - сухой
2. По своему значению и выполняемой в предложе-
нии функции глаголы делятся на смысловые, вспомога-
тельные, модальные глаголы и глаголы-связки.
Смысловые глаголы (Notional Verbs) имеют са-
мостоятельное лексическое значение и употребляются в
предложении в роли глагольного сказуемого.
77
He lives in Minsk. Он живет в Минске.
She left school last year. Она закончила школу в
прошлом году.
Вспомогательные глаголы (Auxiliary Verbs) не
имеют самостоятельного значения и служат для образо-
вания сложных глагольных форм сказуемого. К ним
относятся глаголы: to be, to have, to do, shall, should,
will, would.
He is working now.
I have answered all the
questions.
Do you speak Spanish?
She doesn’t teach English.
They will discusss the
plan.
He said that he would buy
a car.
Он работает сейчас.
Я ответил на все вопросы.
Вы разговариваете на
испанском языке?
Она не преподает
английский язык.
Они обсудят этот план.
Он сказал, что купит
машину.
Модальные глаголы (Modal Verbs) can, may, must,
should, ought(to) употребляются в сочетании с инфини-
тивом, образуя в предложении составное модальное ска-
зуемое.
You may go home.
Can you help me?
You must not do it.
Вы можете идти домой.
Можете ли вы помочь мне?
Вы не должны делать это.
Глаголы-связки (Link Verbs) служат для обра-
зования составного именного сказуемого.-Основным гла-
голом-связкой служит глагол to be. В функции связ-
ки могут выступать также глаголы to become, to get,
to grow, to turn (в значении становиться), to look - вы-
глядеть и др.
He is an economist.
She became a lawyer.
It gets dark early in
autumn.
Он экономист.
Она стала юристом.
Осенью темнеет рано.
Все глаголы (за исключением модальных) имеют лич-
ные (Finite Forms) и неличные формы (Non-Finite Forms
или Verbals).
Личные формы глагола имеют категории лица,
числа, наклонения, времени и залога. Они служат в
78
предложении сказуемым и согласуются с подлежащим в
лице и числе.
Не knows English well.
They are playing chess.
She has seen this film.
Он знает английский
хорошо.
Они играют в шахматы.
Она видела этот фильм.
Неличные формы глагола: инфинитив (The Infini-
tive), герундий (The Gerund) и причастие (The Participle)
не имеют категории лица, числа и наклонения и не
употребляются в предложении в функции сказуемого.
Английские глаголы, также как и русские, делятся
на переходные (требующие после себя прямого допол-
нения: to take, to tell) и непереходные (после которых
не употреблятся прямое дополнение: to go, to live).
В английском языке выделяются четыре основные
формы глагола, которые в сочетании со вспомогатель-
ными глаголами образуют все времена в действительном
и страдательном залогах:
Infinitive Past Indefinite Past Participle Present Parti- ciple
Инфинитив Прошедшее неопределенное время Причастие прошедшего времени Причастие настоящего времени
ask asked asked asking
speak spoke spoken speaking
В зависимости от способа образования второй и тре-
тьей форм все глаголы делятся на правильные (Regular
Verbs) и неправильные (Irregular Verbs).
Правильные глаголы образуют формы Past Indefinite
и Participle II при помощи суффикса -ed^ который при-
бавляется к основе глагола, причем соблюдаются опре-
деленные правила произношения и правописания:
to hope - hoped - hoped [t],
to close - closed - closed [d],
to visit - visited - visited [id],
to study - studied - studied
to play - played - played
после глухих согласных
после звонких согласных
и гласных
после [t] и [d]
буква у предшествует
согласная
букве у предшествует
гласная
79
to stop — stopped - stopped
to travel - travelled - travelled
to permit - permitted - per-
mitted
глаголы, оканчиваю-
щиеся на согласную с
предшествующим крат-
ким гласным звуком
конечной букве 1 пред-
шествует краткий
гласный
ударение падает на по-
следний слог
Неправильные глаголы образуют формы прошедшего
времени (Past Indefinite) и причастия прошедшего вре-
мени (Participle II) различными другими способами.
Формы неправильных глаголов нужно заучивать:
to go - went - gone
to become - became - become
to be — was/were — been
to have - had - had
ГЛАГОЛЫ TO BE, TO HAVE (HAVE GOT)
Глаголы to be (быть, находиться) и to have (иметь)
имеют несколько форм в настоящем и прошедшем вре-
мени. Они могут употребляться в предложении в функ-
ции смыслового, вспомогательного и модального глаго-
лов. Глагол to be также употребляется как глагол-связ-
ка и является частью оборота there + be.
Глаголы to be и to have как вспомогательные и to be
как глагол-связка не переводятся. Они служат для об-
разования видовременных форм глаголов.
to be
Present Past Future
I am He was shall be
She is It We was will be shall be
You are They ' were will be
80
to have
Present Past Future
I have had shall have
He
She has had will have
It
We shall have
You have had will have
They-
Как модальные глаголы to be и to have употреб-
ляются в сочетании с инфинитивом с частицей to и
обозначают: to be (to) - необходимость совершить дейст-
вие по предварительной договоренности (по плану), а
также приказы, инструкции; to have (to) - долженство-
вание, необходимость совершить действие в силу каких-
то обстоятельств.
Например:
а) Не is at home now.
She is a doctor.
I am writing a letter.
We are to take exams in
June.
b) He has a red pencil.
The boy has read the
book.
I had to get up early.
Он сейчас дома.
Она врач.
Я пишу письмо.
Мы должны сдавать экза-
мены в июне.
У него есть красный
карандаш.
Мальчик прочитал книгу.
Мне пришлось встать рано.
При образовании вопросительной формы глагол to be
выносятся на первое место перед подлежащим (в нас-
тоящем и прошедшем времени), согласуясь с ним в ли-
це и числе. При образовании отрицательной формы час-
тица not употребляется непосредственно после соответ-
ствующей формы to be: am not, is not (isn’t), are not
(aren’t), was not (wasn’t), were not (weren’t).
В вопросительных предложениях в будущем време-
ни вспомогательные глаголы shall и will выносятся
перед подлежащим, а в отрицательных - частица not
употребляется после них: shall not (shan’t), will not
(won’t).
81
Например:
Аге you a student? —
How old are you? -
Were they at school
yesterday? -
Will he be busy tomorrow? -
No, I am not a student.
I’m seventeen.
No, they were not here.
No, he will not (won’t) be
busy tomorrow.
To have и have got имеют одно и то же лексическое
значение, однако have got употребляется обычно в нас-
тоящем времени в неофициальной разговорной речи.
Например:
Have you got any money on
you?
ho:
The President has a meeting
with the Prime Minister
now.
У тебя есть деньги при
себе?
У президента сейчас
встреча в премьером.
В настоящем времени вопросительные и отрицатель-
ные предложения с глаголом to have образуются тремя
способами:
Have you got a bicycle?
Do you have a bicycle?
Have you a bicycle?
I haven’t got a bicycle,
I don’t have a bicycle.
I haven’t a bicycle.
Обычно, если речь идет о конкретном единичном слу-
чае, то вопросительные предложения образуются путем
постановки глагола to have в соответствующей форме
перед подлежащим, а отрицательные - с помощью час-
тицы not после глагола to have.
Have you got a
headache?
- No, I haven’t got a
headache.
Has he got a dictionary?
- No, he hasn’t got a
dictionary.
У вас болит голова?
Нет, у меня не болит
голова.
У него есть словарь?
Нет, у него нет словаря.
Если же речь идет об обычном, постоянном наличии
какого-либо предмета, явления или состояния, то воп-
росительные и отрицательные предложения образуются
с помощью вспомогательных галоголов do (not), does
(not).
82
Do you often have
headaches?
- No, I don’t have
headaches at all.
У вас часто болит голова?
Нет, у меня вообще не
болит голова.
В прошедшем времени в утвердительных предложе-
ниях обычно употребляется форма had, а вопроситель-
ные и отрицательные предложения образуются с помо-
щью вспомогательных глаголов did и didn’t (но возмо-
жен вариант: Had you...?)
— Did you have time to
prepare for the lessons
yesterday?
- No, I didn’t have time
to do it.
- Did you have/Had you
an umbrella when you
left the house?
У тебя вчера было время
подготовиться к урокам?
Нет, у меня не было
времени сделать это.
У вас был зонт, когда вы
вышли из дома?
Отрицательные предложения с глаголом to have так-
же образуются при помощи отрицательного местои-
мения по. В этом случае существительные употреб-
ляются без артикля и без местоимения any.
We have no car.
I have no time for it.
She has no friends
here.
У нас нет машины.
У меня нет на это времени.
У нее здесь нет друзей.
В будущем времени вопросительные предложения об-
разуются путем постановки вспомогательных глаголов
shall/will перед подлежащим, а в отрицательных пред-
ложениях частица not стоит между вспомогательным и
основным глаголом.
- Will you have lessons
tomorrow?
— No, we shall not
(shan’t) have lessons
tomorrow.
- У вас будут уроки завтра?
- Нет, у нас завтра не будет
уроков.
Глаголы to be и to have могут входить в состав
устойчивых глагольных сочетаний типа: to be tired —
уставать, to have a good time — хорошо проводить
время, to have a rest — отдыхать, to have classes —
заниматься, to have tea (coffee) — пить чай (кофе), to
83
have meals (breakfast, dinner, supper) — есть (завтра-
кать, обедать, ужинать).
Вопросительные и отрицательные предложения в
подобных словосочетаниях с глаголом to have всегда
образуются при помощи вспомогательных глаголов do
(does), did.
Do you have dinner at 2?
Does he have English
classes every day?
Вы обедаете в 2 часа?
Он занимается англий-
ским каждый день?
We didn’t have а
dictation yesterday.
Мы не писали диктант
вчера.
Упражнения
1. Проанализируйте функции глаголов to be и to
have в следующих предложениях.
а) 1. An interesting film is on at the nearest cinema.
2. My father is at work now. 3. My grandfather was a
doctor. 4. The lesson was interesting. 5. I’ll be glad to
help you.
b) 1. Have you got any mushrooms on sale? - We usu-
ally have, but I am afraid we haven’t got any at the mo-
ment. 2. Will you have some coffee? — No, thanks. 3. I
had to work hard in my final year at school. 4. We ha-
ven’t seen him for ages.
2. Запомните следующие словосочетания с глаголом
to be. употребите их в предложениях.
to be about + инф. — собираться сделать что-либо
to be on duty - дежурить
to be present - присутствовать
to be back - вернуться
to be absent, to be away — отсутствовать
to be good at — иметь способности к чему-либо
to be ready (for) - быть готовым
to be up — закончиться
to be well - быть здоровым
to be ill - быть больным
to be busy — быть занятым
to be free - быть свободным
to be glad - быть довольным
84
to be married - быть женатым (замужем)
to be engaged - быть помолвленным
to be fond of - увлекаться
to be going + инф. — собираться
to be interested in — интересоваться
to be sorry (for smb., about smth.) - сожалеть (о ком-
то, о чем-то)
to be acquainted with - быть знакомым с ...
to be late — опаздывать
to be in (on) time - быть вовремя
to be right - быть правым
to be wrong - быть неправым
to be mistaken - ошибаться
to be at home - быть дома
to be hungry - быть голодным
to be thirsty - испытывать жажду
to be on - идти (о фильме)
to be on pension - быть на пенсии
to be tired - быть усталым
to be afraid of - бояться
to be over — окончиться
to be... years old
I am 20 years old — Мне 20 лет
to be sure - быть уверенным
to be worth doing smth - стоит делать что-либо
3. Поставьте следующие предложения в the Past и
the Future Indefinite, употребляя соответствующие
обстоятельства времени.
а) 1. It is warm today. 2. I am glad to meet them. 3. The
days are rainy in October. 4. I am 17 years old. 5. We are
busy now. 6. My father is at work. 7. You are late today.
b) 1. We have many apple trees in our garden. 2. My
sister has a nice cat. 3. You have little time left. 4. We
have breakfast at 8 in the morning. 5. She has a good rest
every summer. 6. They have no vacant rooms in the hotel.
4. Употребите полную форму глаголов to be и to
have в 3-м лице единственного числа.
1. He’s 18. 2. It’s far from London. 3. He’s cold.
4. There’s enough salt in the soup. 5. She’s got a new
coat. 6. Jane’s married. 7. He’s got a motor cycle. 8. She’s
85
got a lot of strawberries in her basket. 9. It’s Monday to-
day. 10. She’s interested in mathematics. 11. He’s got
black hair. 12. My name’s Pitt.
5. Поставьте общие вопросы к следующим утверж-
дениям и дайте на них краткие ответы.
А. Образец: I am afraid of snakes.
Are you afraid of snakes? —
Yes, I am (No, I am not.)
B. He has (got) a car:
Has he (got) a car? - Yes, he has. (No, he hasn’t.)
C. She had a good rest last summer.
Did she have a good rest last summer? -
Yes, she did. (No, she didn’t.)
a) 1. You are good at physics. 2. The ice wasn’t thick
enough to skate. 3. Marry will be angry with me. 4. That
was Bill on the phone. 5. She is proud of her children.
6. The weather is usually fine in summer. 7. Kate wasn’t
at school yesterday. She was ill. 8. He will be seventeen in
a month.
6) 1. I have a new tape-recorder. 2. They haven’t
enough money to buy these books. 3. She has no time to
do it now. 4 We’ll have holidays in summer. 5. This man
had a heartattack last month. 6. I hadn’t the courage to
tell her the truth.
в) 1. My father usually has breakfast af 7. 2. English
people have tea many times a day. 3. We had a good time
out of town. 4. I don’t have coffee in the evening. 5. The
pupils have classes six days a week. 6. My friend usually
has dinner in our school canteen.
6. Задайте альтернативные вопросы своему собесед-
нику.
А. Образец: I’m a pupil (a student).
Are you a pupil or a student?
1. Kate is at home (at school). 2. They are in England
(Scotland). 3. Oxford is far from (near) London. 4. She is
a writer (a painter). 5. She is interested in music
(drawing). 5. I am seventeen (eighteen) years old. 6. The
ice was thick (thin) on the river. 7. That was Jane (Ann)
on the phone. 8. He was rude (polite) with you. 9. It will
86
be cold (warm) tomorrow. 9. The weather will be fine
(rainy) next week.
В Образец: You have many (few) friends at school?
Have you many or few friends at school?
I had dinner at home (at school) yesterday.
Did you have dinner at home or at school
yesterday?
1. They have a house (a flat) in Minsk. 2. My friend
has a lot of English (French) books. 3. Our family had a
rest in the countryside (abroad) last summer. 4. I usually
have coffee (tea) in the morning. 5. We have meals three
(four) fimes a day. 6. You will have five (six) lessons to-
morrow.
7. Ответьте на вопросы.
a) 1. What is your name? 2. How old are you? 3. When
were you born? 4. Where are you from? 5. What are you
fond of? 6. Will you be busy tomorrow?
6) 1. Have you got any books by Jack London? 2. Has
your flat all modern conveniences? 3. Will you have some
tea? 4. How often do you have English classes? 5. Has
your mother a lot of work to do about the house? 6. Did
you have any idea how to solve this problem?
8. Дополните разделительные вопросы.
А. Образец: You are fond of sports, aren’t you?
You are not fond of sports, are you?
1. The water is deep here,...? 2. This is the front of the
queue,...? 3. Tom was over there,...? 4. They were in a
hurry,...? 5. The weather isn’t bad,...? 6. There wasn’t a
lot of noise,...? 7. Bob will be surprised,...?
В Образец: You have got a watch, haven’t you?
You have coffee in the morning, don’t you?
1. You have got this information,...? 2. The English al-
phabet has 26 letters,...? 3. Short people always have bad
tempers,...? 4. You had breakfast at home,...? 5. She will
have a party next week,...? 6. The child has milk before go-
ing to bed,...? 7. You haven’t got English text-book to
day,...?
87
9. Задайте специальные вопросы своему собеседнику,
используя предложенные вопросительные слова.
Образец; 1. They were late.
a) Why were they late?
b) Who was late?
2. He will have examinations soon.
a) When will he have examinations?
b) Who will have examinations soon?
1. The boy is lucky, he cought a big fish
yesterday.
2. We’ll have a lecture on history
tomorrow.
3. English people have many old
customs and traditions.
4. It’s 10 o’clock.
5. She will have an examination next
week.
6. He is 21 years old and I’m 17.
7. I haven’t got a computer.
8. He had a letter for you on the table.
9. They were in this town last year.
who
when
where
why
what
how many
how often
how old
what time
10. Употребите глаголы to have или to be в нужной
форме.
a) 1. It ... difficult to find a job now,... it? 2. I want...
a doctor, that is why I ... a student of the Medical Insti-
tute. 3. There is no school in this village and the children
go to the school which... two miles away. 4. How old...
you? — I... 17. 5. ... you English lessons twice a week? —
Yes, we ... . 6. I ... no time to help you yesterday. I ...
very sorry about it. 7. We ... a conference tomorrow. So I
... busy with my report today. 8. There ... only two facul-
ties at the Belarusian University in 1921, now there ...
twelve faculties there. 9. My sister ... a second-year stu-
dent of the Law Faculty. She ... a lawyer. 10. You ... in
the final year at school, ... you? Yes, I .... 11. What ...
you fond of? My hobby ... drawing.
6) 1. The U.S.A ...various natural resources and ... one
of the of the richest countries in the world. 2. The Soviet
Union... the first country to send a man into space. 3. My
mother... the only person I could talk to. 4. Will you...
any lectures tomorrow? 5. Health... priceless possession.
88
6. Physics... my favourite subject at school.
7. Fortunately the news... not as bad as they had ex-
pected. 8. Your clothes... out of fashion, you should buy
something new. 9. He ... a lot of trouble with his car yes-
terday. 10. Their new furniture... very beautiful and ex-
pensive. 11. I think that three days... not long enough for
a good holiday. 12. My grandfather... short grey hair but
my grandmother’s hair... long and thick. 13. Money spent
on the brain... never spent in vain. 14. Your glasses... on
the table. 15. My knowledge... not enough for solving this
problem.
11. Переведите предложения:
1. Какой фильм был по телевизору вчера? - К
сожалению, сейчас у нас нет телевизора. 2. Вы были на
концерте в воскресенье? — Нет, я была занята тогда.
3. Где вы были вчера? - У нас в школе был вечер. Мы
хорошо провели там время. 4. Если вы свободны сейчас,
давайте пойдем поужинаем куда-нибудь. Где вы обычно
ужинаете? - Дома. 5. Когда у вас будут каникулы? -
Через неделю. 6. Где вы отдыхали прошлым летом? —
На берегу моря. 7. Откуда вы родом? - Мы из Беларуси.
12. Употребите следующие пословицы в кратких си-
туациях.
1. Business is business.
2. False friends are worse than open enemies.
3. Two heads are better than one.
4. No man is wise at all times.
5. Every medal has its reverse.
6. Fields have eyes, and woods have ears.
Оборот there + be
В английском языке широко употребляются предло-
жения, начинающиеся с оборота there + be со значе-
нием есть, имеется, находится, существует. Данный
оборот употребляется, когда хотят сообщить о наличии
или отсутствии какого-либо предмета или лица в опре-
деленном месте. Глагол to be употребляется в личной
форме и согласуется в числе с подлежащим, которое
следует непосредственно за ним. Неисчисляемые су-
89
ществительные всегда согласуются с глаголом в единст-
венном числе.
Present Past Future
there is/are there was/were there will be
Перевод предложений начинается с обстоятельства
места (времени) или со сказуемого, если обстоятельство
отсутствует (т.е. с конца предложения).
There is a park near our
house.
There are many parks in
London.
There is much snow in the
fields.
There is a book and some
pens on the table.
There are some ways of
solving this problem.
Недалеко от нашего дома
(есть, находится) парк.
В Лондоне много парков.
На полях много снега.
На столе книга и не-
сколько ручек.
Сущестувует несколько
способов решения этой
проблемы.
Исчисляемые существительные в единственном числе
употребляются в данной обороте с артиклем а/ап, су-
ществительные во множественном числе употребляются
без артикля. Например:
There is a text-book on
the desk.
There are text-books
on the desk.
На парте учебник.
На парте учебники.
Подлежащее в данном обороте часто употребляется с
неопределенными местоимениями some, any, much, ma-
ny, a lot of, few или другими словами co значением ко-
личества.
There are some
mistakes in my paper.
There is much noise in
the streets.
There are twelve
months in a year.
В моей работе несколько
ошибок.
На улицах много шума.
В году двенадцать месяцев.
В вопросительных предложениях глагол to be в соот-
ветствующей форме ставится перед словом there (в на-
90
стоящем и прошедшем времени) и shall/will - в буду-
щем времени.
a) Is there a lift in your
house?
Yes, there is. (No, there
isn’t.)
Are there any mistakes
in my paper? — Yes,
there are some. — (No,
there are not any.)
Were there many lessons
yesterday?
- Yes, there were.
(No, there were not.)
Will there be a meeting
tomorrow?
— Yes, there will.
(No, there won’t.)
6) Are there many or few
pupils in your English
group?
How many lessons were
there yesterday?
There is a map on the
wall, isn’t there?
- Yes, there is
(No, there isn’t.)
В вашем доме есть лифт?
Да, есть. (Нет.)
В моей работе есть (какие-
либо) ошибки?
Да, есть.
(Нет.)
Вчера было много уроков?
-Да.
(Нет.)
Завтра будет собрание?
-Да.
(Нет.)
В вашей английской груп-
пе много или мало учени-
ков?
Сколько уроков было вчера?
На стене есть карта, не
так ли?
-Да.
(Нет.)
В отрицательных предложениях частица not или
местоимение по ставятся после глагола to be, перед
подлежащим. Перед any, many, much и числительными
употребляется только not. Употребление по исключает
употребление артикля перед подлежащим.
There is no picture on
the wall.
There are not any books
on the table.
There are not many
English books in my
library.
На стене нет картины.
На столе нет (никаких)
книг.
В моей библиотеке не мно-
го английских книг.
91
Оборот there + be не употребляется, если речь идет
об известном предмете, т.е. когда русское предложение
начинается с подлежащего. Сравните:
The telephone is in the
hall.
There is a telephone in
the hall.
Телефон в прихожей.
В прихожей есть телефон.
Упражнения
1. Проанализируйте употребление оборота there +
be в следующих предложениях.
1. There is a large forest near our city. 2. There are
many berries and mushrooms there. 3. There is always
much work to do about the house. 4. There is no need to
begin all over again. 5. There is nothing to do but to wait.
6. Are there any museums in your home town? 7. There
were no vacant seats in the stalls. 8. There will be an in-
teresting lecture on literature tomorrow. 9. There is a
sofa and two armchairs in our living-room. 10. There is
always much light in this room.
2. Поставьте следующие предложения в Past и Fu-
ture Indefinite.
Образец: There is a park near our school.
There was a park near our school.
There will be a park near our school.
1. There is much snow in winter. 2. There are not any
german books in our library. 3. There is one theatre and
five cinemas in this town. 4. There is no lift in our house.
5. There is little milk in the bottle. 6. There are few shops
in this district. 7. There are three rooms in our flat.
8. There is a new film on at our local cinema. 9. There are
not many difficult exercises in this text-book. 10. There
are two hospitals in this town.
3. Преобразуйте предложения, употребляя оборот
there is/аге.
Образец: This room has two windows.
There are two windows in this room.
a) 1. This city has many monuments. 2. Our town has
no theatres. 3. This family has two children. 4. Our group
92
has many good pupils. 5. Every week has 7 days and every
year has twelve months. 6. She has a lot of English books
in her library.
b) 1. The dog is in the room. 2. The children are in the
yard. 3. The students are in the laboratory. 4. The car is
near the house. 5. The bench was under the tree. 6. A lot
of people will be at the stadium tomorrow.
Образец" I see (have) several English books on
the shelf.
There are several English books on the
shelf.
в) 1. I see much sand on the beach. 2. I see a man at
the corner. 3. I see many students in my classroom. 4. He
hasn’t any pictures on the wall. 5. I have no red ink.
6. We have a lot of ports in the Atlantic Ocean. 7. I can
see a letter lying on the floor. 8. I can’t see anybody here.
9. I noticed only two mistakes in his dictation. 10. He
knew only one way out of the situation. 11. I could see
yellow curtains on your window. 12. He noticed two more
men behind the house.
4. Употребите формы it is или there is/are в следую-
щих предложениях.
a) 1. ... very wet today,... impossible to go out. 2. ...
thick fog last week. ... usually a lot of accidents in such
bad wether. 3. ... foolish to drive fast when ... foggy or
rainy. 4. ... interesting to go sightseeing in any unknown
city. 5. ... a lot of places of interest in ancient towns of
this country. 6. ... time to go home,... a lot of work to do
there. 7. ... all sorts of stories about Robin Hood.
6) 1. ... a gas-stove in the kitchen. 2. ... a gas-stove.
3. ... fine today. 4. ... an underground station near my
house. 5. ... nearly 11 o’clock. 6. ... a light in the window.
Somebody must be at home. 7. ... no place like home. 8. ...
time to go to bed. 9. ... not much furniture in our flat.
10. ... not true to say that she is a close friend of mine.
11. ... no central heating in my house. 12. ... only one
cigarette in the box. 13. ... important to know the details.
14. ... fifteen students in our group. 15. ... a pity you
can’t go with us. 16. ... too early to leave. 17. ... any
news in the letter? 18. ... easy to understand why she is
absent. 19. ... much milk in the jug. 20. ... a pity you
93
can’t join us. 21. ... some interesting articles in the news-
paper. 22. ... not very cold today.
5. Задайте вопросы к следующим утверждениям и
дайте ответы на них.
а) Образец: There are some interesting English books
in my library.
Are there any English books in your
library? — Yes, (sure) there are. — No,
(I am afraid) there are not. There are no
English books in my library.
1. There are new blocks of flats in this street. 2. There
is a bus stop over there. 3. There will be an interesting
match on TV tonight. 4. There were so many people at the
concert. There was no place to sit down. 5. There are some
interesting articles in this magazine.
б) Образец; There are plates and spoons on the table.
- What is there on the table?
1. There is some cheese on the plate. 2. There are a lot
of stars in the sky. 3. There were not many apples in our
garden this year. 4. There was nothing interesting in today’s
newspaper. 5. There will be a concert on TV tonight.
6. Дополните ответы в отрицательной форме.
Образец} As far as I remember there is a path to the
forest.
I am afraid you are wrong, there is no path
there.
1. There was a telephone in the hall. - I’m afraid, ... .
2. I should like to have some ice-cream. - But ... . 3. You
can take this book in the library. - I was there. But ... .
4. There will be much trouble with this car. - Why, on
the contrary... . 5. I am going to see a popular TV pro-
gramme tonight. But ... . 6. There are many old trees in
your garden. On the contrary... .
7. Переведите предложения на английский язык,
употребив конструкцию there is/are, либо глаголы to be,
to have, где это необходимо.
1. В нашей квартире есть телефон. У нас также есть
радиоприемник и телевизор. 2. Наш дом находится на
94
улице Свободы. Около дома есть школа и поликлиника.
3. В библиотеке нашей школы много английских книг,
а у меня только несколько. 4. На улице много снега.
Снег лежит на земле, на крыше, на деревьях.5. Завтра
будет собрание. Я должен присутствовать там. 6. Что
лежит на вашем письменном столе? У меня там доклад
и записная книжка. 7. У моей сестры много работы в
поликлинике. Она врач. На ее участке много людей.
8. В Москве много красивых зданий и исторических па-
мятников. 9. Масло не в холодильнике, оно на столе.
Там также есть белый хлеб и варенье. 10. В этой книге
много юмора. 11. Этот текст трудно перевести, так как в
нем много незнакомых слов. 12. В коллекции моего отца
есть несколько старинных марок. 13. Сколько книг
зарубежных писателей в твоей домашней библиотеке?
8. Употребите следующие пословицы в кратких си-
туациях.
1. There is no smoke without fire.
2. Where there is a will, there is a way.
3. There is no rule without exeption.
4. There is no place like home.
5. There is no rose without a thorn.
6. There is no time like the present.
7. While there is life, there is hope.
СИСТЕМА ВИДО-ВРЕМЕННЫХ
ФОРМ ГЛАГОЛА
В ИЗЪЯВИТЕЛЬНОМ НАКЛОНЕНИИ
ДЕЙСТВИТЕЛЬНОГО ЗАЛОГА
ОБЩАЯ ХАРАКТЕРИСТИКА
В английском языке имеется четыре группы времен
глагола в действительном залоге (Active Voice).
Indefinite (Simple) Tenses
Continuous Tenses
Perfect Tenses
Perfect Continuous Tenses
— неопределенные (про-
стые) времена
— длительные времена
— перфектные (совершен-
ные) времена
— перфектно-длительные
времена
95
В каждой группе в изъявительном наклонении дей-
ствительного залога имеется четыре времени: Present
(настоящее), Past (прошедшее), Future (будущее) и Fu-
ture in the Past (будущее с точки зрения прошедшего).
Таким образом, в английском языке 16 грамматичес-
ких времен в действительном залоге.
Indefinite (Simple) Tenses
Времена группы Indefinite употребляются для описа-
ния однократных или регулярно, систематически повто-
ряющихся действий в настоящем, прошедшем и буду-
щем.
Образование Present Indefinite (ask/asks)
Утвердительная форма Present Indefinite совпадает с
инфинитивом глагола (без частицы to) для всех лиц,
кроме 3-го лица единственного числа, принимающего
окончание -s или -es (после -о, s, ss, se, sh, tch, ch, x).
I, you work He She works
we, they It
Вопросительная и отрицательная формы образуются
при помощи вспомогательного глагола do (does в 3-м
лице единственного числа), стоящего в вопросах перед
подлежащим и соответственно do not и does not в отри-
цательных предложениях после подлежащего. Причем
следует помнить, что окончание -s в третьем лице
единственного числа исчезает при наличии вспомога-
тельного глагола does.
Do Don’t I. you we, they work? not work? work? Does Doesn’t he she it work? not work? work?
Общие вопросы в отрицательной форме выражают
удивление и соответствуют в русском языке вопросам,
начинающимся с разве или неужели. Сравните:
Do you know him? — Вы знаете его?— Да.
Yes, I do.
Don’t you know him? - Разве (неужели) вы его не
No, I don’t. знаете? - Нет.
96
Вопросы к подлежащему и его определению не содер-
жат вспомогательных глаголов, а основной глагол упо-
требляется в 3-м лице единственного числа: т.е. сохра-
няет окончание -s, -es и прямой порядок слов.
Who lives near here? - I do. / He does.
What makes you think so?
Which of you knows his address?
Whose parents work here?
How many students study at Oxford University?
What books help us to become educated people?
Употребление Present Indefinite
1. Present Indefinite употребляется для выражения
обычного, повторяющегося или постоянного действия
или состояния, констатации факта в настоящем време-
ни. Часто в таких предложениях используются наречия
неопределенного времени: usually, always, sometimes,
often, seldom, as a rule, every day (every week, every
year), twice a year.
The Earth goes round
the Sun.
I usually get up at
7 o’clock.
He doesn’t smoke.
Земля вращается вокруг
солнца.
Я всегда встаю в 7 часов.
Он не курит.
2. Для выражения действия, совершающегося в мо-
мент речи, с глаголами, не употребляющимися во вре-
менах группы Continuous (to see, to hear, to understand,
to know, to love, to hate, to prefer, to want и др.).
Look! I see a lake in the
distance.
Sorry, but I don’t
understand what you
mean.
Посмотри! Я вижу озеро
вдали.
Извините, но я не пони-
маю, что вы имеете в виду.
4 Зак. 2112
97
3. Для выражения будущего действия в обстоятель-
ственных придаточных предложениях условия и време-
ни (вместо Future Indefinite), которые вводятся союза-
ми: if — если, unless — если не, provided — если, when —
когда, till, until — до тех пор пока, as soon as - как
только, as long as - пока, before — прежде чем и т.д.
You will pass your
exams successfully if
you work hard.
We shall stay here until
he comes back.
Вы успешно сдадите экза-
мены, если будете упорно
работать.
Мы останемся здесь, пока
он не вернется.
4. Present Indefinite употребляется с глаголом say,
когда мы хотим получить информацию о прочитанной
книге, письме, сообщении.
What does the book say? О чем говорится в книге?
5. Мы употребляем Present Indefinite, когда говорим
о расписании, транспорте, сеансах в кинотеатрах и т.д.
The train leaves Minsk
at 10.30 and arrives in
Brest at about 19.00.
What time does the film
begin?
Поезд отправляется из
Минска в 10.30 и прибы-
вает в Брест приблизитель-
но в 19.00
Когда начинается фильм?
Образование Past Indefinite (asked/saw)
Утвердительная форма Past Indefinite правильных
глаголов образуется путем прибавления окончания -ed к
основе инфинитива для всех лиц: worked, helped, chan-
ged, visited, decided.
Неправильные глаголы образуют Past Indefinite пу-
тем различных изменений и употребляются во второй
форме: went, came, wrote.
I, we you worked
he, she, it came
they
Вопросительные и отрицательные предложения обра-
зуются при помощи вспомогательного глагола did (для
всех лиц), который в вопросах всегда стоит перед подле-
жащим, а в отрицаниях did not (-didn’t) после подле-
жащего перед смысловым глаголом в форме инифини-
тива без частицы to (1-й формы глагола).
When Did did you help see him?
Вопросы к подлежащему и его определению не содер-
жат вспомогательного глагола, а основной глагол сохра-
няет окончание -ed или употребляется во 2-й форме.
Who met you at the
station?
What happened with him
yesterday?
Which of you visited the
museums in Minsk?
What firms organized
this exhibition?
Кто встретил вас на вокза-
ле?
Что случилось с ним вчера?
Кто из вас посещал музей
в Минске?
Какие фирмы организова-
ли эту выставку?
Употребление Past Indefinite
Past Indefinite употребляется для выражения обыч-
ных, регулярно повторяющихся действий, при описа-
нии последовательности событий, фактов, отдельных
действий, совершившихся в прошлом.
Past Indefinite может переводиться на русский язык
глаголом как совершенного, так и несовершенного вида
в прошедшем времени.
She translated this text Она перевела (переводила)
yesterday. этот текст вчера.
Следующие индикаторы времени употребляются с
Past Indefinite: yesterday, the day before yesterday, last
week, a few days ago, the other days, in 1991, during the
war.
They left school last
year.
We didn’t play football
yesterday.
He left the house, took a
bus and went to work.
Они окончили школу в
прошлом году.
Мы не играли в футбол
вчера.
Он вышел, сел в автобус и
уехал на работу.
Для выражения обычных, повторяющихся действий
в прошлом, а также для выражения действий или сос-
тояний, которые продолжались длительный период вре-
99
98
мени в прошлом (часто с глаголами to be, to know, to
live и др.), но которые в данный период времени не
имеют уже места, употребляется used (to) в сочетании с
инфинитивом.
I used to read a lot
about famous people.
Did you use to live in
the village in your child-
hood?
I didn't use (used not) to
ask him about anything.
Я много читал об извест-
ных людях.
Вы жили в деревне в
детстве?
Я обычно ни о чем его не
спрашивал.
Образование Future Indefinite (shall/will ask)
Утвердительная форма Future Indefinite образуется
при помощи вспомогательного глагола shall (для 1-го
лица единственного и множественного числа) и will (для
всех остальных лиц) и инфинитива без частицы to смы-
слового глагола.
Возможно употребление will для всех лиц в утверди-
тельных и отрицательных предложениях, но не в вопросах.
I, we
Не, she, it
You, they
shall do it.
will do it.
В вопросительных предложениях глаголы shall, will
стоят перед подлежащим. В вопросах к подлежащему и
его определению сохраняется прямой порядок слов.
1. Where shall I put this
book?
2. Will you help me?
3. When will she call us?
4. Will you or your
brother go abroad?
5. She will come by bus,
won’t she?
6. They won’t wait, will
they?
7. Who will answer the
questions?
Куда положить эту книгу?
Вы поможете мне?
Когда она позвонит нам?
За границу поедете вы или
ваш брат?
Она приедет автобусом, не
так ли?
Они не будут ждать, не
так ли?
Кто ответит на эти вопро-
сы?
100
В отрицательных предложениях частица not стоит
между вспомогательным и основным глаголами.
It will not (won’t) rain Сегодня не будет дождя.
today.
I (we) shall not (shan’t) Я (мы) здесь не останемся.
stay there.
Употребление Future Indefinite
Future Indefinite обычно употребляется для выраже-
ния однократных или повторяющихся действий в будущем
и может переводиться на русский язык будущим време-
нем глагола как совершенного так и не совершенного вида.
She will know the results Она узнает (будет знать)
tomorrow. результаты завтра.
Наряду с Future Indefinite будущее действие выра-
жается посредством словосочетания to be going (соби-
раться) и инфинитива с частицей to другого глагола.
I am going to help him. Я собираюсь помочь ему.
На будущее время в предложении могут указывать
обстоятельства времени: tomorrow, the day after tomor-
row, in a few days, next week (year), soon, а также при-
даточные предложения времени и условия (употреблен-
ные в Present Indefinite).
The lesson will be over
soon.
I’ll ring you up when I
get home.
Урок скоро заканчивается.
Я позвоню вам, когда добе
русь домой.
Future Indefinite-in-the Past употребляется в прида-
точных дополнительных предложениях для описания
будущих событий, если глагол главного предложения
стоит в Past Indefinite.
She said that she would
follow my advice.
Она сказала, что последует
моему совету.
Упражнения
1. Проанализируйте употребление времен в следую
щих предложениях.
а) 1. Dogs bark but do not always bite. 2. Does your
cat drink milk? 3. Man proposes, God disposes. 4. Misfor-
101
tunes never come singly. 5. If we take a taxi, we shall be
in time there. 6. The train leaves at 12.30.
6) 1. Charles Babbage, a professor of mathematics at
Cambridge University, invented the first calculating ma-
chine in 1812. 2. That machine did complicated calculation
faster than any mathematician. 3. Long, long ago the peo-
ple of Egypt made paper from the tall grass that grew on
the banks of the river Nite. 4. Once there was a man who
went to the market every day. 5. He used to go there at
the same time and always bought five loaves of bread. 6.
They used to live in London for a long time but now they
live in Edinburg.
в) 1. I shall make coffee for you. 2. In five years he
will work as a lawyer. 3. Don’t bother. I’ll drive you
home. 4. A drawing man will catch at a straw. 5. The bag
is too heavy. I’ll help you with it. 6. I won’t tell anybody
about it. 7. Will you open the window, please. 8. Shall I
read the text?
2. Употребите следующие предложения в 3-м лице
единственного числа Present Indefinite Tense и в Past
Indefinite Tense, обращая внимание на чтение оконча
ний -s, -es и -ed.
Образец: The rivers freeze in winter. (This river)
This river freezes in winter.
1. You watch TV too much. (The boy). 2. These shops
close at 6 p.m. 3. We realize the danger of doing it. (He).
4. The children hurry to the cinema after school. 5. We
arrange everything for the New Year party (Bill). 6. I al-
ways help them. (She). 7. They look very well (Jane). 8.
They worry too much about their children (This woman).
9. I agree with you (My mother). 10. Trams pass our
house every ten minutes.
3. Поставьте глагол в the Past и the Future Indefini-
te, употребляя соответствующие индикаторы времени.
1. Не plays tennis twice a week. 2. She learns French
and German. 3. We keep our car in the garage. 4. They
often make mistakes. 5. I help my mother about the
house. 6. They do their shopping every day. 7. We go to
the University by metro. 8. The classes begin at 8. 9. I
stay at school till 2 o’clock. 10. It often rains in October.
11. Tom gets excellent marks in English.
102
4. Ответьте на вопросы, выбрав подходящий по
смыслу вариант ответа.
1. How does a doctor help us? grows all kinds of corn
2. What does a teacher do? and vegetables for us;
3. Who a hairdresser a barber a postman a baker a miner a worker a dressmaker bakes bread for us; brings us letters and telegrams; cuts hair and shaves men; cuts and dresses women's hair;
an engine driver a lawyer a farmer makes our clothes; cures the ill and old; digs coal for us;
teaches us to solve
problems right, how
to count, to read and
write;
makes cars, planes and
other things;
sees that the laws of
the country are obeyed;
drives trains for us.
5. Поставьте общие вопросы к данным утвержде-
ниям. Дайте на них краткие и полные отрицательные
ответы.
Образец Л: I trust a) Do you trust him? -
him. No, I don’t.
I don’t trust him.
She trusts b) Does she trust him? -
No, she doesn’t.
She doesn’t trust him.
a) 1. I know him well. 2. The children often swim in
this river. 3. We pick apples in July. 4. The taxes rise
every three days. 5. They sing well. 6. The children make
terrible noise.
b) 1. Our English teacher speaks three foreign lan-
guages. 2. This man usually wears a hat. 3. She wants to
learn Spanish. 4. Annie comes from Wales. 5. It takes me
ten minutes to get to school. 6. She knows English well.
Образец Б: The boy did his homework and watched TV.
Did the boy do his homework and watch
TV? - Yes, he did. (No, he didn’t).
103
a) 1. I waited for you. 2. She saved up to go abroad.
3. They arrived here an hour ago. 4. I recognized the man.
5. He refused to answer the questions. 6. We asked the
teacher a lot of questions about England.
6) 1. He sold his car. 2. The police caught the thief.
3. We heard a terrible noise in the street. 4. We met him
at my friend’s birthday party. 5. My mother taught En-
glish at school. 6. My brother learnt German well.
Образец В: I will remember this day all my life.
Will you remember this day all your life?
Yes, I will. (No, I won’t).
1. We shall move to a new flat next week. 2. I shall
open the door for you. 3. She will come and see me after
classes. 4. He will take this letter to the post. 5. You will
get your visa, if you fill in this form. 6. A dog will obey
his owner but cat will not.
6. Поставьте предложения в вопросительную и от-
рицательную формы.
1. Den studies at the University. 2. They usually buy
newspapers in the morning. 3. The teacher asks many
questions. 4. He entered the Law faculty. 5. My friend
saw an inter esing film yesterday. 6. They got to the coun-
try by bus. 7. Nick will work as a teacher. 8. We shall
make coffee for him. 9. Her cousin will go abroad next
week.
7. Поставьте вопросы к выделенным словам.
1. The train leaves at 9. 2. We have supper at 8 p. m.
3. Old ladies like to sit by fire. 4. His grandparents live in
Gomel. 5. He visits his grandparents very often. 6. Her
brother made three mistakes in his test, 7. He worked at a
plant last year. 8. They will remember this day for ever.
9. She has a headache, so she will not go to school. 10.
He will buy this interesting book.
8. Спросите, используя модель и предложенные слова:
Do you know a) who works under the earth?
I wonder в) whose work deals with animals?
I’d like to know
a) (in the open air, sits (stands) all day long, has dirty
work, stressful job, adopts laws of the country).
104
в) with (sick people, our food, brain work, writing
books, painting pictures, making discoveries).
9. Ответьте на следующие вопросы:
a) Do you live far from school?
Does it take you long to get to school?
Does your English teacher often ask you at the lessons?
Haw many lessons do you have every day?
Does your mother know English or French?
You often listen to the radio, don’t you?
You don’t go to the library every day, do you?
Who usually speaks English with you?
Which of you in the family swims well?
Whose brother drives a car very well?
How many pets live in your flat (house)?
6) Did you go to the theatre yesterday?
At what age did you start to learn English?
Who helped you in choosing your future profession?
Who used to help you with your studies at school?
Where did you use to spend your holidays?
Haw many friends came to your last birthday?
Whose family lived in the country last summer.
в) Will you try to enter any university after leaving
school?
Will you take your final exams in May or in June?
Will you continue your studies or join the army after
school?
You won't go to the seaside this summer, will you?
r) Are you going to watch TV tonight!
How are you going to spend the week-end?
Which of you is going to take part in the conference?
Are you going to become a lawyer or an economist?
You are going to take English at the entrance exami-
nations, aren’t you?
10. Раскройте скобки, употребив нужную видо-вре
менную форму глаголов.
1. Nurses (look) after patients in hospitals. 2. Ann
plays the piano, but she (not, play) it very well. 3. In
Britain most shops (close) at 5.30 p. m. 4. At night when
it (get) dark, they (switch) on the TV or the radio and
(listen) to music. 5. Mr. Brown often (go) to the cinema
but his wife (not to go) very often. She (prefer) to stay at
105
home and to watch TV. 6. You (mind) if I ask you
a question? - That (depend) on the question. - It (concern)
your future. - Sorry, but I (not to want) to speak about it
till I (pass) my final exams at school. 7. His mother often
(tell) him that he (spend) too much money but he never
(listen). 8. I didn’t want to meet Robert so when he (enter)
the room I (leave). 9. I (learn) to drive a car some years
ago. 10. He (cross) the street and (go) towards the city
park. 11. As soon as you (come) home, I’ll phone you. 12. If
you (enter) the Institute, your parents will be happy. 13. If it
(rain) we shall stay at home. 14. I will not write to him
unless he (write) to me. 15. You (stop) interrupting! I’ll
never get finished this letter if you (not to keep) quiet.
12. Употребите следующие пословицы в кратких си
туациях.
1. One man does not make a team.
2. Too much knowledge makes the head bald.
3. Don’t trouble trouble till trouble troubles you.
4. Time works wonders.
5. Good clothes open all doors.
6. Fornute favours the brave.
Continuous Tenses (Длительные времена)
Времена группы Continuous обозначают длительное
действие, которое происходит, происходило или будет
происходить в указанный момент или период времени в
настоящем, прошедшем или будущем:
Continuous Tenses образуются при помощи вспомога-
тельного глагола to be (в соответствующем времени груп-
пы Indefinite) и причастия настоящего времени (смысло-
вого глагола).
be + Ving
Present Continuous Past Continuous Future Continuous Future Continuous-in- the-Past am, is, are reading was/were reading shall/will be reading should^ be reading would
I am translating the text now.
He was translating the text at 3 o’clock yesterday.
106
We’ll be translating the text at 3 o’clock tomorrow.
He said that they would be translating the text at this
time tomorrow.
В вопросительных предложениях первый вспомога-
тельный глагол стоит перед подлежащим, а в отрица-
тельных предложениях частица not стоит после первого
вспомогательного глагола.
Аге the children playing now? - No, they are not
playing now. Will you be working when I come? - No, I
shan’t be working at that time. What are you doing now? - I
am playing chess.
Момент протекания действия может быть указан сле-
дующим образом: в Present Continuous словами: now, at
this moment, но их наличие не обязательно, поскольку
сама форма выражает, что действие совершается в
момент речи.
Listen! Somebody is Послушайте! Кто-то играет
playing the piano. на пианино.
Present Continuous может употребляться с обстоя-
тельствами времени today, this week, this evening и др.,
когда мы хотим подчеркнуть более широкий период
протекания длительного действия, хотя и не обязатель-
но в момент речи.
Is Mr. Brawn working М-р Браун работает на
this week? этой неделе?
- No, he is on holiday. - Нет, у него отпуск.
Present Continuous употребляется, если мы говорим
об изменениях, происходящих вокруг нас.
The polution of the air is Загрязнение воздуха ухуд-
getting worse. шается.
Present Continuous часто употребляется для выраже-
ния будущего запланированного действия. В таких предло-
жениях обычно имеется обстоятельство времени, указы-
вающее на будущее время.
We are taking the final Мы сдаем выпускные экза-
exams in June. мены в июне.
Present Continuous употребляется для выражения по-
стоянной привычки, наклонности и выражает неодобре-
ние, нетерпение, сопровождаясь наречиями always, all
the time, too often, constantly.
107
Ты всегда что-то теряешь.
Она всегда жалуется.
You аге always loosing
something.
She is always complain-
ing.
Следует помнить, что глаголы, выражающие чувства,
восприятие, желание, умственное состояние, не упо-
требляются во временах группы Continuous, так как
они не могут выражать действие или состояние как
процесс. Такие глаголы как love, like, have, see, notice,
hear, feel, want, wish, desire, know, understand, remem-
ber, forget, recognize, seem, believe и др. употребляются
в одном из времен группы Indefinite.
Do you hear the noise in Ты слышишь шум на ули-
the street? це?
I want to eat. Я хочу есть.
В Past и Future Continuous для указания на опреде-
ленный период протекания длительного действия могут
употребляться следующие обстоятельства времени: at
that time, at 2 o’clock (yesterday/tomorrow), at noon, at
midnight, while (для указания двух одновременных дли-
тельных действий), the whole evening, all day long, from
nine till eleven и др., а также придаточные предложе-
ния времени с глаголом в Past Indefinite или Present
Indefinite (для указания определенного момента в буду-
щем). Все времена группы Continuous переводят на рус-
ский язык глаголом несовершенного вида.
The doorbell rang when
I was watching TV.
Раздался звонок в дверь,
когда я смотрел телевизор.
Я буду спать, когда ты вер-
нешься.
Я буду делать домашнее
задание в то время, как
мама будет готовить обед.
I’ll be sleeping when you
return.
I’ll be doing my home-
work while my mother
will be cooking dinner.
Future Continuous-in-the-Past употребляется в при-
даточных предложениях для описания будущего
длительного действия, когда глагол в главном предло-
жении стоит в прошедшем времени.
Не said that he would be
working in the library
from 9 till 11 o’clock.
Он сказал, что будет рабо-
тать в библиотеке с 9 до 11
часов.
108
Упражнения
1. Проанализируйте времена сказуемого в следую-
щих предложениях.
а) 1. The students аге translating the sentences from
English into Russian now. 2. The teacher is listening to
them. 3. You are making a lot of mistakes in your answer.
4. You are always talking at the lessons. 5. They are
leaving for Moscow tomorrow. 6. The economic situation
is bad and it is getting worse.
6) 1. The secretory was typing the manager’s report at
10 o’clock yesterday morning. 2. What were the children
doing the whole evening? - They were swimming in the
river. 3. Who was talking on the telephone at that time?
4. Who were you talking to when I came in? 5. My mother
was weeding the flower beds while my father was cutting
the grass. 6. It was raining the whole day yesterday.
в) 1. We shall be writing a dictation at two o’clock to-
morrow. 2. The children will be sleeping when their par-
ents come home. 3. I shall be decorating a new-year tree
while my mother will be making a cake. 4. They will be
discussing this matter at this time tomorrow. 5. The
teacher said that we should be writing a test at 2 o’clock.
2. Поставьте глагол в the Past и the Future Continuous,
употребив соответствующие индикаторы времени.
1. The child is sleeping now. 2. Nina is having a lec-
ture now. 3. The family is sitting at the table and having
dinner. 4. What are you doing tonight? 5. The girl is
looking for her note book. 6. The students are preparing
for their exams. 7. It is snowing hard.
3. Образуйте четыре типа вопросительных предло-
жений.
Образец: The boy is crying.
- Is the boy crying?
- Is the boy crying or laughing?
Who is crying? What is the boy doing?
The boy is crying, isn’t he?
1. The children are reading an interesting book. 2. The
bus is going to Brest. 3. We were waiting for our friends.
4. Pete was hurrying to the theatre. 5. You will be work-
ing at the report. 6. We shall be watching TV in the evening.
109
4. Поставьте вопросы и ответьте на них по образ
цу. Выразите действие как длительное.
Образец: Clean the room. What are you doing? - I am
cleaning the room.
What were you doing? - I was cleaning the
room.
What will you be doing? - I will be cleaning
the room.
1. Go home. 2. Eat the soup. 3. Do your homework.
4. Learn the rule. 5. Speak English. 6. Lay the table.
7. Press your clothes. 8. Spell the word. 9. Open the book.
10. Read the text.
5. Раскройте скобки, употребив нужную видо
времен-ную форму глагола.
1. Му teacher (speak) over the telephone now. 2. Where
is Ann? — She (play) tennis. 3. Please, don’t make so much
noise. Father (work) in the study. 4. Don’t disturb me. I
(watch) a war movie. 5. We (ski) the whole day yesterday.
6. What you (discuss) at the meeting yesterday? 7. When
I came to the party all guests (dance). 8. I (learn) English
the whole day tomorrow. I am having my exams soon.
9. While Kate (wash up) Ann was making sandwiches.
10. While my mother was cooking dinner I (lay) the table.
6. Ответьте на вопросы о планируемых действиях в
будущем.
Образец: What are you doing tonight?
I’m going to the cinema.
a) 1. What time is your mother coming home tomorrow?
2. Are you meeting her at home or at the bus stop?
3. Is your brother getting married next month?
4. What time are you leaving home tomorrow?
5. Are you going to the dentist on Monday or on Tuesday?
6. Are you having dinner at home or at your fritnd’s
tomorrow?
6) 1. Are you going to see a film on television tonight?
2. Are you going to clean the windows in your room?
3. Is it going to rain now?
4. Who are you going to invite to your birthday party?
5. Is your father going to give up smoking?
6. What are you going to cook for dinner today?
no
7. Переведите предложения, употребив the Present
Continuous для выражения планируемого действия в
будущем.
1. Он уезжает в Англию через два дня. 2. Я пойду к
зубному врачу в понедельник. 3. Мы обедаем у друзей в
воскресенье. 4. Поезд приходит в 12. 5. Денис женится
в августе. 6. Что ты делаешь завтра вечером? 7. Когда
придет Анна? 8. Ты встретишь ее на вокзале? 9. Вы уже
уходите? 10. Я иду завтра в театр. 11. Ты не работаешь
сегодня вечером, не так ли? 12. Ты придешь к нам в
субботу? - Извините, но я играю в волейбол. Разве ты
не хочешь присоединиться к нам? 13. Они уезжают в
Испанию на каникулы. 14. Вы готовы? Гости прибудут
с минуты на минуту. 15. Они купили новую квартиру и
переезжают на следующей неделе.
Perfect Tenses (Совершенные времена)
Времена группы Perfect употребляются для выраже-
ния законченного действия, совершившегося к опреде-
ленному моменту в настоящем или предшествующего
действия по отношению к какому-то моменту в прош-
лом и будущем.
Perfect Tenses образуются при помощи вспомога-
тельного глагола to have (в соответствующем времени
группы Indefinite) и причастия прошедшего времени
(Participle II) смыслового глагола.
to have + Participle II
Present Perfect have/has done
Past Perfect had done
Future Perfect shall/will have done
Future Perfect in the Past should
2^ have done
would
She has already left for
Moscow.
She had left for Moscow
before I arrived.
She will have left for
Moscow before I arrive.
She said that she would
have left for Moscow
before I arrived.
Она уже уехала в Москву.
Она уехала в Москву до
того, как я приехал.
Она уедет в Москву до
того, как я приеду.
Она сказала, что уедет в
Москву до того, как я
приеду.
111
В вопросительных предложениях первый вспомога-
тельный глагол ставится перед подлежащим, а в отри-
цательных предложениях частица not употребляется
после первого вспомогательного глагола.
Have you learnt this
poem by heart? -
Will you have done it
before I come? -
Yes, I have.
No, I haven’t learnt it yet.
No, I won’t have done it by
that time.
Present Perfect употребляется для описания событий,
которые произошли в еще неистекший период времени,
или который продолжался вплоть до настоящего време-
ни, а также при наличии наречий неопределенного
времени: today, this week/year/month, already, ever, ne-
ver, often, yet (в отрицательных предложениях co зна-
чением еще и в общих вопросах со значением уже), just,
for (a long time), for two hours, up to now, since; при
наличии слов it is the first (second) time...; в письмах, в
первом вопросе и ответе, начинающих беседу о
прошлых событиях.
Present Perfect в отличие от Past Indefinite (которое
выражает действие, свершившееся в истекшем отрезке
времени) выражает связь прошлого действия с настоя-
щим благодаря наличию результата сейчас. Present Per-
fect никогда не употребляется в вопросах, начинаю-
щихся с вопросительного слова when).
Сравните:
a) The lift has broken
down.
The lift broke down.
When did the lift break?
Лифт сломался, (приходит-
ся ходить сейчас пешком)
Лифт сломался, (возмож-
но, он уже снова работает)
Когда сломался лифт?
He has smoked for two
years.
He smoked for two
years.
(He continues smoking)
(and then stopped smoking)
6) I’m sorry I haven’t writ-
ten before because I’ve
been very busy lately.
Извините, что я не писал
раньше, но я был занят
последнее время.
112
в) Where have you been? -
What did you see?
What was the film? -
Did you like it? -
It is the second time I’ve
seen this film. -
Have you seen this film
yet?
No, I haven’t seen it yet.
I’ve been to the cinema.
(I saw) Hamlet.
Yes, I enjoyed it.
Я смотрел этот фильм вто-
рой раз.
Вы уже смотрели этот
фильм?
Нет, я его еще не видел.
Past Perfect и Future Perfect
Past Perfect представляет собой «предпрошедшее»
время по отношению к другому моменту в прошлом, до
которого закончилось действие; в то время как Future
Perfect употребляетсся для выражения будущего дейст-
вия, которое совершитсся к определенному моменту в
будущем.
Этот момент в прошлом и будущем может быть выра-
жен следующими указаниями времени: by that time by
two o’clock, by Sunday, by the end of the year/month, a
также другим прошедшим действием, выраженным в
Past Indefinite (Past Perfect) и будущим действием в
Present Indefinite (Future Perfect).
The students had passed
the exam by 2 o’clock
(yesterday).
The students will have
passed the exam by 2
o’clock (tomorrow).
Студенты сдали экзамен к
двум часам (вчера).
Студенты сдадут экзамен к
2 часам (завтра).
Past Perfect употребляется, когда прерывается по-
следовательность описываемых действий в прошлом упо-
минанием о ранее совершившихся действиях.
Ann came home late. She
had been to the theatre.
She had supper and went
to bed.
Анна пришла домой позд-
но. Она была в театре. Она
поужинала и легла спать.
Past Perfect употребляется в главном предложении
при наличии наречий hardly, no sooner (в последующем
придаточном предложении употреблено Past Indefinite).
113
No sooner I had done my He успел я сделать
homework, than my домашнее задание, как
friends came. пришли друзья.
Future Perfect-in-the Past употребляется в придаточ-
ных дополнительных предложениях для выражения
будущего действия, которое совершится к определенно-
му моменту, когда глагол в главном предложении упо-
треблен в прошедшем времени.
The teacher said that he
would have returned
from London by the 1st
of September.
Учитель сказал, что вер-
нется из Лондона к перво-
му сентября.
Времена группы Perfect переводятся на русский
язык соответственно настоящим, прошедшим и буду-
щим временем глагола совершенного вида.
Упражнения
1. Проанализируйте времена сказуемого в следую-
щих предложениях.
а) 1. I haven’t seen you for ages. 2. We have already
discussed this problem. 3. He has never been to England.
4. Have you seen this film yet? - No, I haven’t seen it.
5. Have you ever been abroad? - Yes, I have. 6. I have
known them for three years. 7. Have you spoken with your
teacher today? 8. After I have done my homework, I shall
go for a walk. 9. I haven’t decided yet where to continue
my studies. 10. We haven’t met her since we left school.
6) 1. We had got to the theatre by 6 o’clock. 2. When
we arrived, the performance had just begun. 3. They had
met long before they left school. 4. By the end of the year
he had learnt a lot of new English words. 5. I saw the film
after I had read the novel. 6. No sooner had we got home,
than it became dark.
в) 1. I shall have translated the text by 5 o’clock.
2. We shall have passed our final exams by the end of
June. 3. He will have read this book by tomorrow. 4. It
will have stopped raining before we leave the party. 5.
The manager will have signed the documents after we
have discussed the contract in detail. 6. He said that he
had bought a present for his friend’s birthday.
114
2. Поставьте предложения в отрицательную и воп
росительную форму.
1. They have received a new flat this year. 2. She has
been to Italy. 3. They have already heard the news. 4. I
have known his father. 5. He had worked at a plant before
the army. 6. We had studied German before we began to
study English. 7. She had written the letter by 5 o’clock.
8. The children will have done their homework before
their parents come home. 9. It will have stopped raining
by noon.
3. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Have you ever read English books in the original?
2. Have you ever been abroad?
3. Has your sister ever been to England?
4. Have you ever played any musical instrument?
5. Who has phoned you?
6. Which of you has never seen mountains?
7. What exams had you passed before your English?
8. Where had you studied before entering the University?
9. By what time will you have finished your work?
4. Скажите, что вы выполнили задание.
Образец: Do your homework. - I have already (just)
done it.
1. Clean the room. 2. Do your hair. 3. Have a good
rest. 4. Make coffee. 5. Pack your things. 6. Close the
door. 7. Give up smoking. 8. Tell me the truth. 9. Buy a
new coat. 10. Finish the work. 11. Have breakfast. 12. In-
vite him to come.
5. Преобразуйте предложения, употребив the Past и
the Future Perfect.
Образец: I was reading a book at 5 o’clock.
- I had read a book by 5 o’clock yesterday.
- I shall have read a book by 5 o’clock
tomorrow.
1. She was making dinner at that time. 2. We were
translating the text when you came. 3. They were writing
a dictation when I entered the classroom. 4. The students
were taking their exams from 9 till 12 o’clock. 5. He was
115
having a shower when the telephone rang. 6. The boys
were playing foootball when it began to rain.
6. Раскройте скобки, употребив нужную видо-вре-
менную форму глагола.
1. You (see) this film? 2. He (be) at the cinema with
you? 3. You (taste) the cake? 4. The pupils (not, do) their
exercises yet. 5. I (not, meet) my school friend for many
years. 6. She told me everything about him after he
(leave). 7. When we arrived the concert already (begin). 8.
I asked him what countries he (visit). 9. I hope you (come)
home from school by 2 o’clock. 10. I (finish) everything by
the time you get back tomorrow. 11. If we don’t hurry the
sun (set) before we reach the top. 12. I saw Tom yesterday
but I (not to see) him today. 13. You ever (drive) a car? -
No, this is the first time I (drive) a car. 14. The tourists
just (arrive) in London and everything (be) new for them.
15. He went back to his home town and was surprised that
the town (change) a lot. 16. We are late. The performance
already (start) by the time we get to the theatre.
Perfect Continuous Tenses
(Совершенно-длительные времена)
Времена группы Perfect Continuous употребляются
для выражения действия, начавшегося в прошлом и
продолжающегося до настоящего, прошедшего и буду-
щего момента, включая его в течение какого-то опреде-
ленного периода времени, указанного в предложении
следующими обозначениями времени: for an hour (month),
for a long time, since 9 o’clock, since last year, these two
weeks, all my life, how long...
Perfect Continuous Tenses образуются при помощи
вспомогательного глагола to be (в соответствующем време-
ни группы Perfect) и причастия настоящего времени
(Participle I), смыслового глагола.
Present Perfect Continuous Past Perfect Continuous Future Perfect Continuous Future Perfect Continuous-in- have/has been doing had been doing shall/will have been doing should
the Past have been doing would
116
She has been writing the
letter for two hours
already.
She had been writing the
letter for two hours by
the time he came.
She will have been writ-
ing the letter for two
hours by the time he co-
mes.
Она пишет письмо уже два
часа.
Она писала письмо уже
два часа к тому времени,
когда он пришел.
Она будет писать письмо
уже два часа к тому време-
ни, когда он придет.
В вопросительных предложениях первый вспомога-
тельный глагол стоит перед подлежащим, а в отрица-
тельных предложениях частица not употребляется после
первого вспомогательного глагола:
Have you been prepar-
ing for the exam for a
long time?
How long will you have
been preparing for it?
- No, I haven’t been preparing
for the exam for a long time.
- For two days.
С глаголами, не употребляющимися во временах
групы Continuous (т.е. выражающими чувства, рас-
суждение, желание, умственную деятельность: know,
like, want, belive и др., вместо Perfect Continuous Ten-
ses употребляются Perfect Tenses.
a) How long have you
been translating the
text?
6) My hands are dirty.
I’ve repairing the car for
two hours, (ремонтирую)
в) He was very tired. He
had been working hard.
г) I shall have been
waiting for you for half
an hour and if you don’t
come at 11 o’clock, I’ll
go alone.
How long have you known
him?
The car is OK now.
I’ve repaired it.
( отремонтировал )
He was working when the
telephone rang.
I’ll be waiting for you at 11
o’clock.
Времена группы Perfect Continuous переводятся на
русский язык соответственно настоящим, прошедшим и
будущим временем глагола несовершенного вида.
117
Упражнения
1. Проанализируйте употребление времен сказуемо-
го в следующих предложениях.
а) 1. I have been waiting for you for a long time.
2. You have been watching TV too long. 3. She has been
teaching English since last year. 4. I’m tired. I have been
working for several hours. 5. It is still cold as it has been
raining since morning. 6. How long have you been study-
ing English? - For five years. 7. Since when have you
been doing your homework? — Since 9 o’clock.
6) 1. I had been working for a long time when you
came. 2. My father had been repairing the roof for two
hours till it began raining. 3. He had been painting the
floor for an hour before he asked me to help him.
в) 1. By the and of this year we shall have been learn-
ing English for six years. 2. By next September my
mother will have been working as a teacher for twenty-
five years. 3. I shall have been repairing the car for two
days before I dare to drive it.
2. Поставьте следующие предложения в the Past и
the Future Perfect Continuous Tenses, употребляя соот-
ветствующие обстоятельства времени.
I have been learning the new words for an hour, but I
don’t remember them. 2. Jane has been writing letters to
her friends since morning. 3. My father has been reading
newspapers since he came back from his office. 4. It has
been raining heavily all day long. 5. The boys have been
playing football for 2 hours. 6. You have been speaking on
the phone for half an hour already.
3. Поставьте вопросы к выделенным словам.
1. They have been watching TV programmes since
morning. 2. We have been living in a new district of
Minsk for two years. 3. They had been sitting in silence
for a long time before he spoke. 4. My brother had been
studying abroad for some years. 5. He will have been
waiting for my telephone call all day long. 6. I shall have
been waiting for Kate for an hour and not longer.
118
4. Раскройте скобки, употребив нужную видо-вре-
менную форму.
1. It is a very boring novel. I (read) it for two weeks,
though I usually (read) books quickly. 2. She (live) in
Gomel since she (be) born. 3. The children (skate) in the
park for two hours before they went to the cinema. 4. We
(lie) on the beach since early morning. 5. She (learn) Eng-
lish for a year before she goes abroad. 6. Since when they
(work) here? 7. How long Ann (translate) the text?
8. It (rain) for two days. There will be a flood soon.
9. How long you (drive)? - I (drive) five years. 10. The
police (look) for the thief for a week already. 11. How
long you (save) money before you went abroad for the
first time? 12. We were very tired at the end of the jour-
ney because we (travel) for more than 20 hours. 13. Is it
all right if I come at about 9? - Fine. I (watch) the match
on TV for about two hours but it will have finished by
that time. 14. It was 7 p.m.; and we were tired because we
(work) hard all day long.
СРАВНИТЕЛЬНАЯ ХАРАКТЕРИСТИКА
ФОРМ НАСТОЯЩЕГО ВРЕМЕНИ
В английском языке существует четыре формы на-
стоящего времени: the Present Indefinite (настоящее не-
определенное), the Present Continuous (настоящее длитель-
ное), the Present Perfect (настоящее завершенное) и the Pre-
sent Perfect Continuous (настоящее завершенно-длительное).
Все формы настоящего времени обозначают дейст-
вия, рассматриваемые по отношению к моменту речи.
Выбор конкретной формы определяется тем, каким об-
разом действие соотносится с настоящим моментом: про-
текает в данный момент, длится какой-то указанный
период времени, закончено к моменту речи либо просто
представлено в настоящем времени. Например:
I translate many articles
every day.
I am translating an
article now.
I have just translated an
article.
I have been translating
this article for two hours
already.
Каждый день я перевожу
много статей.
Сейчас я перевожу статью.
Я только что перевел
статью.
Я перевожу эту статью
уже два часа.
119
Для the Present Indefinite достаточно указания на
то, что действие происходит в настоящем времени регу-
лярно, постоянно, но не в момент речи (every day, usu-
ally, as a rule).
Для the Present Continuous, кроме указания на настоя-
щее время, необходимо подчеркнуть момент протекания
действия во время речи или в ближайший незаконченный
период времени (taday, this week, this evening, now).
The Present Perfect обозначает действие, свершив-
шееся к моменту речи. Для него характерны наречия
already, just, ever, never, lately, recently, etc., в то время
как в the Present Continuous широко употребляется
предлог at — в. Несмотря на то, что в русском языке
действия, выраженные в the Present Perfect переводят-
ся прошедшим временем, в английском они восприни-
маются в настоящем времени, т.к. привязаны к настоя-
щему результатом этого действия.
I have read the book. = I know its contents now.
Я прочитал книгу. Я знаю ее содержание,
(результат).
Так же как и the Present Continuous, the Present Per-
fect Continuous обозначает длительное действие, воз-
можно протекающее и в момент речи. Однако в отличие
от the Present Continuous, the Present Perfect Conti-
nuous содержит указание на полный период его проте-
кания (for 2 hours, since 1970).
Так же как и в the Present Perfect действие, выра-
женное в the Present Perfect Continuous, может завер-
шиться к моменту речи, но в отличие от the Present Perfect
в the Present Perfect Continuous точно указан начальный
момент либо период этого длительного действия.
The Present Perfect Continuous переводится на русский
язык глаголом в настоящем времени часто с наречием уже.
The Present Continuous
Утвердительная форма Вопросительная форма Отрицательная форма
I am writing he she is writing we you 2^* “"e writing they Am I writing? Is s'' she^writing? "'''•'x it / ^,we Are you writing? x'theyx I am not writing hev^ she is not writing it S' we\ you are not writing theyx
The Present Perfect
Утвердительная форма Вопросительная форма Отрицательная форма
I have written he she has written it you have written they Have I written? ^hev Has she' written? \ it /we. Have^ you4written? 'x^they/< I haven’t written he she hasn’t written it s' we you haven’t written they/
The Present Perfect Continuous
Утвердительная форма Вопросительная форма Отрицательная форма
I have been writing he she 4 has been it writing we. you4 have been they writing Have I been writing? /he Has she been writing? 4 it /•we Have you been writing Xthey I haven’t been writing he she hasn’t been it -s writing we you haven’t been they^ writing
Упражнения
1. Проанализируйте употребление и формы глаголов
в настоящем времени.
The Present Indefinite
The Present Indefinite
Утвердительная форма Вопросительная форма Отрицательная форма
I write Do I write? I do not (don’t) write
he he he^
she _ writes Does ' she4, write? she does not write
it ^it' it
we we^ we x.
you write Do you write? you do not write
they X thev- they*^
I usually have breakfast
at 8.00.
After breakfast I go to
my office.
He plays chess well.
She lives in Minsk.
You always look very
well.
Обычно я завтракаю в 8 ча-
сов.
После завтрака я иду в свое
учреждение.
Он хорошо играет в шахматы.
Она живет в Минске.
Ты всегда очень хорошо
выглядишь.
120
121
The Present Continuous
What are you doing?
— I am reading Crime
and Punishment.
Do you hear what they
are talking about?
Someone is knocking at
the door. Are you going
to answer it?
Что ты делаешь?.
— Я читаю ♦Преступление
и наказание*.
Вы слышите, о чем они го-
ворят?
Кто-то стучит в дверь.
Ты пойдешь открывать?
The Present Perfect
I have just met him.
I haven’t spoken to him
yet.
I have already had my
dinner.
I haven’t seen him for
ages (since childhood,
since 1975, since we left
school).
Я только что встретил его.
Я еще не разговаривал с
ним.
Я уже пообедал.
Я не видел его вечность (с
детства, с 1975, с тех пор
как мы закончили школу).
The Present Perfect Continuous
Her phone has been ring-
ing for ten minutes.Why
doesn’t she answer it?
How long have you been
waiting for me? I have
been waiting since
9 o’clock.
How long have you been
wearing glasses? - For
five years.
Ее телефон звонит уже 10
минут. Почему она не от-
вечает?
Как долго ты меня
ждешь? — Я жду с 9 ча-
сов.
Как давно ты носишь оч-
ки? - Пять лет.
2. Дополните следующие предложения, выбрав соот-
ветствующие обстоятельства времени из правой ко-
лонки.
1. We are having a test a) every lesson
b) for two days
c) now
2. We have tests a) very often
b) for two hours
c) lately
122
3. We have had a test
4. We have been having
a test
a)today
b) usually
c) every day
a) since 5 o’clock
b) right now
c) at 5 o’clock
3. Выберите из правой колонки ту видо-временную
форму глагола, которую уместно употребить при пере-
воде следующих предложений.
1. Он готовится к экза-
мену сейчас.
2. Я ищу вас уже час.
3. Я учусь в универси-
тете.
4. Сегодня я сдал эк-
замен по английскому
языку.
a) is revising (for)
b) revises
c) has been revising
a)look for
b) am looking for
c) have been looking for
a) am studying (at)
b) have been studying
c) study
a) pass
b) have passed
c) have been passing
4. Раскройте скобки, употребив формы the Present
Indefinite или the Present Continuous.
1. Cuckoos (not, build) nests. They (use) the nests of
other birds. 2. He usually (drink) coffee but now he
(drink) tea. 3. I shan’t go out now as it (rain) and I (not,
have got) an umbrella. 4. Tom can’t read the newspaper
now because his mother (read) it. 5. I always buy lottery
tickets but I never (win) anything 6. Tom and Ann (have)
a long conversation. I wonder what they (talk) about.
7. You (believe) all that the newspapers say? — No, I (not,
believe) any of it. — Then why you (read) newspapers?
8. You (hear) the wind? It (blow) very strongly. 9. Have
you seen my car keys anywhere? — No, I (look) for them
but I (not, see) them. 10. She always (borrow) from me
and never (remember) to pay me back.
5. Раскройте скобки, употребив формы the Present
Perfect и the Present Perfect Continuous.
1. We (walk) ten kilometres already. 2. We (walk) for
three hours. 3. I’m on a diet, I (eat) nothing but apples for
123
the whole week. 4. He (sleep) since ten o’clock. It’s time he
woke up. 5. The students (work) very well this term. 6. I
(work) with him for ten years and he never (say) “Good
morning” to me. 7. You (hear) the news? Tom and Ann are
engaged! 8. How many baskets of apples you (pick)? It seems
to me you (to pick) them for 3 hours already. 9. You (see) my
bag anywhere? I (look) for it for half an horn’.
6. Переведите предложения, употребив нужную фор
му глагола в настоящем времени.
Мой отец работает на заводе. сейчас. Не зови его. здесь уже много лет.
Наша учительница го- ворит (разговаривает) на нескольких языках. по телефону уже 10 минут, с директором сейчас.
Он ждет меня у входа (обычно). пока я закончу писать письмо. уже около часа.
Дождь идет очень часто (осенью), сегодня. Возьми зонтик, уже 3 часа.
7. Раскройте скобки, употребляя Present Indefinite,
Present Continuous, Present Perfect, Present Perfect Conti-
nuous Tenses.
1. The nearest shop (open) at 9 o’clock and (close) at
20 00 every day. 2. The Olympic games (take place) every
four years. 3. Rice (not to grow) in Belarus. 4. Vegeta-
rians (not to eat) meat. 5. The water (boil). Can you turn
it off? 6. Let’s go out. It (not to rain)and the sun (shine)
brightly. 7. Hurry up! Everybody (wait) for us. 8. You
(believe) in God? 9. He told me his name but I (not to re-
member) it now. 10. You (see) that girl over there? She is
my friend. 11. Shall I phone to reserve a table? - No, I
just (do) it. 12. Would you like something to eat? - No,
thank you. I already (have lunch). 13. Jane isn’t here at
the moment. She (go) to the shop. 14. I (drink) two cups
of coffee today but I’d like to have one more. 15. It’s the
first time she (drive) a car. She never (drive) a car before.
16. You ever (be) to China? - No, I never (g >) there. 17. It
124
(rain) for two hours already. 18. How long you (learn)
English? - I (learn) it since morning. 19. My brother be-
gan looking for a new job six month ago. He still (look)
for it. He (look) for a job for six month already. 20. Tom
still (watch) TV. He (watch) TV all day. 21. She always
(go) to Scotland for her holidays. She (go) there for years.
She (go) there next summer too. 22. You (hear) from Ann
recently? - No, I (not to see) her since we finished school.
23. I’ll phone you as soon as I (get) home from work. 24.
When we (be) in London again we shall visit Buckingham
Palace. 25. If he (not to come) soon, we are not going to
wait. 26. Manners (make) the man.
СРАВНИТЕЛЬНАЯ ХАРАКТЕРИСТИКА
ФОРМ ПРОШЕДШЕГО ВРЕМЕНИ
В английском языке имеется четыре формы прошед-
шего времени: the Past Indefinite (прошедшее неопреде-
ленное), the Past Continuous (прошедшее длительное),
the Past Perfect (прошедшее завершенное) и the Past
Perfect Continuous (прошедшее длительное).
Все эти видовременные формы выражают действия,
происходившие в прошлом. Выбор необходимой формы
определяется тем, каким образом действие соотносится
с указанным моментом в прошлом: совпадает с ним,
предшествует ему, совершается в указанный период и т. п.
I translated the article
yesterday.
I was translating the
article at 5 o’clock
yesterday.
I had translated the
article by 5 o’clock.
I had been translating
the article for two hours
already when you came.
Я вчера перевел статью.
Я переводил статью вчера
в 5 часов.
Я перевел статью к пяти
часам.
Я переводил статью уже
два часа, когда ты при-
шел.
The Past Indefinite обозначает обычные, повторяю-
щиеся или единичные действия, свершившиеся в прош-
лом, на что указывают характерные для этого времени
слова типа ago, yesterday, the day before yesterday, the
other day, last month, а также ссылка на прошедшие
события или год, который уже истек (in 1975, during
the war). The Past Indefinite переводится глаголом как
125
Я встретил его вчера на
улице.
Я часто встречал его в
клубе в прошлом году.
обозначает длительные дейст-
определенный момент в про-
совершенного, так и несовершенного вида, что опреде-
ляется по контексту. Например:
I met him in the street
yesterday.
I often met him in the
club last year.
The Past Continuous
вия, происходившие в
шлом. Этот момент может быть указан с помощью пред-
лога at (at 5 o’clock yesterday, at that moment, at noon)
или обозначен другим коротким действием в the Past
Indefinite (when I entered the room, etc.)
В ряде случаев в одном и том же контексте может
употребляться и the Past Indefinite и the Past Conti-
nuous. При употреблении the Past Continuous говоря-
щий подразумевает процесс, а при употреблении the
Past Indefinite — факт свершения действия. Например:
It was raining yesterday. Вчера шел дождь.
It rained yesterday. Вчера шел дождь.
The Past Perfect употребляется для выражения завер-
шенных действий, которые произошли до указанного мо-
мента в прошлом. Момент может быть обозначен предлога-
ми (by, before), либо другим действием в the Past Indefinite.
The Past Perfect Continuous употребляется для выра-
жения длительного действия, которое началось до ука-
занного момента в прошлом и продолжалось до этого мо-
мента. Период времени, в течение которого происходи-
ло действие, может обозначаться с помощью различных
обстоятельств времени типа for three hours, for two years,
all his life, all day, for a long time, since. The Past Perfect
Continuous так же, как и the Past Continuous употреб-
ляется только с динамичными глаголами. Подобные дейст-
вия со статичными глаголами выражаются в the Past Perfect.
The Past Indefinite
Утвердительная форма Вопросительная форма Отрицательная форма
I I.
hex. he's.
she X. / she \ she x.
it wrote Did it write? it did not
we / \ we / we (didn’t) write
you / \ you / you /
they 'they' they
126
The Past Continuous
Утвердительная форма
I
he was writing
she /
it '
you were writing
they''”'
Вопросительная форма
Was he writing?
\ she/
' it '
Were you writing?
\they
Отрицательная форма
I
he was notfwasn’t)
she writing
it
we \
you were not (weren't)
they''writing
The Past Perfect
Утвердительная форма Вопросительная форма Отрицательная форма
I he she \ it had written we / you / they _/he\. Z she \ Had it written? X. we / X. you / ' they heX. she X it had not (hadn’t) we written you / they'
The Past Perfect Continuous
Утвердительная форма Вопросительная форма
Отрицательная форма
it had been
we writing
/he
/ she
Had it been writing?
\ we
it had not been
we writing
Упражнения
1. Проанализируйте употребление и формы глаголов
в прошедшем времени.
The Past Indefinite
I saw your brother
yesterday.
He lived in Siberia du-
ring the war.
She got up, washed, had
breakfast and went to
school.
He came at 12 last
night.
He didn’t ring me up.
Я видел твоего брата вчера.
Он жил в Сибири во время
войны.
Она встала, умылась, поза-
втракала и пошла в шко-
лу.
Он пришел в 12 вчера ве-
чером.
Он не позвонил мне.
127
The Past Continuous
Yesteday at ten o’clock I
was returning home af-
ter the concert.
We were discussing the
plan of our work at the
meeting.
The car had nobody in
but the engine was
running.
When the boy was play-
ing in the yard he lost
his mittens.
Вчера в десять часов я воз-
вращался домой после кон-
церта.
На собрании мы обсужда-
ли план работы.
В машине никого не было,
но мотор работал.
Когда мальчик играл во
дворе, он потерял свои ва-
режки.
The Past Perfect
I had lived in Kiev be-
fore I moved to Minsk.
She had learnt to speak
English by the end of the
year.
After the sun had set we
went home.
By that time mother had
prepared dinner
Я жил в Киеве, прежде
чем переехал в Минск.
Она научилась говорить
по английски к концу го-
да.
После того, как село солн-
це, мы пошли домой.
К тому времени мама при-
готовила обед.
The Past Perfect Continuous
It had been snowing
heavily for two days
before our arrival.
I had been trying to find
him for years but I failed.
I had been working at
the plant for two years
before I could enter the
University.
До нашего приезда два дня
шел сильный снег.
Я годами пытался найти
его, но не смог.
Я два года работал на за-
воде, прежде чем смог по-
ступить в университет.
2. Выберите из правой колонки те формы глагола,
которые необходимо употребить при переводе следую-
щих предложений.
1. Я закончил школу в a) have left
прошлом году. б) left
в) had left
128
2. Я изучал английский
в течение 3 лет, прежде
чем поехал за границу.
3. Она не очень хорошо
спала вчера.
4. Шел дождь, когда я
вышел на улицу.
a) had been studying
б) had studied
в) have been studying
a) didn’t sleep
6) haven’t been sleeping
в) hasn’t slept
a) rained
6) was raining
в) has been raining
3. Раскройте скобки, употребив одно из прошедших
времен (the Past Indefinite или the Past Continuous).
1. He (have) a bath when the phone rang. Very unwill-
ingly he (get) out of the bath and (go) to answer it. 2. He
suddenly realized that he (travel) in the wrong direction.
3. You looked very busy when I saw you last night. What
you (do)? 4. The boys (play) cards when they (hear) their
father’s steps. They immediately (hide) the cards and
(take) out their text-books. 5. He (not, allow) us to go out
in the boat yesterday as strong wind (blow). 6. When
I (hear) the knock I (go) to the door and (open) it, but I
(not recognize) him at first because he (wear) dark
glasses. 7. When I came in they (sit) round the table. Mr.
and Mrs. Brown (watch) TV, Kate (knit), the others
(read). Mrs. Brown (smile) at me and (say), “Come and sit
down”.
4. Раскройте скобки, употребив одно из прошедших
времен (the Past Perfect или the Past Perfect Continu-
ous).
1. He already (park) the car when I arrived. 2. He
(drive) all day, so he was very tired when he arrived.
3. I (finish) cleaning the car by one o’clock. 4. What you
(do) in the garden before I came? 5. I (live) in Germany
before I came to Russia. 6. They already (write) a letter
when the light went down. 7. Last year the plant (fulfil)
the plan by the end of November. 8. The train (not, ar-
rive) yet by that time. 9. The child (sleep) for an hour be-
fore we came.
5 Зак. 2112
129
5. Раскройте скобки, употребляя Past Indefinite,
Past Continuous, Past Perfect, Past Perfect Continuous
Tenses.
1. At the border station passangers (fill) in the forms
and (go) though the customs. 2. When he (look) for his
passport, he (find) these old photographs. 3. She (walk)
along the street when someone (open) the window and
(throw) out a bouquet of roses. 4. Our neighbour (find)
this ring when he (dig) in the garden. He wonders who it
(belong) to? 5. We (fly) over Loch Ness some days ago.
You (see) the Loch Ness monster? 6. When she (leave)
school she (cut) her hair and wears it short. 7. Mr. Bush
(work) as a cashier for twenty-seven years. Then he
(retire) and (go) to live in the country. 8. Why you (not to
lend) him that book yesterday? - I (read) it myself at that
time. 9. I know you (be) very busy last week, so I (not to
disturb) you. 10. My mother was very pleased to see her
classmates again. She (not see) them for twenty years.
11. Last year the Browns (go) to France. It (be) their first
time their. They never (be) there before. 12. Was Helen at
the party when you (arrive)? No, she (go) home. 13. The
house (be) very quiet when we (get) home. Everybody (go)
to bed already. 14. Where your grandmother (work) before
she retired on pension? - She (work) at the post-office all
her life. 15. The children (lie) in the sun for half an hour
when it started to rain. 16. We were good friends. We
(know) each other for a long time. 17. When I came my
boss (wait) for me. He (wait) for 20 minutes already and
(be) annoyed because I (be) late. 18. When I (wake) up at 9
yesterday morning my brother (sit) in front of TV. He
just (turn) it off. He (watch) TV programmes since seven
o’clock. 19. He (wait) for the train for 10 minutes when
suddenly he (realize) that he (arrive) at the wrong station.
A minute later he (hurry) to a taxi stop.
6. Переведите предложения, употребив нужную фор-
му глагола прошедшего времени.
1. Он поступил в уни- в прошлом году.
верситет после того, как поработал
на заводе.
2. Он написал доклад вчера,
прежде чем идти на
собрание.
130
3. Он сломал ногу когда был ребенком.
и не смог принять участие в
соревнованиях.
4. Он приехал в Минск к 2 часам.
2 часа тому назад.
СРАВНИТЕЛЬНАЯ ХАРАКТЕРИСТИКА ФОРМ
БУДУЩЕГО ВРЕМЕНИ
В английском языке имеется четыре формы будуще-
го времени: the Future Indefinite (будущее неопреде-
ленное), the Future Continuous (будущее длительное),
the Future Perfect (будущее завершенное), the Future
Perfect Continuous (будущее завершенно-длительное).
Все формы будущего времени обозначают действия
предполагаемые, планируемые в будущем. Выбор необ-
ходимой формы определяется характеристикой предпо-
лагаемых действий: являются ли они длительными,
планируется их завершение в определенном будущем,
либо они просто представлены безотносительно к момен-
ту их свершения в будущем. Например:
I shall translate the
article tomorrow.
I shall be translating the
article at 5 tomorrow.
I shall have translated
the article before the bell.
I shall have been trans-
lating the article for an
hour when you come.
Завтра я переведу эту
статью.
Я буду переводить статью
в пять часов завтра.
Я переведу статью до звон-
ка.
Я буду переводить статью
уже час, когда ты придешь.
Как видно из примеров, the Future Indefinite упо-
требляется для обозначения однократного или повтор-
ного действия, которое состоится в будущем (tomorrow,
next week, in two days, etc.). Момент или период про-
текания действия не существенен.
Примечание: The Future Indefinite не употребляется
в придаточных предложениях времени и условия. В
131
The Future Continuous
этих предложениях вместо the Future Indefinite упо-
требляется the Present Indefinite, хотя глагол на рус-
ский язык переводился будущим временем. Например:
I shall ask him about it
when he arrives.
We shall play volleyba 1 if
it doesn’t rain.
Я спрошу его об этом,
когда он приедет.
Мы будем играть в волей-
бол, если не будет дождя.
Утвердительная форма Вопросительная форма Отрицательная форма
I shall be we ’ writing he she\. she it will be writing you / they /I \ Shall — we be writing? . he / he / she Will it be writing? \ you ^they I shall not be we writing he he she it will not be you writing they
Для the Future Continuous, как и всех других времен
этой группы, важно указание на то, что действие будет
происходить в определенное время в будущем (at 5
o’clock tomorrow, when he comes).
The Future Perfect употребляется для выражения
действий, которые будут завершены до указанного
момента в будущем (before the bell, by that time, by the
end of the year, etc.). Глаголы в этом времени пере-
водятся будущим временем совершенного вида (сделаем,
поедем, переведем).
The Future Perfect Continuous употребляется для
выражения длительного действия, которое, начавшись в
определенный момент в будущем, будет продолжаться в
течение некоторого периода времени до наступления
другого: более позднего действия или момента. Как и
все времена этой группы, the Future Perfect Continuous
употребляется только в тех случаях, когда указан
период времени, в течение которого будет совершаться
действие (for 2 hours, all my life, etc.).
The Future Indefinite
Утвердительная форма Вопросительная форма Отрицательная форма
I 1 \ I — shall not (shan’t)
we ——- shall write Shall — we — write? we S write
he
she he he
it will write / she\^ she x.
you s' Will it write? it will not (won’t)
they ' you / you write
they ' they
The Future Perfect
Утвердительная форма Вопросительная форма Отрицательная форма
I shall have we written he she ^X. it will have you written they''''^ /I x Shall we have written? he / she Will it have written? \ you 4 they I shall not have we' written he she it will not have you written? they
The Future Perfect Continuous
Утвердительная форма Вопросительная форма Отрицательная форма
I shall have we been writing he she will have been it /writing you / they I have been Shall — we writing? -he \ S she have been Will it writing? \ you / 'they I shall not have we been writing he she will not have it been writing you / they '
Упражнения
1. Проанализируйте употребление и формы глаголов
в будущем времени.
The Future Indefinite
I shall go to the country
tomorrow.
We shall know the re-
sults in a week.
I’ll remember this day
all my life.
Завтра я поеду за город.
Мы узнаем результаты че-
рез неделю.
я буду помнить этот день
всю свою жизнь.
132
133
He will come again next
year.
They will never forgive
him.
Он приедет снова в следую-
щем году.
Они никогда не простят
ему.
The Future Continuous
I shall be watching TV
at 5 o’clock tomorrow.
I’ll be doing my home-
work when you come.
It will be raining to-
morrow morning.
Я буду смотреть телевизор
в 5 часов завтра.
Я буду делать домашнее за-
дание, когда ты придешь.
Завтра утром будет идти
дождь.
The Future Perfect
I shall have translated
all articles by 10 o’clock.
The students will have
discussed the problem
before the teacher comes.
The train will have left
by the time we get to the
station.
Я переведу все статьи к 10
часам.
Студенты обсудят эту про-
блему до того, как придет
преподаватель.
Поезд уже уйдет к тому
времени, как мы доберем-
ся до вокзала.
The Future Perfect Continuous
By the first of Septem-
ber she will have been
teaching at this school
for 25 years.
My sister will have been
living in Minsk for five
years by the end of this
month.
К первому сентября она
будет работать в этой шко-
ле учителем уже 25 лет.
К концу этого месяца моя
сестра будет жить Минске
уже 5 лет.
2. Выберите из правой колонки ту видо-временную
форму глагола, которую уместно употребить при пере-
воде следующих предложений:
3. Мой друг будет учи-
телем через 2 года.
4. Я буду готовиться к
контрольной в 5 часов
завтра.
a) will be
б) will have been
в) is
a) prepare
6) shall be preparing
в) shall prepare
3. Раскройте скобки, употребив формы the Future
Indefinite или the Future Continuous.
1. I can’t understand this letter. — I (call) my son. He
(translate) it for you. 2. What you (do) when you grow
up? — I (be) a pilot. 3. This time next month I (sit) on a
beach. 4. In a few days time we (go) to London. 5. That tree
makes the house very dark. — Very well, I (cut) it down.
6. My brother has just returned from America. — Oh,
good, we (ask) him to come to our next party. 7. I’ll come
at six o’clock. — Good, I (wait) for you. 8. You look fro-
zen. Sit down by the fire and I (make) you a cup of tea.
9. Don’t ring her up at 9, she (put) her children to bed.
Ring up later. 10. My son (be) in the fifth form next year.
That means that he (learn) English. 11. I (know) the results
in some days.
4. Раскройте скобки, употребив формы the Future
Perfect или the Future Perfect Continuous.
1. I (finish) this book by tomorrow evening. 2. By next
winter I (save) the necessary sum of money. 3. I (trans-
late) the article for an hour before you come. 4. By the
end of January he (work) at the University for 10 years.
5. On September 26 they (be married) for twenty-five
years. 6. By the end of the month we (live) in this house
for two years. 7. If I continue with my diet I (lose) 10 ki-
los by the end of the month. 8. The train (leave) before we
reach the station.
1. Она уберет квартиру
к их приезду.
2. Ему потребуется
полчаса, чтобы добрать-
ся до университета.
a) will clean
б) will be cleaning
в) will have cleaned
a) takes
6) will take
в) will have taken
5. Переведите предложения, употребив нужную фор-
му глагола будущего времени.
1. Я буду работать в
библиотеке
2. Мой друг будет чи-
тать (прочитает) книгу
завтра
завтра с 2 до 3
через несколько дней
к вечеру
134
135
3. Он сдаст экзамены
4. Вы будете слушать
свою любимую
музыку
к трем часам завтра
на следующей неделе
завтра
в два часа завтра
Обзорные упражнения
1. Пользуясь сводной таблицей, употребите словосо-
четания to watch TV, to go to the cinema во всех
временах действительного залога.
Indefinite
(факты, повто-
ряющиеся
действия)
Continuous
(действия, про-
исходящие в
данный мо-
мент)
Perfect
(законченные,
предшествую-
щие действия)
It worked
ат
working
аге "
was
working
have
has
worked
have
Perfect Con-
tinuous
(действия,
продолжающие-
ся до другого
данного момен-
та, часто вклю-
чая его)
have
has been
working
have
had worked
They
were
had been
working
I shall
He\
She will
It S' work
We shall
You
They will
shall
shall working
will /
shall
will have
worked
shall z
will
shall
have
been
shall working
will
will
Future-
I should
He\
She would
It —" work
We should
You
They---- would
would be
working
should
would
should
would have
worked
should /
would
have
would been
working
should
would
136
2. Прочитайте и переведите следующие предло-
жения. Объясните различия в употреблении a) Past
Indefinite и Present Perfect; б) Present Perfect Con-
tinuous и Present Continuous; в) Present Perfect и Pres-
ent Perfect Continuous с предлогами for, since.
The Past Indefinite The Present Perfect
He was at the front He has been at the front
during the war. for two years.
I knew that long ago. I have known that for a long time.
I was very ill last month. He has been very ill since last month.
We had terrible weather We have had terrible
the other day. weather since Monday.
He didn’t eat anything He hasn’t eaten anything
the day before yesterday. for twenty-four hours.
The Present Continuous The Present Perfect Con- tinuous
I am reading a book at I have been reading a book
the moment. for two hours.
I am working at my I have been working in this
project now. office for a month.
It is raining heavily out- It has been raining since
side. early morning.
I hope you are not I hope you haven’t been
waiting long. waiting long.
Don’t bother, she is talk- She has been talking over
ing over the telephone. the telephone for ten mi- nutes.
3. Употребите следующие предложения во всех видо-
временных формах, вводя соответствующие индикато-
ры времени.
1. I play tennis. 2. I take my exams. 3. He reads books.
4. The train leaves at half past one. 5. He does his morn-
ing exercises.
4. Раскройте скобки, употребив Present Perfect или
Past Indefinite.
1. How you (learn) to drive? - My father (teach) me.
2. Yesterday I (be) very tired, so I (go) to bed early and
137
(fall) asleep at once. 3. Look! Somebody (break) the vase. -
Well, I (not to do) it. - I wonder who it (be) then. 4. How
many plays Shakespeare (write)? 5. My aunt is a writer.
She (write) three books. 6. Where is your key? - I don’t
know. It seems to me I (lose) it. 7. Last Sunday the chil-
dren (lose) their way in the forest and (come) home late in
the evening. 8. My parents (get) married in Moscow.
9. What do you think of my English? — I think you
(improve) it greatly. 10. Newton (be) a scientist who
(discover) the universal law of gravitation. 11. My grand-
mother (do) Franch at school but she (forget) most of it.
12. She (fail) an exam but now she (pass) it. 13. When he
(arrive)? - He (arrive) at 2.00. 14. You (lock) door when
you left the house? 15. I (read) these books when I was at
school. I (enjoy) them very much. 16. I (not see) him for
three years. I wonder where he is. 17. He (not smoke) for
two weeks. He is trying to give up.
5. Раскройте скобки, употребив
a) Present Indefinite или Present Continuous:
1. What he (do) in the evenings? - He usually (play)
chess or (watch) TV.
2. I won’t go out now as it (rain) and I (not to have) an
umbrella.
3. The last train (leave) the station at 11.30.
4. He usually (speak) so quickly that I (not to under-
stand) him.
5. Ann (make) a dress for herself at the moment. She
(make) all her own clothes.
6. Hardly anyone (wear) a hat nowadays.
7. I’m afraid I’ve broken one of your coffee cups. -
Don’t worry. I (not like) that set anyway.
8. I (wear) my sunglasses today because the sun is very
strong.
9. Tom can’t have the newspaper now because his aunt
(read) it.
10. I’m busy at the moment. I (redecorate) the sitting
room.
11. The kettle (boil) now. Shall I make the tea?
12. You (enjoy) yourself or would you like to leave now? -
I (enjoy) myself very much. I (want) to stay to the end.
13. How you (get) to work as a rule? -
14. I usually (go) by bus but tomorrow I (go) in Tom’s car.
138
б) Past Indefinite или Past Continuous:
1. How you (damage) your car so badly? — I (run) into
a lamp-post yesterday. - I suppose you (drive) too quickly
or were not looking where you (go)
2. As he (get) into the bus it (start) suddenly and he
(fall) backwards on to the road.
3. I (call) Paul at 7.00 but it wasn’t necessary because
he had already (got) up.
4. When I (hear) his knock I (go) to the door and (open)
it, but I (not recognize) him at first because (he wear) the
glasses.
5. As I (cross) the road I (step) on a banana skin and
(fall) heavily. I still (lie) on the road when I (see) a lorry
approaching. Luckily the driver (see) me and (stop) the lorry
in time.
в) Present Perfect или Present Perfect Continuous:
1. The students (work) very well this term.
2. I only (hear) from him twice since he went away.
3. I (plant) the flowers, that’s why my hands are dirty.
4. I (polish) this table all the morning but I am not
satisfied with it yet.
5. He (teach) in this school for five years.
6. “I (teach) hundreds of pupils but I never (meet) such
a hopeless class as this”, our teacher used to say.
г) Future Indefinite или Future Continuous:
1. I want to post this letter but I don’t want to go out
in the rain. - I (post) it for you. I go out anyway as I have
to take the dog for a walk.
2. The prima ballerina is ill so I expect her understudy
(dance) instead.
3. This time next Monday I (sit) in a Paris cafe reading
Le Figaro. - You (not read). You (look) at all the pretty
girls there.
4. Wages have gone up, so I suppose prices (go up) too.
5. It is nearly autumn; soon the leaves (change) colour.
6. Mother (on phone): My son has just burnt his hand
very badly.
Doctor: I (come) at once.
139
6. Раскройте скобки, употребив нужную видовре
менную форму глагола.
1. I (live) in Moscow before I (go) to St. Petersburg.
2. He (lose) the key of his house and now he has to climb
through the window. 3. Shakespeare (write) a lot of plays.
4. I (not see) him for three years. I wonder where he is.
5. You (close) the door before leaving the house? 6. I can’t
go out because I (not finish) my work yet. 7. I (do) this
sort of work when I (be) in the army. 8. He (go) out ten
minutes ago. 9. The newspaper (come)? Yes, Ann is read-
ing it. 10. You (be) here before? — Yes, I (spend) my holi-
days here last year. — You (have) a good time? — No, it
never (stop) raining. 11. The play just (begin). You are a
little late. 12. You (have) breakfast already? — Yes, I
(have) it at 8.00. 13. The concert (begin) at 2.30 and (last)
for two hours. Everyone (enjoy) it very much.
7. Переведите предложения. Определите видо-вре-
менную форму глагола и заполните пустые графы таб-
лицы номерами соответствующих предложений.
Indefinite Continuous Perfect Perfect Continuous
Present Past Future
1. Я смотрю телевизор по вечерам. 2. Где твой брат? —
Он в гостиной смотрит телевизор. 3. Вчера я не смотре-
ла телевизор, т. к. была занята. 4. Я только что посмо-
трела эту программу. 5. Я смотрела телевизор, когда во-
шла мать. 6. Я уже посмотрела этот фильм, когда пришел
отец. 7. Я посмотрю фильм к тому времени, когда придет
мой друг. 8. Завтра по телевизору интересная передача. Я
буду обязательно смотреть ее. 9. Завтра в полдень я буду
смотреть интересный фильм по телевизору. 10. Ты смо-
тришь телевизор уже 4 часа подряд. 11. Я понял, что
смотрел телевизор слишком долго. 12. Пока ты придешь,
я в течение часа буду смотреть телевизор.
8. Употребите глаголы, данные в скобках, в нужной
видо временной форме.
1. George (соте)? - Yes, he (...). - When he (соте)? -
He (come) 10 minutes ago. 2. Don’t ring me up at 3. My
140
father usually (have a rest) after dinner. 3. My friend
(wait) for you since two o’clock. Why you (not to come) in
time? 4. How long you (to translate) this article and how
much of it you (translate)? 5. I (return) from the library
by three o’clock yesterday. 6. Don’t come to me at 5
o’clock today. I (have) an English lesson. 7. When he be-
gan to teach at the Institute, students in his group al-
ready (study) English for two years. 8. My friend (study)
at the library every day. Last Sunday we (go) to the li-
brary together. We (read) books on Russian literature, (to
learn) English and (translate) some newspaper articles.
9. You (be) ever to the Urals? - Yes, I... . I (be) there last
year. Borisov (be) on business there next year. 10. I
(write) this book in a year if I (have) more free time.
11. By the first of September she (work) here for 20
years. 12. You (learn) English before you entered the Uni-
versity? 13. Rose and Jim (meet) for the first time when
they (study) at the university and they (know) already
each other for seven years. 14. I’m sorry you (decide) to
leave the company. I (miss) you when you (go).
9. Употребите соответствующие формы глаголов в
следующих предложениях.
1. Polly (be) to England for two years. She is working
there and (like) it very much. 2. When we moved into a
new flat we (ask) for a telephone. The Post Office (tell) us
to wait. We (wait) for a year and our phone still (not
come). 3. What you (do) next weekend? - It (depend) on
the weather. If it (be) fine we (go) somewhere in the car;
if it (be) wet we probably (stay) at home. 4. I expected
your call at 10. I (have) no time to call later because we
(negotiate) an important contract. 5. What your father
(say) when he hears about this accident? He (not say)
much but he (not to lend) me the car again. 6. I (be) very
ill since last month. I (go) to the doctor at 2 o’clock. And
if everything is all right I (let) you know. 7. When we ar-
rived at the station George (wait) for us for half an hour
already. He (to wear) a blue suit and looked very hand-
some. 8. I (not see) you for ages. Where you (be) all this
time? - I (return) from Canada last week. - How long you
(stay) there? Not very long, we (live) there two years. 9. I
heard Jack (get) married. You (know) him quite well,
141
didn’t you? - Yes. We (work) for the same company for
five years but we (not to see) so much of him after he
(leave) the company. 10. When I (open) the door I (see) a
man behind it. He clearly (listen) to our conversation and
I (wonder) how much he (hear) but I (ask) him nothing1 and
(invite) to come into the room. But he (turn) round and
(run) downstairs. I’d like to know what that man (do) be-
hind my door. But I never (see) him since that time.
11. Those young people (stand) at the bus stop for the last
half an hour. Shall I tell them that the last bus already
(go)? 12. Venice slowly (sink) into the sea. Scientists (try)
to save it and (work) hard at this problem for many years
already. But by the time they (find) the answer the city
probably (sink).
10. Переведите:
1. Звонит телефон. Кто-нибудь ответит? 2. Анна
болеет всю эту неделю. Она простудилась, когда была в
командировке. 3. Я уснула, когда посмотрела все филь-
мы по телевизору. 4. Если ты поможешь мне, я закончу
эту работу сегодня. 5. Если дождь не прекратится, мы
не пойдем на экскурсию завтра. 6. Я никогда не был в
Лондоне. Я собираюсь посетить столицу Великобрита-
нии следующим летом. 7. Когда родители вернулись
домой, ребенок спал. 8. Извините, как мне добраться до
ближайшего универмага? 9. Где продают готовую одеж-
ду? 10. Сколько стоит это пальто? 11. - Как жизнь? Я
не видела тебя целую вечность. — Я работала в Англии
два года. 12. - Счастливых каникул тебе. - Тебе того
же. - Когда собираешься вернуться в Минск? - Буду в
Минске в конце августа. 11
11. Употребите следующие пословицы в кратких си-
туациях.
1. A good beginning makes good ending.
2. If you run after two hares you’ll catch none.
3. The heart that once truly loves never forgets.
4. A man is as old as he feels, and a woman as old as
she looks.
5. When the cat is away, the mice will play.
142
МОДАЛЬНЫЕ ГЛАГОЛЫ
(Modal Verbs)
Модальные глаголы обозначают не действия, а отно-
шение к ним. С помощью модальных глаголов говоря-
щий показывает, что он считает то или иное действие
возможным или невозможным, обязательным или не-
обязательным, вероятным или маловероятным. К числу
модальных глаголов относятся can, may, must, should,
need. Кроме того, модальные значения могут быть выра-
жены глаголами to be и to have.
Модальные глаголы считаются дефектными, непол-
ноценными по форме. У них отсутствует ряд грамма-
тических форм. Многие из них употребляются только в
настоящем времени, не имеют суффикса -s в 3-м лице
единственного числа и не образуют неличных форм
(причастия, инфинитива, герундия).
После модальных глаголов, как правило, стоит
смысловой глагол без частицы to (за исключением to be,
to have и ought).
Модальные глаголы могут употребляться со всеми
формами инфинитива в зависимости от времени совер-
шения действия. Если действие относится к насто-
ящему времени, то употребляется простой инфинитив
или инфинитив продолженной формы (Continuous).
Не can play tennis. Он умеет играть в теннис.
Не may be playing Он, возможно, играет в
tennis now. теннис сейчас.
Если действие относится к прошлому, то употреб-
ляется перфектный инфинитив.
You could have taken Вы могли бы позаботиться
care of her. о ней.
Вопросительная и отрицательная формы предло-
жений с модальным глаголом образуются без вспомо-
гательных глаголов (за исключением глагола to have).
Обычно модальный глагол в вопросе стоит перед
подлежащим. Например:
May I come in? Можно войти?
Can you translate the Ты можешь перевести
text? этот текст?
143
Отрицательная форма образуется при помощи части-
цы not, которая стоит после модального глагола.
You must not smoke here. Вы не должны здесь ку-
рить.
You needn’t go there. Тебе не надо туда ходить.
Сап
Модальный глагол сап имеет следующие формы:
сап — настоящее время (могу, может, умеет и т. д.);
could — прошедшее время (мог, могли), сослага-
тельное наклонение (мог бы), форма вежливости.
Словосочетание to be able (быть в состоянии)
употребляется вместо недостающей формы глагола сап в
будущем времени (shall/will be able to), а также когда
речь идет о фактически свершившемся действии в
определенной ситуации (was/were able to) в прошлом.
Сап может выражать:
1) умственную и физическую возможность, способ-
ность, умение выполнить действие, выраженное инфи-
нитивом стоящего за ним глагола:
I can’t understand you.
We couldn’t swim well,
but once we were able
to cross a wide river.
She will be able to
answer these letters
tomorrow.
Could you show me
the way to the station?
He is (was, will be) able
to come and see us every
Sunday.
Я не могу вас понять.
Мы не могли хорошо пла-
вать, но однажды смогли
переплыть широкую реку.
Она сможет ответить на
эти письма завтра.
Не могли бы вы показать
мне дорогу к вокзалу?
Он может (смог, сможет)
навещать нас каждое воск
ресенье.
2) разрешение; запрещение (в отрицательных) и не-
уверенность (в вопросительных предложениях):
You can use my book
You can’t speak to your
mother like that.
Can it be true?
Ты можешь взять мою
книгу.
Ты не смеешь (я не раз-
решаю) так разговаривать
со своей мамой.
Неужели это правда?
144
Must
Модальный глагол must имеет только одну форму,
которая употребляется в настоящем времени и не
изменяется в косвенной речи. В прошедшем и будущем
времени для выражения долженствования вместо must
употребляется глагол to have с частицей to (had to,
shall/will have to). Например:
I must do it. Я должен это сделать.
I had to do it. Я должен был это сделать.
I’ll have to do it. Я должен буду это сделать.
Must может выражать:
1) необходимость, обязанность, долг:
Every young man must Каждый молодой человек
serve in the army. должен служить в армии.
2) запрещение (в отрицательных предложениях):
You must not disturb him. Вы не должны мешать ему.
3) настойчивый совет, приказание:
You must speak to Nick. Ты должен поговорить с
Не is in trouble. Николаем. У него неприят-
ности.
То have (to)
Модальный глагол to have может употребляться в
настоящем, прошедшем и будущем временах, образуя
вопросительную и отрицательную формы по общему
правилу (с помощью вспомогательных глаголов do,
does, did): После него следует инфинитив с частицей to.
Не has to get up at 6
o’clock.
Does he have to get up
at 6 o’clock?
He doesn’t have to get up
at 6 o’clock.
Он вынужден вставать в
шесть.
Он вынужден вставать в 6
шесть?
Ему не приходится вста-
вать в шесть.
Модальный глагол to have выражает обязанность и
необходимость, обусловленную обстоятельствами:
I didn’t want to go there Я не хотел идти туда, но
but I had to. мне пришлось.
I have to cook dinner Я должен (мне приходит-
myself because my mother ся) готовить обед сам, по-
is out. тому что мамы нет дома.
145
To be (to)
Модальный глагол to be употребляется в двух фор-
мах — the Present и the Past Indefinite и всегда с
частицей to:
We are to meet on Friday. Мы встретимся (должны
встретиться) в пятницу.
We were to meet last Мы должны были встре-
Friday. титься в прошлую пятни-
цу-
То be может выражать.
1) предварительную договоренность, планируемое дей-
ствие:
Mary and John are to Мери и Джон поженятся
marry in June. в июне.
Не was to come and see Он должен был навестить
me last week. меня на прошлой неделе.
2) приказы, распоряжения:
The Principal says I am Директор говорит, что я
to arrange the meeting. должен организовать
встречу.
May
Глагол may имеет следующие формы:
may — настоящее время (могу, можешь и т.д.)
might — в косвенной речи, после глагола в
прошедшем времени; сослагательное наклонение (мог
бы, смогли бы).
Глагол may может выражать:
1) разрешение, позволение совершить какое-либо
действие:
You may take my
umbrella.
May I come in? - Yes,
you may. / No, you
may not.
He said that we might
leave in half an hour.
Ты можешь взять мой
зонт.
Можно войти? — Да.
(Нет).
Он сказал, что мы можем
уйти через полчаса.
То be allowed (to) употребляется для выражения раз-
решения в прямой речи в прошедшем времени, а также
вместо недостающих форм глагола may (has been al-
lowed, will be allowed).
146
He was allowed to stay Ему разрешили остаться
here. здесь.
2) предположение, основанное на неуверенности:
It may start raining. Вероятно, пойдет дождь.
Не may not be at home. Возможно (может быть),
его нет дома.
Форма might может выражать упрек или неодоб-
рение:
You might have told him Ты мог бы сказать ему
about it. об этом.
Should, ought (to)
Модальные глаголы should и ought имеют только од-
ну форму, которая употребляется в настоящем времени
и не изменяется в косвенной речи.
Глаголы should и ought практически имеют одно и
то же значение и различаются лишь тем, что ought
употребляется с частицей to, a should — без нее.
Они могут выражать:
1) совет или рекомендацию (следует, должен):
You ought to be more
attentive at the lessons.
You shouldn’t go to bed
so late.
Вы должны быть более
внимательны на уроках.
Вам не следует ложиться
спать так поздно.
2) недоумение, удивление, возмущение. В этом слу-
чае should придает эмоциональную окраску высказы-
ванию, не выражая модальности:
Why should I go there?
How should I know?
С какой стати мне туда
идти?
Откуда мне знать?
Need
Модальный глагол need имеет только одну форму. Он
употребляется преимущественно в отрицательных пред-
ложениях и выражает ненужность совершения действия:
You needn’t come so Вам незачем приходить
early. так рано.
Need может употребляться и как смысловой глагол
со знанием “нуждаться в чем-либо”:
147
He needs a long rest. Ему нужен продолжитель-
ный отдых.
Do you need my advice? Вам нужен мой совет?
Упражнения
1. Проанализируйте употребление модальных глаго
лов в следующих контекстах.
1. Nick can run long distances. 2. Не can speak many
foreign languages. 3. You can join our group. 4. I must
excuse myself. 5. You mustn’t park the car here. 6. The
boy must see a doctor. 7. You may keep my book for a
week. 8. Drivers may go at 60 kilometres an hour here. 9.
You may stay at your friends’ over the weekend. 10. It
may be cold. Take your coat. 11. Jack shouldn’t have
laughed at John. 12. John ought to be more careful in the
future. 13. You needn’t buy bread. We have some at
home. 14. You needn’t have done this. It was useless. 15.
I have to take a taxi in order not to be late. 16. We had to
wait as the manager was out. 17. Robert is to take his
exams next month. 18. We are to meet at 5 o’clock.
2. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Can you drive (swim, play the piano)?
2. What can you do in the evening?
3. Where can you buy bread (sugar, meat)?
4. What kind of dictionaries can you find in the libra-
ry?
5. How many new words can you learn every day?
6. Must you attend all lectures on mathematics?
7. Who must we show the documents to?
8. Why mustn’t we miss the train?
9. May I use your telephone?
10. What may happen to a man if he doesn’t follow the
doctor’s advice?
11. Who should accompany you to the party?
12. Where should butter be kept?
13 Need you work so much?
14 Do you have to stay in bed when you are ill?
15. Why do you have to hurry to the station?
16. Is the train to arrive at six?
17 Were you to read Oliver Twist at school?
148
3. Поставьте вместо точек: can (not)/could (not)
be able (to).
1. ... you show me that umbrella, please? 2. At the end
of the month the Post office will send us a bill which we
... (not to pay) as you are talking on the telephone for
hours every day. 3. When I was a child I ... not under-
stand adults. 4. When I first went to England I ... neither
read nor speak English. 5. I know the town well so I ...
advise you where to go. 6. ... I speak to Mr. Green,
please? - He is out at the moment. ... you ring back later?
7. At the age of five I ... read but I ... write. 8. I lost my
key yesterday and ... open the door. 9. When the sun rises
we ... to continue our way. 10. ... you show me the way to
the station? 11. Excuse, how ... I get to the nearest su-
permarket? 12. The boy was very tired but he ... reach the
opposite shore of the river. 13. If you don’t help me I ...
fix this shelf on the wall. 14. What ... help people live
through a difficult time?
4. Поставьте вместо точек один из следующих мо
дальних глаголов: must, have to, be to, need в отрица-
тельной или утвердительной форме.
1. You ... explain anything. I know everything. 2. Tom
... get up early yesterday. 3. You ... send for the doctor.
4. I ... finish the work yesterday, but I didn't have
enough time. 5. My friend is ill and I ... visit him today.
6. I ... make a report so I ... go to the library this week.
7. The car ... be parked on the pavement. 8. The students
... do the whole exercise. Ten sentences are enough. 9. I
... go shopping today. There is enough food in the house.
5. Употребите may/might или be allowed to.
1. You ... find this book at any library.
2. ... I speak to you for a moment?
3. ... I see your passport, please?
4. I ... never be able to see you again.
5. You ought to buy it now; prices ... go up.
6. When he was a child he ... do exactly as he liked.
7. Warning: No part of this book ... be reproduced
without the publisher’s permission.
8. The teacher said to the students that they ... find
this book at any library.
149
9. He has refused but he ... change his mind if you ask
him again.
10. She ... not ... to drive since the accident.
11. ... I come in? - Please do.
12. It ... rain, you’d better take an umbrella.
13. He said that it ... rain.
14. He ... not believe you.
6. Поставьте вместо точек нужный по смыслу мо-
дальный глагол:
1. Let us ask mother. She ... know his address. 2. You
... drink cold water if you don’t want to fall ill. 3. ... you
help me? — I am afraid not. 4. You ... interrupt me when
I am speaking. 5. Pupils ... talk during the lesson. 6. It ...
rain, take your raincoat. 7. My father ... be at his office
now as it is 8 o’clock already. 8. ... I switch on the radio? —
Yes, you ... . 9. ... I smoke here? — No, you ... . 10. You
... take my pencil for a moment. 11. I ... finish this work
today. I am tired.
7. Дополните предложения, употребляя модальные
глаголы или их эквиваленты в утчредительной или
отрицательной форме.
1. ... you remember the adress? - I ... not even remem-
ber the street. 2. The sick man had restless night, but he
... sleep for an hour or two. 3. He was very strong, he ...
ski all day and dance all night. 4. When they buy a car,
they ... visit their friends more often. 5. You ... ring the
bell, I have a key. 6. You ... drink this: it is a poison.
7. The buses were all full, I ... get a taxi. 8. What were
your instructions about phoning, Bill? - I ... phone him at
6.00. 9. That hat doesn’t suit you, you ... buy another
one. 10. Tom was often late and his father told hiim that
he ... wake up earlier. 11. The policeman told the driver
that he ... drive more carefully. 12. The woman is looking
ill. She ... see a doctor.
8. Переведите:
Ты можешь помочь мне сейчас? — Извините, не могу.
Я должна идти домой, мне придется остаться дома с
сыном моей сестры. Она должна была уехать в
командировку вчера. Я смогу помочь тебе завтра, если
ты можешь подождать. - Когда ты должна быть дома? -
150
Я обещала приехать домой в 7 часов вечера. Как часто
тебе приходится заботиться о своем племяннике? —
Когда могу, я всегда готова помочь сестре, потому что
ей приходится воспитывать сына одной. - Можно мне
приехать к тебе домой сегодня вечером? — Конечно.
9. Употребите следующие пословицы в кратких
ситуациях.
1. Never put off till tomorrow what can be done today.
2. The wolf may lose his teeth, but never his nature.
3. What is done, cannot be undone.
4. A fair face may hide a foul soul.
5. Love cannot be forced.
6. If the mountains will not come to Mahomet, Ma-
homet must go to the mountains.
СТРАДАТЕЛЬНЫЙ ЗАЛОГ
(The Passive Voice)
Глагол в страдательном залоге выражает действие,
которое направлено на предмет или лицо, выраженное
подлежащим, (дом продается, магазин открывается,
статья переведена и т.д.).
Страдательный (пассивный) залог представляет собой
сложную аналитическую форму, которая образуется
при помощи вспомогательного глагола to be в соответ-
ствующем времени, лице и числе и причастия прошед-
шего времени смыслового глагола (to be + Participle II).
The work will be done in
time.
The letters are being
answered now.
The table had been laid
by 8 p.m.
В первом примере сказуемое стоит в the Future In-
definite Passive и образуется от the Future Indefinite
глагола to be в 3-м лице ед. числа (will be) + Participle
II, т.е. третья форма смыслового глагола to do (done). Во
втором примере форма the Present Continuous Passive
образуется от the Present Continuous глагола to be во
множественном числе (are being) + Participle II смыс-
лового глагола to answer (answered). В третьем примере
Работа будет сделана вов-
ремя.
На письма сейчас отвеча-
ют.
Стол накрыли к 8 вечера.
151
форма the Past Perfect Passive образуется от the Past
Perfect глагола to be (had been) + Participle II глагола to
lay (laid).
В силу специфики своего значения страдательный
залог употребляется только с переходными глаголами.
Вопросительная форма в страдательном залоге обра-
зуется путем переноса (первого) вспомогательного гла-
гола на место перед подлежащим. В специальных воп-
росах вспомогательный глагол ставится после вопроси-
тельного слова.
Is the house being Дом строится теперь?
built now?
Who was the novel written Кем был написан роман?
by?
Отрицательная форма образуется при помощи час-
тицы not, которая ставится после (первого) вспомо-
гательного глагола, например:
The article will not be
written tomorrow.
The work has not been
finished yet.
Статья не будет написана
завтра.
Работа еще не закончена.
Употребление времен в страдательном залоге соот-
ветствует правилам употребления соответствующих вре-
мен в действительном залоге. Сравните:
The Present Indefinite: Articles are translated every day. Статьи переводят каждый день.
The Past Indefinite: Articles were translated every day last year. Статьи переводили каждый
The Future Indefinite: день в прошлом году. Articles will be translated to- morrow. Статьи будут переведены завтра.
The Present Continuous: Articles are being translated now. Статьи сейчас переводят.
The Past Continuous: Articles were being translated at 5 o’clock yesterday. Статьи переводили в 5 часов вечера.
152
The Present Perfect:
The Past Perfect:
The Future Perfect:
Articles have just been trans-
lated.
Статьи только что перевели.
Articles had been translated
by the end of the day. Статьи
перевели к концу дня.
Articles will have been trans-
lated by the end of the day.
Статьи переведут к концу
дня.
Времена группы Perfect Continuous, а также the Fu-
ture Continuous не употребляются в страдательном зало-
ге (см. таблицу).
The Passive Voice
Indefinite Continuous Perfect
Present I am he she is it / shown we you are they/ I am he she is being it x shown we \ you are they/ I have he \ she has been it Xх shown we x^ you have they/
Past I . he^\ she was it / shown we you were they/ I \ he was she / it ' being we \ shown yon were they x I you\ he \ she had been it shown we / they
Future I shall we\ you 'v he ' be she will shown it / they - I shall we\_ you 'x have he will been she / shown it / they
При преобразовании предложений из действитель-
ного залога в страдательный необходимо помнить
следующее:
а) глагол в страдательном залоге ставят в том же вре-
мени, что и в действительном. Лицо и число может
меняться, так как меняется подлежащее.
153
I read newspapers in the
evening.
Newspapers are read in
the evening.
Я читаю газеты вечером,
Газеты читают(ся) вече-
ром.
б) дополнение в действительном залоге будет подле-
жащим в страдательном и наоборот.
They build new houses in
our street.
New houses are built in
our street.
Они строят новые дома
на нашей улице.
На нашей улице строятся
новые дома.
в) если в предложении действительного залога имеет-
ся два дополнения, то любое из них может быть подле-
жащим в страдательном залоге. При этом дополнение,
выраженное местоимением в косвенном падеже, ставит-
ся в действительном залоге в именительном. Местоиме-
ние, указывающее на носителя действия в страдатель-
ном залоге, ставится в объектном падеже. Например:
Nick gave me an interest-
ing book.
An interesting book was
given to me.
I was given an interesting
book.
Николай дал мне интерес-
ную книгу.
Мне дали интересную кни
гу-
Мне дали интересную кни
гу.
г) дополнение с предлогом by в страдательном залоге
часто опускается, если оно выражено личным местои-
мением. Например:
Не showed me a picture.
A picture was shown to
me (by him).
Он показал мне картину.
Мне показали картину.
д) если сказуемое действительного залога выражено
сочетанием модального глагола с инфинитивом, то в
страдательном залоге ему соответствует сочетание того
же модального глагола с инфинитивом в страдательном
залоге. Например:
I can’t answer your
question.
Your question can’t be
answered.
He must clean the room.
The room must be cleaned.
Я не могу ответить на
ваш вопрос.
На ваш вопрос невозмож-
но ответить.
Он должен убрать в комнате.
В комнате необходимо уб-
рать.
154
ПЕРЕВОД ГЛАГОЛОВ В СТРАДАТЕЛЬНОМ ЗАЛОГЕ
НА РУССКИЙ ЯЗЫК
Существует несколько способов перевода английской
конструкции страдательного залога на русский язык.
1. Соответствующей страдательной конструкцией:
Many pictures were de-
stroyed by the fire.
2. Возвратной формой
времени:
The house is being built
in our street.
Огнем было уничтожено
много картин.
глагола в соответствующем
Дом строится на нашей
улице.
3. Глаголом в действительном залоге в 3-ем лице
множественного числа с неопределенно-личным значе-
нием:
The question has been Вопрос уже обсудили,
discussed.
The child is being dressed. Ребенка одевают.
Если позволяет контекст и русская грамматика, одну
и ту же страдательную конструкцию можно перевести
двумя или тремя вышеуказанными способами (строят,
строится и т.п.).
Поскольку в английском языке страдательный залог
употребляется гораздо чаще, чем в русском, существует
ряд случаев, представляющих определенную трудность
при переводе. К ним относятся следующие:
1. Если в страдательном залоге указан носитель
действия (by somebody), то при переводе может упо-
требляться личная форма глагола действительного
залога:
The news was brought by Новость принесла моя
my sister. сестра.
2. Если сказуемое в страдательной конструкции
выражено глаголом с предлогом, то подлежащее пере-
водят дополнением с соответствующим предлогом, а
сказуемое — неопределенно-личной формой глагола:
The doctor has been sent За доктором послали,
for.
The child is being looked За ребенком присматрива-
after. ют.
155
3. После ряда глаголов (to give, to help, to send, to
tell, to show, to ask, to see, to teach) подлежащее в
английском языке переводят существительным или
местоимением в дательном или винительном падеже, а
сказуемое — неопределенно-личной формой глагола:
Му friend was asked to
come to the party.
I wasn’t told about it.
Моего друга попросили
прийти на вечер.
Мне об этом не сказали
4. Безличные конструкции переводят следующим об-
разом:
It is known that...
It is said that...
It is expected that...
It should be mentioned
that...
Известно, что...
Говорят, что...
Ожидают, что...
Следует упомянуть, что...
Упражнения
1. Сравните образование и употребление видо вре-
менных форм глаголов действительного и страдатель-
ного залогов. Предложения переведите.
The Active Voice
a) They usually close the
shop at 8.
They closed the shop at 8
yesterday.
They will close the shop
at 8 tomorrow.
6) The students are translat-
ing the text now.
The students were translat-
ing the text the whole
lesson yesterday.
The students will be
translating the text
the whole lesson tomorrow,
в) We have just written the
test.
We had written the test
before the bell rang.
We shall have written
the test before the bell
rings.
The Passive Voice
The shop is usually closed
at 8.
The shop was closed at 8
yesterday.
The shop will be closed at 8
tomorrow.
The text is being translat-
ed by the students now.
The text was being
translated by the students
the whole lesson yesterday.
The test has just been written
(by us).
The test had been written
before the bell rang.
The test will have been
written before the bell rings.
156
2. Переведите на русский язык.
а) 1. The delegation was headed by the Minister of For-
eign Affairs. 2. She can be seen in the library every day.
3. Heat and light are given to us by the sun. 4. The child
was often left home alone. 5. The children were brought
up in the country. 6. He was educated at Oxford. 7. I
wasn’t told about your decision. 8. The guests were shown
the places of interest in the city. 9. The house is destroyed
by the fire. 10. She is invited to come to England next
year. 11. This house was rebuilt after the war.
6) 1. The film is much spoken about. 2. My father will
be operated on. 3. The letter is being looked for every-
where. 4. The boy was laughed at. 5. The book is often
referred to. 6. My friend can be relied on. 7. I must go.
I’m being waited for. 8. The children will be looked after.
9. Your parents are taken good care of. 10. Our teacher is
always listened to attentively.
3. Образуйте форму инфинитива страдательного
залога по модели:
Образец: to do - to be done
to show - to be shown
to bring, to translate, to send, to offer, to make, to
speak, to tell, to say, to build, to use, to advise, to break,
to give, to take, to find, to see, to do, to join, to visit, to
clean, to understand, to meet, to plant, to write, to read,
to pay, to finish, to return.
4. Употребите следующие предложения во всех фор-
мах страдательного залога. Выберите соответствую
щий индикатор времени.
1. Dinner (be cooked) by
mother. 2. This problem
(be discussed) by the stu-
dents. 3. A new grammar
rule (be explained) by the
teacher. 4. The poem (be
learnt) by the pupils.
5. A beautiful piece of
music (be played) by the
pianist. 6^ The suit (be
made) by a tailor.
always, usually, often, in
1997, yesterday, at 5
o’clock yesterday, tomor-
row, the day after tomor-
row, in a week, next Mon-
day, at 5 o’clock tomorrow,
now, at this moment, during
the break, when he comes
in, just, today, this year,
last week, by five o’clock,
before his parents came, be-
fore Christmas, by the end
of the month.
157
5.
ходимую форму
1. Статья была переведе-
на вчера.
2. Когда я пришел,
статья переводилась
студентами.
3. Статья уже была
переведена, когда я
пришел.
4. Статью будут перево-
дить завтра на уроке.
Переведите следующие предложения,
глагола страдательного залога.
выбрав необ
a) is translated
б) was translated
в) had been translated
a) was translated
6) was being translated
в) were being translated
a) had been translated
6) has been translated
в) had translated
a) will be translated
6) will have been translated
в) is being translated
6. Переведите предложения с русского на англий-
ский язык, обращая внимание на употребление модаль-
ных глаголов в конструкциях страдательного залога.
1. Книги должны быть возвращены в библиотеку.
2. Упражнение может быть сделано без труда. 3. Ему
следует позаботиться о своих родителях. 4. Работа
должна быть выполнена в срок. 5. Перевод не следовало
делать письменно. 6. Обед должен быть готов в два.
7. Письмо нужно переписать еще раз. 8. Это стихо-
творение придется выучить наизусть. 9. Экзамены пла-
нируется сдать осенью.
7. Преобразуйте следующие предложения из дейст
вительного залога в страдательный.
1. Не published the book last year. 2. We use these
clothes only on special occasions. 3. Somebody switched on
the light and opened the door. 4. They will give you an
answer in some days. 5. Who wrote this novel? 6. They
showed her the easiest way to do it. 7. We have looked for
the telegram everywhere. 8. Nobody had visited him.
9. They will have finished the work by twelve. 10. We
shall not admit children under sixteen. 11. The pupils can
do this exercise without any difficulty. 12. You must not
leave your bags in the hall. 13. They don't look after the
children properly.
8. Преобразуйте предложения, содержащие два до-
полнения, из действительного залога в страда
тельный.
Образец: Му friend gave me an interesting book.
- An interesting book was given to me.
- I was given an interesting book.
1. They showed us the postcards of New Year. 2. The
teacher told the pupils the story of Washington. 3. My
father promised me to bring an interesting book about
London. 4. They gave him the chance. 5. The grandmother
read the grandson a fairy-tale.
9. Преобразуйте следующие предложения из страда
тельного залога в действительный. Введите носителя
действия, где это необходимо.
1. This article is often referred to. 2. Lewis Carroll is
remembered not as a mathematician but as the author of
Alice in Wonderland. 3. His paintings will be exhibited at
the Picture Gallery. 4. The child was taken to the circus.
5. The first spaceship was constructed by the Soviet scien-
tists. 6. The anniversary of the liberation of Minsk is
celebrated on July, 3. 7. A new system of work is being
started by the librarians. 8. He doesn’t like to be laughted
at. 9. The doctor must be sent for at once. 10. The door
must be kept shut. 11. This talk must have been started
by our opponents. 12. The problem is being discussed now.
Обзорные упражнения
1. Употребите глаголы в нужной видо временной
форме.
а) 1. Our new house (build) in a year. 2. We think this
picture (paint) by Van Gogh. 3. The letter looks as if it
(write) by a child. 4. The best whisky (produce) in Scot-
land. 5. Every time I go through customs I (search).
6. Too many books (publish) lately - nobody has time to
read them all. 7. Her telephone (cut off) soon because she
didn’t pay the bill. 8. Do you know when the window
(break)? 9. On Sundays our TV (switch on) at breakfast
time and it stays on all day. 10. Gunpowder (invent) by
the Chinese several centuries ago. 11. The text (translate)
by the students now.
158
159
б) 1. The dicuments (sign) by the president of the com-
pany today. 2. This book (translate) into Russian soon.
3. A new railway line (construct) across the desert. 4. A
new Metro line (build) in our city by the end of the year.
5. Many goods (export) from China to different countries
of the world. 6. The articles (not to translate) yet? - Yes,
they (translate) them by 2 o’clock yesterday.
2. Поставьте вопросы к выделенным частям пред
ложения. Переведите эти предложения.
1. No woman has ever been elected President of the
USA. 2. I was frightened about losing my job, but I don’t
worry about it now. 3. Ruth is disappointed: the job she
applied for has been given to someone with more experi-
ence. 4. Before the Princess arrived at the shipyard, the
police dogs had been used to make sure there were no
bombs hidden there. 5. I was told that the 8.15 train
would get me to London in time to reach Cambridge by
10.30. 6. A few minutes later, it was announced that the
train would be late. 7. A new law on smoking in public
places has been introduced.
3. Переделайте предложения, употребив глагол в
страдательном залоге.
а) 1. Beethoven wrote the Pastoral Symphony. 2. He
wrote the Symphony with a pen made from a goose
feather. 3. A falling stone injured Beethoven’s foot. 4. My
parents never lock the children alone in the flat. 5. They
serve lunch in the cafeteria from 11.00 to 2.30.6. The
guide asked the visitors not to touch the furniture.
7. People will talk much about the successful debut of the
young actress. 8. You should send the sick man to hospi-
tal. 9. Why did they laugh at him? 10. You can always
rely upon him. 11. The lecturer advized the students to
read rare books on this problem.
6) 1. The scientists have not yet defined the origin of
the name Belarus. 2. All sorts of agressors attacked and
occupied Belarus many a time. 3. Francisk Skaryna
started book-printing business in Belarus in the 16th cen-
tury. 4. The fascists cut down and burnt many Belarusian
woods during the years of World War II. 5. The Belaru-
160
sian people restored the economy of the republic with the
help of all peoples of the former Soviet Union. 6. The Be-
larusian people celebrate Independence Day on the 3d of
July. 7. Belarusian industry produces tractors and auto-
mobiles, refrigerators and TV sets, computers and other
goods. 8. The Belarusian farmers cultivate grain, vegeta-
bles, herbs and flax. 9. In 1870 I. Nosovic published the
first dictionary of the Belarusian language. 10. The Rus-
sian and Polish languages have greatly influenced on the
Belarusian language.
4. Поставьте глагол в скобках в нужной видо-вре-
менной форме.
1. This piece of music (know) to me. But it never (play)
so wonderfully before. 2. When I came into the cinema, a
new film (show). I was sorry that I (not, tell) about the
show before and was late for the beginning as the end em-
pressed me greatly. 3. It is raining and footbool (not to
play). 4. The students (work) at the laboratory the whole
evening yesterday. 5. Nick was late for the party, so when
he came into the room all the guests (introduce) to each
other, some of them (dance) and some (sing) in the next
room. 6. The mother (tell) not to worry about her sick
boy. He (examine) soon by the doctor. 7. We (discuss) the
problem already when you came. 8. The weather changed
for the worst. It (rain) heavily. The windows (break) by
the strong wind. 9. When you come here in summer, their
house (repair). 10. It's a very good class. It (teach) by Mr.
Smith. 11. I (give) a kitten. It (call) Pussy, but my little
sister (call) it Push. 12. I (introduce) to him last week but
I am afraid I (not, recognize) him if I meet him again.
13. I (not, see) anything of Moscow yet.
5. Употребите следующие пословицы в кратких си-
туациях.
1. The devil is not so black as he is painted.
2. Marriages are made in heaven.
3. Hell is paved with good intentions.
4. Man is known by the company he keeps.
5. Don’t cty before you are hurt.
6. Rome was not built in a day.
6 Зак. 2112
161
СОГЛАСОВАНИЕ ВРЕМЕН
(The Sequence of Tenses)
Правило согласования времен в английском языке
представляет определенную зависимость времени глаго-
ла в придаточном предложении (главным образом до-
полнительном) от времени глагола в главном предло-
жении. В русском языке такой зависимости не сущест-
вует.
Основные положения согласования времен сводятся
к следующему:
1. Если сказуемое главного предложения выражено
глаголом в настоящем или будущем времени, то ска-
зуемое придаточного предложения может стоять в лю-
бом времени, которое требуется по смыслу:
he studies что изучает
English. английский.
Не says he will study Он говорит, что будет
English. изучать
he studied английский.
English. что изучал
английский.
2. Если сказуемое главного предложения стоит в
прошедшем времени, то сказуемое придаточного пред-
ложения должно стоять в одном из прошедших времен.
Выбор конкретной видо-временной формы определяется
тем, происходит ли действие в придаточном предложе-
нии одновременно с главным, предшествует ему либо
будет происходить в будущем:
he studied что изучает
English. английский.
Не said he would study Он сказал, что будет
English. изучать
he had studied английский.
English. что изучал
английский.
В ряде случаев правило согласования времен не со-
блюдается:
а) если сказуемое придаточного предложения вы-
ражено модальными глаголами must, should, ought и
инфинитивом:
162
He told us that he should
leave immediately.
I knew he must visit his
sick friend.
Он сказал, что должен
уехать незамедлительно.
Я знал, что он должен на-
вестить своего больного
друга.
если сказуемое придаточного предложения выра
б)
жает общеизвестный факт:
The pupils were told that
the Earth goes round the
Sun, and the Moon goes
round the Earth.
Ученикам сказали, что
Земля вращается вокруг
Солнца, а Луна вращается
вокруг Земли.
в) в придаточных определительных, а также в пред-
ложениях, которые вводятся союзом than, as...that,
as...as, less than.
Yesterday I read the book
which you are reading
now.
Last year I worked less
than I work now.
Вчера я читал книгу,
которую ты сейчас чи-
таешь.
В прошлом году я рабо-
тал меньше, чем работаю
сейчас.
ПРЯМАЯ И КОСВЕННАЯ РЕЧЬ
(Direct and Indirect Speech)
Правило согласования времен особенно часто соблю-
дается в косвенной речи, то есть когда мы своими сло-
вами пересказываем содержание того, что было сказано
другими. Сравните:
Не said, “I shall do it
tomorrow”.
He said that he would do
it the next day.
Mary said to me, “I
worked at this office”.
Mary told me that she
had worked at that office.
He said, “I can speak to
you now”.
He said he could speak to
me then.
Он сказал: “Я сделаю это
завтра”.
Он сказал, что сделает
это завтра.
Мери сказала мне: «Я ра-
ботала в этом учреж-
дении» .
Мери сказала мне, что ра-
ботала в этом учреждении,
Он сказал: “Сейчас я мо-
гу с тобой поговорить”.
Он сказал, что может по-
говорить со мной сейчас.
163
then
that day
the next day
the day before
ago на
here
this
these
before
there
that
those
Как видно из примеров, при преобразовании по-
вествовательных предложений из прямой речи в косвен-
ную производятся следующие изменения:
1) может употребляться союз that;
2) изменяются времена глаголов в соответствии с
правилами согласования времен;
3) заменяются местоимения в зависимости от смысла;
4) глагол to say, за которым следует дополнение,
заменяется глаголом to tell (без предлога to);
5) заменяются наречия места и времени:
now на
today
tomorrow
yesterday
Вопросительные предложения преобразуются следу-
ющим образом. Общие вопросы вводятся союзами if или
whether (частица «ли»), порядок слов вопросительного
предложения заменяется
тельного предложения:
Не asked me, “Do you
know my telephone
number?"
He asked me if (whether)
I knew his telephone num- ли я номер его телефона,
ber.
Специальные вопросы вводятся тем же вопроси-
тельным словом, с которого начинается прямая речь,
порядок слов заменяется
тельного предложения:
Не asked me, “When will
you come to my place?”
He asked me when I
would come to his place.
При преобразовании из
глаголов в повелительном наклонении они остаются в
форме инфинитива с частицей to.
Не said to me, “Give me
your pen”.
He asked me to give him
my pen.
порядком слов повествова-
Он спросил меня: “Ты зна-
ешь мой телефон?”
Он спросил меня, знаю
порядком слов повествова-
Он спросил меня: “Когда
ты придешь ко мне?”
Он спросил меня, когда я
к нему приду.
прямой речи в косвенную
Он сказал мне: “Дай мне
свою ручку”.
Он попросил меня дать
ему мою ручку.
164
Упражнения
1. Прочитайте и проанализируйте следующие случаи
согласования времен в косвенной речи.
a) Peter says (that) he moves to a new flat,
he moved to a new flat,
he will move to a new flat.
Mary asks me if I know her address.
I knew her address.
I shall know her address.
b) Mary said (that) she was busy,
she had been busy,
she would be busy.
Mary asked me if I saw American films on TV.
I had seen the film the day
before.
I should see the film the
next day.
2. Выберите ту грамматическую форму, которую
вы употребили бы при переводе придаточных дополни-
тельных предложений.
1. Он говорит, что работает над этой проблемой сейчас. a) works б) is working в) has been working
2. Он сказал, что ему будет 20 лет в январе. a) will be 6) would be в) is
3. Он спросил меня, люблю ли я детей. a) love 6)loved в) had loved
4. Он спросил, где я училась. a)study 6) studied в) had studied
3. Поставьте глагол в главном предложении в Past
Indefinite и сделайте необходимые преобразования в
придаточном предложении.
а) Не says that he knows them well.
He said that he knew them well.
l .He is sure that she is in Moscow now.
2 . He says that she is 20 years old.
165
З .Не says that the classes begin at 2 o’clock.
4.1 think that she is at home.
5. We know that she is ill.
6) He says that she went to the Crimea.
He said that she had gone to the Crimea.
1.1 know that he lived in Kiev.
2. He says that they met in Moscow.
3.1 am sure that the students were in the library.
4.1 hope that they knew about it.
5.1 think that they were busy.
в) She says that she will go to the cinema.
She said that she would go to the cinema.
1. They say that they will leave for London.
2. She says that she will buy this coat.
3. We know that we shall discuss this question.
4. We hope that they will help us to do this work.
5. We think that we shall have our holidays in Janu-
ary.
4. Дополните следующие предложения.
1. She says, что она больна. 2. We knew, что они
увлекаются музыкой. 3. I was sure, что он поможет мне.
4. We hoped, что вы поступите в университет. 5. We
knew, что вы учитесь в лингвистическом колледже. 6. I
thought, что тебе 18 лет. 7. I understood, что выполнить
свое обещание будет трудно. 8. We dreamt, что будем
путешествовать по Кавказским дорогам во время каникул.
5. Переведите:
1. Я был уверен, что он будет рад видеть вас.
2. Я знал, что они получили наше письмо.
3. Мы думали, что они уехали на юг.
4. Она поняла, что была неправа.
5. Я надеялся, что погода изменится.
6. Она сказала, что хочет посетить Эрмитаж.
7. Они обещали, что примут участие в этом экспери-
менте.
8. Мы надеялись, что придем на вокзал как раз
вовремя.
6. Преобразуйте следующие предложения из прямой
речи в косвенную.
а) 1. “I’m going away tomorrow, mother”, he said.
2. “I’ve been to London for a month but I haven't had
166
time to visit the Tower”, said Roger. 3. “Nothing grows in
my garden as it never gets any sun”, she said. 4. “It isn’t
so foggy today as it was yesterday”, I remarked. 5. “We
have a lift but very often it doesn’t work”, they said.
6. “From the window of my flat I can see the river”, said
my friend. 7. “You can keep that book, if you like, Joan”,
she said. 8. “I’ll sit here till she comes in, but I hope she
won’t be late”, said the stranger.
6) 1. “Who put salt in my coffee? ” he asked. 2. “Why
is Petrov absent? ” the teacher asked. 3. “What is your
new house like? ”, I asked them. 4. “Where were you last
night? ” he asked. 5. “Do you understand what I mean? ”
he asked. 6. “Are you leaving today or tomorrow morn-
ing? ” asked the secretary. 7. “How far is it? And how long
will it take me to get there? ” asked the man. 8. “Are you
sorry for what you did?” the mother asked the little son.
в) 1. “Don’t eat too much”, I advised her. 2. “Write to
me as soon as you can”, said his wife. 3. “Don’t forget
your sandwiches”, said his mother. 4. “Don’t go near the
water, children”, she said. 5. “Be careful crossing roads”, he
said, “and remember that they drive on the left in England”.
6. “Make the coffee a bit stronger”, I begged. 7. “Don't take
your coat off. We are going out again”, she told him.
r) 1. “You mustn’t come in without knocking”, she
said. 2. “Your ticket may cost five pounds”, he told me.
3. Notice reads, “Dogs must be kept on a lead”. 4. His fa-
ther said, “You should work harder next term”. 5. “You
mustn’t play with knives, children”, said their mother.
6. “You needn’t get up till nine tomorrow”, I warned.
7. He said, “After the lecture I have to go home quickly”.
8. “You should try to repair your chair”, she said. “I can,
but nothing will come of it”, answered the boy.
4. Преобразуйте следующие предложения из прямой
речи в косвенную, употребив такие глаголы, как thank
— благодарить, greet — приветствовать, congratulate —
поздравлять, wish — желать, explain — объяснять, call —
называть, offer — предлагать, introduce — представлять.
Образец: Не said: “Thank you” — Не thanked her.
He said: “Happy Christmas” — He wished
me a Happy Christmas.
167
1. He said, “Good morning”. 2. He said, “Congra-
tulations! ”. He said, “Liar". 4. “Have a cigarette”, he
said. 5. “Many happy returns of your birthday”, we said.
6. “Thank you”, answered the boy. 7. “Welcome home, my
dear”, said his wife. 8. “Miss Brown, this is Miss White;
Miss White, this is Miss Brown”, he said. 9. “You pressed
the wrong button”, said the mechanic.
НАКЛОНЕНИЕ
(The Mood)
Наклонение — это форма глагола, при помощи
которой говорящий показывает отношение действия к
реальности. Это отношение может быть представлено
как реальное, проблематичное, нереальное, а также в
виде просьбы или приказания.
Действия, представленные как реальные, выра-
жаются в форме изъявительного наклонения (the In-
dicative Mood), видо-временные и залоговые формы
которого были рассмотрены выше.
Просьбы и приказания выражаются в форме пове-
лительного наклонения (the Imperative Mood). Утвер-
дительная форма повелительного наклонения совпадает
с инфинитивом глагола без частицы to:
Be careful while crossing Будьте внимательны, пере-
the street. ходя дорогу.
Отрицательная форма образуется при помощи
вспомогательного глагола do и частицы not (do not или
don’t):
Don’t cry! Everything will He плачь! Все будет хоро-
be all right. шо.
Don’t listen to him! He is He слушай его. Он обман-
а liar. щик.
При обращении просьбы или приказания к 3-му
лицу употребляется глагол let (пусть), а к 1-му лицу
let’s (давайте):
Let Ann read the text. Пусть Аня читает текст.
Let's go for a walk. Давайте пойдем на про-
гулку.
168
Нереальные или проблематичные действия выража-
ются формами сослагательного наклонения (the Sub-
junctive Mood). На русский язык сослагательное накло-
нение переводится всегда прошедшим временем глагола
с частицей “бы”, которая может присоединяться к
любому слову в предложении. В русском языке нет спе-
циальных форм сослагательного наклонения для выра-
жения действий, относящихся к разным периодам
времени. В английском языке существуют две такие
формы: первая — неперфектная, когда действие отно-
сится к настоящему и будущему времени и совпадает по
форме с Future-in-the-Past в главном предложении и с
Past Indefinite в придаточном предложении (II тип
условных предложений); вторая — перфектная, когда
действие относится к прошедшему времени и совпадает
по форме с Future Perfect-in-the-Past в главном предло-
жении и с Past Perfect в придаточном предложении (III
тип условных предложений).
Сослагательное наклонение употребляется во II и III
типе условных предложений, а также в смешанном
варианте условных предложений.
1. I should write a letter
to him if I knew his
address.
2. I should have written
a letter to him, if I had
known his address.
3. Would you recognize
your friend at once if
you hadn’t seen him
for ten years?
Я бы написала ему пись-
мо, если бы знала его ад-
рес (сегодня или завтра).
Я бы написала ему пись-
мо, если бы знала его ад-
рес (вчера).
Вы бы узнали своего
друга сразу, если бы не
видели его десять лет?
Отрицательная форма образуется характерным для
этих времен способом:
I shouldn’t write a letter to him, if I didn’t know his
address.
I shouldn’t have written a letter to him, if I hadn’t
known his address.
Если сказуемое главного или придаточного пред-
ложения содержит модальный глагол сап или may, то в
сослагательном наклонении употребляются формы could
или might.
169
I could write a letter to
him if I knew his
address.
I should write a letter to
him if I could find his
address.
Я мог бы написать ему
письмо, если бы знал
его адрес.
Я написал бы ему пись-
мо, если бы мог найти
его адрес.
Глагол to be в сослагательном наклонении принимает
форму were независимо от лица и числа:
If I were you I should На твоем месте я бы
know what to do. знал, что делать.
И главное, и придаточное предложение могут в слу-
чае необходимости употребляться самостоятельно, со-
храняя соответствующие формы:
If I (only) knew his Если бы я (только) знал
address! его адрес.
I could have written а Я мог бы написать ему
letter to him. письмо.
Формы главного предложения называются Subjunc-
tive I, придаточного — Subjunctive II.
Сослагательное наклонение также употребляется в
некоторых других типах придаточных предложений:
1) подлежащих, после главного предложения типа It is
(was) necessary; It is (was) important; It is (was) desirable; It
is (was) recommended, etc. (с глаголом should для всех лиц):
It is necessary that he Необходимо, чтобы он
should come. пришел.
2) дополнительных,
а) если сказуемое главного предложения выражено
глаголами suggest, propose, demand, order, request, in-
sist, и др. (с глаголом should для всех лиц):
Не suggests (suggested) Он предлагает (предло-
that I should take a leave, жил), чтобы я взял отпуск.
б) после глагола wish в главном предложении:
I wish I knew his adress. Жаль, что я не знаю его
адрес.
3) определительных, со словом time в главном пред-
ложении:
It is time we went/ Пора идти домой.
should go home.
170
Упражнения
1. Определите наклонение в следующих предложениях.
1. Не doesn’t like cats. 2. It’s cold. 3. Don’t cry! 4. He
said, “Get out of my way!”. 5. Let’s begin our discussion.
6. If I see him I shall tell him everything. 7. If I saw him
I should tell him everything. 8. Don't be so silly. 9. I am a
student. 10. I wish you good luck.ll. I wish you were
lucky. 12. He suggested that we should climb the moun-
tain. 13. He suggested climbing the mountain. 14. Please
come here, Tom. 15. Will you come here again? 16. If you
go to the country, don’t forget to take your dog with you.
17. If he had gone to the country he would have taken his
dog with him.
2. Проанализируйте употребление форм сослага-
тельного наклонения в следующих предложениях.
1. We should play football if it were not raining. We
should have played football if it hadn’t been raining.
2. Carrie would play her part better if she were a true ac-
tress. Carrie would have played her part better if she had
been a true actress. 3. It is necessary that he should buy
winter shoes. 4. It is important that you should do this
work yourself. 5. It is desirable that they should take part
in the work of the conference. 6. The teacher suggests
that we should stay after classes. 7. The teacher demands
that the pupils shouldn’t be late for classes. 8. I wish you
didn’t lose so much time. 9. I wish I were you. 10. It’s
high time that you got down to business. 11. But for the
toothache I would have enjoyed the performance.
3. Преобразуйте предложения no образцу, обращая
внимание на различие грамматических форм, выра
жающих реальные и нереальные условия.
Образец: If I have time, I shall help you.
a) If I had time, I should help you.
6) If I had had time, I should have helped
you.
1. If he works hard, he will pass the exams well. 2. If
they finish their work quickly, they will go home early.
3. If you don't listen to the teacher, you will learn noth-
ing. 4. If he lives in England, he will go to Oxford Uni-
versity.
171
4. Переведите.
1. Не would have taken the bus if he had not been late.
2. If he had not been worrying about being late, he would
have closed the house door properly. 3. If he had not seen
the door was open, he would not have got out of the car to
close it. 4. He would not have locked the car with the keys
inside if he had not been in a hurry. 5. If he had not run
back into the house to get the other car key, he would not
have knocked a jar of jam all over the kitchen floor. 6. He
would not have got stuck in a traffic jam (because the
main road to his office was closed for repairs) if he had
read the paper that morning. 7. If he had not got to work
so late, there would have been places in his usual car park.
5. Ответьте на следующие вопросы:
1. Would you go to the department store if you wanted
to buy a new coat?
2. Would you buy the suit if it were your size?
3. What would you do if you had any free time?
4. What motor car would you buy if you needed it?
5. Where would you spend your holiday if it were in
February?
6. How much time would it take you if you went to
Moscow by train?
7. What is required of shoes?
8. What is required of a shop assistant?
9. What is demanded of a customer?
10. What new laws would you like the government to
introduce?
6. Употребите нужную форму сослагательного на-
клонения в придаточном предложении.
1. I shouldn’t have believed a) didn’t see
it if I ... it with my own eyes. 6) haven’t seen
в) hadn’t seen
2. He might have understood a) have spoken
it if you ... slowly. 6) had spoken
в) would speak
3. He would take me with a) were
him if I . . ready. 6) had been
в) should be
4. The newspaper would a) were
print the story if it ... true. 6) had been
в) was
172
7. Употребите нужную форму
клонения в главном предложении.
1. If I had known that you
were in hospital I ... you.
2. If I knew that the traffic
lights were red I ... .
3. If you had obeyed my
instructions you ... into
trouble.
4. If I hadn’t been wearing
tight shoes I ... the bus
quite easily.
сослагательного на-
a) shall visit
6) should visit
в) should have visited
a) would have stopped
6) would stop
в) should stop
a) wouldn’t get
6) wouldn’t have got
в) couldn’t get
a) should catch
6) should have caught
в) caught
8. Поставьте глагол в скобках в нужную форму сос-
лагательного наклонения.
а) 1. If you (bring) me the book, I should have read it.
2. If he didn’t ring me up, I (not to come). 3. If he (not to
write) to me, I shouldn’t have answered him. 4. I wish I
(have) a tie to match my suit. 5. The doctor suggested that
she (have) a long rest in the Crimea. 6. If I (be) you, I should
have appologised to her. 7. You wouldn’t have so many acci-
dents if you (drive) slowly. 8. If he were in, he (answer) the
phone. 9. If you (pass) your examination, we should have a
celebration. 10. What might happen if I (press) the button?
11. I should not have taken your umbrella if I (know) that it
was the only one you had. 12. If he knew it was dangerous he
(not, come). 13. I shouldn’t have gone there if I (be) you.
14. He would have been the best pupil in the class if he
(work) harder. 15. We (stay) at home if we had known he
was coming. 16. He might (understand) everything if you
had spoken not so fast.
6) 1. You work much, I suggest that you (take) a leave.
2. The teacher demands that we (revise) all the grammar
rules before the English exam. 3. The manager insists that
they (sign) the contract. 4. My mother recommends that I
(not to sit) up late doing my homework. 5. It is important
that you (pass) your entrance examinations successfully to be
admitted to a higher school. 6. It is desirable that you (do)
sports regularly. 7. It is necessary that the pupils (not to
miss) lessons.
173
в) 1. I wish I (can) speak English better. 2. We wish week-
ends (come) more often. 3. I wish I never (meet) him. 4. I
wish I (spend) my money on something else instead of buying
that bicycle. 5. I wish I (can help) you yesterday. 6. I wish
they (be) on time tomorrow. 7. He wished he (know) about
your arrival.
11. Закончите предложения, употребив соответству-
ющую форму сослагательного наклонения.
1. If he had eaten less ...
2. If he had taken my advice ...
3. If she practised more ...
4. If we had left before breakfast...
5. If he were not so lazy ...
6. If he saw my father ...
7. We should send for the doctor if ...
8. Her life might have been saved if ...
9. You would look better if ...
10. I should have bought the dress if ...
11. He would bring the book if ...
12. You would be angry if ...
12. Подумайте и скажите, что бы вы делали в сле-
дующих ситуациях.
1. What would you do if you saw your first teacher
walking along the street?
2. What would you do if you knew that you would be sent
to study abroad?
3. What three wishes would you choose for yourself if you
knew that they would come true?
НЕЛИЧНЫЕ ФОРМЫ ГЛАГОЛА
(The Verbals)
Неличные формы глагола — это неизменяемые по
лицам и числам, не имеющие наклонения глагольные
формы, которые не употребляются самостоятельно в
функции сказуемого, а могут лишь входить в его состав.
К неличным формам глагола относятся инфинитив,
причастие и герундий. Они имеют формы залога и
временной отнесенности (выраженное ими действие про-
исходит одновременно или предшествует действию,
выраженному сказуемым предложения).
174
Наряду с глагольными свойствами они имеют
свойства имени существительного (инфинитив, герун-
дий), прилагательного и наречия (причастие) и, следо-
вательно, могут выполнять их функции в предложении.
ИНФИНИТИВ
(The Infinitive)
Инфинитив — неопределенная форма глагола, фор-
мальным признаком которой является частица to.
Чаще всего инфинитив употребляется после того или
иного глагола в личной форме, либо после модального
глагола (без частицы to). Например:
I like to play tennis.
I can play tennis well.
Я люблю играть в теннис.
Я могу хорошо играть в
теннис.
В английском языке инфинитив имеет следующие
формы временной отнесенности и залога:
Active Passive
Indefinite to ask to be asked
Continuous to be asking —
Perfect to have asked to have been asked
Perfect Continuous to have been asking —
The Indefinite Infinitive (простой инфинитив) выра-
жает действие, происходящее одновременно с действием
глагола-сказуемого или непосредственно следующее за
ним. Например:
Не wants to ask you a
question.
He wants to be asked a
question.
Он хочет задать вам воп-
рос.
Он хочет, чтобы ему зада-
ли вопрос.
The Continuous Infinitive подчеркивает длительность
действия, происходящего одновременно с действием
глагола-сказуемого. Например:
The child seems to be Ребенок, кажется, спит
sleeping now. сейчас.
175
The Perfect Infinitive выражает действие, которое
произошло раньше действия, выраженного глаголом-
сказуемым. Например:
She seems to have asked
him about it.
She seems to have been
asked about it.
Кажется, она уже спраши-
вала его об этом.
Кажется, ее уже спраши-
вали об этом.
B предложении инфинитив может выполнять сле-
дующие функции: подлежащего, части сказуемого, пря-
мого дополнения, обстоятельства цели и определения.
Например:
То read much is to know
much, (подлежащее;
часть сказуемого)
I want to buy a new TV
set. (дополнение)
He was the first man to
tell me about it.
(определение)
To be a teacher you must
graduate from the Peda-
gogical Institute,
(обстоятельство цели)
Инфинитив может также употребляться в функции
сложного дополнения и сложного подлежащего, образуя
при этом соответствующие обороты: объектный инфини-
тивный оборот (the Objective-with-the infinitive
struction) и субъективный инфинитивный оборот
Subjective- with- the- Infinitive Construction).
Объектный инфинитивный оборот включает в
объект (существительное в общем падеже либо местои-
мение в объектном) и инфинитив. Причем действие,
выраженное инфинитивом, выполняет сам объект, а не
подлежащее главного предложения:
I have never heard her
sing.
I want him to come.
После таких глаголов
sider, to wish, to prefer, to know, to ask, should (would)
like инфинитив употребляется с частицей to.
Много читать — много
знать.
Я хочу купить новый те-
левизор.
Он был первым человеком,
кто рассказал мне об этом.
Чтобы стать учителем,
надо закончить педагоги-
ческий институт.
Соп-
(the
себя
Я никогда не слышал,
как она поет.
Я хочу, чтобы он пришел,
как to want, to expect, to con-
176
После глаголов, выражающих физическое восприя-
тие (to see, to watch, to hear, to feel), а также to make,
to let частица to не употребляется.
Субъектный инфинитивный оборот состоит из
субъекта (существительного или личного местоимения в
именительном падеже) и инфинитива, следующего за
сказуемым. Действие, выраженное инфинитивом,
выполняет субъект, который является в предложении
подлежащим. Сказуемое может быть выражено глаго-
лами to think, to know, to suppose, to hear, to see, to
say, to report, to describe, to order и некоторыми
другими в страдательном залоге, а также глаголами to
seem, to happen, to appear, to prove, to turn out в
действительном залоге. Предложения с субъектным
инфинитивным оборотом соответствуют русским
неопределенно-личным предло-жениям типа «говорят,
что ...; думают, что ...; сообщается, что ...; известно,
что ...;» и т.д.:
Не is said to know several Говорят, что он знает не-
foreign languages. сколько иностранных язы-
ков.
Не is known to be writing Известно, что он пишет
a new novel. новый роман.
В английском языке имеется также инфинитивный
оборот с предлогом for. Он состоит из существительного
(или местоимения), перед которым стоит предлог for, и
инфинитива. Этот оборот может употребляться в ка-
честве сложного подлежащего (с вводным it), именной
части сказуемого, сложного дополнения, определения и
обстоятельства.
It’s difficult for me to
translate this text.
I’ve brought two books
for my son to read.
Мне трудно перевести
этот текст.
Я принесла почитать сы-
ну две книги.
Упражнения
1. Определите форму и функцию инфинитива в сле-
дующих предложениях. Переведите их на русский язык.
1. Не can’t help you. 2. Му son likes to read books.
3. I wanted to answer the letter but then I forgot. 4. The
captain was the last man to leave the ship. 5. To save the
177
child he rushed into the burning house. 6. We saw the
guests enter the house. 7. We heard somebody open the
window, and saw a man walk quickly upstairs. 8. He is
considered to be a clever man. 9. He was seen to enter the
library at 9 o’clock. 10. He seems to have been writing a
test for an hour already. 11. She appeared to know several
foreign languages. 12. It is likely to rain. 13. It is neces-
sary for you to know the truth. 14. He spoke too loud for
us to hear. 15. Here is a book for you to read.
2. Преобразуйте предложения, употребив инфини-
тив в функции: а) определения; б) обстоятельства цели.
а) Образец: Не was the first man who arrived.
He was the first man to arrive.
1. He was the first who broke the silence. 2. There are
a lot of things that need repairing. 3. Would you be so
kind and lend me your umbrella? 4. He wished he had a
younger brother with whom he could play. 5. There was
no place where he could sit. 6. I can’t go to the party, I
have nothing that I can wear. 7. It is convenient that you
have a balcony in your flat.
б) Образец: They sent me to Paris. They wanted
me to learn French.
They sent me to Paris to learn French.
1. She went to London. She wanted to find a job there.
2. I’m buying paint. I want to paint my door. 3. They got
up very early. They wanted to get to the top of the hill
before sunrise. 4. He rang the bell. He wanted to tell us
that dinner was ready. 5. I took off my shoes. I didn’t
want to make any noise. 6. I’m learning Greek. I wish to
read Homer. 7. I’m saving money. I want to buy a car.
3. Объедините следующие предложения, употребив
нужную форму инфинитива.
Образец: We must speak in a low voice. We don’t
want to wake him up.
We must speak in a low voice not to
wake him up.
1. It’s very cold. We can’t bathe. 2. The boy is very
young. He can’t have a front-door key. 3. It was very
dark. We couldn’t see the car. 4. I sent him out of the
room. I wanted to discuss his progress with the headmas-
ter. 5. He sent his children to his sister’s house. He
178
wanted to have some peace. 6. Don’t let the baby play
with my glasses. He may break them. 7. We must take
our gloves. We don’t want to get frozen.
4. Употребите следующие предложения в страда-
тельном залоге, изменив конструкцию.
Образец: People say that he was a clever man.
It is said that he was a clever man.
He is said to be a clever man.
1. They say that paper has been invented in China.
2. Some people consider that Hamlet is the summit of
Shakespeare’s art. 3. They say that Nick lived on potatoes
and vinegar. 4. People know that he is armed. 5. They be-
lieve that he was killed at the front. 6. We expect that the
expedition will reach the South Pole in May. 7. We con-
sider that she was the best singer in America.
5. Преобразуйте предложения, употребив инфини-
тив в функции а) сложного дополнения, б) сложного
подлежащего. Предложения переведите.
а) Образец: 1. Everybody considers that he is a
clever man.
Everybody considers him to be a clever
man.
2. I saw as he crossed the street.
I saw him cross the street.
1. I know that she is a good teacher. 2. Everybody be-
lieves that he is right. 3. I have never heard how she plays
the piano. 4. The student expects that his article will be
published. 5. I saw as the driver opened the window and
threw a box into the bushes. 6. I felt as somebody looked
at me. 7. Nobody heard as he spoke on the telephone.
б) Образец: They say that he lives in Warsaw.
He is said to live in Warsaw.
1. They say that he is one of the best doctors at the
hospital. 2. People say this palace will be built in three
years. 3. The newspapers report that the President will
arrive in Moscow tomorrow. 4. Everybody knows him as a
prominent public figure. 5. They say that paper has been
invented in China. 6. We expect her to come tomorrow.
7. We know that this student works much.
179
- -
6. Употребите следующие пословицы в кратких си-
туациях.
1. То know everything is to know nothing.
2. Talk of the devil and he is sure to appear.
3. Live and let live.
4. Easy come, easy go.
5. To help is human.
ПРИЧАСТИЕ
(The Participle)
Причастие — это неличная форма глагола, соче-
тающая свойства глагола, прилагательного и наречия. В
английском языке различают два причастия: Participle
I и Participle II. Participle I соответствует русскому
причастию с суффиксами -ущ, -ющ, -ащ, -ящ (asking —
спрашивающий, writing — пишущий), а также
деепричастию несовершенного вида с суффиксами -а, -я
(going — идя, crying — плача) или совершенного вида с
суффиксом -в (seeing — увидев). Participle II является
страдательным причастием прошедшего времени (a for-
gotten song — забытая песня). Participle I, как и
инфинитив, может иметь формы относительного време-
ни и залога.
Active Passive
Present Participle Perfect Participle Participle II asking having asked being asked having been asked asked
Отрицательная форма образуется при помощи
частицы not перед причастием.
Формы Present Participle употребляются для обозна-
чения действия, одновременного с действием глагола в
личной форме.
Being late I took a taxi. Так как я опаздывал, я
взял такси.
I heard the problem being Я слышал, как обсуждали
discussed. эту проблему.
Формы Perfect Participle употребляются для обозна-
чения действия, предшествующего действию глагола в
личной форме.
180
Having passed the exams Сдав экзамены, он уехал
he went to the Crimea. в Крым.
Однако с глаголами движения и восприятия to come,
to arrive, to enter, to turn, to see, to hear, to notice, a
также to say и to think употребляется обычно Present
Participle, даже когда выражается предшествование.
Arriving at the station we Приехав на вокзал, мы
went to buy the tickets. пошли покупать билеты.
Как и прилагательные причастие (Present Participle
и Participle II) может выполнять в предложении функ-
цию определения и стоять перед определяемым словом
или после него (в последнем случае оно образует
определительный причастный оборот).
Who is that smiling
girl?
The girl speaking to
her friends is my
sister.
Lost time is never
found again.
Books written by
Mark Twain are full of
humour.
Кто та улыбающаяся де-
вушка?
Девушка, разговарива-
ющая со своими друзьями,
моя сестра.
Потерянное время не
вернешь.
Книги, написанные Мар-
ком Твеном, полны юмора.
Английское причастие не употребляется в функции
определения для выражения предшествующего дейст-
вия по отношению к действию, выраженному глаголом-
сказуемым. Поэтому русское причастие прошедшего
времени действительного залога переводится на англий-
ский язык определительным придаточным предложе-
нием. Например:
Студент, сделавший The student who made the
доклад на конференции, report at the conference
учится в университете. studies at the University.
Причастие II имеет только одну форму, которая
совпадает с третьей формой глагола. Самостоятельно в
предложении употребляется только Participle II,
образованное от переходных глаголов. Причастие, обра-
зованное от непереходных глаголов, является частью
сказуемого.
Как наречие, причастие может выполнять в пред-
ложении функцию обстоятельства: времени (часто с
181
союзами when и while, которые на русский язык не
переводятся), причины, образа действия и сопутст-
вующего обстоятельства.
(When, While) translating
the text I had to use a
dictionary.
When asked about it,
he refused to answer.
Not knowing the answer
the pupil kept silence.
Переводя текст, мне при-
шлось пользоваться сло-
варем.
Когда его спросили об
этом, он отказался от-
вечать.
Не зная ответа, ученик
молчал.
Perfect Participle употребляется только в функции
обстоятельства.
Having discussed the Обсудив констракт, уп-
contract the manager равняющий подписал его.
signed it.
Причастие в сочетании с существительным или мес-
тоимением может образовывать причастные обороты:
объектный, субъектный и абсолютный.
Причастный оборот «Объектный падеж с причастием
настоящего времени» (Objective-with-the-Present-Parti-
ciple) представляет собой сочетание существительного
или местоимения в объектном падеже с причастием
настоящего времени. Этот оборот употребляется после
глаголов: to feel, to find, to hear, to listen, to look, to
notice, to see, to watch. Например:
I hear the phone ringing Я слышу, как звонит теле-
in the next room. фон в соседней комнате.
She watched the children Она наблюдала, как дети
playing in the yard. играли во дворе.
Этот оборот аналогичен объектному инфинитивному
обороту, но причастный оборот показывает действие в
процессе его совершения, а инфинитивный оборот толь-
ко указывает на действие. Например:
I saw the children play- Я видел, как дети играли
ing hockey. в хоккей.
I saw the children play Я видел, что дети играли в
hockey. хоккей.
Оборот «Объектный падеж с причастием прошедшего
времени» (Objective with-the-Past-Participle) представ-
182
ляет собой сочетание существительного или местоиме-
ния в объектном падеже с причастием прошедшего вре-
мени. Этот оборот употребляется после глаголов: to
have, to get, to want, to wish, to watch, to hear, to see, to
find. Например:
I want to have a new Я хочу пошить новое пла-
dress made. тье.
Этот оборот с глаголом to have (to get) означает, что
действие совершается не самим подлежащим, а другим
лицом для него или за него.
I must have my coat ' Я должен почистить паль-
cleaned. то (это сделают для меня).
♦Субъектный причастный оборот» (Nominative-with-
the Participle) представляет собой сочетание существи-
тельного в общем падеже или местоимения в имени-
тельном падеже с причастием настоящего или прошед-
шего времени. Употребляется после глаголов, выражаю-
щих восприятие.
The pupils were heard
speaking about their fi-
nals.
The teacher was seen
surrounded by the pupils.
Слышали, как ученики раз-
говаривали о выпускных
экзаменах.
Видели, как ученики окру-
жили учителя.
♦Абсолютный причастный оборот» (The Absolute Parti-
cipial Construction) — это оборот, в котором причастие
имеет свое собственное подлежащее, выраженное су-
ществительным в общем падеже или местоимением this,
it или словом there.
На русский язык данный оборот переводим прида-
точным предложением с союзами так как, после того
как, если, когда. Если оборот стоит в конце предложе-
ния, то переводим его самостоятельным предложением с
союзами а, причем, в то время как.
The weather being fine,
we went for a walk.
My mother was cooking
dinner, my sister helping
her.
Так как погода была хоро-
шая, мы отправились на
прогулку.
Моя мама готовила обед, а
сестра помогала ей.
183
Упражнения
1. Переведите на русский язык следующие словосоче-
тания.
a) a smiling girl, playing children, a writing boy, a fal-
ling tree, a laughing baby, a sleeping man, a walking cou-
ple, reading audience, a running sportsman, a developing
country, a crying child, a burning house.
6) a broken cup, a translated text, an unanswered let-
ter, an opened window, a closed door, an occupied room, a
written letter, a fallen tree, a discussed problem, produced
goods, a cooked dinner, a surprised man, lighted windows,
a developed country.
2. Определите форму и функцию причастия в сле-
дующих предложениях. Переведите их на русский язык.
1. This is the book so much spoken about. 2. The
method followed by our scientists was not simple. 3. Ha-
ving found no one at home he went to his neighbours.
4. A letter lying on the table must be posted. 5. If asked
he will explain you everything. 6. We came up to the
crying girl to ask where her mother was. 7. I saw him
working in the garden. 8. I heard the children speaking in
the next room. 9. We saw an old woman coming towards
us and heard her asking for help. The weather being aw-
ful, I stayed at home and heard the rain beating on the
windows. 11. He turned and went out, we following him.
12. She sat silent, with her eyes fixed on the ground.
13. The children were seen running to the river. 14. The
flight to Moscow was heard announced. 15. The pupils
were heard discussing this problem with the teacher.
16. We had our TV-set repaired yesterday. 17. I want my
hair cut.
3. Преобразуйте предложения, употребив причастия
в функции а) определения; б) обстоятельства времени,
причины.
а) Образец: The man who is reading a book is my
father.
The man reading a book is my father.
1. I took the newspaper which was lying on the table.
2. The house which is being built opposite my house is a
modern nine-storeyed building. 3. The books which have
184
been written by Picul are read with interest. 4. The pupil
who is being asked by the teacher is Pavlov. 5. The car
which is parked in front of the house is mine.
б) Образец: As he was busy he refused an invitation.
Being busy he refused an invitation.
1. As he was late he had to excuse himself. 2. As he
had spent all his money he decided to go home. 3. When
they were going home they met their teacher. 4. While he
was translating the text, he wrote out new words. 5. After
they had visited the museum they decided to have a cup of
coffee. 6. The girl entered the room and didn’t lock it.
4. Объедините следующие предложения, употребив
нужную форму причастия.
Образец: Не was ill. Не had to stay at home.
Being ill he had to stay at home.
1. I knew that he was poor. I offered him a room.
2. She didn’t want to listen to the story again. She had
heard it before. 3. She entered the room suddenly. She
found them smoking. 4. I had looked through the fashion
magazine. I realized that my clothes were out of date.
5. She turned on the light. She was surprised at what she
saw. 6. I fed the dog. I sat down to my own dinner. 7. I
sat in the front row. I saw everything beautifully. 8. She
was singing a song. I heard it.
5. Употребите следующие пословицы в кратких си-
туациях.
If you want a thing well done, do it yourself.
Danger foreseen is half avoided.
Seldom seen, soon forgotten.
Rats desert a sinking ship.
Let sleeping dog lie.
ГЕРУНДИЙ
(The Gerund)
Герундий — это неличная форма глагола, сочетаю-
щая свойства глагола и существительного. Соответст-
вующей формы в русском языке нет. По значению к ге-
рундию близки такие русские отглагольные существи-
тельные как чтение, ожидание (reading, waiting) и т.п.
185
К глагольным свойствам относится наличие форм зало-
га и относительного времени (таких же, как и у причас-
тия), возможность иметь дополнение и определяться
наречием. Как и существительное, герундий может быть в
предложении подлежащим, частью составного сказуе-
мого, прямым и предложным дополнением, определе-
нием, обстоятельством. Ему могут предшествовать опреде-
лители: местоимения и существительные в притя-жатель-
ном падеже, предлоги, что не характерно для причастия.
Active Passive
Indefinie doing being done
Perfect having done having been done
Герундий как прямое дополнение употребляется пос-
ле таких глаголов как to like, to need, to prefer, to re-
member, to enjoy.
I enjoy listening to
classical music.
Мне доставляет удовольст-
вие слушать классическую
музыку.
Герундий как предложное дополнение может употре-
бляться после любого глагола с предлогом: to thank for,
to be responsible for, to be fond of, to be tired of, to look
forward to, to be interested in.
He is fond of playing Он увлекается игрой в
chess. шахматы.
Герундий как определение употребляется после аб-
страктных существительных с предлогами: the idea (of),
importance (of), way (of), experience (in), interest (in),
reason (for).
I saw no other way of Я не видел другого способа
doing it. сделать это.
Герундий как обстоятельство употребляется всегда с
предлогом. В функции обстоятельства времени он упо-
требляется с предлогами after, before, on, образа дейст-
вия — by, without, instead of, besides: Например:
Before having dinner Перед обедом необходимо
you must wash your мыть руки.
hands.
186
Герундий как часть сказуемого употребляется после
глаголов, выражающих начало, продолжение и конец
действия: to begin, to start, to continue, to go on, to
stop, to finish.
He finished translating
Он закончил переводить
the text.
текст.
Как герундий, так и инфинитив употребляется после
следующих глаголов и словосочетаний: to like, to begin,
to start, to continue, to hate, to prefer, to forget, to re-
member, to stop, to intend, it is (of) no use, it is useless,
it is (no) good.
It began raining (or: it
began to rain) early in
the morning.
It is no use talking (or:
it is no use to talk)
about it.
Дождь начал идти рано
утром.
Бесполезно говорить об
этом.
Употребление герундия или инфинитива после глаго-
ла to stop меняет смысл предложения. Например:
Не stopped reading ап Он перестал читать объяв-
adverticement. ление.
Не stopped to read ап Он остановился, чтобы
adverticement. прочитать объявление.
После глаголов to finish, to enjoy, to suggest, to
avoid, to excuse, to forgive, to mind, to imagine, to give
up, to go on, to keep on, а также после всех глаголов,
требующих предлогов, и словосочетаний: it’s worth,
can’t help, to feel like, to look like и прилагательного
busy употребляется только герундий.
This film is worth see- Этот фильм стоит посмот-
ing. - реть.
She is busy looking for а Она занята поиском новой
new job. работы.
Из вышеприведенных примеров видно, что герундий
может переводиться на русский язык отглагольным су-
ществительным, неопределенно-личной формой глагола,
деепричастием и придаточным предложением.
Герундий в сочетании с существительным в общем
или притяжательном падеже или местоимением в при-
тяжательном или объектном падеже образует герун-
187
диальный оборот (The Gerundial Complex), выполняю-
щий любую функцию в предложении, свойственную
герундию. На русский язык данный оборот переводится
придаточным предложением с союзами что (чтобы) с
предшествующими ему местоимениями то, тем что,
как.
Thank you for your
answering my letter.
I dislike my relatives’
interfering in my
affairs.
Спасибо за то, что ответи-
ли на мое письмо.
Мне не нравится то, что
родственники вмешивают-
ся в мои дела.
Упражнения
1. Определите форму и функцию герундия в следую-
щих предложениях. Переведите их на русский язык.
а) 1. Не finished speaking and sat down. 2. Stop argu-
ing and start working. 3. The children prefer watching TV
to reading. 4. Walking is very useful. 5. I had no hope of
meeting her here. 6. On seeing her parents the girl
laughed. 7. He is thinking of leaving his job and going to
America. 8. Did you hear of John’s having been sent
abroad? 9. She is looking forward to reading his new
book. 10. I don’t enjoy going to the doctor. 11. Grammar
is the art of speaking, reading and writing.
6) 1. There’s no danger of it happening again. 2. He
was wakened by someone knocking at the door. 3. Nobody
can go on living without some belief. 4. She does not like
the thought of leaving you alone. 5. I remember my
mother laughing at my jokes. 6. There came the sound of
the door closing then being locked. 7. On awakening she
dressed quickly and left the house. 8. Life seemed worth
fighting for. 9. Jane sat through her first lesson without
saying a word and without paying much attention to the
lecture.
2. Преобразуйте предложения, употребив герундий
вместо инфинитива.
Образец: I like to read.
I like reading.
1. I like to skate. 2. I hate to read detective stories.
3. I think to send him a telegramme. 4. I remember to tell
188
you about it. 5. They stopped to smoke. 6. They prefer to
stay at home in the evening. 7. He continued to speak to
his friends. 8. He kept to talk about the events.
3. Вставьте нужный no смыслу предлог.
1. I hated the idea ... your going there.
2. She said: “Excuse me ... coming in ...
knocking.”
3. He insisted ... accompanying them.
4. “I am tired ... being old and wise” my
grandmother said.
5. We’ll look forward ... seeing you.
6. I’m afraid I shan’t succeed ... being kind
and sympathetic in this situation.
7. Both windows needed ... cleaning.
8. She could not bear ... lying in the sun.
in
to
on
without
for
of
4. Вставьте подходящую no смыслу форму герундия.
1. Ted sat down without ... (speak) 2. He did not go
without ... Ann. (congratulate) 3. She kept on ..., her
voice low and controlled, (talk) 4. In the morning light,
she was ashamed of herself for ... so the night before, (be
frightened) 5.Nobody looks his best after ... up all night,
(sit) 6. His legs were tired from ... for days, (climb) 7. I
know every man who is worth ... . (know) 8. There’s hap-
piness in ... alive, (be)
5. Закончите предложения, употребив герундий.
1. There are a lot of ways of (сделать это). 2. What is
your idea of (обсудить этот вопрос сейчас)? 3. Do you
have the opportunity of (посетить выставку)? 4. The film
is worth (посмотреть). 5. I don’t like (напоминать ему об
этом). 6. It’s no use (плакать). 7. Do you remember (что
они уже рассказывали нам об этом)? 8. Не is busy
(подготовкой к докладу). 9. There was no other way of
(предупредить его).
6. Переведите:
1. Увидев клоуна, зрители рассмеялись. 2. Мальчик
не отрицал, что потерял книгу. 3. Учитель настаивал,
чтобы записали новые слова. 4. Эту книгу стоит прочи-
тать. 5. Я не одобряю того, что вы пропускаете уроки.
6. Я устала от того, что со мной обращаются как с
189
ребенком. 7. Мне не хочется идти на прогулку сейчас.
8. Мне стыдно, что я сделала так много ошибок в
последнем переводе.
7. Употребите следующие пословицы в кратких си-
туациях.
Seling is believing.
Repetition is the mother of learning.
There’s no use crying over spilt milk.
Обзорные упражнения
1. Употребите одну из форм причастия, герундия и
инфинитива.
а) 1. (be) a foreigner she couldn’t get accustomed to
our life for a long time.
2. (live) abroad for many years, he speaks English
without a foreign accent.
3. (know) everything about this man, we couldn’t trust
him.
4. I didn’t notice a letter (lie) on the table.
5. The article (publish) in the latest issue of the local
newspaper carries an interesting material for the young
people.
6) 1. I am sorry for (be late). 2. I enjoy (spend) my
week-ends on the bank of the river near the forest (gather)
berries and mushrooms. 3. Is the American screen version
of the novel “War and Peace” worth (see)? 4. The students
the finished (discuss) thes question of their (go) abroad in
summer but still couldn’t stop (argue). 5. I can’t help
(feel) sorry for animals (live) in Zoo.
в) 1. (read) English books in the original is a real
pleasure for me. 2. My aim is (graduate) from the Univer-
sity successfully and (become) a good specialist. 3. (pass)
the exams well I have (work) hard during the term. 4. I
am sorry (keep) you waiting. 5. I meant (to go) there but I
couldn’t.
r) 1. I wish (see) the manager. 2. It’s no use (wait).
3. I’m looking forward to (see) you. 4. Don’t forget (lock)
the door before (go) to bed. 5. My mother told me (not,
190
speak) to anyone about it. 6. He tried (explain) but she
didn’t want (listen). 7. Would you mind (show) me how
the lift works? 8. I’m beginning (understand) what you
mean. 9. The boys like (play) tennis but hate (do) lessons.
10. He surprised us all by (go) away without (say) “Good-
bye”. 11. Please, go on (write), I don’t mind (wait).
12. The doctor advised him (give up) (smoke). 13. I prefer
(drive) to (be driven). 14. I advise you (start) (look) for a
flat at once. 15. After (discuss) the matter for an hour the
committee left without (reach) any decision. 16. Most
people prefer (spend) money to (earn) it. 17. It’s not good
for children (eat) too many sweets.
2. Употребите одну из неличных форм: инфинитив,
герундий, причастие.
1. Не offered (lend) me the money. I didn’t like (take)
it but I had no other way out. 2. What was in the letter? I
don’t know. I did not want (open) it as it wasn’t addressed
to me. 3. Try (avoid) (be) late. He hates (be) kept (wait).
4. He heard the clock striking seven and knew it was time
for him (get) up. 5. I can hear the bell (ring) but nobody
seems (be coming) (open) the door. 6. Did you advise him
(go) to the police? — No, I didn’t like (give) any advice on
such a difficult matter. 7. I’m not used to (drive) on the
left. 8. It’s pleasant (sit) by the fire at night and (hear)
the wind (blow) outside. 9. It’s no use (write) to him, he
never answers letters. The only thing (do) is (go) and (see)
him. 10. Ask him (come) in. Don’t keep him (stand) at the
door.
3. Подчеркните и определите конструкции с нелич-
ными формами глагола. Переведите предложения.
1. The English being conservative, many old traditions
are still observed in England. 2. Their address having been
lost, we couldn’t write them about this news. 3. On leav-
ing the house I saw my bus approaching and hurried not
to miss it. 4. I have never heard her play the piano so
wonderfully. 5. Shakespeare’s works are known to be
translated into many languages of the world. 6. It’s for
him to solve this problem. 7. Our taking part in the Eng-
lish conference helped us greatly to improve our knowl-
edge of the language.
191
НАРЕЧИЕ
(The Adverb)
Наречием называется часть речи, которая обозначает
признаки или обстоятельства, при которых совершает-
ся действие (как, где, когда и т.д.).
По структуре наречия делятся на простые (here, now,
soon, then); производные, образованные от прилагатель-
ного при помощи суффикса -ly (slowly, quickly);
сложные (sometimes, somewhere) и составные, представ-
ляющие собой сочетания с предлогами или другими
наречиями (till now, from where). Наречия могут отно-
ситься:
1) к глаголу. В этом случае они являются обстоя-
тельством и стоят после определяемого глагола:
I get up early. Я встаю рано.
Не lives here. Он живет здесь.
2) к прилагательному или другому наречию, указы-
вая на их признаки:
Не is a very good Он очень хороший
engineer. инженер.
Не speaks English quite Он говорит по-английски
well. вполне прилично.
3) к предложению в целом:
Unfortunately, I don’t К сожалению, я ничего об
know anything about it. этом не знаю.
4) могут служить вопросительным словом:
Why were you absent? Почему ты отсутствовал?
5) могут соединять предложения:
I was ill, so I stayed in Я был болен, поэтому ос-
bed. тался в постели.
КЛАССИФИКАЦИЯ НАРЕЧИЙ ПО ЗНАЧЕНИЮ
По своему лексическому значению наречия делятся
на следующие разряды:
а) места: here — здесь, there — там, somewhere —
где-нибудь, куда-нибудь, где-то, куда-то, nowhere —
нигде, far — далеко, near — близко, inside — внутрь,
192
внутри, outside — наружу, снаружи, above — наверху,
выше, below — внизу, ниже.
б) времени: always — всегда, often — часто, usually —
обычно (как правило, стоят перед глаголами, за исклю-
чением to be); ever — когда-нибудь, never — никогда,
just — только что (стоят между вспомогательным и
смысловым глаголом); yet — уже; lately, recently — в
последнее время, before — прежде, since — с тех пор,
как (как правило стоят в конце предложения); now —
сейчас, today — сегодня, tomorrow — завтра, yesterday —
вчера (могут стоять как в начале, так и в конце предло-
жения);
в) меры и степени: very — очень, too — слишком, so —
так, rather — довольно, hardly — едва, quite — совсем,
enough — достаточно, almost, nearly — почти, much —
много, little — мало;
г) образа действия: well — хорошо, fast, quickly —
быстро, slowly — медленно, quietly — спокойно, easily —
легко.
Ряд наречий употребляются для придания словам
дополнительных смысловых оттенков: too, also, as well,
either — тоже, также, else — еще, even — даже, only —
только, just — просто.
Для соединения независимых самостоятельных пред-
ложений используются наречия so — поэтому, итак,
таким образом; then — затем, however — однако, be-
sides — кроме того, otherwise — иначе. Например:
It was late, so I went to Было поздно, поэтому я
bed. пошел спать.
Для присоединения придаточного предложения к
главному употребляются такие наречия как when —
когда, where — где, куда, why — почему, how — как.
Например:
I don’t know why he is Я не знаю, почему он от
absent. сутствует.
I don’t know where she Я не знаю, где она роди
was born. лась.
Многие наречия (главным образом образа действия
могут иметь степени сравнения, которые образуются
так же, как и степени сравнения прилагательных. Срав-
ните:
7 Зак. 2112
193
late — поздно, later — позднее, latest — позднее
всего, attentively — внимательно, more attentively —
более внимательно, most attentively — внимательнее
всего.
Упражнения
1. Укажите, являются выделенные слова прилага-
тельными или наречиями.
1. It is early autumn. I usually get up early. 2. We
shall take a fast train to Yalta. Don’t speak so fast, I
can’t understand you. 3. I have little time. She has slept
little today. There is very little difference between them.
4. You would have written the grammar test better if you
had learnt the tenses of the English verb. It is the worst
result you ever had. 5. You know this problem better than
I. Better to do well than to say well. 6. He lives in the Far
East. He lives far from his school. 7. How long did you
travel about Great Britain? Oh, it was a long and very
pleasant journey. 8. Excuse me, how do I get to the Uni-
versity? - Go straight down the street and then turn to
the left. 9. He is a very handsome young man, with
straight nose, blue eyes and black hair.
2. Выберите нужную форму прилагательного или
наречия.
1. I am (happy, happily) to meet you. They have lived
all their life (happy, happily). 2. Don’t speak to me so
(cold, coldly). Your hands are (cold, coldly), put on your
gloves. 3. The results of our work were (perfect, per-
fectly). We have done everything (perfect, perfectly). 4. “I
am quite (helpless, helplessly) in solving such problems”,
she said. She looked at them (helpless, helplessly) not
knowing what to do. 5. Can you tell me the (exact, ex-
actly) time of his arrival? Sorry, but I don’t know (exact,
exactly) when he comes back. 6. He often comes home
(late, lately). I haven’t seen him (late, lately).
3. Поставьте наречия, заключенные в скобках, на
соответствующее место в предложении.
1. I get letters from ту friends (often). 2. We shall go
(tomorrow, there). 3. Have you been to the Crimea (ever)?
4. I have been there (never). 5. They have returned from
the South (just). 6. I have not seen this film (yet). 7. He
gets up early (usually). 8. My mother cooks dinner for our
family (always). 9. She is very busy (always). 10. I haven’t
money to buy this TV-set (enough). 11. She knows French
well to work as an interpreter (enough).
4. Переведите на английский язык.
1. Она много читает. 2. Вы ходили куда-нибудь вче-
ра? - Нет, мы никуда не ходили, мы были дома вчера.
3. Я встречал его где-то, но не помню, где это было.
4. Мы думаем, что он достаточно умен, чтобы понять
нас. 5. Я никогда не забуду мои школьные годы. 6. Чем
больше вы будете читать, тем скорее расширите свой
словарь. 7. Рано или поздно его мечта осуществится, но
чем скорее, тем лучше для него. 8. Он упорно изучает
все предметы в школе. 9; Самолет летел так высоко, что
я с трудом смогла увидеть его. 10. Говорите громче, я
ничего не слышу.
ПРЕДЛОГ
(The Preposition)
Предлогами называются служебные слова, которые
выражают отношения слов в предложении. Наряду с
порядком слов они являются одним из основных спо-
собов выражения падежных отношений в английском
языке.
Предлоги бывают простые (of, for, on), сложные
(below, between), составные (in front of, out of). Многие
предлоги имеют не одно, а несколько значений. Напри-
мер: on Saturday — в субботу, on the table — на столе.
Предлоги обычно ставятся перед существительными,
к которым они относятся, однако в ряде случаев могут
стоять после них, а также в конце предложения.
Например:
There is a picture on the На стене картина,
wall.
What street do you live На какой улице ты жи-
in? вешь?
This novel is much Об этом романе много го-
spoken about. ворят.
194
195
Предлоги в английском языке подразделяются на
предлоги места, направления и времени.
Предлоги места
on—на
in — в, на
at—у, в, на
near — около
over — над
under — под
between — между
among — среди
behind — за
across — вдоль,
через
in front of — перед
through — через,
сквозь
on the desk, on the wall
in the room, in the street
at the window, at the meeting
near the door, near the wall
over the table, over the sofa
under the table, under the bed
between two chairs, between the
doors
among the students, among them
behind the house, behind the tree
across the street, across the river
in front of the house, in front of the
column
through the window, through the
glass
Предлоги направления
to — к, на, в towards — в направлении, к to the library, to the South, to the park towards the forest, towards the house
from — от, из, с into — в (внутрь) out of — из (изнутри) - from the table, from work into the room, into the box out of the house, out of the drawer
off — с (со), от off the table, off the wall
Предлоги времени
on — в
in — в, через
at—в, у
by—к
from...till—от(с) ...до
since — с
for — в течение
on Sunday, on the tenth of
February
in two days, in September
at 7 o’clock, at noon
by 3 o’clock, by noon
from early morning till late at
night
since 5 o’clock, since midnight
for an hour, for ages
196
during — во время
before — до (перед)
after — после
till (until) — до
between — между
during the lecture, during the
break
before the bell, before winter
after the break, after classes
till May, till the end of the
year
between one and two o’clock
Примечание: От перечисленных выше следует отли-
чать случаи так называемого несвободного, фиксирован-
ного употребления предлогов в том или ином сочетании
слов: on duty — дежурный, ответственный, on foot —
пешком, а также широкое употребление послелогов, т.е.
предлогов, обязательных для ряда глаголов и стоящих
после них (to be interested in — интересоваться чем-
либо, to be responsible for — отвечать за и т.д.). Такие
слова следует запоминать.
Упражнения
1. Переведите следующие предложения сначала на
русский язык, а затем снова на английский, уделяя
внимание употреблению предлогов.
1. Не went to Moscow. They will go to the South in a
week. She goes to work by bus. 2. They stayed at home in
the evening. I stayed at the entrance of the theatre. He
stayed at the hotel. 3. I was born on the first of May.
4. Our lessons begin at six o’clock in the evening. 5. The
child fell on the floor and began crying. 6. He took the
picture off the wall. 7. He looked through the window.
8. She travelled by train (bus, plane). 9. We went for a
walk. 10. He worked at the post office. 11. We turned
round the corner. 12. We passed over the bridge.
13. Would you like to sit in front? 14. She walked along
the street. 15. The bus stopped and we got off. 16. He
travelled about many countries of the world.
2. Прочитайте следующие предложения, обращая
внимание на изменение значения глаголов в зависи-
мости от предлогов.
She is looking after the Она заботится о детях,
children.
197
She is looking at the
children.
She is looking for the
magazine.
She is looking through
the magazine.
We stood up and went
out of the room.
They stood for peace.
Она смотрит на детей.
Она ищет журнал.
Она просматривает жур-
нал.
Мы встали и вышли из
комнаты.
Они выступали за мир.
3. Прочитайте следующие словосочетания и предло-
жения, обращая внимание на различие в употреблении
предлогов в английском и русском языках.
in the morning/on а
sunny morning
in the afternoon/on a
hot afternoon
in the evening/on a cold
evening
Wait for me.
Listen to me.
Ask for cigarettes,
please.
Go on!
Come along!
He is at home.
She goes in for sports.
I am interested in music.
I’m going to enter the
University.
We joined the group of
students.
утром/солнечным утром
днем/жарким днем
вечером/холодным вечером
Подождите меня.
Послушайте меня.
Попросите сигареты, по-
жалуйста.
Продолжайте!
Пойдем!
Он дома.
Она занимается спортом.
Я интересуюсь музыкой.
Я собираюсь поступать в
университет.
Мы присоединились к
группе студентов.
4. Преобразуйте предложения с предлогами to и for :
Образец. The pupil is giving his exercise-book to the
teacher.
The pupil is giving the teacher his exercise-
book.
1. Kate is telling an interesting story to her friend.
2. Mother is reading a fairy-tale to her little son.
3. Parents are buying a new coat for him. 4. Grandmother
is showing coloured pictures to her grandchildren. 5. My
198
aunt is making a new dress for me. 6. She is singing a
song for them. 7. Tell the news to everybody!
5. Преобразуйте следующие предложения, употребив
предлоги to и for.
Образец; Show Ann your pictures.
Show your pictures to Ann.
1. I must buy my niece a doll. 2. Peter, bring me the
raincoat. 3. Nick, give Tom this English book. 4. They
buy the children new toys. 5. Don’t read them this letter.
6. They are writing Jane a note. 7. We want to send him
some flowers. 8. Give him your note-books, please. 9. I’m
going to explain you a new rule.
6. Заполните пропуски предлогами by или with.
1. The new house will be surrounded ... the garden.
2. The book has been written ... a group of authors.
3. The sky is covered ... clouds. 4. The child is covered ...
a blanket ... his mother. 5. I can open the door of my
house ... the key. 6. The cat was killed ... the car. 7. The
man was killed ... the gun. 8. The flat is heated ... the
central heating. 9. He went to Sochi ... his parents.
7. Заполните пропуски предлогами в позиции после
глаголов.
1. I usually wake ... at 7 o’clock and then it is time for
me to get ... . 2. I put ... my dress and go ... the kitchen.
3. Don’t come ... my place tonight. I’m short ... time.
4. Don’t turn ... the radio. I want to listen ... the music.
5. I am fond ... my new friend. 6. This writer’s books are
always popular ... the readers. 7. Ann is very good ...
English. She helps her friends ... grammar. 8. Will you
tell me where to get ...? 9. He went ... Riga. 10. When it
is dark we switch ... the light.
8. Заполните пропуски нужными no смыслу предлогами.
I like Jane best ... all my friends. She is a pretty girl
... large blue eyes, brown hair and slender figure. ...
summer we usually spend our free time ... the bank ... the
river not far ... our town. We swim ... the river, lie ... the
sun and gather berries ... the forest. ... the evening we
return home happy and sunburnt. ... Sunday we are going
... an excursion ... bus. We shall return ... Minsk ... three
199
days. ... our stay ... Kiev we shall see many places ... in-
terest. Jane is a student ... the University. I am also go-
ing to enter ... the University this year.
9. Скажите по-английски:
на юг, на юге, в школу, в университет, в кино, в ма-
газин, в школе, в университете, в кино, в магазине, о
романе, о писателе, об артисте, о картине; книги писа-
теля, картины художника, улицы города, население рес-
публики, двадцать первого августа 1991 года, первого
января 1990 года.
10. Переведите следующие предложения:
1. Моя мать живет за городом, но зимой она приез-
жает к нам и обычно остается с нами на неделю или
две. 2. По пути из университета я должна купить биле-
ты в кино. Я также хочу зайти в магазин и купить что-
нибудь на ужин. 3. У нас хорошая двухкомнатная квар-
тира с большой кухней в центре города. Она находится
на втором этаже в новом доме. 4. Университет располо-
жен недалеко от нашего дома. 5. Между диваном и кни-
жным шкафом нет места. 6. Среди моих друзей нет
врачей. 7. Мой дедушка сидит в кресле перед телеви-
зором. 8. По-моему, твоя квартира слишком мала для
вашей семьи.
11. Закончите предложения. Запомните употребле-
ние предлогов после глаголов.
1. Му family consists of ... . 2. Не is capable of ... .
3. Russian winter is famous for ... . 4. People in all win-
dows were looking out at ... . 5. We are proud of ... .
6. I’m very interested in ... . 7. It’s rude to laugh at ... .
8. This writer is very popular with ... . 9. Who is respon-
sible for ... ? 10. I?ve heard a report on ... . 11. I feel
sorry for ... . 12. What’s the use of ... . 13. Don’t worry
about .1. . 14. What’s wrong with ... . 15. They are
speaking about ... . 16. They are speaking to ... .
СОЮЗ
(The Conjunction)
Союзами называются служебные слова, которые упо-
требляются для соединения членов предложения и са-
200
мих предложений. Союзы делятся на простые (and, if,
that), производные (although, before) и составные (as
well as, both ... and).
По выполняемой ими роли в предложении союзы
делятся на сочинительные и подчинительные.
К наиболее употребительным сочинительным союзам
относятся and — и, a; but — но, ог — или, as well
as — также как (и), both ... and — как ... так и, either
... or — или .... или, neither ... nor — ни ... ни, not only
... but — не только ... но и.
Сочинительные союзы соединяют однородные члены
предложения и предложения:
There were many people
on the platform and all
of them were trying to
get into the train.
There is a vase with
flowers and a glass of
water on the table.
На платформе было много
народу, и все пытались по-
пасть в поезд.
На столе стоит ваза с цве
тами и стакан воды.
Подчинительные союзы
жение с придаточными:
соединяют главное предло-
а) подлежащими (that)
That she won’t come is
sure.
To, что она не придет, не
вызывает сомнения.
б) сказуемыми (if, whether)
The question is Вопрос в том, придет ли
if(whether) she will она.
come.
в) дополнительными (that)
She said that she Она сказала, что не при-
wouldn’t come. дет.
г) определительными (which, that, who)
Here is the man who has Вот тот человек, который
spoken to you over the разговаривал с вами по те-
phone. лефону.
д) обстоятельственными: времени (after, before,
when, while, since, until, till, as), условия (if, whether,
unless), места (where), причины (as, because), образа
201
действия (as, as if, as though), цели (lest, so ... that, in
order that), сравнительными (as ... as, than):
As it was hot we decided
to have a swim.
If I have money I shall go
to the restaurant.
You’ll ask her about it
when she returns.
Так как было жарко, мы
решили искупаться.
Если у меня будут день-
ги, я пойду в ресторан.
Вы спросите у нее об
этом, когда она вернется.
Упражнения
1. Определите роль союзов в следующих предложе-
ниях.
1. I arrived in New York, where I was to change trains.
2. Mark Twain wrote many short stories and novels.
3. His father died when he was twelve and the boy had to
find a job. 4. He arrive in our country in 1940 and stayed
there till the war broke out. 5. That she has returned
home is quite natural. 6. If these people knew who I was
they would help me. 7. As I was saying this my friend's
smiling face appeared at the door. 8. I was walking qui-
etly so that nobody could hear. 9. He is as young as his
brother.
2. Опустите, где возможно, союзные слова и относи-
тельные местоимения, соединяющие предложения.
1. Tolstoy who is the world famous writer was born in
1828. 2. I know the girl with whom you have been dancing
for two hours. 3. The car which they have bought is of the
latest model. 4. Belarus goes by the time, which is three
hours earlier than London’s time. 5. The man whom you
need has just left. 6. We usually go to the cinema which
is round the corner. 7. The watch which you are looking
at is wrong.
3. Соедините предложения, употребив соответст-
вующие союзы и местоимения.
1. Му neighbour ... is a doctor has moved to a new
flat. 2. Do you remember the day ... he arrived in Mos-
cow? 3. Unfortunately, I can’t remember the person ...
I have borrowed the pen from. 4. The man ... you see at
the desk is my secretary. 5. Where is the shop ... sells
202
gloves? 6. The book ... you have given to me is very inter-
esting. 7. The shop ... we buy our food is closed.
8. Mother said to her son ... he must help her about the
house.
4. Заполните пропуски союзами as ... as, not so ... as
и переведите предложения на русский язык.
1. This box is ... heavy ... that one. 2. The weather to-
day is ... cold ... it was yesterday. 3. Is Text 10 ... diffi-
cult ... Text 9? — No, it is not. Text 10 is ... difficult ...
Text 8. 4. Have you got ... many friends ... I have?
5. This year you don’t work at your English ... much ...
you can. 6. Is it ... easy to get up early in winter ... it is
in summer? 7. Greek buildings were beautiful ... well ...
useful. 8. Ancient Greeks ... well ... ancient Egyptians
knew the art of building with cut stone. 9. Those decora-
tions are ... beautiful ... these. 11. This street is ... wide
... the next one.
5. Заполните пропуски союзами either ... or, neither ...
nor, both ... and. Переведите предложения на рус-
ский язык.
1. We call this room “the hall” and use it ... as a sit-
ting-room ... a living-room. 2. Chekhov is well known ...
in our country and abroad. 3. We saw ... you ... your
friend at the party yesterday. 4. At the party they will ...
dance ... listen to music. 5. You may have ... tea ... cof-
fee. 6. If you go by tram you may be late for lessons. Take
... the underground ... a taxi. 7. ... Nick .... George were
late for the lessons because they went by tram. 8. From
the corridor you can get ... to the sitting-room ... to the
study. 9. In the evening we .... watch TV ... read newspa-
pers. 10. ... Tom ... Harry has much money
ПРЕДЛОЖЕНИЕ И ЕГО СТРУКТУРА
В английском языке имеются повествовательные
(declarative), вопросительные (interrogative) и восклица-
тельные (exclamatory) предложения. В отличие от рус-
ского языка порядок слов во всех типах английских
предложений нормативный, строго фиксированный. В
повествовательном предложении на первом месте стоит
подлежащее и его определители, на втором — ска-
203
зуемое. За ним следуют все остальные члены предло-
жения: косвенное и прямое дополнение, обстоятельство
и т.п. Например:
The teacher is explaining
1 2
the students a new rule now.
3 4 5
Обстоятельства места и времени могут, однако,
стоять и перед подлежащим, особенно если конец пред-
ложения перегружен другими обстоятельствами или
определениями. Например:
Yesterday the teacher was
explaining a new gram-
mar rule about the use
of tenses in modern
English.
Вчера учитель объяснял
новое грамматическое пра-
вило употребления времен
в современном английском
языке.
Подлежащее в предложении может быть выражено
существительным, местоимением, числительным, не-
личными формами глагола (герундий, инфинитив), суб-
стантивированным прилагательным, формальными эле-
ментами, заменяющими подлежащее или вводящими
его в предложение (it — в безличных предложениях,
there — в конструкции there is/are, one — в неопреде-
ленно-личных предложениях, it, this — в назывных).
Например:
The station was not far
away.
Nobody saw him yester-
day.
Smoking is not allowed
here.
To smoke here means to
violate the rule.
The blind usually walk
with white sticks.
It is getting dark.
One must know this.
It is a book.
Вокзал был недалеко.
Никто не видел его вчера.
Курить здесь не разреша-
ется.
Курить здесь — значит
нарушать правило.
Слепые обычно ходят с бе-
лыми тросточками.
Становится темно. .
Это нужно знать.
Это книга.
Сказуемое выражается глаголом в личной форме,
который может употребляться как самостоятельно, так
и в сочетании с другими частями речи. Например:
204
I shall come home at 5 Я приду домой в 5 часов,
o’clock.
Не has finished packing Он закончил складывать
his things. свои вещи.
Сказуемое согласуется с подлежащим в числе и лице.
Общее правило таково: с подлежащим в единственном
числе глагол употребляется также в единственном числе
и наоборот.
Структура вопросительных предложений
В английском языке существует несколько типов
вопросительных предложений: общие вопросы (general
questions), специальные (special questions), альтерна-
тивные (alternative questions), разделительные (disjun-
ctive questions).
Общие вопросы — это вопросы ко всему предложе-
нию. На них можно коротко ответить yes (да) или
по (нет). общих вопросов характерен обратный
порядок слов (инверсия), т.е. на первое место выносится
сказуемое или его часть (первый вспомогательный гла-
гол, модальный глагол).
Have you а саг?
Are you happy with your
answer?
Does he spend his holi
days by the sea?
Have you been waiting
for her for a long time?
Can you play the piano?
У тебя есть машина?
Ты доволен своим отве-
том?
Он проводит свои канику-
лы у моря?
Ты долго ее ждешь?
Ты умеешь играть на
пианино?
Краткие ответы на общие вопросы образуются сле-
дующим образом. Для выражения согласия употреб-
ляется форма yes + подлежащее, выраженное личным
местоимением, + глаголы to be, to have или первый
вспомогательный глагол в утвердительной форме в нуж-
ном лице и числе. Для выражения несогласия употреб-
ляется форма по + подлежащее, выраженное личным
местоимением, + глаголы to be, to have или первый
вспомогательный глагол в отрицательной форме. На-
пример:
Are you a student? — Yes, I am. No, I am not.
205
Has he a sister? — Yes, he has. No, he hasn’t.
Do you know him? — Yes, I do. No, I don’t.
Have the workers done their work? — Yes, they have.
No, they haven’t.
Will the event take place tomorrow? — Yes, it will.
No, it won’t.
Специальные вопросы ставятся к одному из членов
предложения с целью уточнения информации. Следова-
тельно, на них всякий раз требуется конкретный, опре-
деленный ответ.
Специальные вопросы строятся на основе структуры
общего вопроса, предваряя ее вопросительным словом.
Например:
When do you usually get
up?
Why were you absent
yesterday?
What had he done before
leaving the room?
Когда вы обычно встаете?
Почему вы вчера отсутст-
вовали?
Что он сделал, прежде чем
уйти из комнаты?
В вопросах к подлежащему сохраняется порядок
слов утвердительного предложения, при этом глагол
ставится в 3-м лице единственного числа:
Who reads the books?
Who gave you my ad-
dress?
What is there in the
corner of the room?
Who has got three
brothers?
Кто читает книги?
Кто дал тебе мой адрес?
Что находится в углу ком-
наты?
У кого есть три брата?
Альтернативные вопросы предполагают выбор меж-
ду двумя предметами, лицами, действиями, признаками
и т.д. Они строятся по типу общих вопросов, но с сою-
зом или (or). Например:
Do you like strong or
weak tea?
Are you leaving for Mos-
cow today or tomorrow?
Вы любите крепкий или
слабый чай?
Вы уезжаете в Москву се-
годня или завтра?
Разделительные вопросы представляют собой вы-
сказывания, заканчивающиеся вопросом “не так ли?, не
правда ли?” Первая часть этих вопросов строится по
206
типу повествовательного предложения, вторая — по
типу вопросительного (усеченный общий вопрос). Если
первая часть утвердительная, то вторая отрицательная
и наоборот. Например:
You want to help me, don’t
you?
You don’t want to help
him, do you?
She is very pretty, isn’t
she?
Вы хотите мне помочь, не
так ли?
Вы не хотите ему по-
мочь, не так ли?
Она очень симаптичная, не
правда ли?
Структура отрицательных предложений
Наиболее распространенным способом выражения от-
рицания в английском языке является употребление
частицы not. В предложении она ставится непосредст-
венно после глаголов to be и to have в the Present и the
Past Indefinite, после модальных глаголов, а также
после первого вспомогательного глагола, если сказуемое
выражено сложной аналитической формой. Например:
This is not a girl, it’s a
boy.
I haven’t got any friends
in England,
You needn’t hurry.
He will not (won’t) speak
to you now.
I don’t know him.
Это не девочка, это маль-
чик.
У меня нет друзей в Анг-
лии.
Тебе не надо торопиться.
Он не будет с тобой теперь
разговаривать.
Я его не знаю.
Кроме частицы not в английском языке имеется ряд
слов, способных выражать отрицание своим лексичес-
ким значением. Это:
1) отрицательные местоимения nobody, nothing, no-
where, no one, neither of, none, а также местоимение no,
которое употребляется особенно часто после глаголов to
have и в конструкции there is/are. Например:
I have no flowers with У меня с собой нет цветов,
те.
There is no salt on the На столе нет соли.
table.
Nobody can help me. Никто не может мне по-
мочь.
2) союз neither ... nor:
207
They had neither child-
ren nor relatives.
У них не было ни детей,
ни родственников.
3) наречия never, hardly:
She never helps anybody.
Она никогда никому не
помогает.
Она ушла не простившись.
4) предлог without:
She left without saying
good-bye.
5) отрицательные приставки in-, im-, un-, dis-:
He is incapable of doing
this.
He is unaware of the fact.
Он не в состоянии сделать
это.
Он ничего не знает об этом.
Упражнения
1. Определите способы выражения подлежащего и
сказуемого в следующих предложениях.
1. Many great men in England have been buried in
Westminster Abbey. 2. Everyone is ready to help him.
3. Our cosmonauts have spent hundreds of hours in outer
space. 4. One needn’t go to a post-office to send a letter.
5. To send letters from one community to another was
necessary even in ancient times. 6. There is a railway road
connecting these two towns. 7. It is autumn. 8. He was
late for the train. 9. It has been raining for 2 days. 10. He
began to prepare for exams. 11. She stopped crying and
looked at me hopefully. 12. He is considered to be a clever
man. 13. His work is interesting and important. 14. Jack
has to take a taxi.
2. Определите безличные предложения из числа при-
веденных ниже.
1. It is my room. 2. It is the shortest month of the
year. 3. It is warmer today than it was yesterday. 4. Is it
necessary to go there? 5. It was then that he made his fa-
mous discovery. 6. It's a fine day today. 7. It’s a pleasure
to walk to the forest on such a day. 8. It is my pen. 9. It
is difficult to study French. 10. It was Mendeleev who
discovered the Periodic Law of Elements. 11. It is impor-
tant not to miss classes. 12. Is it hot in summer?
208
3. Преобразуйте предложения, употребив конструк-
цию there is/are.
Образец; I see (have) several English books on the
shelf.
There are several English books on the shelf.
1. I see much sand on the beach. 2. I see a man at the
corner. 3. I see many students in my classroom. 4. He
hasn’t any pictures on the wall. 5. I have no red ink. 6. We
have a lot of ports in the Atlantic Ocean. 7. I can see a
letter lying on the floor. 8. I can’t see anybody here. 9. I no-
ticed only two mistakes in his dictation. 10. He knew only
one way out of the situation. 11. I could see yellow cur-
tains on your window. 12. He noticed two more men be-
hind the house.
4. Проанализируйте построение общих вопросов и
кратких ответов на них.
a) Am I right?
Is there any butter on
the plate?
Are they busy?
Was the weather fine?
Will they be at home in
the evening?
6) Have you a sister?
Has he got a book?
Do you have dinner at
two?
Does he have to excuse
himself?
в) Can you come tomor-
row?
Must I follow your ad-
vice?
May I smoke here?
Is he to leave for Paris?
r) Does he like animals?
Did you come home late
yesterday?
Will he ring you up?
Have you done your
homework?
Yes, you are. No, you aren’t.
Yes, there is some. No, there
isn’t any.
Yes, they are. No, they aren’t.
Yes, it was. No, it wasn’t.
Yes, they will. No, they
won’t.
Yes, I have. No, I haven’t.
Yes, he has. No, he hasn’t.
Yes, I do. No, I don’t.
Yes, he does. No, he doesn’t.
Yes, I can. No, I can’t.
Yes, you must. No, you
needn’t.
Yes, you may. No, you may
not.
Yes, he is. No, he isn’t.
Yes, he does. No, he doesn’t.
Yes, I did. No, I didn’t.
Yes, he will. No, he won’t.
Yes, I have. No, I haven’t.
209
5. Запомните способы образования утвердительной
и отрицательной формы краткой реплики «и я тоже».
I haven’t had a holiday for two years. — Neither have I.
I don’t understand English humour. — Neither do I.
I didn’t see that film. — Neither did I.
I can swim well. — So can I.
I like to drive very fast. — So do I.
He is rich and famous. — So am I.
6. Прочитайте и запомните модель построения воп-
росов к подлежащему.
1. Who works as an engineer?
2. Who lives next door to you?
3. Who sent you a telegram?
4. Who was speaking to you?
5. What begins at 8 o’clock?
6. What is there on the wall?
7. What was lying in the box?
8. What will contribute to your success?
7. Образуйте разделительные вопросы от следую-
щих утверждений.
Образец: Ann knew it, didn’t she?
You can’t swim, can you?
He is happy, isn’t he?
There is no bread at home, is there?
1. It’s cold. 2. Tom has a car. 3. You can drive. 4. He
should drive slowly. 5. He plays well. 6. I was right. 7. You
did it yourself. 8. You won’t be long. 9. They needn’t pay.
10. They aren’t allowed to play cards. 11. She doesn’t know
you. 12. We shan’t be here. 13. You hear me. 14. Professor
N. lectures on mathematics. 15. You understood him easily.
16. She will talk to the teacher. 17. You have a sister.
8. Поставьте альтернативные вопросы к следую-
щим предложениям, используя слова, данные в скобках.
Образец: This pencil is bad (good).
— Is this pencil bad or (is it) good?
1. Your friend is a doctor (teacher). 2. These pencils
are brown (yellow). 3. I’m leaving tonight (tomorrow).
4. The book is open at page ten (twelve). 5. He is taking
the book off the table (shelf). 6. Peter is sitting at the
210
window (corner). 7. The classroom is large (small). 8. You
went for a walk with Ann (Lena). 9. The train leaves at 10
(10.15).
9. Ответьте на следующие вопросы. Обратите вни-
мание на их образование.
а) 1. What are you? 2. What language do you learn?
3. What kind of books do you like to read? 4. When were
you born? 6. When do you get up? 6. Where do you live?
7. Where will you go tomorrow? 8. Where were you going
when I met you? 9. Why were they so tired? 10. Why
have you chosen this profession? 11. How are you?
12. How do you like your coffee, strong or weak? 13. How
many sisters and brothers have you? 14. How much does
your bag cost? 15. How long have you been studying Eng-
lish? 16. How often do you visit your grandparents?
6) 1. Is Romeo and Juliet written by Shakespeare?
2. Will your friend be invited to the party? 3. What is
your jacket made of? 4. What planet has been known as
the Morning Star? 5. By whom was America discovered?
6. By whom was War and Peace written? 7. When was the
Republic of Belarus declared? 8. When was the Minsk un-
derground built? 9. Where was Jack London born?
10. Поставьте следующие предложения в вопроси-
тельную и отрицательную формы.
1. A new play is being staged at our theatre. 2. The
hall is usually separated from the stage. 3. He had been
introduced to me before I met you. 4. The children were
taken home. 5. He is loved by everybody. 6. The carpet
was made by hand. 7. The doors are open. 8. Animals are
fed twice a day at the zoo. 9. Moscow University was
founded in 1755. 10. They will be presented with flowers
on their birthday.
11. Поставьте вопросы к выделенным словам.
1. I’ve known him for many years. 2. He works at the li-
brary every Saturday. 3. Our teacher always speaks Eng-
lish in class. 4. Our lessons usually last two hours.
5. His sister works for “Philips”. 6. They are discussing
this question now. 7. My friend is a teacher. 8. He was in
Brest last week. 9. Doctor Petrov spoke to me about my
son’t health.
211
ЛЕКСИКА
UNIT 1
Conversational Topic ABOUT MYSELF
My name is Petrova Alla. I am Belarusian. I was born
on May 5, 1982 in the village of Bakino, Slutsk district,
Minsk region. Two years ago our family moved to Minsk
where I live now together with my parents. My father is a
doctor, he works at a hospital. My mother is a housewife.
She has much work to do about the house. We are five in
the family. I have a younger sister and a brother. They
are both pupils. Lucy is in the fifth form and Boris is a
pupil of the ninth form. Our family is very united.
In May I finished school No 60 in Minsk. I always did
well at school and learned with great interest. I also took
an active part in social life, attended sport sections and
subject circles.
My favourite subject at school was Literature. Maths
and physics came easy to me too. I was on the top of the
list in our class in these subjects but they were not so in-
teresting to me. I also liked English. I’d like to learn some
other European languages to communicate with people
from different countries.
I’m quite sociable and easy to deal with. I have many
friends with whom we spend much time together. I can
also add that I’m energetic, rather intelligent, patient,
calm and never lose my temper. I love animals and child-
ren. My hobby is collecting badges.
My ambition is to become a good expert in languages.
This year I’ve left school. Now I’m an applicant for entry
to the Belarusian University, Philological Department. I
hope my dream will come true. If I fail in my exams I’ll be
very upset, but next year I’ll try to enter the University
again.
You see, my biography isn’t long. I can only add that
I’m fond of reading books on history and I’m keen on
212
sports. I’ve got the first category in volleyball and have
many friends among sportsmen. I also like shaping, it
helps me to keep fit.
Тематический словарь
biography, n биография
name, n имя
surname, n фамилия
nationality, n национальность
age, n возраст
occupation, n занятие, род
деятельности
be married, v быть женатым
be single, v быть холостым
go to school ходить в школу
leave (finish) закончить
school школу
go to college поступать в
институт
sociable, a общительный
communicate, v общаться
intelligent, a умный
applicant, n абитуриент
first-year stu-
dent, n
introduce one-
self, v
get acquainted, v
be born,v
die, v
come from, v
enter the Uni-
versity
fail in an exam
pass exams
serve in the
army
patient, a
calm, a
ambition, n
первокурсник
представиться
познакомиться
родиться
умереть
происходить
поступить в
университет
провалиться
на экзамене
сдать экзамены
служить в ар-
мии
терпеливый
спокойный
стремление
Упражнения
1. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. What is your name?/Who are you?
2. Where and when were you born?
3. How old are you?
4. Are you Belarusian?
5. Have you got a family?
6. How many are you in the family?
7. What relations do you have in your family (parents,
sisters, brothers, grandparents, etc.)?
8. Where do you live? I What’s your permanent ad-
dress?
9. Do you work? I What do you do?
10. When did you finish school?
11. How well did you do at school?
12. What was your favourite subject?
13. Do you like to read?
14. Who is your favourite writer?
15. What sport do you go in for?
213
16. What are you going to be?
17. Do you know about the difficulties of your future
profession?
18. What will you do if you don’t enter the University?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. Не was born in 1975.
2. Не lives in Minsk.
3. He is Belarusian.
4. He finished school number five.
5. He worked at a plant.
III. Образуйте предложения no модели. Обратите
внимание на наименование различных национальностей.
Образец: Не comes from England (1).
Really? He doesn’t look English (2).
(1) (2)
France French
Sweden Swedish
Germany German
the United States American
Japan Japanese
Greece Greek
Italy Italian
Denmark Danish
IV. Заполните анкету.
Surname_________________
Nationality_____________
Occupation______________
Date of arrival in London
Length of stay
First name.
Date of birth
Place of birth
Address______
V. Поставьте 10 вопросов,
when...? how long...? who...? have you...?
начинающихся c what...?
VI. Переведите текст на английский язык.
Меня зовут Михаил, коротко Миша. Мое полное имя
Михаил Иванович Федоров. Я русский, но живу в
Беларуси. Мне почти 20 лет. Я студент второго курса
медицинского института. Я хочу стать врачом и
214
работать в городской больнице. Мне нравятся занятия в
институте, и я стараюсь не пропускать их.
Я родился в Курске в семье врача. Мой отец —
детский врач, а мать — медсестра. После окончания
Московского медицинского института они приехали
работать в Курск и живут там уже 16 лет. Я закончил
школу № 5 в Курске и уехал к бабушке в Беларусь.
Летом я обычно езжу к родителям. Я не женат пока, но
собираюсь жениться через год. У меня есть девушка.
Она тоже студентка мединститута.
VII. Составьте ситуации, аналогичные заданным.
Расскажите о себе, своих друзьях, родственниках,
знакомых.
1) Hello! Му name is Marina. I’m 19 years old and I
come from a town called Novogrudok. I’m a student and I
live at a hostel. I study at the University. My elder
brother is also a student of the University and lives at a
hostel too. We are going to become teachers.
2) There is very little I can tell you about my friend.
You know he is an orphan (сирота). His parents died
many years ago. He used to live with his grandmother in
his childhood. He hasn’t got any other close relatives ex-
cept her. He is a good sportsman now and he doesn’t like
to speak about himself.
VIII. Прочитайте и переведите диалог на русский
язык.
N.: Pleased to meet you. My name is Nick and yours?
P.: My full name is Peter Popov. I am very glad to
share a room with you in the hostel. I think we’ll get on
well, shan’t we?
N.: I hope so. What year student are you?
P.: I’m a first-year student of the law faculty, I’m only
17. And you?
N.: I am a second-year student. You see, I entered the
University after the Army. So I’ll be 22 in two days.
P.: My best congratulations, Nick. You were born in
1977, the same as my elder brother. His birthday is Sep-
tember, 25. And what place do you come from?
215
N.: I was born in Brest region. It’s rather far from
here. My family lives in the country. And what about
your family?
P.: My parents live in Molodechno. It’s not far from
Minsk. It takes me two hours to get there by electric
train. My father is a technician and my mother is a book-
keeper. I am the only child in our family. And have you
got brothers or sisters?
N.: Oh, my family is very large. I have both parents,
grandparents, two sisters and a brother.
P.: Do you all live together?
N.: Fancy that! We all live in a big private house. The
remarkable thing is that we practically never quarrel.
Come and see us. I’ll be glad to introduce you to my fami-
ly-
P.: All right. I’ll be glad to know them all.
IX. Прочитайте текст. Запомните различные
способы обращения к людям в Великобритании.
There are several ways of addressing people in English.
The most universal ones that can be used when speaking
to strangers as well as to people you know are:
Mr. — to a man, Mr. Brown;
Miss — to an unmarried woman, Miss Brown;
Mrs. — to a married woman, Mrs. Brown;
Ms. — to a woman whose marital status is unknown
(mostly used in the written, e.g. Ms. Brown).
Mr., Miss, etc. are never to be used without the per-
son’s second name.
If you wish to attract somebody’s attention (e.g. in the
street, in an office, in a shop, etc.) it is nice to say: Ex-
cuse me, please...
People who have a scientific degree — a PhD, ScD —
are to be addressed Dr (doctor) Brown, whereas doctors
who cure people are simply Doctors (no name is neces-
sary). Professors can also be addressed by the title only.
Sir and Madame are mostly used when speaking to the
customers. You’d better use officer — addressing a po-
liceman, Your Majesty addressing a King or a Queen, La-
dies and Gentlemen addressing a group of people.
In fact people in the English speaking countries prefer
calling each other by the first name: Peter, Ann, etc.
216
X. Переведите текст со словарем.
FAMILY HISTORY
Му father was English, my mother Scottish, and I vis-
ited Scotland recently with the desire to discover what
I could about my Scottish ancestors. My grandmother’s
name was Renton. Her husband, my grandfather, spent
most of his working life in India. After he died she came
back to Scotland and settled down with her sisters in an
old house in a village called Gullance. As a small boy I
was taken to visit her there.
I knew that my great-grandfather, my grandmother’s
father, had written a book about his experiences as a
young minister in Canada, so I went to the National Li-
brary in Edinburgh to find out if they had a copy. Ho-
wever, the visit was a disappointment. There were a num-
ber of Rentons in the catalogue. But I could find no refer-
ence to my great-grandfather’s book.
I also knew that after my great-grandfather had re-
turned to Scotland from Canada, he had spent twenty
years or more as Minister of the Presbyterian Church at
North Berwick and my mother had told me that he had six
daughters, five of whom had never married.
On a beautiful sunny Saturday morning I drove from
Edinburgh to North Berwick. I found somewhere to park
and asked the way to the church. My mother had told me
of the minister’s house and the minister’s meadow, a
small field, where my grandfather kept a few cows, and
where my grandmother and her five sisters had played as
little girls. But this was seventy years ago.
The street was narrow and busy with Saturday after-
noon shoppers. I walked along and suddenly there it was
in front of me. St. Andrew’s Church. The main doors were
locked, so I made my way to the back, found a small door
that was open, let myself in and looked round the church.
The sunshine flooded through the windows and shone
upon the brass memorial plaques on the walls. But I
looked in vain for the name Rentons. Then it struck me
that Renton was my grandmother’s married name. Before
that her name was... was... Sprott. Of course. No wonder
I hadn’t been able to find my great-grandfather’s book in
the library. I looked again and soon I found a plaque “In
memory of the Rev. George Washington Sprott, Minister
of this kirk...”
217
Behind the church, at the top of a small hill, the minis-
ter’s house still stood and between the house and the
church lay the small meadow where my grandmother used
to play among the cows. There were no cows there now,
but in one corner, standing in the shade of a tree, was a
hot, grey, bored-looking donkey.
The following Monday I returned to the National Li-
brary in Edinburgh and there I found my great-
grandfather’s book. Reflections on the life of a Young
Minister in Canada, by the Rev. G.W. Sprott. It was
dedicated to “My children and their children’s children”.
UNIT 2
Conversational Topic MY FAMILY
Our family is not very large. I have a father, a brother
and a sister. We all live together in a new flat in one of
the industrial districts of Minsk.
My father Igor Ivanovich is 45 years old. He is a tall
and well-built man with short black hair and grey eyes.
He works at a big automobile plant as an engineer. He
likes his work and spends most of his time there. By char-
acter my father is a quiet man, while my mother is ener-
getic and talkative. Her name is Olga Petrovna. She is a
teacher of music and plays the piano well. She is intelli-
gent, patient and always ready to help. I’ve got good rela-
tions with my mum. She is always interested in what I do,
and I can always ask her for advice. I love her very much
though I love my father not less.
My sister’s name is Alla. She has blue eyes and lovely
fair hair. She is a very good-looking girl. Alla is three
years younger than me. She is a pupil of the 9th form. She
does well at school and gets only good and excellent
marks. Alla has a good sense of humour and is very
popular with her friends at parties.
My name is Tanya. I’m 17 years old. I resemble my
mother in appearance but take after my father in nature.
People say I’m an easy-going person. I have many friends.
They come to my place very often.
Our family is very united. We like to spend time to-
gether and help our mother about the house. In the eve-
nings we watch TV, read books and newspapers, listen to
music or just discuss everyday problems. Our parents
don’t always agree with us but they take into considera-
tion our opinion. All of us like to spend our week-ends out
of town. We often go to the village to see our grandpa-
rents. They are old-age pensioners now but prefer to live
in the country.
I also have some other relatives: uncles, aunts, cousins
and many friends. We are happy when we are together. It
is really very important to have a good family where all
people are tactful, helpful, tolerant and respect each
other. In such families children get on well with their
parents. They are confident, willingly share domestic du-
ties, joys and difficulties, views and opinions. In happy
219
families parents are not bossy and never dominate their
children. They teach them to communicate with different
people in different situations. It’s nice to have a good fa-
mily.
Тематический словарь
family, n
parents, n
father, n
mother, n
sister, n
brother, n
aunt, n
uncle, n
niece, n
nephew, n
grandparents, n
grandfather, n
grandmother, n
granddaughter, n
grandson, n
be single
be married
get married
be divorced
be on pension
son, n
daughter, n
husband, n
семья
родители
отец
мать
сестра
брат
тетя
дядя
племянница
племянник
дедушка и
бабушка
дедушка
бабушка
внучка
внук
быть неженатым
быть женатым
жениться
быть в разводе
быть на пенсии
сын
дочь
муж
wife, п
cousin, п
mother-in-law, п
daughter-in-law, п
son-in-law, п
father-in-law, п
relatives, п
(close, distant)
twins, n
child, n
baby, n
consist of, v
have, v
look like
respectful, a
share domestic
duties
get along with
жена
двоюродный
брат (сестра)
свекровь, теща
невестка
зять
свекор, тесть
родственники
(близкие, даль-
ние)
близнецы
ребенок
грудной ребе-
нок
состоять из
иметь
выглядеть
почтительный
разделять до-
машние обя-
занности
ладить, ужи-
ваться
Упражнения
1. Ответьте на вопросы.
I. How old are you?
2. Are you married?
3. Have you a family of your own?
4. Do you live together with your parents?
5. Is your family large or small?
6. What are your parents?
7. Are you an only child in the family?
8. Is your sister (brother) older or younger than you?
9. What is your sister’s (brother’s) occupation?
10. Do you help your mother to keep the house?
11. Have you got grandparents?
12. Why is it important to have a good family?
220
13. Have you any other close relatives?
14. Do you often see them?
15. What do you usually do in the evenings?
16. Do you spend your week-ends together with your
parents?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. How old are you?
2. I am 17 years old.
3. I haven’t got a family of my own.
4. My family consists of four persons.
5. My father works as an engineer.
III. Переведите текст на английский язык.
У моего брата большая семья. Он живет вместе с
тестем и тещей. Кроме того, у него трое детей. Его жена
Ирина не работает. Она заботится о детях и о своих
родителях. Ее родители — пенсионеры по старости. Им
обоим по 75 лет и у них плохое здоровье. Старший сын
брата — школьник. Он ученик второго класса. Две
младшие дочери — близнецы. Им по 5 лет. Они ходят в
детский сад. Я люблю проводить время с ними, потому
что они очень забавные. Девочки помогают маме по
дому. Вечерами вся семья собирается в гостиной, и
становится очень шумно. Однако все они живут очень
дружно.
IV. Составьте ситуации, аналогичные заданным.
Коротко расскажите о своей семье, о семье своего
друга, семьях родственников, знакомых.
1) Му family consists of my mother and myself. I have
a flat in Minsk and my mother came to live with me. For
the week-end we sometimes go to the village where my
mother has a house. I’m single. I have an aunt who lives
in Brest but I haven’t seen her for years.
2) My friend’s family is his wife, Jane, who is a doctor,
and his daughter Ann, who’s ten. His parents are still
alive but they live in Germany and he doesn’t see them
very often. My friend’s family lives in a private house in
Vitebsk.
221
V. Прочитайте диалог. Скажите, знакома ли вам
описываемая ситуация.
Nick: Mum, I want to tell you something important
Mother: What is it, dear?
Nick: I'm going to get married.
Mother: Get married?! You must be joking.
Nick: Nothing of the kind. It’s my final decision. I’m
not a child any more.
Mother: Good heavens! But you are only 18. I hope you
are not serious.
Nick: Absolutely serious.
Mother: But who is that poor thing?
Nick: It’s Helen, you know her. Helen is a dream of a
girl, the sweetest girl I've ever met! I can’t see my life
without her.
Mother: Oh, no! Helen is out of the question. She is too
young. She can’t even cook, likes good clothes and doesn’t
work yet. Your marriage is sure to fall on my shoulders.
Nick: Don’t worry. It is not as bad as that. We are
going to live with her family.
IV. Прочитайте диалог. Расскажите, что вы узнали
о семье Анны.
THE FAMILY ALBUM
Nick: There are many photos in your family album,
Ann. Could you tell me what relations you have with the
people in the pictures?
Ann: All right. Look here. This is our family photo on
the first page. This is my father, mother, my younger sis-
ter and myself.
Nick: Oh, your parents look very young. How old are
they?
Ann: My father is 40 and my mother is 36. She is a
shop assistant.
Nick: And your father? He wears the uniform. Is he a
military man or a militiaman?
Ann: He is a military man and serves in the Far East.
We are going to his place next year after I finish school.
Nick: It’s a pity. I thought we could study together at
the Institute.
222
Ann: I’m afraid not. But my sister who is two years my
senior may stay here together with our grandparents as
there’s no secondary school at the place where my father
serves.
Nick: Is this the picture of your grandparents?
Ann: You are right. Here it is.
Nick: And whose photo is this?
Ann: My friend’s. Her name is Kate. She is pretty,
isn’t she?
Nick: She is very beautiful. Is she your class-mate?
Ann: Oh, no. Kate is a student. She lives next door to
me.
I have many girl-friends at school. We are all taken
photo in this picture.
Nick: I see. And who is this smiling woman?
Ann: This is my father’s elder sister. She is still young
in the photo. Aunt Olga is fifty already. She has a grown-
up daughter Helen. Helen is my cousin. She is married
and has children of her own. They are my nephews. Look
here! This is Helen’s wedding photo. Isn’t it nice?
Nick: Very beautiful! The couple is very kind and lov-
ing.
Ann: And can you recognize me in this baby?
Nick: It’s hardly possible. You are crying bitterly but
your mother is happy.
VII. Прочитайте текст и обсудите следующие за
ним вопросы.
BRITISH FAMILIES
British families are usually quite small. An average
family consists of a mother, a father and two or three
children. No one is really sure how it is possible to have
four children. It is quite rare in Britain for grandparents,
aunts and uncles to share the house with the family. How-
ever, families often share the house with dogs, cats, gold-
fish and even rabbits which they keep, not to eat, but as
pets.
1. Are families in Britain the same as in our coun-
try?
2. What similarities and differences have you noticed
from the passage?
223
VIII. Переведите текст со словарем.
THE ONLY CHILD
I was one of six children. I have two younger brothers
and three elder sisters. My father was not a wealthy man
and we lived in a three-bedroomed house, so conditions at
home were always quite cramped and there was little pri-
vacy. Yet I consider that I was extremely fortunate. The
house was on the outskirts of a small town. Meadows,
woods and even a friendly stream lay within walking dis-
tance of our home. My mother and father were far too
busy to occupy themselves with my affairs, so the
greater part of my upbringing was left to my sisters. If
I am now a comparatively calm and placid person, able
to cope tolerably well with those problems that life pre-
sents us with, it is, I firmly believe, due to the fact
that I was allowed to grow up without too much fuss
being made of me.
The most dreadful fate that I can imagine would be
that of growing up as an only child. All mothers and fa-
thers experiment on their unfortunate firstborn. They
read the latest baby books, they attend clinics and
courses of lectures. They listen to the advice of maiden
aunts.
They debate the exact moment to present him or her
with solid food. What they find extremely difficult to do
is to allow their child to grow up at his own pace, to make
his own mistakes and quietly learn from them.
As soon as the second baby is on the way, the first es-
capes from this period of close attention. He begins to
get away with things. He discovers that even if he does
eat sandwiches with dirty hands, or unripe apples that
have fallen from the tree, he may not be sick in the
night. He acquires a sense of proportion regarding his own
importance.
But what happens to the only child? Never, or at least
not until it is far too late to do anything about it, does he
or she escape from the minute examination of his every
action. It is a miracle if he does not grow up a nervous
person constantly worrying about his health, a wholly
224
self-centred being, who shivers at the sight of his own re-
flection in the mirror.
IX. Выучите наизусть следующее стихотворение.
OUR FAMILY
Our large family
Has a nice flat,
We live there happily
With a kitten and a cat.
My sisters and brothers
All go to school,
We help one another,
It is a good rule.
We help our mother
When she washes or cooks.
Together with father
We like to read books.
8 Зак. 2112
UNIT 3
Conversational Topic OUR HOUSE AND FLAT
I live in a new nine-storeyed block of flats in Pushkin
street. Our flat is on the third floor. It is very comfort-
able. We have all modern conveniences, such as central
heating, electricity, gas, cold and hot running water, a
telephone and a chute. There are three rooms in our flat:
a living-room, a study and a bedroom. We also have a
kitchen, a bathroom, a small entrance hall and two balco-
nies.
Our living-room is the largest in the flat. It overlooks a
green park and has a lot of sunshine. The living-room is
nicely furnished. There is a suite of modern furniture
with a wall unit, a wardrobe and a bookcase. We are fond
of books and have plenty of them at home. To the left of
the wall unit there is a corner-sofa with two armchairs
and a small table for newspapers. In the opposite corner
there is a TV set with a video and a tape-recorder. A
beautiful crystal chandelier gives much light to the room.
A thick carpet on the floor and curtains on the windows
match the walls. All this makes the room cosy. My mother
usually buys everything for the living-room, she has a
good eye and taste for colour and style.
I spend most of my time in my bedroom which I use as
a study. Here you can see a writing-table where I do my
homework. Near the wall there is a pull-out sofa where I
sleep at night and have a rest in the day-time. There are
some book-shelves crammed with text- and fiction books.
There is a thick comfortable rag on the floor near the sofa.
My dog likes to sleep on it.
My parents’ bedroom is more spacious than the study.
There is a doublebed, a mirror-stand, two bedside tables
and a built-in wardrobe there. It is very convenient to
have it because it doesn’t occupy much space. In the cor-
ner of the room there is a small table with a tape-recorder
on it. My parents enjoy listening to music.
Our kitchen is rather large. There is a set of modern
kitchen furniture, a gas-stove with an oven, a food proc-
essor, a refrigerator and a cupboard where we keep our
dishes. The kitchen serves us as a dining-room. But when
we receive guests we have meals in the living-room.
226
I like my bathroom too because it provides us with
maximum of convenience and is well-fitted. There is a
nice mirror, a rack for towels, a bath-tab and a basin.
There is a shelf above the basin where I keep soap, tooth-
paste, tooth-brush, combs, creams, shampoos and make-up.
It’s very pleasant to have a bath or to take a shower here.
The entrance hall is small. There is a hall-stand and a
mirror on the wall. A telephone is on a special table under
the mirror. We try to keep our flat clean.
Тематический словарь
building, n здание armchair, п кресло
house, n Дом sideboard, п сервант
private house частный bookcase,п книжный шкаф
дом bookshelf, п книжная полка
block of flats многоквар- piano, п пианино
тирный tape-recorder, п магнитофон
дом carpet, п ковер
entrance, n подъезд curtain, п занавеска
balcony, n балкон picture, п картина
lift, n лифт bed, п кровать
floor, n этаж, пол bedside table тумбочка
convenience, n удобство wardrobe, n платяной шкаф
central heating отопление cupboard, n посудный шкаф
electricity, n электри- suite of furniture мебельный гарнитур
чество chandelier, n люстра
gas, n газ built-in wardrobe встроенный шкаф
running water водопровод pull-out sofa раздвижной диван
telephone, n телефон refrigerator, n холодильник
chute, n мусоро- stove, n плита
провод toilet articles туалетные
flat, n квартира принадлежности
bedroom, n спальня mirror, n зеркало
living-(sitting-) гостиная hall-stand, n вешалка
room, n convenient, a удобный
study, n кабинет cosy, a уютный
kitchen, n кухня of modern design современный
entrance hall прихожая move (to), v переезжать
lavatory, n туалет basin, n раковина
furniture, n мебель overlook, v выходить на
TV set, n телевизор spacious, a просторный
table, n стол live, v жить
desk, n парта, стол keep the house содержать дом в
sofa, n диван clean чистоте
sofa-bed, n диван-
кровать
227
Упражнения
1. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Where do you live?
2. Do you live in a private house or in a block of flats?
3. Is there a garden in front of your house?
4. What is there next to your house?
5. Is your house far from the metro (bus stop)?
6. What floor is your flat on?
7. What modern conveniences are there in your flat?
8. Is your flat large or small?
9. How many rooms are there in your flat? What are
they?
10. Which is the biggest room in your flat?
11. How is your living-room furnished?
12. Do you often get together in your living-room?
13. In what room do you receive guests?
14. Where do you keep your clothes?
15. Where do you keep your books?
16. Where do you usually have meals?
17. Are you happy with your flat?
II. Спросите своего друга:
— живет ли он в старом или новом доме;
— где находится его дом;
— как можно добраться до его дома;
— какая у него квартира;
— на каком она этаже;
— есть ли у него телефон;
— какой у него телевизор;
— какие программы он чаще всего смотрит по теле-
визору;
— как обставлена его гостиная (спальня, кабинет).
III. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. I live in a five-storeyed block of flats in Pushkin
street.
2. My flat is on the third floor.
3. There are three rooms in my flat.
4. Our living-room is nicely furnished.
5. There is a TV set, a corner sofa, a piano and a book-
case in it.
228
IV. Вставьте предлоги там, где это необходимо.
Му sister got a very comfortable flat ... last year. It is ...
the third floor ... a new block ... flats. I got a letter ... my
sister ... several pictures ... her flat. ... one of the pic-
tures you can see her family sitting ... the table ... the
living-room. My sister is sitting ... her husband and two
sons. They are watching TV. It is ... the corner ... the
window. There is a piano ... the left ... the table and a
small table ... a telephone ... it ... the right. My sister is
going to speak ... me ... the telephone tonight. You can
see a lovely carpet ... the middle ... the room and some
pictures ... the wall ... the piano. My sister’s sons learn to
play ... the piano. Besides they are fond ... reading books
and have plenty ... them ... the bookcase and ... the
shelves.
V. Переведите предложения на английский язык.
1. Наш дом находится на улице Горького. Мы пере-
ехали туда два года тому назад. 2. У него двухкомнат-
ная квартира на втором этаже. 3. На втором этаже все
квартиры без балконов. 4. Все комнаты, гостиная,
спальня и кабинет небольшие, но они уютно обставле-
ны. 5. В гостиной находится сервант, угловой диван,
цветной телевизор, два кресла и журнальный столик.
6. На столе стоит ваза с цветами. 7. Наша кухня — до-
вольно большая. Там есть плита, холодильник, посуд-
ный шкаф, стол и несколько стульев. 8. В ванной хра-
нятся различные предметы туалета. 9. На стене в кори-
доре находится вешалка и зеркало. 10. Мы поддержи-
ваем порядок в комнате.
VI. Переведите текст и опишите по аналогии свою
классную комнату.
OUR CLASSROOM
Our classroom is on the fifth floor. It is not very large
but rather cosy. It has two large windows, so it’s very
light here. There are three rows of desks in our classroom,
each has 3-4 desks. One row of desks is in the middle of
the room, the others are on the left and on the right of it.
In front of the desks there is a teacher’s table. The black-
board is just behind it. There’s a piece of chalk and a
229
duster on the blackboard. On the walls there are some pic-
tures. The pots with flowers stand on the window-sills.
VII. Прочитайте диалог и передайте его основное
содержание в косвенной речи.
Students: Good evening, Mrs. Parker. We should like
to see the room you let.
Mrs. Parker: Are you the students of the University?
Students: Yes, we are. We are looking for a flat with
all modern conveniences.
Mrs. Parker: But where did you live before?
Students: We rented a room in an old house which
was pulled down (снесен). Now we tempo-
rarily live at our friends.
Mrs. Parker: Then go and see my room. There are all
necessary pieces of furniture in it. The
room overlooks the city park and is not far
from the University.
Students: Your room is really nice and comfortable.
But what about bed linen and would you
also allow to use the refrigerator and the
TV set?
Mrs. Parker: Yes. That is included in the rent which is
.quite reasonable.
Students: It isn’t bad indeed. When can we move in
(вселиться)?
Mrs. Parker: Any time you like. The room is ready.
VIII. Переведите текст и скажите, чем отличает-
ся описываемое жилище англичанина от вашего.
THE HOUSE OF AN ENGLISHMAN
Many families in London live in flats, but most people
live in their own houses in the suburbs. Most of London’s
suburban houses consist of two floors, the ground floor
and the first floor. All in all there are six or seven rooms
in the house.
On the ground floor there’s a dining-room, a sitting-
room, a kitchen and a hall. In the hall you can see a stand
for hats, coats and umbrellas. A staircase leads from the
hall to the landing on the first floor. On this floor there
230
are four bedrooms, a bathroom and a lavatory. On top of
the roof there are three chimneys. In front of the house
they have a small garden, in which they grow flowers: ro-
ses, tulips and so on. At the back of the house there’s a
much larger garden with a lawn and some fruit trees.
There’s also a vegetable garden where they grow all kinds
of vegetables, such as potatoes, cabbages, cauliflowers,
onions and tomatoes. At the side of the house there is a
garage, where they can keep their car. The garden is en-
closed by a fence, with a gate in it.
IX. Прочитайте и перескажите содержание текста
на английском языке.
Dear Uncle,
I am glad to inform you that I live now in quite com-
fortable lodgings. My room is a bit small, rather dark and
terribly cold, for my landlady requires extra pay for
heating it. But I have to put up with it as I can't afford a
better one. I even find my room nice and cosy. Though, to
tell the truth, I can’t call it quiet. Some good-for-nothing
young people make an awful noise upstairs. Almost every
evening they dance and sing and laugh at silly things. All
of it greatly interferes with my studies. I spend my days
in reading for the examinations. I need lots of money to
buy books. I hate to ask you to send me an extra sum of
money. I think it's a shame. I hate to trouble you. I hope
the postman will lose my letter.
X. Переведите текст co словарем.
HOUSE AND HOME
A person’s home is as much a reflection of his person-
ality as the clothes he wears, the food he eats and the
friends with whom he spends his time. Depending on per-
sonality, how people see themselves and how they allow
others to see them most have in mind an “ideal home”.
But in general, and especially for the students or new
wage earners, there are practical limitations of cash and
location on the way of achieving that idea.
Cash shortage, in fact, often means that the only way
of getting along when you leave school is to stay at home
for a while until things improve financially. There are ob-
vious advantages to living at home: personal laundry is
231
usually done along with the family wash, meals are pro-
vided and you pay a minimum rent for it if any at all.
On the other hand, much depends on how a family gets
on. Do your parents like your friends? Are you prepared
to be tolerant when your parents ask where you are going
in the evening and what time you expect to be back?
If you don’t like the idea of living with the family the
possibilities are well-known to you already. You can find a
good landlady and rent a room till you make enough mo-
ney to buy a flat or a house of your own.
Most families in Britain live in their own houses,
rather than in flats or apartments. The houses are not al-
ways very big, and they are often built very close to-
gether. You may want to live in a detached house (the
house of your own) or in a semidetached house (two
houses under one roof). Many people live in the so-called
“terraced houses”, usually two-storeyed houses that are in
a long line, connected to each other. Each entry here be-
longs to one owner and is considered to be a house.
XI. Запомните следующие пословицы и поговорки.
Дайте их русские эквиваленты и употребите в крат-
ких ситуациях.
1. An Englishman house is his castle.
2. There is no place like home.
3. Men make houses, women make homes.
UNIT 4
Conversational Topic MY WORKING DAY
On week-days I usually get up at 7 o’clock. I make my
bed, open the window and do my morning exercises. Then
I go to the bathroom where I clean my teeth and wash my-
self. If I have enough time I take a cold and hot shower. It
really wakes me up and makes my body feel well. After
bathroom I go back to my room where I dress myself and
brush my hair. In 10 minutes I am ready for breakfast. It
may be a cup of tea or coffee and a sandwich. I never
eat cereal or corn flakes, and very seldom I eat scrambled
eggs.
After breakfast I put on my coat, take the bag and go
to school. As I live not far from school it takes me only
five or seven minutes to get there. I don't want to be late
for the first lesson so I come to school a few minutes be-
fore the bell. I leave my coat in the cloakroom and go up-
stairs to the classroom.
The lessons begin at eight o'clock in the morning and
they are over at half past one in the afternoon. I have six
lessons a day with short breaks between them. After
classes I go home and have dinner there. I usually have
something substantial for dinner, for example, cabbage
soup for the first course, hot meat or fish with some
vegetables for the second. Then I drink a cup of tea or
milk. Sometimes when I have to stay at school after
classes I go to the school canteen and have dinner there.
After dinner I have a short rest, read newspapers,
make some telephone calls, go to the bakery. Then I do my
homework. We study many subjects at school and it takes
me three or even more hours to do the homework. Some-
times I go to the library to get ready for my practical
classes or to write a report. As a rule I have very little
free time on my week-days. But when I have some spare
time I do some work about the house: do the shopping and
the cleaning.
Eight o’clock is supper time in our family. We all get
together in the kitchen, then go to the sitting-room and
watch TV, read books or discuss different problems. Then
I go for a walk with my dog. Twice a week I go to school
in the evening to play volleyball. I am a member of the
233
school volleyball team and we have our training rather
late.
At about eleven at night I go to bed.
Тематический словарь
working day
week-days
wake up, v
get up, v
do morning
exercises
make one’s bed
take a shower
(bath)
wash (oneself), v
dress (oneself), v
clean teeth
comb (brush)
one’s hair
рабочий день
будние дни
просыпаться
вставать
делать
утреннюю
зарядку
убирать
постель
принимать душ
(ванну)
умываться
одеваться
чистить зубы
причесываться
take a bus
(tram, trolley-
bus)
go to work
leave for work
work, v
have a rest
have a break
make a tele-
phone call
do homework
be in a hurry
go to bed
ехать автобусом
(трамваем,
троллейбусом)
идти на работу
уходить на ра-
боту
работать
отдыхать
иметь перерыв
звонить
делать домаш-
нее задание
торопиться
ложиться спать
Упражнения
1. Ответьте на вопросы.
I. When does your working day begin?
2. What do you do when you get up?
3. Do you do your morning exercises every day?
4. Who makes breakfast for you?
5. What time do you leave for school (for work)?
6. How long does it take you to get there?
7. When does your school (work) begin?
8. How long does it last?
9. When do you have dinner?
10. Do you usually have dinner at home or at your
school canteen?
11. What do you usually have for dinner?
12. Do you have a short rest after dinner?
13. How long does it take you to prepare your homework?
14. Do you sometimes go to the library to get ready for
classes?
15. What do you usually do in the evenings?
16. What time do you go to bed?
234
II. Спросите своего друга:
когда он встает, завтракает, уходит из дому, возвра-
щается с работы, идет спать, просыпается;
где он делает зарядку, завтракает, обедает, делает
уроки;
что он делает утром, днем, вечером, в школе, дома, в
библиотеке.
III. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. I usually get up at 7.
2. My working day begins at eight o’clock.
3. I have a sandwich with tea for breakfast.
4. My classes last 6 hours.
5. It takes me three hours to get ready for my lessons.
6. I go to bed at 11.
IV. Переведите предложения на английский язык.
1. Мой рабочий день начинается в девять часов и
длится 7 часов. 2. Он встает в семь, а уходит из дома в
восемь. 3. Чтобы не опоздать на работу, мы вышли из
дома на 15 минут раньше обычного. 4. Вчера мой брат
был болен и не пошел на работу (остался дома). 5. В
будние дни у них практически нет свободного времени.
6. Кроме работы в учреждении, ей приходится делать
всю работу по дому. 7. Отец обычно обедает в столовой,
дети — дома. 8. Я должен торопиться, чтобы не опо-
здать на автобус. 9. Чтобы не опоздать на поезд, нам
пришлось взять такси. 10. Придя с работы, Дина при-
няла душ и пошла на вечер. 11. Тебе понадобится пол-
часа, чтобы добраться домой на трамвае. Это долго. Бе-
ри такси. 12. Он встал, умылся, оделся, позавтракал,
вышел из дома и быстро пошел на остановку.
V. Перескажите содержание диалога в косвенной речи.
— What time do you usually get up?
— As a rule at half past six.
— Why so early?
— I live out of town. So I have to take the first morn-
ing train if I don’t want to be late for my work.
— When do you get to the office?
— At half past eight if I catch an early train.
235
VI. Прочитайте и скажите, знакома ли вам ситуа-
ция. описанная в диалоге.
Mother: What have you been doing in the bath-
room? I could hear the terrible noise. Is every-
thing all right?
Daughter: I’ve just done the washing up.
Mother: Well, I hope you haven’t broken anything.
Daughter: Broken anything? Of course not. And I’ve
been cooking too.
Mother: Cooking? But you don’t even know how to boil
an egg.
Daughter: I’ve made you a nice plate of soup.
Mother: That’s not cooking. All you had to do was to
open a tin. What about the sitting room?
Have you aired it?
Daughter: But I aired it two days ago.
Mother: Two days ago?! Do you think it is still fresh
there?
Daughter: Well, it seems all right to me.
Mother: Don’t let me shout at you. I’ve still got a ter-
rible sore throat.
Daughter: Then you’d better have my warm soup. It’ll be
really good for you.
VII. Переведите co словарем текст, в котором фото-
модель Тина рассказывает о своем рабочем дне.
MY WEEK DAYS
Well, the first thing that I do as soon as I wake up is
to go and have a shower. I start with a warm shower and
then, just before I get out of the shower, I turn the water
onto cold and for a few seconds I have a really cold
shower and let the water run over me. It really wakes you
up, you know. After that I usually go into my bedroom,
open the bedroom window and breathe in some fresh air
and sit on the floor and do a few exercises. I think it’s
really important that you do a few exercises first thing in
the morning: it makes your body feel good and keeps the
muscles firm. I usually exercise my stomach muscles and
my leg muscles. I also exercise my face muscles with my
fingers for a few minutes and that keeps the skin of my
face very firm, which is, I think, important for a model.
Well, now, after I’ve brushed my hair, done my exercises
236
and had my shower, I go and have my breakfast. Now
I really believe that it’s important to have a really good
breakfast. I don’t think you should just have a cup of cof-
fee, like some of the girls do. Well, anyway, I have orange
juice every morning ... and often I have an egg and toast.
I also like yoghurt and grapefruit. By 10 o’clock I am
ready to get dressed and go to work. I usually take a taxi
to work. I usually arrive at about 11. I don’t usually eat
anything for lunch, but sometimes I have a sandwich and
a glass of milk. Then I work for about four hours with the
photographer and he takes pictures, a lot of pictures.
Usually they are the sort of pictures that are used in the
weekly magazines, women’s weekly magazines. I finish
work at about 5, so as you can see I’ve got quite good
hours: I only work from about eleven to five and then it’s
time to go home. When I get home I make some telephone
calls, watch the news on telly, have a bath and change my
clothes. Every night I usually go out. I like dancing. I go
dancing quite often. I can’t cook very well, so I like to eat
out as often as I can afford it. I’d say I have a good life
really, and I am well paid when you think about the num-
ber of hours I work.
VIII. Заполните графы таблицы. Укажите, что мо-
жет делать Тина (упр. VII) и что обычно делаете вы
в указанное время.
Time What Tina does
08.00 wakes up
08.30 10.00 gets shower does exercises brushes hair has breakfast
11.00
12.30
17.00
20.00
23.00
Time What you do
08.00 get up
08.30 leave for work
10.00 ______________
11.00 ______________
12.30 ________________
17.00 ______________
20.00 ______________
23.00 ______________
237
IX. Прокомментируйте следующие пословицы и по
говорки.
1. Early to bed and early to rise makes people healthy,
wealthy and wise.
2. Never put off till tomorrow what you can do today.
3. A good beginning makes a good ending.
4. If you want a thing well done, do it yourself.
5. What is done cannot be undone.
UNIT 5
Conversational Topic MY FREE TIME
I wouldn’t say I have much free time on week-days
when I study. But I’m more or less free on Sundays and
on holidays, both short and long ones.
What I do on my days off really depends on what the
weather is like. If the weather is cold and wet, it is not a
big problem because there are plenty of things you can do
indoors. You can read books, listen to music, watch TV.
Watching TV is a very popular leisure activity. You may
also go to different entertainment centers such as disco
club, art centers including exhibitions, cinema, theatre,
concert halls, etc. You can meet your friends at your place
and have a nice time together. It’s really very important
to stay with friends because communication helps to form
your views and makes life more interesting and exciting.
If you don’t feel like staying in you can go to the park.
You can find different things going on there, from sport
competitions to musical entertainments of various kinds.
You may simply relax on the grass, listening to a band
perhaps. If you are tired and want to get away from noisy
streets you can go to the countryside and enjoy fresh air
and a change of scenery. Many people like to spend time
in the forest, walking, gathering berries or picking up
mushrooms.
During the summer holidays people have a greater va-
riety of things to do. You can travel all over the country
by car, plane, train, sea or on foot. In my opinion, the
best and the most interesting way of travelling is by car.
It’s very convenient: you needn’t reserve your tickets and
carry heavy suitcases. You can enjoy the passing scenery
through the window. You can stop wherever you wish and
spend at any place as much time as you like.
Every year my family and I go to the Naroch or to the
Black Sea by car. There are many rest-homes, sanatoriums
and tourist camps there. But we usually rent a room or a
furnished house for a couple of weeks. Sometimes we
place ourselves in a tent on the sea shore enjoying fresh
air and the sun all day long. As a rule I make new friends
there. We swim, sunbathe, play different games. In the
evening I like to sit on the beach watching the sea and en-
239
joying the sunset. Sometimes I go to the disco, sit in a bar
drinking juice, coke or soda-water.
People may also have their special interests and hobbies
to occupy themselves in their free time: writing, painting,
computer programming, gardening, mountaineering, wal-
king, working with wood or paper, learning languages,
collecting something and what not. Each person chooses
his own way of spending free time, either passive or ac-
tive. In any case leisure should be a refreshment and a
source of inspiration.
Тематический словарь
day off, n выходной день listen to music слушать му-
week-end, n конец недели зыку
hobby, n увлечение play games играть в игры
enjoy, v наслаждаться lie in the sun загорать
make plans планировать come to smb’s приходить к
spend time проводить place кому-л.
время receive guests принимать гос-
discuss, v обсуждать тей
have a rest отдыхать gather berries собирать ягоды
lesure, n досуг pick up mush- собирать грибы
spare time свободное время rooms
entertainment, n развлечения scenery, n пейзаж
relax, v расслабляться refreshment, n отдых, восста-
go to the country ехать за город новление сил
go for a walk идти на про-
гулку
Упражнения
1. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Which day of the week do you like best and why?
2. What time do you get up on Sunday?
3. What do you do in the morning?
4. How do you usually spend your days off?
5. What does your leisure depend on?
6. Do you often go to the country on your days off?
7. What are the best places around Minsk?
8. How do you like travelling? Why do you prefer trav-
elling by car?
9. Do you often go to see your friends?
10. How often do you spend the week-end with your
parents?
240
11. With whom do you like to spend your free time bet-
ter: with your friends or with your parents?
12. Do you sometimes go to the theatre on Sundays?
13. Which do you like best, the cinema or the theatre?
14. Do you like music?
15. What is your hobby?
16. How do you usually spend the evenings on your days
off?
17. Do you sometimes receive guests on Sunday?
18. How do you plan to spend your next Sunday?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. Sunday is my day off.
2. On my days off I get up later than usual.
3. We make plans for the week-end.
4. My friends often come to my place.
5. I like to spend time out of town.
6. Reading is my hobby.
III. Спросите своего друга:
как он проводит выходной день, собирается провести
свой отпуск, добирается до кинотеатра, готовится к
экзамену;
чем он увлекается, занимается по вечерам, интере-
суется;
часто ли он ходит в кино, проводит выходные с роди-
телями, ходит на прогулки по вечерам.
IV. Переведите на английский язык:
1. Где вы проводите свой свободный день? 2. В во-
скресенье мы встаем позже, чем обычно. 3. Иногда мы
ходим в лес собирать ягоды и грибы. 4. На вечере мы
пели, танцевали, играли в различные игры. 5. Они
прекрасно провели время в прошлые выходные. 6. Мое
хобби — коллекционирование марок. 7. За городом мы
загораем, играем в футбол, волейбол, теннис. 8. Конец
недели мы проведем в деревне у бабушки. 9. В плохую
погоду мои друзья приходят ко мне. Мы слушаем музы-
ку, читаем книги, обсуждаем различные проблемы.
10. Мне нравится отдыхать у телевизора.
241
V. Перескажите следующий диалог в косвенной речи.
Mary: Hello, Granny! How are you?
Granny: Oh, that’s you, Mary. How nice of you to ring
me up! I’m all right, thank you. And what
about you? How are your studies progressing?
Mary: It’s O.K. I’m quite satisfied with the progress.
This week I was very lucky at school.
Granny: And how are you going to spend the week-end? I
remember you asked me to take you to the thea-
tre once.
Mary: It would be fantastic, Granny! Opera and Ballet
then. Do you know what is on there?
Granny: Swan Lake. I hope it won’t bore you to see an
old ballet. I’m attached to the old tunes. And
Swan Lake was the first ballet in which I saw
Pavlova.
Mary: All right then. It must be a very beautiful bal-
let.
VI. Закончите следующий рассказ письменно.
At breakfast the family decides how to spend the day.
As usual, they can’t agree. Mr. Davies and Paul want to
go to a football match, while Mrs. Davies and Veronica
would rather spend the day in town buying souvenirs
(they are on holiday, staying in a hotel). In the end they
split up (расходятся) and go separately...
VII. Прочитайте и переведите текст со словарем.
Eating out in a restaurant is now very popular. In most
towns there is a wide variety of restaurants serving dif-
ferent types of food at different prices. Most British
towns have Chinese or Indian restaurants which serve
quite cheap food; Italian restaurants are also popular and
French restaurants are famous for high quality (and ex-
pensive) cooking. Many pubs now have restaurants or
grill-rooms. In some you can get a full range of food; in
others the choice is more limited.
For many British people, the pub is the centre of their
social life. People from some countries find this rather
shocking, but for most people in Britain a pub is a place
with a friendly atmosphere where they can meet their
friends and talk over a drink and often over a meal.
242
It is quite normal for women to go into pubs in Britain —
but like everybody else they must follow certain laws.
These are very complicated and control the time pubs are
allowed to open. The times vary in different parts of the
country, but pubs are usually open from about 11.00 until
about 2.00 or 2.30, and in the evening from about 6.00
until 10.30 or 11.00 (except on Sundays when opening
times are shorter). The laws also control who is allowed
into pubs. You must be 16 before you are allowed to go
into a pub, and 18 before you are allowed to buy alcoholic
drinks. If the landlord of a pub thinks you are under 18
he will refuse to serve you.
VIII. Выразите свое согласие или несогласие со сле-
дующими утверждениями.
1. The British are terribly conservative. You can’t find
any food at all in their restaurants except traditional
English cooking.
2. The good thing about pubs is that they are open all
day.
3. You don’t have to buy alcoholic drinks in pubs. You
can buy soft drinks as well.
4. Women never go to pubs. That’s unheard of!
VII. Прочитайте и скажите, какие две строчки сти-
хотворения передают его основную мысль.
What is this life if, full of care,
We have no time to stand and stare.
No time to stand beneath the bughs.
And stare as long as sheep or cows.
No time to see, when woods we pass,
Where squirrels hide their nuts in grass.
No time to see, in broad daylight,
Streams full of stars, like skies at night.
No time to turn at Beauty’s glance,
And watch her feet, how they can dance.
No time to wait till her mouth can
Enrich that smile her eyes began.
A poor life this is, full of care,
We have no time to stand and stare.
W.H. Davies (1871—1940)
243
UNIT 6
Conversational Topic MY HOUSEHOLD DUTIES
This is my last year at school and I work hard to pass
my final exams successfully. As I am very busy I can’t
help my parents much about the house.
But still I have some household duties. Every day I do
my room and my bed, wash up dishes, dust the furniture
and take the garbage away. It is also my duty to buy
bread and milk. I usually go to the baker's after I have
dinner. I buy some brown and white bread, biscuits and
cakes there. The shop is not far from our house and it
doesn’t take me long to do everyday shopping.
Once a week I help my mother to do all other work
about the house. We wash our linen, iron and mend it,
clean the flat. We beat the dust out of the carpets, va-
cuum the floors and polish them. It’s not difficult to keep
the flat tidy if you do your rooms regularly. This is my
usual round of duties. But sometimes I have some other
things to do.
When my mother is ill or away from home I do the
cooking and washing up, buy food and plan my meals. I
am not a good cook, but my vegetable soup is always
tasty. I can also boil an egg or fry some meat. I also lay
the table and clear away the dishes. If I’m too busy or
can’t do these things, all the duties are organized among
other members of our family.
Sometimes I have to visit everyday service establish-
ments: hairdresser’s, shoemakers’, tailor’s, dry cleaners’,
photographer’s. At the hairdresser’s I have my hair cut
and waved. At the shoemakers’ I have my shoes and boots
repaired, at the photographer’s I have my photo taken.
Service is generally good, but in some cases it leaves much
to be desired.
My brother has his own duties at home. He helps to fix
and repair some things. For example, he repairs electrical
appliances when they are out of order. He has already re-
paired our mother’s electric iron, my desk lamp and his
own shaver.
Last year I was at my grandparents’. They are elderly
people and need our care and attention. During my stay
there I swept the floors and washed them, fed the chick-
244
ens, collected the eggs and weeded the vegetable-beds. I
didn’t learn to milk the cow but I helped to feed the other
animals: lambs, sheep and pigs. I enjoyed this work very
much.
Тематический словарь
household du-
ties
keep house
mess, a
do (tidy up) the
room
do (make) the
bed
make tea
(coffee)
do the cooking
do the shopping
sweep the floor
water the flow-
ers
lay the table
dust, v
look after, v
keep the room
tidy"
do the laundry
wash up, v
boil potatoes
peel potatoes
fry meat (fish)
tasty, a
cook (make)
smth. v
bake pies
домашние
обязанности
вести хозяйст-
во
беспорядок
убирать комна-
ту
убирать постель
заваривать чай
(кофе)
стряпать
делать покупки
подметать пол
поливать цветы
накрывать на
стол
вытирать пыль
присматривать.
заботиться
поддерживать
порядок в
комнате
стирать (белье)
мыть посуду
варить карто-
фель
чистить карто-
фель
жарить мясо
(рыбу)
вкусный
готовить
(стряпать)
печь пироги
weed vegeta-
ble)-beds
everyday servi-
ces
iron (press), v
mend, v
sew, v
sew a button on
knit, v
repair, v
fix, v
feed, v
hairdresser's
(shop)
barberes (shop)
cut the hair
do one’s hair
tailores (shop)
dry cleaner’s
shoemaker’s
photographer's
(shop)
have one’s
photo taken
it leaves much
to be desired
полоть грядки
бытовое обслу-
живание
утюжить, гла-
дить
чинить
шить
пришивать
пуговицу
вязать
ремонтировать
укреплять,
устанавливать
кормить
парикмахерская
(жен,)
парикмахерская
(муж.)
постричь
волосы
сделать при-
ческу (жен.)
швейная
мастерская
химчистка
сапожная
мастерская
фотография
сфотографиро-
ваться
оставляет же-
лать лучшего
Упражнения
1. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Do you help your mother about the house?
2. What are your household duties?
245
3. How much time do you spend on your work about
house?
4. Do you like to do everyday shopping?
5. Is it difficult to keep your flat tidy?
6. How often do you clean your flat?
7. Do you sometimes have to cook meals for the fami-
ly?
8. Are you a good cook?
9. What everyday services do you visit?
10. Are you a regular customer at the local hair-
dresser’s?
11. Where do you usually have your shoes repaired?
12. Do you press your own clothes or do you have them
pressed for you?
13. What does your brother (sister) usually do about the
house?
14. Do the household duties of villagers differ from
those of citizens?
II. Спросите своего друга (подругу):
— how long it takes him (her) to make his (her) bed;
— if he (she) has flowers in his (her) room and if he
(she) waters them every day;
— if he (she) cooks a substantial breakfast;
— if he (she) sets the table for meals;
— who does the cooking in his (her) family;
— when he (she) makes his (her) dinner himself
(herself);
— how often he (she) cleans the flat;
— if he (she) looks after his (her) younger sister
(brother);
— what his (her) brother's (sister’s) duties are;
— how he (she) helps his (her) grandparents in the
village.
III. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. I do my room every day.
2. It is Mother who does the cooking in our family.
3. I wash up dishes and clear them away from the ta-
ble.
4. Could you repair the chair, Tom?
5. Feed the cat, Lena.
246
TV. Переведите предложения на английский язык.
1. Не обращайте внимания на беспорядок. Я как раз
убираю в комнате. 2. Я не готовлю завтрак утром, так
как у меня всегда мало времени. Я выпиваю чашку чая
или кофе и ухожу в школу. 3. Как правило, утром мне
некогда подметать пол, вытирать пыль и мыть посуду.
Я только убираю постель и открываю окно, чтобы
проветрить комнату. 4. Моя бабушка всегда заботится
обо мне. Она шьет и вяжет красивые вещи. 5. Мой
младший брат сам пришивает пуговицы в своей одежде.
Он может также повесить книжную полку на стенку и
отремонтировать электрический утюг. 6. Раз в месяц я
хожу в парикмахерскую, чтобы постричь волосы.
V. Составьте диалоги, аналогичные заданному. Из-
мените вид деятельности.
Ann: What are your plans for tomorrow, Lora?
Lora: Well, first I’m going to do the washing up.
Ann: Poor you. While you’re doing the washing up,
I’ll be having breakfast in bed.
Lora: It’s all right for some people.
Activities:
wash up
clean a living room
change the clothes
prepare dinner
look after a baby
do one’s homework
go to bed
have breakfast in bed
walk in the country
drink in a pub
talk to friends
visit a night-club
dance
see sunrise
VI. Прочитайте и перескажите диалог в косвенной
речи.
Ann: Hello, Mary.
Mary: Hello, come in. Don’t mind the mess. I’m just
doing the room.
Ann: Oh, what a pity you are busy. I’ve got two tickets
for the cinema. The show begins at three sharp.
Mary: Don’t worry. It never takes me much time to tidy
up my room.
Ann: Let me help you. What am I to do?
247
Mary: If you don’t mind, you may water the flowers and
dust the books while I sweep the floor and put
everything in its place.
Ann: Don’t you want to air the room? Do you mind if I
open the window?
Mary: Oh, no. I don’t mind it a bit.
Ann: Now the room looks quite tidy. There is nothing
else to do. Let’s go.
Mary: Wait a moment. I have to wash up the dishes.
Ann: Somebody else can do it, I think.
Mary: Certainly, everybody can, but today it’s my turn
to do it. We all help Mother about the house as
much as we can.
Ann: And who does the shopping in your family?
Mary: As a rule, mother does shopping after work. But
today I must buy something for supper as Mother
has a meeting at her work.
VII. Выразите свое отношение к обсуждаемой в
тексте проблеме.
FAMILY DAILY ROUTINES
It is not a bad idea to nave a kind of subdivision of la-
bour at home when each person knows his own daily
household jobs. The children should keep their own room
tidy, make their beds, set the table for meals, clear away
the dishes and wash up. The mother could then concentrate
on the more specialized jobs of cooking, washing, ironing and
mending. It would be useless, however, if the children prom-
ised to help, and then failed to do their jobs, so that she con-
stantly had to say: “I wish you would make your bed, Carol.
I’d like you to pick up all those toys from the floor, Bob”.
Shopping at the supermarket could be a kind of family out-
ing, if they all were free at the right time and went together
and helped to choose the goods and push the trolley.
VIII. Переведите текст co словарем.
HOW WE KEPT MOTHER’S DAY
after S. Leacock.
We decided to have a special celebration of Mother’s
Day. We thought it a fine idea. It made us realize how
248
much Mother had done for us for years, and all the efforts
and sacrifices that she had made for our sake.
So we decided that we’d do everything we could to
make Mother happy. Father decided to take a holiday
from his office and my sister and I stayed home from col-
lege and Mary and my brother stayed home from High
School.
Our plan was to make the day like a big holiday. So we
decided to decorate the house with flowers. We asked
Mother to arrange the decoration because she always does
it on holidays.
Well, after breakfast we had it arranged as a surprise
for Mother that we would hire a motor car and take her
for a beautiful drive away into the country. Mother is
never able to go to the country because she is busy in the
house all the time.
We asked Mother to cut some sandwiches and make up
a sort of lunch in case we got hungry. Mother packed it
all up in a basket for us ready to go to the car.
When the car came to the door, it turned out that
there was no room in it for us all. Father said he could stay
at home; he said that there was a lot of work in the garden
that he could do. He wanted us to go right ahead and be
happy. Of course, we didn't want to let Father stay at home.
So in the end it was decided that Mother would stay
home and have a lovely restful day round the house, and
make the dinner. Mother doesn’t like fishing, and also it
was a little cold and fresh out of doors and Father was
rather afraid that Mother might take cold if she came. We
said good-bye to Mother and drove away. Mother stood
and watched us as long as she could see us.
We had a very happy day up among the hills. It was
quite late when we came back, but Mother had guessed
that we would be late, so she kept the dinner so as to have
it just nicely ready and hot for us. She had to get up and
down a good bit during the meal, fetching things back and
forward. The dinner lasted a long while, and when it was
over all of us wanted to help to clear the things away and
wash the dishes. But Mother said that she would do it
herself, and so we let her.
It was quite late when it was all over, and when we all
kissed Mother before going to bed she said it had been the
most wonderful day in her life, and I think there were
tears in her eyes.
249
UNIT 7
Conversational Topic SHOPPING
When we want to buy something, we go to a shop.
There are many kinds of shops in every town or city, but
most of them have a food supermarket, a department
store, men’s and women’s clothing stores, a grocery, a
bakery and a butchery.
I like to do my shopping at big supermarkets because
you can buy a lot of goods more cheaply there than at
small local shops.,There are several department stores un-
der one roof at all supermarkets./in Britain they often
belong to different firms which tun them individually.
Prices vary from department to department. They sell a
wide assortment of confectionery and bakery, wines,
fruits and vegetables, smoked meat and sausage, dairy
products, butcher’s meat, a lot of jewellery, electrical ap-
pliances, perfumery, household goods, sport goods and
foot wear, knitted and leather goods, textiles, stationary,
etc.
Supermarkets are brightly-lit and well laid out. The
goods are tidily arranged on trays and long shelves on
which the prices are clearly marked. There’s plenty of
room for the customers to walk about.
In the supermarkets most of the goods are sold ready-
weighed, ready-packed and wrapped. You can find wide
selection of everything here from shoe polish to eggs. In
the women’s clothing department, for example, you can
buy dresses, costumes, blouses, skirts, coats, beautiful
underwear, etc.
In the men’s clothing department you can choose suits,
trousers, overcoats, ties, etc. In the knitwear department
one can buy sweaters, cardigans, short-sleeved and long-
sleeved pullovers, woolen jackets. In the perfumery they
sell face cream and powder, lipstick, lotions and shampoos.
Another shop we frequently go to is a greengrocery
which is stocked with cabbage, potatoes, onions, cucum-
bers, carrots, beets, green peas, etc. I like to buy fruits
and vegetables there. They smell good and you feel as if
are in an exotic country.
Customers go round the supermarket with a basket or
trolley getting the food from the shelves. Having filled
250
your basket you go to the cash desk, where there is a
short queue. When there is your turn the prices of your
purchases are added up. You pay money to the cashier and
she gives you back the change.
There are departments, known as «bargain sales»,
where they sell goods at reduced prices. It is important
for housewives because the prices are going up constantly.
Тематический словарь
shop, n
self-service
shop
shop-assistant, n
shop window, n
do shopping
department
store
supermarket, n
grocery, n
greengrocery, n
bakery, n
butchery, n
confectionery.n
stationary, n
sell, v
to be on sale
buy, v
pay, v
clothes, n
foot-wear, n
shoes, n
toy, n
china, n
appliance, n
knit-wear, n
linen, n
fabrics, n
camera, n
dress, n
costume, n
blouse, n
skirt, n
underwear, n
coat, n
магазин try on, V
магазин само- fitting-room, n
обслуживания suit, v
продавец витрина fit, v
делать покупки универсальный match, v
магазин
большой мага- cheap, a
зин самообслу- expensive, a
живания suit, n
бакалея овощной мага- trousers, n
зин sweater, n
булочная pullover, n
мясная лавка jacket, n
кондитерская perfumery, n
канцтовары face cream
продавать powder, n
быть в продаже lipstick, n
покупать lotion, n
платить shampoo, n
одежда products, n
обувь ботинки, туфли sausage, n
игрушка fish, n
фарфоровая по- meat, n
суда poultry, n
прибор, при- sugar, n
способление macaroni, n
трикотаж белье cereals, n
ткани bread, n
фотоаппарат roll, n
платье biscuit, n
костюм milk, n
(женский) cream, n
блуза sour cream, n
юбка cheese, n
нижнее белье butter, n
пальто customer, n
примерять
примерочная
быть к лицу
подходить (по
размеру)
подходить ( по
качеству,
цвету)
дешевый
дорогой
костюм
( мужской )
брюки
свитер
пуловер
жакет
парфюмерия
крем для лица
пудра
губная помада
лосьон
шампунь
продукты пи-
тания
колбаса
рыба
мясо
птица
сахар
макаронные
изделия
крупы
хлеб
булочка
печенье
молоко
слнвки
сметана
сыр
масло
покупатель
251
raincoat, n
counter, n
cashier, n
cash desk, n
purchase, n
change, n
плащ
прилавок
кассир
касса
покупка
сдача
serve, v
price, n
basket, n
reduced prices
bargain sales
обслуживать
цена
корзина
сниженные цены
распродажа
Речевые фразы
How much is this dress?
What’s the price of this
dress?
It costs ... roubles.
I would like to buy ...
What floor are the suits on?
Where can I buy ...
It suits me.
I take it.
Сколько стоит это платье?
Оно стоит ... рублей.
Я хочу купить ...
Где продают костюмы?
Где можно купить ...
Это меня устраивает (мне
подходит)
Я покупаю это.
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы:
1. Do you often go shopping?
2. What shops do you usually go to?
3. What do you buy at a grocery, butchery, perfumery?
4. What dairy products do you know?
5. Where do you go for fish?
6. Which do you prefer: tinned vegetables or fresh
vegetables, pickled or green cucumbers?
7. What departments are there in the Belarus store?
8. Is there an escalator in this store?
9. When were you at a big shop last?
10. What did you buy there?
11. Are the prices high in our shops?
12. What is sold at the butcher’s (baker’s, greengro-
cer’s)?
13. Where do you buy tea, coffee and sugar?
14. What clothes do you prefer: cotton, woolen, silk or
nylon?
15. Do you prefer low or high-heeled shoes for everyday
wear?
16. Which method of shopping do you like most of all?
252
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. I usually do shopping twice a week.
2. The things for sale are displayed on the counters.
3. Everything is sold ready-weighed here.
4. The selection of goods in the shops was very limited.
5. Before buying the suit you must try it on.
6. I prefer clothes made of wool and cotton.
III. Спросите своего друга:
— любит ли он ходить в магазины;
— как часто он делает дорогие покупки;
— большой ли выбор товаров в магазинах ГУМ и
ЦУМ;
— сколько стоит телевизор (холодильник);
— что он покупает ко дню рождения друга;
— обращается ли он за помощью к продавцу;
— какую одежду он предпочитает: спортивную или
элегантную;
— какие товары он покупает к началу учебного года;
— какие магазины находятся рядом с его домом;
— нравится ли ему профессия продавца.
IV. Закончите следующие предложения.
1. When you want to buy something ... 2. There are
different kinds of shops in our city: ... 3. A department
store is divided into several departments: ... 4. In the
men’s clothing department you can find ... 5. In the
women’s clothing department you choose ... 6. After you
have chosen the thing you ... 7. If you need a jacket or a
pullover you can go to ... 8. Shoes are sold at ... 9. In a
supermarket you can buy ... 10. The greengrocery is
stocked by ...11. At a dairy you can buy ...
V. Назовите одним словом.
1. What do we call a person who sells goods (does
shopping, to whom you pay money in a store)?
2. What do we call a place where you do shopping (pay
for your goods, try on clothes, the goods are displayed)?
3. What do we call the department (shop) where ready-
made clothes (shoes, face creams, milk, meat, bread, vege-
tables) are sold?
253
VI. Составьте ситуации, используя следующие слова
и словосочетания;
a) self-service shop, a shop window, to display goods,
shop-assistant, to serve the customer, a basket, a counter,
cashier, to cost, to give back the change;
6) a blouse, to fit, to suit, a fitting room, to try on,
tight, loose, to be of the latest fashion and style (out of
fashion);
в) a book-shop, to look for, be on sale, to be sold out, to
recommend, a newspaper stall, to be lucky.
VII. Переведите предложения на английский язык.
1. Я хотел бы купить несколько новых сорочек и
галстуков, которые бы к ним подходили. 2. Интересно,
сколько может стоить такой костюм? 3. Покупатель
попросил продавца показать ему сорочку 42 размера.
4. Сегодня в продаже есть сорочки всех цветов и раз-
меров. 5. Аня любит носить модные туфли на высоком
каблуке. 6. Обычно она делает покупки в небольшом
магазине рядом с домом. 7. Этот костюм мне подходит
по размеру, но я думаю, что он мне не совсем к лицу.
8. В нашем гастрономе можно купить все продукты,
кроме овощей. 9. В отделе одежды имеется большой
выбор товаров. 10. Покупатель оплачивает чек, кладет
покупки в сумку и уходит из магазина. 11. Я пред-
почитаю делать покупки в больших магазинах само-
обслуживания.
VIII. Прочитайте диалоги. Выпишите незнакомые
слова и словосочетания. Выучите их наизусть.
In a Shop
(typical interaction)
1
Ass.: Can I help you?
Cust.: No, it’s all right, thanks, I’m just looking round.
Ass.: That’s O.K.
Cust.: (in some minutes) I like this navy-blue jacket very
much. Can I try it on?
Ass.: Certainly. The fitting room is in the right-hand
corner.
Cust.: Oh, it suits me very well, doesn’t it?
254
Ass.: That’s a really nice jacket. Pure wool, a modern
fashion.
Cust.: How much is it?
Ass.: £ 55. English clothes are really good value. They
are so well-made.
Cust.: All right. I can afford the price.
2
Ass: Can I help you?
Cust.: Yes, please. I would like to have something from
this shopping list.
Ass.: Oh, your shopping list is very big. We stock only
three items you ask for: butter, milk and cheese.
Cust.: Two packets of butter, a pound of cheese and three
bottles of milk, please.
Ass.: Here they are. Pay by cheque at the cash desk.
Cust.: Excuse me, do you happen to know where I could
find some ham, minced meat and beef sausages?
Ass.: They are all sold at the butcher’s.
Cust.: And I wonder if you stock any cigarettes here?
Ass.: I’m afraid we don’t. You should try the shop next
door for the cigarettes.
3
Cust.: Hello, I’m looking for a pullover. Can you show me
one?
Ass.: Certainly, madam. What kind of pullover do you
want?
Cust.: A woolen one. Medium size.
Ass.: How about this one? It’s very attractive.
Cust.: Yes, but it’s too thick.
Ass.: How about this yellow one?
Cust.: Oh, it’s quite nice but it’s too short and I don’t like
the colour.
Cust.: What colour do you want?
Ass.: I think blue or brown will do.
Ass.: Well, we have some pullovers of that colour. Here
they are. Which one do you like best?
Cust.: Can I try this brown one?
Ass.: Of course, madam. ...Oh, it fits you perfectly. It’s
exactly your size.
Cust.: Yes, but I don’t think it suits me. Can I try that
blue one? It matches the colour of my eyes.
255
Ass.: Unfortunately, we can’t offer you exactly what you
want. The colour, size, material, price are all
wrong. Try another shop, please.
Cust.: Excuse me, please.
Ass.: That’s all right. But you’d better go to a big su-
permarket next time. You’ll find everything there.
Cust.: Thank you very much. It was very kind of you to
explain me all that. I'm a foreigner here and I’m
not accustomed to your service and prices yet.
IX. Прочитайте текст и обсудите вопросы, следую-
щие за ним.
SHOPS IN BRITAIN
Most shops in Britain open at 9.00 a.m. and close at
5.00 or 5.30 in the evening. Small shops usually close for
an hour at lunch time. On one or two days a week — usu-
ally Thursday/Friday some large food shops stay open un-
til about 8.00 p.m. for late night shopping.
Many shops are closed in the afternoon on one day a
week. The day is usually Wednesday or Thursday and it is
a different day in different towns.
Nearly all shops are closed on Sundays. Newspaper
shops are open in the morning and sell sweets and ciga-
rettes as well. But there are legal restrictions on selling
many things on Sunday.
In general, overseas visitors don’t have much difficulty
knowing where to buy things. Most shops sell the things
that you would not expect them to. One problem is
stamps. In Great Britain you can only buy these at post-
offices.
Many large food shops (supermarkets) are self-service.
When you go into one of these shops you take a basket
and you put the things you wish to buy into it. You queue
up at a cash-desk and pay for everything just before you
leave.
If someone tries to take things from a shop without
paying they are almost certain to be caught. Most shops
have store detectives who have the job catching shoplift-
ers. Shoplifting is considered a serious crime by the police
and the courts.
When you are waiting to be served in a shop it is im-
portant to wait your turn. It is important not to try to be
served before people who arrived before you. Many people
256
from overseas are astonished at the British habit of
queueing.
1. Are there any differences between shops in Britain
and in your country?
2. Which do you think is better, a small shop with per-
sonal service or a big self-service shop?
X. Составьте короткие рассказы на заданную тему.
1. The shops in my street.
2. A self-service shop.
3. My usual shopping round.
4. At the baker’s.
9 Зак. 2112
UNIT 8
Conversational Topic MY FRIEND
Friendship is a very important thing in people’s lives.
It is so nice to have a person you can rely on. Close
friends usually have similar ideas and beliefs. They under-
stand, respect and trust each other. Your best friend al-
ways helps you when you have problems or troubles. But
we must also think how to keep friendship going because
good friends are easier lost than found.
I have lots of friends around me. They make my life
more interesting and enjoyable. Now I’d like to tell you
about my best friend Olga. She is my classmate and lives
next door to me. Olga is a pretty girl. She is thin, slender
and stylish. She has got lovely dark hair, blue eyes with
long lashes and a straight nose. Her skin is fine. She usu-
ally wears sweaters with knee-length skirts or trousers.
Olga is an active and energetic person. She can’t bear
just sitting around doing nothing. It makes her impatient
and restless. She knows what she wants, and I think she is
sure to achieve her goal.
Olga is hardworking, organized and does well at school.
She is a kind of person who always knows how to have a
good time. Olga has a good sense of humour and never
looks moody. She enjoys being the centre of attention
while I am always nervous in public.
I can’t say I’m passive, but still I’m different. My
problem can be summarized in the words: lack of confi-
dence. I’m shy with other people who may think I’m bor-
ing and stupid sometimes. Lack of confidence also makes
me indecisive: I spend days trying to make up my mind
what to do about quite simple things. Unlike my friend
I’m disorganized and sometimes absent-minded. I’m hard-
working too especially when I’m doing something I’m in-
terested in. But if you compare Olga and me, my friend is
more mature for her age physically, emotionally, intellec-
tually.
We both like reading fiction, exploring the city, its
streets, churches and museums. We spend much time to-
gether, help each other to do our homework, go to the ci-
nema, walk in the park, exchange books.
258
I respect my friend for her strong will, cheerful and
kind character, her intellect and modesty. She is always
full of ideas and knows what and how to do. It’s very
pleasant to be with her around.
Тематический словарь
friend, n друг, подруга brown, а коричневый.
friendship, n дружба карий
make friends подружиться blue, а голубой
appearance, n внешность grey, а серый
ugly, a безобразный nose, п нос
attractive, a привлекательный achieve the goal достигать цели
slim, a изящный mature, a зрелый
slender, a стройный impatient, a нетерпеливый
thin, a худощавый absent-minded, a рассеянный
plump, a пухлый, self-confident, a самоуверенный
полный indecisive, a нерешительный
expression, n выражение worried, a обеспокоенный
cheerful, a веселый angry, a сердитый
ordinary, a обычный superior, a надменный
figure, n фигура* kind, a добрый
impressive, a впечатляющий straight, a прямой
well-built, a хорошо сло- habit, n привычка
женный character, n характер
of medium среднего роста open-minded, a открытый
height strong, a сильный
hair, n волосы honest, a честный
dark, a темный sense of humour чувство юмора
fair, a русый face, n лицо
blond, a светлый oval, a овальный
curly, a вьющийся forehead, n лоб
wavy, a волнистый eyebrow, n бровь
moustache, n усы cheek, n щека
eyes, n глаза lip, n губа
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Have you got many friends?
2. Who is your best friend?
3. When did you make friends?
4. What is your friend?
5. How old is he?
6. Where was he born?
7. Where does he live now?
8. What does he look like?
9. Does he study at the University or at any other in-
stitute?
259
10. What year student is he?
11. What is his future profession?
12. Where does he work?
13. What are the main features of his character?
14. Can you rely on your friend in everything?
15. Do you often spend time together?
16. What is your friend’s hobby?
17. Is he married?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. Му best friend is Oleg.
2. In appearance he is an impressive figure.
3. Oleg is particularly known for his strong character.
4. We made friends with Oleg in childhood.
5. Oleg is fond of music.
III. Прочитайте и скажите, кто из ваших знако-
мых соответствует следующим описаниям внешности.
1
She is attractive. She’s got lovely long hair but the
trouble is she knows it as well. She really thinks she’s the
greatest. She always thinks she’s the best at everything.
All she ever thinks about is herself. She can’t stand criti-
cism of herself.
2
He wears glasses and moustache. I can’t see his face.
Maybe because of this I can’t really trust him. He looks like a
bandit to me.
3
She is a dreadful person. She’s got lots of money but
she hates spending it. She is not very tall — about 156 cm
and she’s rather thin. I suppose she has got blond hair, but
she is not at all attractive. That face! Oh, god! She’s awful!
4
He is a man of 40, not good-looking and not yet ugly.
His hair is reddish, cut very short, his eyes are small,
blue or grey. He looks commonplace. He is just a good,
dull, honest, plain man, a pretty bore. One can admire his
qualities, but avoid his company.
260
5
He’s always complaining about everything around. It
gets on my nerves. And he hasn’t got any sense of humour
at all. If you spend more than five minutes with him you
just want to sleep.
IV. Схематично изобразите лица людей, соответст-
вующие следующим описаниям.
1. Не is 27 years old, 180 cm tall with short black hair
and oval face. He is well-built and extremely strong.
2. I think the glasses suit her. And she’s got that beau-
tiful long hair. She’s always happy and smiling. It’s im-
possible to be depressed with her around.
3. She is not particulary good-looking, but she’s got
lovely dark curly hair.
V. Расскажите об окружающих вас людях:
а) друзьях, одноклассниках;
б) родителях, братьях, сестрах;
в) идеальном мужчине (женщине);
г) любимой актрисе и т.п.
VI. Переведите предложения на английский язык.
1. У меня много хороших друзей. 2. С Николаем и
Денисом мы подружились в школе, с Толей — во время
службы в армии. 3. Мой брат выше матери, но он не
такой высокий, как отец. 4. Кто твой друг по профес-
сии? — Он будущий инженер. 5. У Олега впечатляющая
внешность: его рост 185 см, он хорошо сложен, привле-
кателен, открыт. Его жена — среднего роста, она
изящная и добродушная. 6. Эти студенты обладают
чувством юмора, они всегда веселы и довольны жизнью.
7. Как выглядит ваша учительница? — Она молода,
стройна, со светлыми короткими волосами и карими
глазами. 8. Дружба помогает им лучше узнать друг
друга. 9. У этих молодых людей много общего.
VII. Перескажите содержание диалога в косвенной
речи.
Woman: Barbara reminds me of my niece. She’s got the
same lovely curly hair and blue eyes. Blue eyes
and blond hair go together, don’t they?
261
Man: Oh, yes. I normally prefer women with long hair
but this is beautiful. It really suits her, anyway.
If I wasn’t married, I think I might ....
Woman: You are always joking, John. Barbara has got a
boyfriend. She is very serious and very helpful
as well. If anything goes wrong she’ll listen to
your problem and help you if she can.
Man: As for me I like another thing about her. She is
always friendly and smiling. She never complains
about the weather and other things. It’s pleasant
and easy being with her.
VIII. Переведите текст co словарем.
FRIENDSHIP
Friends play an important part in our lives and al-
though we may take the fact of friendship for granted, we
often don’t clearly understand how we make friends.
While we get on well with a number of people, we are
usually friends with only a few — for example, the aver-
age among students is about 6 per person.
Moreover, a great many relationship come under the
term "friendship". In all cases, two people like one another
and enjoy being together, but beyond that, the degrees of
intimacy between them and the reasons for their mutual
interest vary enormously.
Initially, much depends on how people meet and on fa-
vourable first impressions. As we got to know people, we
take into account things like age, race, physical attrac-
tiveness, economic and social status, and intelligence. Al-
though these factors are not of prime importance, it is
more difficult to relate to people when there is a marked
difference in age and background.
On a more immediate level, we are sensitive to actual
behaviour, facial expression, and tone of voice. Friends
will stand closer together and will spend more time look-
ing at each other than mere acquaintances. Smiles and
soft voices also express friendliness. A friendly look with
the wrong facial expression can turn into an aggressive
stare and nervousness may be misread as hostility. People
who do not look one in the eyes are mistrusted when in
fact, they simply lack confidence.
It is usual for close friends to have similar ideas and
beliefs, to have attitudes and interests in common — they
262
often talk about being on the same wavelength. It gener-
ally takes time to reach this point, sometimes people
•click” immediately. The more intimately involved people
become, the more they rely on one another. People want to
do friends favours and hate to let them down.
In contrast with marriage there are no friendship
ceremonies, no ritual to strengthen the association be-
tween two people. But the experiences and emotions do
create a powerful bond, which can overcome difficulties in
background, and break down barriers of age, class or race.
IX. Подберите русские эквиваленты к следующим
поговоркам и пословицам.
A friend in need is a friend indeed. When a friend
asks, there is no tomorrow. Friends are thieves of time. A
man is judged by his foes as well as by his friends.
UNIT 9
Conversational Topic SEASONS AND WEATHER
There are four seasons in the year: winter, spring,
summer and autumn. Each of them lasts three months.
Every new year begins in winter, on the first of Janu-
ary. This day is a holiday in our country and people deco-
rate their flats with New Year trees.
In Belarus winter is usually a cold season. It often
snows, the rivers and lakes are frozen over. The average
temperature is about 5 degrees below zero. The most un-
pleasant thing about winter is that the sun sets early and
rises late — especially in December and January. The days
are short, the sky is often grey, nature is sleeping and
sometimes it gets rather boring.
But at the end of March the weather gets gradually
milder. The sun shines more brightly. The days become
longer, snow begins melting. Spring comes and nature
awakens after a long sleep of winter. All kinds of plants
and flowers (snowdrops, tulips, primeroses, etc.) come
out. The grass is amazingly fresh. I can’t help loving it.
The birds return from the South and make their nests.
They look so happy and cheerful. I feel happy with them
too listening to their pleasant songs. The farmers begin
the sowing campaign. They fertilize the soil, plough the
fields, plant trees and vegetables. Everybody is automati-
cally much happier in spring. You feel as if you were born
anew.
Spring is followed by summer. The weather gets still
warmer and sometimes it is very hot. The sky is blue and
cloudless. But sometimes there are storms with thunder
and lightning. The gardens are gay with flowers all sum-
mer months. The corn gets golden in the fields. In sum-
mer people spend much time in the open air. They find
time to go to the forest, to swim in the river, to sunbathe.
Summer is a vacation time. I like it very much, but my
favourite season is spring. As the great Russian poet A.S.
Pushkin said: «Oh, summer, fine! I’d love you but for the
heat, the mosquitos and flies».
Autumn comes in September with the beginning of the
school year. Early autumn is still the harvest time, the
time when fruits and vegetables become ripe. It is also a
264
very beautiful time of the year, when the weather is still
warm and the leaves change their colour from green to
yellow and red. Everything around is greenish-gold.
Late autumn is less beautiful. It gets colder, the days
are shorter, in the morning it often freezes. Last leaves
fall from trees and cover the ground. There’s much rain
and fog. Birds fly away to warm countries. Low and heavy
clouds hang in the sky. The landscape gets rather dull.
Nature slowly falls asleep for winter.
In fact every season has its fine days and is pleasant in
its own way. And it is not difficult to see this beauty.
Тематический словарь
season, n
period, n
year, n
month, n
day, n
winter, n
spring, n
summer, n
autumn, n
weather, n
weather fore-
cast
climate, n
snow, n
snowy, a
sun, n
sunny, a
shine, v
win'd, n
windy, a
blow, v
bright, a
fine, a
long, a
short, a
awaken, v
melt, v
freeze, v
cover, v
become, v
it gets
cold, a
cool, a
warm, a
сезон
период
год
месяц
день
зима
весна
лето
осень
погода
прогноз погоды
климат
снег
снежный
солнце
солнечный
светить
ветер
ветреный
дуть
яркий
прекрасный
длинный
короткий
просыпаться
таять
замерзать
покрывать
становиться
становится
холодный
прохладный
теплый
hot, а жаркий
pleasant, а приятный
strong, а сильный
dry, а сухой
mild, а мягкий
wet, а мокрый
rain, п дождь
rainy, а дождливый
cloud, п облако
storm, п шторм, буря
stormy, а бурный
sky, п небо
thunder, п гром
lightning, п молния
landscape, п пейзаж
nature, п природа
grass, п трава
ground, п земля
leaf, п лист
temperature, п' температура
average, а средний
sowing campaign посевная
fertilize the удобрять почву
soil
plough the пахать поля
fields
plant trees сажать деревья
harvest, n урожай
fruit, n фрукты
vegetable, n овощ
gather, v собирать
ripe, a спелый
grow, V расти
265
Речевые фразы
What is the weather like today? — Какая сегодня
погода?
I’m wet to the skin. — Я промок насквозь.
Have you heard the weather forecast for tomorrow? —
Вы слышали прогноз погоды на завтра?
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. How many seasons are there in the year?
2. What are they?
3. How long does each season last?
4. What are the winter (spring, summer, autumn)
months?
5. What is the weather like in winter (spring, summer,
autumn)?
6. In what season of the year does nature return to life?
7. What is the nature like in spring?
8. Which season is the hottest in the year?
9. Why do people like to have their holidays in summer?
10. Do you stay in town or do you go to the country in
summer?
11. What season is the harvest time?
12. Is the weather pleasant in September?
13. Does it often rain in autumn?
14. What is the shortest (longest) day of the year?
15. What is the busiest season of the year?
16. Which is your favourite season and why?
17. What is the weather like today?
18. What can depend on the weather?
II. Спросите своего друга:
какой самый холодный сезон года;
когда больше всего бывает дождей;
была ли снежной прошлая зима;
замерзают ли реки в Беларуси;
где более мягкий климат: в Великобритании или в
Беларуси;
катаются ли на лыжах в Мексике;
когда берут с собой зонтик;
когда одевают теплую одежду.
266
III. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. There are four seasons in the year.
2. Each season lasts three months.
3. Last winter was very snowy.
4. It often rains in autumn.
5. It is getting cold.
IV. Вставьте слова rainy, sunny, snowy или windy.
1. When it rains people say that the weather is ...;
when it snows they say it is ...; when the wind blows, it is
...; when the sun shines, the weather is ... .
2. Winter is ... in our republic, but not in England.
3. There are many ... days in autumn.
4. We had a ... summer last year.
5. When it is ... we take umbrellas.
V. Переведите предложения на английский язык.
1. Летом дни длинные, а ночи короткие. 2. Зимой
мы носим теплую одежду, летом легкую. 3. В Англии
не часто идет снег, но часто бывает дождь. 4. Весной
становится теплей, а осенью холодней. 5. В середине
лета бывает очень жарко. 6. В теплых странах зимы не
холодные. Когда идет снег, он сразу же тает. 7. Мне не
понравилась зима в прошлом году. Было мокро и сыро.
8. Начало осени часто называют «бабье лето» (Indian
summer). 9. Когда идет дождь, я надеваю плащ или
беру с собой зонт. 10. В Англии погода может меняться
несколько раз в день.
VI. Прочтите текст и обсудите вопросы, следую-
щие за ним.
CLIMATE AND WEATHER
You must know from your geography lessons that cli-
mate is the average weather conditions of a place; it is
made up of the average summer and winter temperature,
the amount of sunshine, the direction of the winds, the
average rainfall and so on. Climate may be hot, cold, dry,
wet, mild, tropical, sub-tropical and continental.
Weather is the condition of the atmosphere at a certain
time or over a certain short period. Weather is connected
with atmospheric pressure, temperature, rainfall, cloudi-
267
ness, and wind. Weather can be good, bad, fine, excellent,
beautiful, rainy, snowy, stormy, dry, hot, cold, cool,
warm, pleasant.
Samuel Johnson, an English author of the 18th cen-
tury, said: “When two Englishmen meet, their first talk is
of the weather”. This is true because the weather on the
British Isles is always uncertain. "Other countries have a
climate; in England we have weather". This statement is
often made by Englishmen to describe the meteorological
conditions of their country.
Because the weather can change quickly in Britain it’s
useful to be able to find out what kind of weather to ex-
pect in the next day or two. Information about the
weather that’s likely to come is called a weather forecast,
though it’s often included with information about recent
weather in a weather report.
There are regular local and national weather reports on
television and radio during the day and in the evening.
You can also get weather reports by phone.
Mark the difference between:
a) climate and weather;
b) a weather forecast and a weather report;
c) climate in England and on the continent.
VII. Прочтите следующие прогнозы погоды на вы-
ходные дни и скажите, как они могут повлиять на
вашу деятельность.
Образец: 10° С, heavy rain, gale force winds.
The forecast says it’ll be quite cold and it’s
going to rain heavily. And it’s going to be
extremely windy. So it sounds like a day to
stay at home and do some reading.
1) 20° C, cloudy, no wind;
2) -10° C, clear sky, windy;
3) 30° C, hot, no wind;
4) 0° C, snow, strong winds;
5) 5° C, fog, no wind.
VIII. Прочитайте следующие микродиалоги о погоде
и выразите свое отношение к утверждению, что «раз-
говоры о погоде — это искусство говорить ни о чем».
263
1
— It’s very cold today, isn’t it?
— Yes, but it was colder yesterday.
— But I hope it will get warmer soon, in two days at
least.
— Then it would be lovely at the weekend.
2
— It’s a lovely day today, isn’t it?
— Yes, it is. It has been a beautiful spring this
year.
— Yes, the farmers must be happy, I think.
— Oh, yes, they can do a lot of work when the weather
is fine, can’t they?
— Sure they can.
3
— Lovely day, isn’t it?
— Yes, quite a contrast to yesterday’s. It makes a nice
change.
— Let’s hope it lasts!
4
— Dark clouds gather in the sky and it’s going to
rain.
— It looks more like snow. The clouds are too heavy
and low. In fact rains seldom occur at the end of No-
vember.
IX. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. If it is colder (warmer) today than it was yesterday,
what can you say about yesterday?
2. When is a raincoat more convenient than an um-
brella?
3. When are we glad to see clouds in the sky?
4. Where can you find shelter from the rain?
5. Why do we enjoy the shade of a tree in summer?
6. Which direction does a north wind blow?
X. Выразите свое отношение к содержанию следую-
щих стихотворений.
When the weather is wet,
We must not fret,
When the weather is cold,
We must not scold.
269
When the weather is warm,
We must not storm.
But be thankful together
Whatever the weather.
Man is a fool
When it’s hot, he wants it cool;
When it’s cool, he wants it hot;
He always wants what he has not got.
XI. Прочитайте текст и передайте его содержание
на английском языке.
OBSERVING NATURE
If people carefully observe nature it can tell them many
interesting and useful things.
Do you know that thanks to observing nature you can
forecast weather? “How?” you may ask. By watching birds
and animals, insects and flowers. It is known that some
insects become more troublesome before a change in the
weather. Flies and mosquitoes, for example, begin to hum
and bite before the rain. Big blue-black beetles fly only on
evenings before nice weather.
You should know that the smell of flowers in the gar-
dens and in the parks is very strong before it rains. Flowers
have much sweet nectar before rain and the nectar is good
food for insects. So if you see insects flying over flowers in
large numbers you should know that it may rain soon.
Birds and animals also help to forecast weather. Birds
fly lower than usual before it rains. If you happen to see a
bird hiding its head under its wing, it means that soon it
will become colder.
Even your cat can tell you what the weather will be
like. The cat washing behind the ears is telling you about
the coming rain. Look at the sky and it will tell you about
the weather. A red evening sky tells of good weather the next
day, to say nothing about a little yellow or green sky. A grey
sunrise gives promise of a good day too. If you want to fore-
cast weather, you must know something about winds too.
The South wind brings wet weather,
The North wind is wet and cold together,
The West wind always brings us rain,
The East wind blows it back again.
Study nature, observe it and you’ll understand that it
needs your love and protection.
270
UNIT 10
Conversational Topic SCHOOL
School is a very special place. It’s a temple of knowle-
dge, a place were you grow up and take courage, make
friends and mould your personality. You come here as a
youngster of six, happy, shy, full of expectations and
leave it as a grown-up person of seventeen.
This year I’ve finished school No 50 in Minsk. IV is
known for its academic excellence and strict discipline.
The school is a two-storeyed building of a typical design.
In front of the school there is a big sports-ground, behind
it there is a small garden with beautiful flower-beds. Here
on the sports-ground pupils have their classes in physical
training when the weather is fine. They also have differ-
ent festivities here.
When you enter the school you can see a cloakroom, a
canteen, a gym, workshops and a headmaster’s office. On
the first floor there is a teachers’ room, a library, a large
assembly hall where pupils hold their meetings, a com-
puter class and a language laboratory. On the second floor
there are numerous classrooms and laboratories. They are
well-equipped and have all the devices for studying and
making experiments in different subject fields. On the
walls of the corridors you can see portraits of famous sci-
entists, writers, outstanding people of our country. There
are light curtains on the windows and many flowers on
the window-sills. The halls are full of sunlight.
I went to school six days a week. Classes began at 8.15
in the morning. We had six or seven lessons every day.
We had classes in Russian, Belarusian, Literature, Eng-
lish, Mathematics, Biology, Geography, Physics, Chemis-
try, History, Computer Programming. We also had Music,
Physical Education, Arts and Crafts. My favourite subject
was English. I liked to learn new words, to dramatize
texts and dialogues, I liked to discuss something inter-
esting, to debate, to have small-group discussions, etc.
The school was usually over at about two o’clock. After
classes we didn’t go home right away. We participated in
extracurricular activities. Our social and cultural life was
well-organized. We had an orchestra, a choir, an Arts
Club, and International Friendship Club. I took part in the
orchestra.
271
At school we had good teachers who treated us with re-
spect. They helped us to develop our critical and creative
thinking, to form our views and characters, our attitudes
to life and other people. The teachers also taught us to
love our Motherland, to treat nature carefully, to be hon-
est and hardworking. I enjoyed my school years and I
shall remember them for the rest of my life.
Тематический словарь
school, n
primary -
eight-year -
secondary -
education, n
upbringing, n
tuition, n
uniform, n
pupil, n
schoolboy, n
schoolgirl, n
class-mate, n
form, n
classroom, n
assembly hall
laboratory, n
Teacher’s room
Headmaster, n
workshop, n
cloak-room, n
blackboard, n
chalk, n
desk, n
textbook, n
lesson, n
exam, n
subject, n
history, n
школа
начальная
школа
восьмилетка
средняя школа
образование
воспитание
обучение
школьная
форма
ученик
школьник
школьница
одноклассник
класс
классная
комната
актовый зал
лаборатория
учительская
директор
мастерская
раздевалка
доска
мел
парта
учебник
урок
экзамен
предмет
история
geography, п
literature, п
language, п
mathematics, п
physics, п
chemistry, п
biology, п
physical training
exercise-book, n
bag, n
wall newspaper, n
tape-recorder, n
TV set, n
pen, n
science, n
knowledge, n
study, v
learn, v
teach, v
treat, v
attitude, n
well-equipped
subject field
debate, v
dramatize, v
make experi-
ments
academic ex-
cellence
device, n
география
литература
язык
математика
физика
химия
биология
физкультура
тетрадь
сумка,
портфель
стенная газета
магнитофон
телевизор
ручка
наука
знания
учиться
учить что-л.
учить кого-л.
обращаться
(с кем-л.)
отношение
хорошо обору-
дованный
область (знания)
обсуждать
инсцинировать
ставить опыты
качество обу-
чения
прибор
Упражнения
1. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. What school did you finish?
2. When did you finish school?
272
3. Where is it situated?
4. At what age do children go to school?
5. Do you remember your first day at school?
6. When is Knowledge Day celebrated in our country?
7. What is there in front of your school and behind it?
8. What is there on the ground floor (upper floors)?
9. Where is the Headmaster’s Office situated?
10. What do your classrooms look like?
11. What laboratories are there in your school?
12. Do you like your school teachers?
13. Who was your favourite teacher?
14. What was your favourite subject at school?
15. Who taught you this subject?
16. Were there any subjects you were bad at?
17. Did you work hard at school?
18. Did you have any problem with discipline?
19. Do you think it’s a great responsibility to be a
teacher?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. I go to school No 4.
2. Our school is a large building of a typical design.
3. I was good at languages.
4. Upbringing and education of children are in the
centre of our teacher’s attention.
III. Спросите своего друга:
— в какой школе он учится;
— помнит ли он имя своей первой учительницы;
— какое событие в школе он запомнил;
— какие предметы ему нравятся;
— когда начинается учебный год;
— занимается ли он спортом;
— сколько у него уроков каждый день;
— какой иностранный язык он изучает.
IV. Составьте ситуации, употребив следующие сло-
ва и словосочетания:
1) to remember, not to forget, to get up earlier than
usually, to feel excited, on the way to school, the first
teacher, to have classes;
273
2) to do well at, to be good at languages, to try one’s
best, to be too noisy, to take part in dramatic society, to
go in for sports, to make a report;
3) to be over, to ring, the bell, to walk in the corridor,
to discuss problems, to get ready for the next lesson, to
have a rest, to speak to.
V. Перескажите диалог в косвенной речи.
— Mum, let me introduce my teacher of English, Miss
Black.
— How do you do, Miss Black. I’m pleased to meet
you. My name is Mrs. Martins. I’d like to know about my
son’s progress in English.
— Oh, don’t worry. He is a diligent pupil and is doing
very well. But sometimes he is inattentive and likes to
speak to his friend at the lesson.
— I’m sorry to hear that, Miss Black. But you
wouldn’t really like him to be a model boy, would you?
— No, of course not. Tom is just a normal boy. But if
he is too noisy it will interfere with his schoolwork.
I Want him to do well at school.
— Thank you, Miss Black. I’ll talk to him about it.
VI. Прочитайте текст и обсудите вопросы, следую-
щие за ним.
Pupils at the secondary school in England (that is, pu-
pils between the ages of twelve and eighteen) have two
main exams to worry about, both called G.C.E. (General
Certificate of Education).
They take the first one when they are about fifteen.
It’s called “O” (ordinary) level. There is an exam which
you can take instead of “O” level: it’s called the C.S.E.
(Certificate of Secondary Education), and it’s not as diffi-
cult as “O” level.
Most people take “0” level in about seven or eight dif-
ferent subjects. There are lots of subjects to choose from —
everything from carpentry to ancient languages.
For a lot of jobs, such as nursing, you must have four
or five “O” levels, and usually these must include English
and Maths.
You may leave school when you are fifteen. But if you
stay at school after taking “O” level, you go into the sixth
form, and start working for the second main exam: “A”
274
(advanced) level. Most people take “A” level when they are
about eighteen. It is quite a difficult exam, so people
don’t usually take it in more than three subjects — and
some only take one or two subjects. Three “A” levels are
enough to get you into most universities. For others, such
as Oxford and Cambridge, you have to take special exams
as well.
1. Are schools in Britain the same as in your country?
2. What similarities and differences have you noticed
from the passage?
VII. Прочитайте текст и передайте его содержание
на английском языке.
BELARUSIAN STATE UNIVERSITY
The Belarusian State University is one of the oldest in-
stitutions of higher education in Belarus. It was founded
in 1921 and 1,010 workers and peasants were admitted to
its 2 faculties that year.
The republic’s first higher school rapidly grew and de-
veloped and in the pre-war period a number of independ-
ent higher schools for medicine, pedagogics, national
economy appeared on the basis of the University.
During the Great Patriotic War the University was
razed to the ground by the nazi invaders.
In the post-war years the University was quickly re-
stored and in a short period of time it turned into one of
the largest institutions of higher education of the coun-
try.
At present the University has 12 faculties: Physics,
Mathematics, Applied Mathematics, Chemistry, Geogra-
phy, Biology, Philology, Journalism, History, Economy,
Law which train specialists in 17 professions and 50 spe-
cializations. It has day, evening and correspondence de-
partments where thousands of students study. There are
more than 16,000 students at the University. They attend
lectures and seminars. All the students study foreign lan-
guages. Students’ practical work is given much attention
to.
The students of the teachers’ training faculties give
lessons at secondary schools and work as leaders in chil-
dren’s summer camps.
275
The University course lasts five years. An academic
year is divided into two terms each ending in an examina-
tion session. Those who pass the exams successfully get a
scholarship.
The students who have advanced knowledge in foreign
languages work on a special curriculum and receive a spe-
cial diploma which gives them the right to use a foreign
language in their future work.
In 1967 the Belarusian State University was awarded
the Order of the Red Banner of Labour for its contribu-
tion to the development of science and academic training.
The University is a member of the International Uni-
versity Association and actively co-operates with the Uni-
versities of Sofia, Lyublyana, Warsaw and Krakow, Yena,
Berlin and others. These Universities constantly expand
the exchange of students, post-graduates and scientists.
The students of the University can do any sport they
like. A lot of students carry out research work in various
laboratories which are equipped with up-to-date devices.
Every year hundreds of young specialists begin work-
ing in different branches of national economy, science,
education, in mass media, prosecutor’s offices and courts.
VII. Запомните следующие поговорки.
1. It is never too late to learn.
2. Lost time is never found again.
3. Money spent on the brain is never spent in vain.
UNIT 11
Conversational Topic MY ENGLISH STUDIES
Learning a foreign language is not an easy thing. It is
a long and slow process that takes a lot of time and ef-
forts.
We began studying English in the fourth form of the
secondary school. We started with the ABC, transcription
and sounds. Then we learnt some English words, conversa-
tional phrases and dialogues by heart, read and translated
easy texts, did exercises, wrote dictations. Once a week we
worked in the language laboratory listening to the re-
corded tapes and doing laboratory works.
From lesson to lesson we improved our knowledge,
learnt more and more new words, grammatical structures
and put then into practice of speaking. We enjoyed our
English classes and prepared carefully for them. At home
we tried to listen to different educational programmes
over the radio, watched English films on TV. You can’t
speak English well if you don't know grammar rules, so
we often revised them.
Soon we were able not only to read and translate texts
but to discuss their contents in English, to communicate
with one another making useful statements in real-life
situations. I’m not a good speaker of English yet. It takes
me long to read English book in the original. Adapted and
abridged books are easier for me to read. But I hope that
soon I shall know English well.
One should say that English is not an easy language to
learn. There is a big problem of spelling, of the large
number of exceptions to any rule. This language is very
idiomatic and the prepositions are difficult to remember.
English is one of those languages which may seem easy in
the beginning, but then the bridge between basic knowl-
edge and mastery takes a long time to cross. But if you do
cross this bridge it will give you great satisfaction. You
will be able to speak to people from other countries, to
read foreign authors in the original, which makes your
outlook wider. It is not surprising that many intellectuals
and well-educated people know many foreign languages.
I want to know foreign languages because I have al-
ways been interested in foreign countries, their cultures
277
and peoples. I want to learn English in particular not only
because it is the language of such great countries as the
USA and Great Britain, but also because it has become the
international language, the language of progressive sci-
ence and engineering. To know English today is absolutely
necessary for every educated man, for every good specialist.
Тематический словарь
the ABC
transcription, n
sound, n
conversation, n
phrase, n
dialogue, n
effort, n
tape-recorder, n
master, v
practise, v
contents, n
communicate, v
knowledge, n
intellectual, n
teach, v
learn, v
алфавит
транскрипция
звук
беседа
фраза
диалог
усилие
магнитофон
овладевать, изу-
чать
упражнять (ся)
содержание
общаться
знание
интеллигент
учить, обучать
кого-л.
учить,
узнавать
study, v
read, v
translate, v
adapted, a
abridged, a
language, n
tongue, n
statement, n
outlook, n
spelling, n
exception, n
idiom, n
preposition, n
cross, v
учить(ся)
читать
переводить
адаптированный
сокращенный
язык
язык
утверждение
кругозор
орфография
исключение
идиома,
устойчивое
словосочетание
предлог
пересечь,
перейти
Речевые фразы
You’ll fail in your English
if you miss many lessons.
I passed English success-
fully at my finals.
Ты провалишь англий-
ский, если пропустишь
много уроков.
Я успешно сдал англий-
ский на выпускных
экзаменах.
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Is it easy to learn foreign languages?
2. Which language in the world is spoken by most people?
3. When did you begin learning English?
4. How long have you been learning it?
5. How long did it take you to prepare for your English
lesson?
6. Was there a language laboratory at your school?
7. How often did you work there?
8. Can you speak English well?
9. How can you improve your English?
10. Is it difficult for you to learn English?
11. Why is English not an easy language to learn?
12. Can you read English books in the original?
13. Have you got any English books and dictionaries at
home?
14. What advantages have the people who know foreign
languages?
15. Why do you want to learn English?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. I study at school (the University).
2. We learn grammar rules and structures.
3. I shall teach history at school.
4. You should practise English as much as possible if
you want to improve your language.
5. Now I can speak English well.
III. Составьте ситуации, употребив следующие сло-
ва и словосочетания:
1) to be interested in, intensive studies of foreign lan-
guages, a high level of knowledge, to speak to foreigners,
to communicate with other people, once (twice) a week.
2) to learn new words, to answer the teacher’s ques-
tions, to make up dialogues, to do grammar exercises, to
recite poems by heart, to speak on different topics, to dis-
cuss books (political events), to translate from English
into Russian;
3. it takes me ..., to get ready for, as a rule, to see for-
eign films, to be good (not bad) at ..., to translate texts
with (without) a dictionary, to work hard at ... .
IV. Переведите предложения на английский язык.
1. Ученики нашей школы изучают два иностранных
языка: английский и немецкий. 2. Иностранный язык
преподают с пятого по одиннадцатый класс. 3. Я го-
товлюсь к урокам иностранного языка регулярно и мне
не требуется много времени для этого. 4. Ученики
нашего класса упорно работают над английским, чтобы
278
279
успешно сдать выпускной экзамен в школе. 5. Я соби-
раюсь сдавать английский язык на вступительных экза-
менах в университет. 6. Мы знаем, что иностранному
языку нельзя научить, его можно только выучить.
7. Каждый седьмой человек в мире свободно говорит по-
английски. 8. Английский язык заимствовал (borrowed)
много слов из других языков, особенно из латинского и
греческого.
V. Прочитайте следующие утверждения и поставь-
те вопросы., начинающиеся с вопросительного слова
how many.
1. Mandarin Chinese is spoken by 700 million people
(70 % of the population of China). In a number of speak-
ers (400 million) English in second only to Chinese. At the
same time it is the most widespread language.
2. English has the largest vocabulary, with about
500,000 words and 300,000 technical terms.
3. The oldest written language is Egyptian, which is
5000 years old.
4. India has the most languages, with 845.
5. Cambodian has 72 letters.
6. English has 20 vowel sounds and only 6 vowel let-
ters.
VI . Прочитайте текст и обсудите вопросы, следую-
щие за ним.
Learning a foreign language when you’re an adult isn’t
easy. It’s a long, slow process that takes a lot of time and
patience. When I was studying Russian, I found I could
cope with the’ grammar if I had my grammar book beside
me, and with writing if I had my dictionary beside me.
But when I went into the language laboratory it was aw-
ful. I heard this really fast flow of language and at first
I couldn’t understand a word. After I’d practised listening
to the same piece four or five times it was a bit better but
I still didn’t have the courage to speak into microphone.
When I actually had to speak Russian in the classroom
with my teacher and other students, I forgot all the
grammatical rules and vocabulary I had learnt. I felt such
indict (виноватым) as I wasn’t able to express what I
wanted to say and even when I managed to speak it was at
a really primitive level. In fact, I gave up learning Rus-
280
sian after one year and I still regret the fact that I don’t
speak it.
1. Is learning a foreign language an easy thing?
2. How does the writer’s experience of learning a lan-
guage compare with yours?
VII. Прочитайте и перескажите содержание диало-
га в косвенной речи.
ESPERANTO, A WORLD LANGUAGE
Р = Professor; S = Student.
P: Today we turn our attention to Esperanto, an artifi-
cial language.
S: What are the facts about this artificial language?
P: Well, it was invented in 1887 by a Polish doctor,
Ludwig Lazarus Zamenhof. The vocabulary comes mainly
from Western European languages, and the grammar is
similar to Slavic languages. It sounds like Italian. From
learner’s point of view, it has the advantage that there
are no exceptions to rules. It is spoken all over the world
and there are many people who would like Esperanto to be
the official second language of the world.
S: What are the advantages that you see of Esperanto
as a world language?
P: I see many. The advantages of the world being able
to talk freely to each other about business, politics, cul-
ture, sport, hobbies are obvious. The cost of translation at
any international conference is very big. Do you know
that about 55 per cent of the EEC’ budget in Strasbourg is
taken up by translation costs?
S: My goodness! But why not English as the world lan-
guage? There are already so many people who speak Eng-
lish.
P: Esperanto is a very easy language to learn. The
tense system has none of the complications of English,
and the grammar is based on just sixteen rules which have
no exceptions. It has such internal logic that it could be-
come the international computer language. But any idea
that all other languages will die out is absurd.
S.* Thank you. Professor, ever so much.
P: Thank you.
281
VIII. Переведите текст со словарем.
ENGLISH AS A WORLD LANGUAGE
It is only in the course of the last hundred years that
English has become a world language. In Shakespeare’s
time it was a “provincial” language of secondary impor-
tance with only 6 million native speakers. Nowadays Eng-
lish has become the world’s most important language in
politics, science, trade and cultural relations. In a number
of speakers (400 million) it is second only to Chinese. It is
the official language of the United Kingdom of Great
Britain and Northern Ireland, of the United States of
America, of Australia and New Zealand. English is used
as one of the official languages in Canada, the Republic of
South Africa and the Irish Republic. It is also spoken as a
second language by many people in India, Pakistan, nu-
merous countries in Africa. The number of second-
language speakers may soon exceed the number of native
speakers, if it has not done so already.
Even more widely English is studied and used as a fo-
reign language. In this respect it acquired an international
status. It is used for communication across frontiers, lis-
tening to broadcasts, reading books and newspapers, in
commerce and travel. Half of the world’s scientific litera-
ture is in English. English is associated with technological
and economic development of the great manufacturing
countries and it is the principal language of international
aid. It is the language of automation and computer technol-
ogy. It is not only the universal language of international
aviation, shipping and sport, it is to a considerable degree
the universal language of literacy and public communication.
It is the major language of diplomacy, and is the most fre-
quently used language both in the debates in the United Na-
tions and in the general conduct of the UN business.
English has become a world language because of its es-
tablishment as a mothertongue outside England, in all the
countries of the world. This exporting of English began in
the seventeenth century, with the first settlements in
North America. Above all, it is the great growth of popu-
lation in the United States, assisted by massive immigra-
tion in the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, that has
given the English language its present standing in the
world.
282
UNIT 12
Conversational Topic MY FAVOURITE WRITER
I’m fond of reading. Usually I borrow books from the
library, but I have a lot of them at home, too. I like to
read books about the history of our country, about famous
people and the life of my contemporaries abroad.
Literature means much in my life. It helps to form the
character and the world outlook, to understand life better.
I’ve done regular reading since I was seven. At first
there were small books for children, amusing stories for
light reading, pieces of fantasy. Then came adventure and
detective stories to be followed by fiction. These were dif-
ferent kinds of books: for pleasure and entertainment, for
general knowledge and education. Some of them remained
with me for ever as a source of spiritual and emotional
power. They are like an exercise for my soul and mind. In
these books I find the answers to different problems I face
in my life. They are the dearest teachers and advisers.
The more I read the more I understand our classics:
A.S. Pushkin, M.Y. Lermontov, F.I. Dostoevsky. They are
all my favourites. But there is one more name in Russian
literature that is very dear to me. That is Ivan Ser-
geyevich Turgenev (1818-1883). For me he is a real intel-
lectual and aristocrat, a man of culture, devoted to litera-
ture, music and painting. Though he lived abroad for a
long time he didn’t stop to be a Russian writer for a mo-
ment. He created a number of national characters in his
books. The image of Turgenev’s woman, deeply feeling,
faithful and tender is an ideal of a Russian woman for
me. It doesn’t lose its charm even today. Turgenev’s de-
scriptions of nature are delightful too. Take for example
his Byezhin Prairie, Torrents of Spring, etc.
Turgenev’s prose is very poetic. His style is perfect,
his dialogues are easy-read, interesting, life-like, yet al-
ways significant.
One may think that Turgenev is too balanced, too po-
etic for the new age, but one must admit that these are
the qualities we badly lack today.
Of the present day writers and poets I like Eugene
Evtushenko, Valentin Rasputin, Valentin Pikul, Boris
Vasilyev, Tatyana Tolstaya, Andrei Dementyev. Their
283
works are very humane and realistic. They assert high
moral principles into life. And this is very important
nowadays.
My favourite foreign writer is O’Henry. In childhood
I was deeply impressed by his story The Last Leaf. Since
then I bear in my heart the image of a young girl suffer-
ing from an incurable illness and her friends doing every-
thing they can to give her hope and bring back to life. The
author penetrates deeply into a person’s soul and reveals
its best qualities. He obviously sympathises with common
people, describes their feelings to other people, their
warm-heartedness and kindness.
Тематический словарь
literature, n writer, n author, n playwright, n литература писатель автор драматург episode, п write, v create, v эпизод писать творить, создавать
poet, n поэт plot, n сюжет, фабула
poetry, n поэзия in the original в оригинале
poetic, a поэтический deal with, v иметь дело с
work, n произведение касаться,
work of art художественное concern, v относиться
poem, n произведение publish, v публиковать
стихотворение translate, v переводить
verse, n стих, стихи series, n серия
prose, n проза translation, n перевод
lyrical, a лирический enrich, v обогащать
novel, n triology, n роман inspire, v вдохновлять
трилогия influence, v оказывать
tragedy, n comedy, n трагедия комедия describe, v влияние описывать
drama, n play, n fiction, n драма reveal, v обнаружить
пьеса беллетристика success, n talented, a успех талантливый
adventure, n приключение famous, a известный
detective, n детектив favourite, a любимый
masterpiece, n шедевр fame, n слава
folklore, n фольклор recognition, n признание
dialect, n диалект image, n образ
edition, n volume, n издание том character, n style, n персонаж стиль
passage, n абзац language, n язык
contemporary, a современный
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Do you enjoy reading books?
2. What books do you like to read?
3. Do you usually borrow books from the library?
4. Have you a big library at home?
5. Are you fond of reading books by Russian or by
foreign authors?
6. Who is your favourite Russian (Belarusian) writer?
7. Which books by this writer have you read?
8. Why do you like this author?
9. Which of his characters do you like best of all?
10. Is your favourite writer world famous?
11. Were his books translated into any foreign lan-
guages? Is he popular in our country?
12, Are you fond of reading detective stories?
13. Which famous American or British writers do you
know?
14. Have you read any of their books?
15. Have you read them in the original or in Russian
translation?
16. Do you like poetry?
17. Who is your favourite poet?
18. Can you recite any of his poems?
19. Have you ever tried to write poems?
20. What are the most prominent names in modem Be-
larusian literature?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. Му favourite writer is Chekhov.
2. Nekrasov and Turgenev created a number of na-
tional characters.
3. The image of Pushkin’s Tatyana is an ideal of a
Russian woman.
4. The most prominent names in modern Belarusian
literature are Maxim Tank, Nil Gilevich, Vasil Bykov, Vla-
dimir Korotkevich, etc.
5. His first success was a volume of verse. It was pub-
lished in 1947.
285
284
III. Переведите на английский язык.
1. Писатель — это голос нации, ее наиболее
талантливый, духовно богатый и одаренный предста-
витель. 2. Настоящий талант принадлежит всему миру.
3. Многие считают, что «Гамлет» — вершина твор-
чества Шекспира. 4. Золотой век английской лите-
ратуры связан с именем Шекспира. 5. Самое известное
из 375 произведений Д. Дефо — «Жизнь и странные
приключения Робинзона Крузо». 6. Джон Голсуорси
обогатил английскую литературу, создав прекрасный
роман «Сага о Форсайтах». В ней он описывает жизнь
буржуазного общества начала двадцатого века. 7. Мне
трудно было читать Моэма в оригинале, я прочла его в
переводе. 8. Многие известные писатели были врачами.
IV. Употребите следующие слова и словосочетания
в своих предложениях:
a favourite writer, to deal with, contemporary prose, to
enrich literature with, to succeed in publishing a book, in
the original, to inspire, to become famous, to get recogni-
tion, the description of Nature, one’s masterpiece, literary
career, to have a great effect on the development of li-
terature, to represent.
V. Прочитайте диалог и перескажите его в косвен-
ной речи.
A: Have you already studied Maxim Gorky at school?
B: Yes, we’ve read about four of his novels.
A: And what was the last novel you’ve read?
B: Let me see, it was his authobiographical Child
hood. Apprenticeship and My Universities.
A: Could you tell me more about the trilogy. What
exactly do you like there?
B: Well, as far as the first novel is concerned I can tell
you that it deals with the author’s courageous strug-
gle as a child against poverty, injustice and oppres-
sion. The second book describes the writer’s wander-
ing as a young boy (he began earning his living at the
age of 9) and follows him through episodes of de-
grading service before returning to visit his grandpar-
ents. In the last of Gorky’s trilogy he tries to gain en-
trance to the university but poverty proves to be the
286
block to his ambition. Life becomes his University
teacher for a while.
A: That’s very exciting, indeed.
VI. Прочитайте текст и ответьте на вопросы, сле-
дующие за ним.
THEY ARE THE VOICES OF BELARUS
Yakub Kolas (1882—1956) and his colleague Yanka
Kupala (1882—1942) are the voices of Belarus, a land ta-
lented and humiliated (униженный), spiritually rich, but
unrecognized as a nation for a long time. They spoke for
the nation whose future then depended on the struggle for
the right “to be called people”, to use Kupala’s words.
Kupala represents one of the peaks of Belarusian po-
etry. Not only owing to his genius, but to the fact that he
was always with the people, most fully expressed the spirit,
the character and hopes of his people, belonged to the people,
and wrote works which all appealed to the people.
Yakub Kolas was another Belarusian fighter-poet. He
created many remarkable poems about the destiny of Be-
larus, and later two larger epics — The New Land and
Simon the Musician. His 275 books have been translated
into 18 foreign languages, with a print of over 7 million
copies. Is that not a convincing proof of the worldwide rec-
ognition of both Kolas and his country’s poetic identity?
One of the wonderful Belarusian lyrists was Maxim
Bogdanovich (1891—1917). He lived only 25 years but
raised Belarusian literature to world level. His poems,
preserving their profoundly national spirit expressed real
pain for his people. His poems and songs are of interest to
all people everywhere in the world.
1. What national poets have every right to be called
the voices of Belarus?
2. What is the proof of their worldwide recognition?
3. What is M. Bogdanovich’s contribution to Belaru-
sian literature?
VII. Перескажите текст на английском языке.
WHO WROTE HAMLET?
One day an inspector came to visit a small country
school. Not only the children but also the teachers were
very much afraid of him.
287
At the lesson in a loud and terrible voice the inspector
asked a little boy the question: "Who wrote Hamlet?" —
“Not I, sir”, said the boy.
The inspector was not angry, he laughed at this joke.
After the lessons the inspector spoke with the school-
master, to whom he told the joke. The schoolmaster
smiled and said: “I know one little rascal (сорванец),
maybe he wrote it after all”.
VIII. Переведите текст co словарем.
THE GREATEST POET OF SCOTLAND
Robert Burns (1759—1796) is Scotland’s national poet
and January 25 — the day of his birth — is always cele-
brated in his country and all over the world, with great
excitment. The celebrations are going on in every big city
and in a small village pub, in every remote cottage with
workers and farmers dressed in kilts or in ordinary
working clothes.
The love for Burns is indeed a unique phenomenon.
Most nations consider political or military men as their
national heroes. But Scotland, though she honours the
memory of her two great national liberators, William
Wallace and Robert Bruce, has adopted a poet as her true
hero. Why is it so? I think because Burns’ poetry was
very much consonant to people’s aspirations. It was
closely connected with the national struggle of the Scot-
tish people for their liberation from English oppression.
Burns considered his literary work as his patriotic duty.
Burns wrote many poems in English, but his best
verses are written in the dialect of his own country, Ay-
shire. His best poems are The Jolly Beggars, Halloween,
The Cotter’s Saturday Night, Holy Willie’s Prayer, To a
Mouse. The Two Dogs and others.
Burns travelled a lot about Scotland collecting popular
folk songs. Many of his own lyrical poems were put to
music. All in all he contributed 2000 songs to the Scots
Musical Museum. So Robert Burns is considered to be the
creator of the Scottish song. His songs are memorable for
extraordinary truthfulness passion and lovely melody.
They reflect the people’s soul and national character. The
Poet’s song Oh, My Love is Like a Red Red Rose is one of
the most loved lyrical songs. Many of songs he devoted to
288
his wife, the woman who had been the great love of all his
life and the inspirator of his numerous verses.
Burns’ songs are the soul of music and it is not sur-
prising that Beethoven, Schuman, Mendelssohn and others
compose music to the poet’s verses. Russian composers
have also set many of Burns’ verses to music. The best
known cycle to Burns’ songs have been successfully writ-
ten by Dmitri Shostakovich, Nikolai Myaskovsky, Juri
Levitin, Mark Milman, Victor Oransky and a number of
other composers. All songs are based on Marshak’s trans-
lations which are considered to be the best translations of
Burns’ poetry into Russian.
10 Зак. 2112
UNIT 13
Conversational Topic MY FUTURE PROFESSION
Finishing school is the beginning of an independent life
for millions of school-leavers. It is the beginning of a far
more serious examination of your knowledge, abilities and
character. We usually say that all roads are open before
our school-leavers: vocational and technical schools, insti-
tutes and universities. But actually it is very difficult to
make up one’s mind and choose one of the hundreds of
jobs. While at school I changed my mind a lot of times
and couldn’t decide which science or field of industry to
specialize in.
At schools we have industrial training centres that are
supposed to help in choosing a job. Teachers and parents
also advise pupils, but still very few of them take a clear-
cut view of what they want to do. Generally pupils are not
realistic in thinking about jobs. They have dreams of
playing football for some big clubs, or becoming pop stars,
or heart transplant surgeons or international experts of
some kind. Teachers and parents try to channel that en-
thusiasm into something more realistic, to get the pupils
away from their fantasy level without knocking the dream
completely. But often it doesn’t work and school-leavers
get disappointed in life.
While choosing a job many factors should be taken into
consideration: wages and salaries, job-satisfaction, oppor-
tunities to travel and to see much, etc. For me, the most
important criterion is job-satisfaction, and that’s why I
have chosen the profession of a teacher. Teaching is a
very specific and responsible occupation. Not everyone has
enough courage to accept this responsibility. I believe
teaching to be a very valuable and challenging profession
that requires complete dedication, love of the subject and
lots of enthusiasm. However, there are also disadvantages
that apply to the teaching profession not only in our
country but in other countries as well. It is regarded in
many societies as low-status and underpaid work. Luckily
my main interest is not money but the belief that educa-
tion is very important for the success and progress of our
society.
290
The success of educating and upbringing of children
depends on the personality of the teacher, his professional
skills, moral principles, erudition and cultural back-
ground. This noble profession demands from a teacher
constant creativity, understanding of children and love
for them.
The teacher must be a model of competence, so he is a
person who is learning as well as teaching all his life.
Most jobs can be done within the usual office hours, but
teacher’s work is never done and evenings are mostly
spent marking exercise-books and preparing for the next
lesson. It is also a stressful job because you have to en-
courage your pupils and keep them interested in the sub-
ject you teach.
A good teacher treats his pupils with respect and val-
ues them as individuals. He understands that each child is
unique and has special talents and capabilities. That’s why
he educates each pupil with special attention to his or her
interests and encourages each one to make his best in life.
He helps children to develop their critical and creative
thinking, to form their views and characters, their atti-
tudes to life and to other people. He teaches them to work
independently and cooperatively, to be helpful and useful.
A good teacher will do his best to bring up honest and
considerate, patient and tactful, self-confident, objec-
tively-minded and self-disciplined people, able to meet
many challenges of adult life in a rapidly changing world.
Тематический словарь
profession, n
the military
profession
choose, v
school-leaving
certificate
science and
technology
applied lin-
guistics
choose a career
general educa-
tionm
advantage, n
pilot, n
профессия
военная
специальность
выбирать
аттестат о
среднем обра-
зовании
наука и техника
прикладная
лингвистика
выбирать
профессию
общее
образование
преимущество
летчик
responsibility, п
specialize in
make up one’s
mind
job, n
occupation, n
engineer, n
teacher, n
doctor, n
lawyer, n
journalist, n
interpreter, n
librarian, n
agronomist, n
electrician, n
driver, n
chemist, n
ответственность
специализиро-
ваться
решать
занятие, работа
занятие
инженер
учитель
врач
юрист
журналист
переводчик
библиотекарь
агроном
электротехник
водитель
химик
291
sailor, n моряк businessman, п бизнесмен
shop assistant продавец photographer, п фотограф
nurse, n медсестра professor, п профессор
secretary, n секретарь cameraman, п кинооператор
accountant, n бухгалтер typist, и машинистка
(book-keeper) skilled, а опытный
policeman, n полицейский noble, а благородный
militiaman, n милиционер dream, v мечтать
corpenter, n плотник institute, n институт
fitter, n слесарь decide, v решать
turner, n токарь employment, n занятость
gardener, n садовник dedication, n посвящение
actor, n актер competence, n компетенция
musician, n музыкант challenge, n отклик
singer, n певец commerce, n торговля
scientist, n ученый marketing, n маркетинг
physicist, n физик advertising, n реклама
economist, n экономист promotion, n продвижение
vocational school профтехучилище
humane, a человечный, гуманный
qualified, a квалифицированный
apply to the University поступать в университет
enter the University поступать в университет
leave (finish) school заканчивать школу
get interested in интересоваться
earn money зарабатывать деньги
succeed in преуспевать, достигать цели
work as a teacher работать учителем
work at a plant (office) работать на заводе (учреждении)
mark exercises проверять тетради
bring up, v воспитывать
Речевые фразы
What is your job?
What are you?
I wonder, what are you go-
ing to do after leaving
school?
I’d like to enter the Univer-
sity.
Чем вы занимаетесь?
Кто вы по профессии?
Интересно, что вы
собираетесь делать после
окончания школы?
Я хотела бы поступить в
университет.
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Is there a great variety of jobs in our country?
2. Can our young people choose any profession they like?
3. Is higher education available to those who work?
292
4. Is it easy to choose a profession?
5. What profession can you get at the Institute (at the
vocational school)?
6. When did you decide to become a teacher?
7. Who helped you to make your choice?
8. What was your favourite subject at school?
9. Why have you chosen the teacher’s profession?
10. Do you know much about your future profession?
11. What quality must a good teacher possess?
12. What must his attitude towards children be?
13. A good teacher must keep on learning all his life,
mustn’t he?
14 What is the teacher's duty?
15. What other jobs do you know?
16. Which of them do you like? Why?
17. To what fields of science are you going to apply
your knowledge of English?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
лова и словосочетания.
I. It’s not easy to choose a profession.
2. I made my choice yet in the childhood.
3. Having finished school I tried to enter the Univer-
sity.
4. The professions of teacher and doctor are very im-
portant.
5. The teacher wants his pupils to be hardworking, ca-
pable.
III. Спросите своего друга:
a) what professions he knows; what professions he
likes most of all; what his father's (mother’s, sister’s)
profession is; what he will do if he doesn’t enter the insti-
tute.
b) why he has chosen this profession; why he doesn’t
want to be an engineer; why he didn’t enter the Institute
last year.
c) who influenced the choice of his profession; who his
favourite teacher was; who his teacher of English was.
d) whether he knows much of his profession; whether
he knows about the difficulties of his future profession;
whether his parents are satisfied with his choice.
293
IV. Переведите предложения с русского языка на
английский.
1. Профессия врача и учителя — самые гуманные.
2. Чтобы стать учителем, надо закончить педагогичес-
кий институт или университет. 3. Непросто выбрать
профессию в школьном возрасте. 4. Перед выпускни-
ками школ открыты все двери в высшие учебные
заведения. 5. Мой друг работает слесарем, но он не
доволен своей работой. 6. Все профессии важны и
почетны. 7. Что ты собираешься делать после оконча-
ния школы? 8. Я учитель и не могу представить свою
жизнь без школы. 9. Многие наши ученые, экономисты,
музыканты артисты стали очень известными. 10. Ква-
лифицированные рабочие хорошо зарабатывают.
V. Прочитайте диалоги и выразите свое отношение
к обсуждаемым проблемам.
Ann: What are you going to do when you leave school?
Bob: Oh, I plan to go to the University. And you?
Ann: I hope to enter the University too. Well ... pro-
viding I pass my exams, of course.
Bob: But I thought you said you were going to get a
job?
Ann: Yes, I had planned to, but I changed my mind.
Bob: Oh, why’s that?
Ann: Because there aren’t any jobs going at the moment
— at least, unskilled ones.
Bob: Yes, it’s a problem. But supposing you could have
any job in the world. Which one would you choose?
Ann: Well, if that were possible, I think I’d like to be a
famous writer.
Bob: Oh! Any particular reason you’d choose that?
Ann: Not really, except that it must be nice seeing your
name in print.
CHOOSING A PROFESSION
Nick: Pete, have you already made up your mind what
profession to choose?
Pete: Yes, I am going to apply to the Law Faculty of
the Belarusian State University as I want to be a lawyer. I
think that the profession of a lawyer is one of the most
important in the law-governed state which we are creating
294
now. Lawyers have to solve many problems that still exist
in our society. The duty of the lawyers is not only to
punish people for various crimes: hooliganism, stealing,
traffic violation and so on but they must do their best to
prevent crimes, to fight against evil in our society. They
should help those people who committed an error to find
the right road in their life. The lawyers protect the rights
and legal interests of citizens, institutions and organiza-
tions. As for me, I want to be a defence counsel and to
work at the People’s Court. And where are you going to
study?
Nick: I decided to apply to the faculty of journalism at
the Belarusian State University. I’d like to be a journalist.
The press and journalists play a very important role in the
life of any country and in the process of democratization
of our society in particular. The journalists have done
much to change the moral climate in this country since
the 1980s. The duty of the journalists is to tell people the
truth about success and shortcomings in all spheres of life
in our Republic. In their publications they should truth-
fully depict the life and aspirations of the people, political
and economic problems facing our country and other
countries of the world. The truthful information about
our home and world events helps to create the atmosphere
of confidence, justice, compassion, mutual support and
understanding in the society.
A journalist must be a model of competence himself.
People often apply for his advice and help in difficult life
situations. His honest position and objective information
can help to solve a lot of problems and do much in bring-
ing up the younger generation. To serve the interests of
people is the main purpose of any good journalist. It is
not so easy as may seem at first. One should have courage
to defend one’s point of view and to speak and write the
truth about the facts and events going on around.
Nobody can say exactly what the best qualifications for
a career of a journalist are. They vary enormously ac-
cording to the individual.
But it is clear that those who have decided to take up
journalism as a career should have genuine interest in
people. A journalist should have the qualities of sympa-
thy, open-mindedness and inquiring mind. He must be in-
terested in many subjects but not just in one because he
deals with many different people and various problems.
295
The journalist must be a well-educated man with broad
outlook to be successful in his profession. He must be able
to write in clear, simple and direct language. The right to
know is one of the citizens’ rights and that’s why it won't
be an exaggeration to say that the moral health of any so-
ciety depends upon honest and sincere attitude of jour-
nalists to their work.
Alex: History was my favourite subject at school. I was
fond of reading historical novels describing life, culture
and political events in different countries of the world. It
was shortly before leaving school that I made up my mind
to enter this faculty and take up History seriously as my
future profession.
Historians study and describe the historic events tak-
ing place in different epochs and in different countries.
Their descriptions and analyses should be strictly objec-
tive and scientific.
I’m deeply interested in the history of my native land
Belarus. The period of the 14 th—15 th centuries attracts
me greatly. It was the time when, the Belarusian nation
was formed with its national language and cultural iden-
tity.
The profession of a historian is quite diversified. The
graduates can work as teachers and research workers at
secondary and higher schools, different museums and ar-
chives. Many of them have become well-known scientists
or have chosen public activity as their career.
Whether I shall make a good teacher or a research
worker remains to be seen. But I am sure I’ll be quite
knowledgable in the field of History, if enter and graduate
from the Belarusian State University.
Fred: There are two aspects I’d like to deal with in fu-
ture: marketing and advertising which require applied
linguistics.
Marketing research, communication, planning and ad-
vertising are simply impossible without a foreign lan-
guage.
Besides, marketing involves meeting both companies
and customers’ needs. Here is where the knowledge of
English could help.
Further, marketing provides information about fore-
word demand for the company’s products and services,
and it helps identify and stimulate this demand for such
296
products and services. In order to get this information
you should read foreign literature; it is impossible with-
out proper language knowledge to speed up production
that is based on marketing intelligence study.
Advertising is a part of the marketing strategy, it’s a
complex of activities and a comprehensive one.
Advertising, public relations, direct mail and special
events such as product shows, conferences and exhibitions
comprise the communication mix where again people from
different countries speak mostly English.
I presume that this will be my primary occupation in
future. I want to devote my life to it as the role of adver-
tising is a very important and powerful tool. It formulates
demand, promotes sales, helps create a market, informs
the buyer of the company’s products and services and cre-
ates the company’s image.
Such are my plans for the future. As you can see they
are rather complicated and far-reaching.
VI. Переведите текст co словарем.
CAREERS IN ENGLAND
A teacher. If you want to be a teacher, you have to pass
an examination at about 18; and then you go to a college
and you become a teacher after three or four years: when
you have degree you must take a teaching diploma. After
one year’s teaching experience, you will be a qualified
teacher.
An accountant. There are many different ways of be-
coming an accountant. Usually you go to University for
three years and you study for three years for the account-
ant’s exam. But you must have a job in an accountant’s
office while you studying. You will be a qualified account-
ant when you have passed your exam and have worked for
three years.
A journalist. Journalists often start their career work-
ing on local papers: these are newspapers for people in one
area of England, such as a town. Usually you have to
work for years before you are a qualified journalist; if you
have a degree, it is two years.
A nurse. If you wish to be a nurse, you can start
training when you leave school. You then train in a hospi-
297
tai. Some of the time you are working in the hospital,
some of the time you are studying for examinations. After
two or three years’ training you are a qualified nurse.
A secretary-linguist. It is a special kind of secretary
who can speak other languages. You need to know typing
and shorthand and to speak and write another useful lan-
guage.
UNIT 14
Conversational Topic TRAVELLING/HOLIDAYS
Modern life is impossible without travelling. Thousands
of people travel every day either on business or for plea-
sure. They can travel by air, by rail, by sea or by road.
Of course, travelling by air is the fastest and the most
convenient way, but it is the most expensive too. Travel-
ling by train is slower than by plane, but it has its advan-
tages. You can see much more interesting places of the
country you are travelling through. Modern trains have
very comfortable seats. There are also sleeping cars and
dining cars which make even the longest journey enjoy-
able. Speed, comfort and safety are the main advantages
of trains and planes. That is why many people prefer them
to all other means.
Travelling by sea is popular mostly for pleasure trips.
On board large ships and small river boats people can visit
foreign countries and different places of interest within
their own country. Trips on the Volga, the Dnieper, the
Yenisei, the Black Sea are very popular today. As for me I
prefer travelling by car. I think it’s very convenient. You
needn’t reserve your tickets. You needn’t carry heavy
suitcases. You can stop wherever you wish and spend at
any place as much time as you like. Every year my friend
and I go somewhere to the South for holidays.
The Black Sea is one of the most wonderful places
which attracts holiday-makers all over the world. There
are many rest-homes, sanatoriums and tourist camps
there. But it is also possible to rent a room or a furnished
house for a couple of weeks there. Sometimes we place
ourselves in a tent on the sea shore enjoying fresh air and
the sun all day long. As a rule I make new friends there.
In the daytime we play volleyball, tennis, swim in the
warm water of the sea and sunbathe. In the evening I like
to sit on the beach watching the sea and enjoying the sun-
set. I’m fond of mountaineering. So I do a lot of climbing
together with my friends.
Time passes quickly and soon we have to make our way
back. We return home sunburnt and full of impressions.
299
Тематический словарь
trip, n экскурсия, путешествие sleeping саг riage спальный вагон
journey, n поездка. dining carriage вагон-ресторан
путешествие ticket, n билет
travelling, n путешествие single ticket билет в одну
travel, v путешествовать сторону
by sea морем return ticket билет туда и
by air по воздуху обратно
by road наземным ticket for a билет на поезд
транспортом train to Kiev в Киев
for pleasure ради in advance заблаговременно
удовольствия sail, v отплывать
on business по делу take off, v вылетать
on board a ship на борту flight, n рейс
корабля fasten the пристегнуть
on foot пешком belts ремни
car, n машина change trains делать
plane, n самолет пересадку
ship, n корабль see off, v провожать
boat, n лодка left-luggage камера
train, n поезд office хранения
electric train электричка booking-office билетная касса
call a porter позвать inquiry office справочное
носильщика бюро
call a taxi вызвать такси fast, a быстрый.
advantage, n п реимущество скорый
speed, n скорость slow, a медленный
safety, n безопасность enjoy, v наслаждаться
suitcase, n чемодан admire, v восхищаться
luggage, n багаж walk, v гулять, ходить
railway железнодорож- пешком
ный вокзал tent, n палатка
station time- расписание rest-home, n дом отдыха
table, n sanatorium, n санаторий
carriage, n вагон tourist camp туристическая
база
Речевые фразы
How can I get to the station? — Как проехать на
вокзал?
When does the train leave? — Когда отходит поезд?
When does the train get into ...? — Когда поезд
прибывает в ...?
How long is the flight? — Какая продолжительность
полета?
300
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Is travelling popular today?
2. What means of travelling do you know?
3. Which means of travelling are the most popular
with the passengers? Why?
4. Which is the fastest way of travelling?
5. Have you ever travelled by air?
6. How do people usually travel when they go abroad?
Why?
7. When you travel within the country, do you usually
go by car, by plane, by ship or by train?
8. What are the advantages of travelling by railway?
9. When did you last travel by train?
10. Do you like to change trains?
11. Is travelling by sea faster or slower than by train?
12. What are the most popular sea trips in our count-
ry?
13. Do you agree that travelling by sea is always enjoy-
able?
14. Have you seen a storm on sea?
15. What makes travelling by car enjoyable?
16. What are the disadvantages of travelling by car?
17. Where do you usually spend your holiday?
18. Where do you stay when you go to the South?
19. What is the best time for travelling and tourism?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. I like travelling very much.
2. I prefer travelling by air.
3. People usually travel either on business or for plea-
sure.
4. The Black Sea attracts holiday makers.
5. I’ve bought two tickets for a train to Kiev.
III. Закончите следующие предложения.
1. When I travel by train I usually book tickets (за-
ранее). 2. You book your tickets (по телефону), don’t
you? 3. If I have a lot of luggage my friends (провожают
меня до станции). 4. If you have a lot of luggage you
(нанимаете носильщика). 5. Passengers usually wait for
301
their trains (на платформе). 6. We leave our luggage (в
камере хранения). 7. If you need any information about a
train you address (справочное бюро).
IV. Переведите на русский язык.
1. Airplanes carry passengers to various parts of the
world 2. Our carriage is near the dining car. 3. The train
doesn’t leave for another 10 minutes. 4. The journey was
urgent and I went by air. 5. At exactly twelve o’clock the
plane took off. 6 It wasn’t long before we arrived at our
destination. 7. The sea is perfectly calm and you won’t be
sea-sick. 8. We have a speed limit of thirty miles an hour
in towns and build-up areas. So be careful not to exceed
it, and remember to keep an eye on the traffic lights.
9. We were flying at an altitude of 2,000 metres. 10. I’ll
stop in Paris only for a few hours, after which I’ll fly
straight to London. 11. They heard their flight an-
nounced. 12. The train to Murmansk leaves from platform
3 track 5.
V. Выразите свое согласие или несогласие со следую-
щими утверждениями.
1. Travelling is the name of a modern disease.
2. The best part of travelling is planning the trip.
3. People always want to use the fastest way of travel-
ling.
4. Travelling by ship is a great pleasure for everybody.
5. A big railway station is an interesting place.
6. Staying in the country is a very pleasant way of
spending a holiday.
VI. Перескажите диалог в косвенной речи.
Mr. Blake: How do you feel about coming to Sweden
for your holiday next summer? I’m sure
you would like it.
Mrs. Dickson: Well, nothing is settled yet, but I think
we really might spend our holiday in
Scandinavia.
Mr. Blake: That’s splendid! You would have not to
worry about. I’ll book a hotel and arrange
everything for you. The journey itself is
delightful, especially if you go there by
ship.
302
Mrs. Dickson: But actually we have some friends in Hel-
sinky. And if I go by ship I can’t visit
them on my way to Stockholm.
Mr. Blake: You see, Helsinky and Stockholm are both
port cities. The distance is short enough
to travel there by boat. Besides there’s a
sea ferry (паром) which can give you a
fresh experience of travelling by water.
Mrs. Dickson: Oh, that’s very exciting indeed. Thank
" you for information. I must think it over.
VIII. Прочитайте текст и скажите, реальна ли
описываемая в нем ситуация.
Once a salesman, who had been travelling for years on
a certain railway in America, found to his surprise that
the train had come in on time. He immediately went to
the guard and said: “Here is a cigar. I want to congratu-
late you. I have been travelling this road for fifteen years,
and this is the first time I have seen a train coming in on
time”.
“Keep the cigar”, said the guard, “this is yesterday’s
train”.
IX. Прочитайте текст и поставьте несколько воп-
росов к нему.
Travel is extremely important nowadays. Two hundred
years ago, most people never travelled further than a few
kilometres. Whenever they travelled they walked, or went
by carriage, or on horseback. But in the last quarter of
the twentieth century, people have travelled a lot. Many
people travel 50 or 100 kilometres daily by public trans-
port or private car. Millions of people travel long dis-
tances abroad on business trips or for holidays every year.
Even a housewife who is going shopping may travel
twenty kilometres.
For most people, speed is a very important factor when
they are travelling. They want to reach their destination
as quickly as possible. There are now planes that can cross
the Atlantic in just over three hours.
Other people prefer comfort to speed. They like to relax
during the journey and enjoy themselves as much as pos-
sible.
303
For almost everyone, safety is the most important fac-
tor. For example, many people never fly because they be-
lieve it is dangerous. In fact, it is probably much more
dangerous to travel by car or to walk across a street.
X. Запомните следующие пословицы и поговорки.
Дайте их русские эквиваленты и употребите в крат-
ких ситуациях.
1. When in Rome, do as the Romans do.
2. Every country has its customs.
3. East or West, home is best.
4. So many countries, so many customs.
UNIT 15
Conversational Topic SPORT IN MY LIFE
Sport is a special world of its own. All people are fond
of sports and games. Sport makes us healthy, keeps fit,
more organized and better disciplined. It unites people of
different classes and nationalities.
Many people do sports on their personal initiative.
They practise skiing, skating, table tennis, swimming,
volleyball, football, body-building, etc. All necessary fa-
cilities are provided for them: stadiums, sport grounds,
swimming pools, skating rinks, skiing stations, football
fields. Sport is paid much attention to in our educational
establishments. Gymnastics is a part of children’s daily
activity in the kindergartens. Physical culture is a com-
pulsory subject at schools and colleges.
Professional sport is also paid much attention to in our
republic. There are different sporting societies, clubs and
complexes. The most famous of them are the Olympic
complexes “Raubichi”, “Staiki”, “Dinamo” stadium, etc.
They are used for international matches and contests as
well as for world competitions.
In the last years Belarusian sportsmen take an active
part in the world sports movement and in the Olympic
Games. Major victories have been won by our gymnasts,
weight-lifters, wrestlers, chess and tennis players.
O. Korbut, V. Scherba, I. Ivankov, T. Samusenko, A. Med-
ved, N. Zvereva, B. Gelfandt — these are prominent
names in their own fields. They won fame for themselves
and for our republic. Vitaly Scherba, for example, won six
gold medals at the Summer Olympics in Barcelona in
1992. We are all proud of his victory.
But sport is not just for participants; it’s for specta-
tors too. Millions of people all over the world spend hours
every week watching sport events on television, or at sta-
diums. They enjoy being “fans” or supporters of this or that
team, and many professionals are now as popular and famous
as the greatest Hollywood film stars.
Of course, spectators particularly enjoy watching in-
ternational matches and contests. Such events as the
Olympic Games or the Football World Cup attract more
and more spectators as time goes by.
305
Sports are very much the same in most countries, but
some sports are more popular than others. Nowadays
football, gymnastics and tennis enjoy the greatest popu-
larity in all countries.
As for me I go in for table tennis (ping-pong). It needs
mobility, liveliness and much energy. It keeps a person in
a good form. I have been playing tennis for five years, but
the more I play the more I like it. I get a real joy taking
part in competitions or simply playing with my friends.
Sometimes I go to tennis courts. Certainly, it’s a great
distance between my manner of playing and such favouri-
tes as Jim Courier, Stefan Edberg, Pete Sampas, Boris
Backer, Per Korda, but I do my training with great plea-
sure and hope to play as well as the best players do.
Тематический словарь
gymnastics, n
figure skating
boxing, n
chess, n
hockey, n
play hockey
swimming, n
fishing, n
hunting, n
skiing, n
skating, n
yachting, n
track-and-fields
athletics, n
football, n
basketball, n
volleyball, n
cycling, n
wrestling, n
tennis, n
billiard, n
fencing, n
weightlifting, n
rowing, n
stadium, n
championship, n
tournament, n
swimming pool
гимнастика
фигурное
катание
бокс
шахматы
хоккей
играть в
хоккей
плавание
рыбалка
охота
ходьба на
лыжах
бег на коньках
парусный
спорт
легкая
атлетика
атлетика
футбол
баскетбол
волейбол
езда на велоси-
педе
борьба
теннис
биллиард
фехтование
тяжелая
атлетика
гребля
стадион
чемпионат
турнир
бассейн
competition, п
contest, п
attract, v
spectator, n
supporter, n
team, n
sport facilities
sporting
ground
tourist camp
sporting society
win victory
lose victory
go in for
sports, do
sports
play chess
cheer for
hold the Olym-
pic games
be at one’s dis
posal
score the goal
coach, n
court, n
amateur, n
fan, n
match, n
соревнование
соревнование
привлекать
зритель
болельщик
команда
спортивное
оборудование
спортплощадка
туристический
лагерь
спортобщество
одержать
победу
потерпеть
поражение
заниматься
спортом
играть в
шахматы
болеть за
проводить
олимпийские
игры
быть в
распоряжении
забить гол
тренер
корт,
площадка
любитель
болельщик
матч
306
Речевые фразы
What team are you supporting? — За какую команду
вы болеете?
What’s the score? — Какой счет?
Who scored the first point? — Кто открыл счет?
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Is sport popular in our republic?
2. What kinds of sports do you know?
3. What sports are popular in England/America?
4. When and where did the last summer and winter
Olympic Games take place?
5. Are you interested in tennis?
6. Have you ever taken part in any sport competitions?
7. Can you drive a car (a motor-cycle)?
8. What are the main sporting events?
9. When will the next Olympics be held?
10. Who is our best swimmer, chess player, high
jumper?
11. Do you play football or any other “ball” game?
12. What is your favourite football team?
13. Do you cheer for Minsk Dinamol
14. Which Dinamo football players do you like best?
15. Who is the chief coach of the team?
17. What was the score in the football match you saw
last?
18. Why do millions of people in our country go in for
sports?
II. Спросите своего друга:
— what kinds of sports he knows;
— what sport he goes in for;
— if he has enough time to do sports;
— why people go in for sports;
— what his favourite football team is;
— if he is interested in swimming;
— if he drives a car;
— if he ever goes to football matches or watches the
games on TV;
307
— if he belongs to any sport club;
— who his favourite sportsmen are;
III. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. Sport is very popular in our republic.
2. I go in for speed skating.
3. The athletes took part in competitions abroad.
4. The competitions took place in Kiev.
5. I often do my training in the evening.
6. My friend is a champion in boxing.
IV. Составьте ситуации, используя следующие слова
и словосочетания:
to be fond of sports, to go in for, to win the game, to
do training, to train for competitions, to be a poor chess
player, to play snow-balls, to keep healthy and strong, to
be good at, to cheer for, sports fans, the next Moscow
News prize competition.
V. Закончите предложения.
1. The most popular kinds of sports are ...
2. Our sportsmen are provided with all necessary facili-
ties such as ...
3. The best known sport societies and clubs are ...
4. My training includes running, ...
5. Major victories at the Olympic Games were won by ...
6. Sport makes people ...
VI. Переведите предложения на английский язык.
1. Минские болельщики приветствуют участников
соревнований по футболу. 2. Мы имеем удовольствие в
течение трех дней наблюдать за игрой теннисистов.
3. Дважды в день я делаю зарядку. 4. В мире спорта не
существует языковых барьеров. 5. Олимпийская дерев-
ня построена накануне XXII Олимпийских игр, сос-
тоявшихся в Москве. 6. Все необходимое спортивное
оборудование предоставлено в распоряжение спортсме-
нов. 7. Следующие Олимпийские игры будут проведены
через год. 8. Футбол пользуется особой популярностью
во всех странах Европы.
308
VII. Прочитайте текст и ответьте на вопросы,
следующие за ним.
FROM THE HISTORY OF THE OLYMPIC GAMES
According to Isomer, Pelops, the god of fertility sta-
ged the most memorable games in antiquity, roughly in
1370 BC. Later on games were organized several ti-
mes. They can be considered the prehistory of the Olym-
pics.
The founder of modern Olympics of the 19th century
was a Frenchman. Pierre de Fredy, Baron de Coubertin. In
keeping with the romantic notion of the Olympic revival it
was decided to hold the first Games in Athens, Greece in
1896. Only 12 countries were represented. Despite the
many problems that arose in Athens the Olympic Games
had come to stay. Their motto was “Faster! Higher!
Stronger!”
From that time on the Olympics were held more or less
regularly, depending on the political situation on the con-
tinent. In 1990 they were held in Paris, in 1904 — St.
Louis, in 1906 — Athens again, in 1908 — London, in
1912 — Stockholm, in 1920 — Antwerp, in 1924 — Paris,
in 1928 — Amsterdam, in 1932 — Los Angeles, in
1936 — Berlin, in 1948 — London, in 1952 — Helsinky,
in 1956 — Melbourne, in 1960 — Rome, in 1964 — To-
kyo, in 1968— Mexico, in 1972 — Sapporo, in 1976 —
Innsbruck, in 1980—in Moscow, in 1984 —in the USA, in
1988 — Seoul, in 1992—in Alberwill, in 1994—in Lille-
hammer, in 1998 — in Nagano .
The 22nd Olympic Games took place in the Soviet Uni-
on in 1980. Five cities: Moscow, Kiev, Minsk, Riga and
Tallinn greeted the world’s champions. Our sportsmen
won 80 gold, 64 silver and 49 bronze medals there. That
was the best result among other national teams.
The Olympic Games are held every two years now. They
contribute much to the struggle for peace, understanding
and trust among peoples.
1. What is the prehistory of the Olympics?
2. Who is considered to be the founder of modern
Olympics?
3. When were the first Olympic Games held?
309
4. In what cities did the 22nd Olympic Games take
place? Were they a success?
5. Where and when were the last Olympics held?
6. Do the Olympics help to promote understanding
among nations?
VIII. Выучите наизусть следующие диалоги:
— Hello, Mike is here. Can I speak to Nick, please?
— I’ll just see if he is at home.
— Do please.
— Are you still here? Sorry, but he’s gone out.
— Could you tell him to ring me up when he is back?
— With pleasure... I expect him any minute.
— Hello. This is Nick here. Did you call?
— Yes, would you like to go to the football match bet-
ween our University team and the Polytechnical Academy?
— I’d love to. You know that I am a great football fan.
— We’ll meet at the stadium at a quarter to seven.
— All right.
— Sorry, I am late. What’s the score?
— It’s a pity but 2:0 (two to nothing) in their favour.
They've just scored the second goal. We are losing the
game.
— Cheer up! I’m here and everything will be all right.
We are sure to win the match.
— It would be nice...
IX. Прочитайте диалог и составьте на основании
прочитанного устную тему «Спорт в Великобритании».
SPORT IN GREAT BRITAIN
Student: People all over the world are fond of sports
and games. But there are national games which enjoy the
greatest popularity in that country or another. I’d like to
know about the most popular games in England today.
Teacher: Well, I suppose football and cricket. Almost
every Englishman plays these games. Tennis, golf, hockey,
horse-racing are also very popular.
Student: What football is preferable in England, soccer
or rugby?
310
Teacher: Soccer, I think. You see, this kind of football
is played almost throughout the world. Rugby can be
called hand football. It is more complicated, of course, but
it is also gaining ground.
Student: I’ve been told that Englishmen are mad on
cricket.
Teacher: In a way they are. At least, if their famous
Marylebone Cricket Club loses the game it is considered a
national disaster.
Student: Tennis has become popular of late, hasn’t
it?
Teacher: Oh, yes. In England tennis is played all the
year round — on hard courts, or grass courts, or covered
courts, in parks and in special tennis courts. Every sum-
mer they hold a great international tournament in Wim-
bledon, near London. Tennis players from all over the
world take part in it. It’s very honourable to win it.
Student: And are there any winter sports in England?
As far as I know their winters are mild.
Teacher: You are quite right. There isn’t much snow in
winter there, and Englishmen don’t often have the
chance of skiing, skating or toboganning. But winter is
the proper time for fox hunting if the ground is hard
enough.
Student: What about indoor games?
Teacher: Well, there’s chess, billiard, cards, table ten-
nis again. By the way, do you play chess?
Student: Well, I do, of course. But I’m not a profes-
sional, just an ordinary amateur and not a very good one
at that.
X. Найдите соответствующие определения попу-
лярным в Великобритании спортивным играм.
Football
Volleyball
Golf
Cricket
Tennis
is a kind of game
in which you try
to get a ball through a net
to knock a ball into a hole
to knock a ball in to a
goal
to knock a ball through
some hoops
to hit a ball so that your
opponent cannot hit it
311
XI. Выразите свое согласие или несогласие со сле-
дующими утверждениями.
1. People practise sport for at least two reasons: first,
they enjoy it and, second, they feel a need to keep fit.
2. Many professional sportsmen are now as popular and
famous as the greatest Hollywood film stars.
3. People enjoy watching international matches. Events
such as the Olympic Games or the Football World Cup at-
tract more and more spectators as the time goes by.
4. A lot of British people like sport, especially on TV.
The number of people who actively take part in sport is
quite small. On the whole British people prefer to be fat
rather than fit.
XII. Переведите текст co словарем.
Cassius Clay was born in Louisville, Kentucky in 1941.
He first became famous in 1960 when he won a gold medal
at the Olympic Games in Rome. He became a professional
boxer in the same year. In 1964, the world was astonished
when Cassius Clay beat Sonny Listen and became the
World Heavy Weight Champion. He was a fast and ag-
gressive boxer. His trainer said: “He floats like a butterfly
and stings like a bee”.
At this time Clay became a member of the Black Mus-
lim religious sect and changed his name to Mohammed
Ali. After this he refused to speak to people when they
called him Cassius Clay.
In April 1967 Ali refused to join the US Army and
fight in Vietnam. He went to many meetings, especially in
universities, and told people why he didn’t like the war.
When Ali refused to join the army, the authorities sentenced
him to five years of prison. The Boxing authorities took
away his world title and his licence to fight. Ali didn’t fight
again for three and a half years but never went to prison.
But on June 28th 1971, the US Supreme Court changed the
decision. They said Ali really was a conscientious objector.
He began to figl? again in 1970. On March 8, 1971, he
fought Joe Frazier for the World Title and lost. But he
was not discouraged and in 1974 he had another chance to
win the world title. This time he fought George Foreman
in Kinshasa, Zaire, and beat him. He kept the title until
February 1978, when Leon Spinks beat him in Las Vegas.
But in September 1979 he regained his title again, when
he beat Spinks at the Superdome in New Orleans.
312
UNIT 16
Conversational Topic ART IN OUR LIFE
Art plays an important role in our life. In the variety
of its forms — cinema, television, theatre, music, lite-
rature — it develops our artistic taste and helps to appre-
ciate beauty, to solve the eternal problem of good and evil.
It enriches our life emotionally and spiritually.
Hundreds of years ago theatre was the only attraction
and enjoyed universal popularity. But with the invention
of cinema, radio and TV theatre has lost its prominent po-
sition. Now it is television that attracts millions. Theatre
has become the entertainment for the elite, a fashionable
pastime for those who really love it. To get tickets to the
best theatres where famous actors star is almost impossi-
ble.
Some people enjoy occasional visits to the theatre. They
look forward to seeing an opera, a ballet, a comedy, a
puppet or a mime show, a music or a variety show. It goes
without saying visiting a theatre is much more a festive
event than going to the cinema.
The most famous theatres in Minsk are the Opera and
Ballet Theatre, the Music Comedy Theatre, the Gorky
Russian Drama Theatre, the Yanka Kupala State Aca-
demic Theatre, the Puppet Show Theatre. You can also go
to the Circus or to the Philharmonic.
Theatres are very much the same everywhere. Passing
through the door you come to the box-office, where tick-
ets are sold. If you want to get tickets for the first night
you’d better take them in advance. The best seats at thea-
tres are in the stalls, the circle and the upper-circle. Then
comes the pit and the last of all is the gallery, where the
seats are the cheapest. Boxes of course are the most ex-
pensive. Most theatres have good orchestras and popular
conductors.
When you go to the opera for example you can get the
best of everything: an excellent orchestra, famous conduc-
tors, celebrated singers and a well-dressed audience. But if
you are not fond of music and singing, opera won’t inter-
est you. Frankly speaking I’m not so keen on opera my-
self. Drama and ballet are more to my liking.
313
AT THE THEATRE
I’ll never forget my first visit to the Belarusian Opera
and Ballet Theatre. My friend and I wanted to see the fa-
mous ballet Swan Lake by Tchaikovsky. We knew the plot
very well. We also knew some pieces of music from this
ballet (Small Swans’ Dance) and decided to see the whole
performance.
We bought the tickets in advance and came to the
theatre half an hour before the show. In the foyer we
bought the programme. Such famous dancers as T. Yer-
shova — International Competition Laureate, People’s
Artist of the Republic of Belarus (as Odetta) and V. Zak-
harov — International Competition Laureate, Honoured
Artist of the Republic of Belarus (as Zigfrid) were co-
starring in this ballet. The ballet is about the great and
true love of Prince Zigfrid and a beautiful young girl
Odetta by name.
At 7 sharp the performance began. From the very first
minute I was deeply impressed by everything I saw on the
stage. The setting and the dancing were superb and ex-
citing. The costumes were fine, the music was thrilling.
The ballet seemed to me a fairy-tale. I had never seen any-
thing more wonderful before. My friend also enjoyed
every minute of it.
After the first act we went to look over the theatre.
We saw the boxes, the pit, the dress-circle and the gal-
lery. There were many portraits of famous opera-singers,
ballet-dancers, musicians and producers on the walls of
the foyer. Among them we could see the portraits of
A. Savchenko, R. Petrov, M. Gulegina, etc.
When the curtains fell at the end of the performance
there came a storm of applause. It seemed that it would
never end. The dancers received call after call. They were
presented with large bouquets of flowers. We also ap-
plauded enthusiastically. The performance was a suc-
cess.
AT THE CINEMA
Cinematography is one of the wonders of the modern
world. In 1895 the Lumiere brothers gave the world’s first
real cinema show in Paris to an audience of 33 spectators.
The first film they showed was “The Arrival of a Train at
a Station”. Moving pictures seemed so real that the audi-
314
ence was frightened to death by the train rushing at them
from the screen.
Not long ago millions of people used to visit cinemas
each week. Cinema houses were often packed full and one
could see people queuing up in front of the box-offices.
Now with the price of tickets far from reasonable, the
growth of video production, flood of thrillers empty of se-
rious contents, the cinema is rapidly loosing its popular-
ity.
Cinematography is truly an art of our time. It’s com-
plicated and multi-faced as the 20th century itself. Every-
one can find something to his liking in the broad variety
of its genres. Those who seek pure entertainment and rest
to the mind prefer musical comedies, detective films,
thrillers, horror-films and westerns. Other people consider
that movies should be rather a thought provoking and
earnest art.
As for me, I really enjoy going to the cinema: it’s one
of my favourite pastimes even though I don’t -really do
that often. When I want to go to the cinema I usually see
in the programme what films are on. Then I phone my
friends and we discuss what films to see. We prefer fea-
ture films but also enjoy cartoons and popular science
films. To see a good love story, a musical or a detective
film is a very pleasant way of spending free time. I par-
ticularly enjoy films where you become so involved in the
story that you forget where you are.
If I want to go to an evening show I usually book tick-
ets in advance. But for matinee performances I always
buy tickets just before the show.
I’d like to tell you about the film which has been a hit
with the public for 20 years already and on the eve of
every New Year it is shown on TV. I guess you know I’m
talking about the film “Light Steam to You, or the Irony
of the Fate”. This film is very relaxing, it is for enter-
tainment of heart and mind. It is Eldar Ryazanov’s film
released by the Mosfilm studio. The action takes place in
St. Petersburg of our days. Such famous actors as R. My-
agkov, B. Brylska, Ju. Jakovlev, A. Shirvindt, L. Akhed-
zhakova are co-starring in the film. I think the acting was
superb which is quite natural with such a cast.
315
One more film I enjoy is a screen version of the novel
Gone with the Wind by M. Mitchel. This film is in colour.
It’s an old film but still enjoys great popularity. There are
many famous American actors in it with Vivien Leigh and
Clark Gable in the leads. I was deeply impressed by their
acting and the film itself. It hasn’t lost its visual splender
by the passage of time.
Тематический словарь
theatre, n
cinema, n
film, n
feature film
matinee, n
circus, n
show, n
performance, n
perform, v
screen, n
stage, n
cast, n
foyer, n
stalls, n
pop music
pop singer
opera, n
opera singer
conductor, n
pit, n
театр
кинотеатр
фильм
художествен-
ный фильм
дневное
пре дставл ение
цирк
представление,
зрелищное
мероприятие
театральное
представление,
исполнение
исполнять, играть
экран
сцена
состав
исполнителей
фойе театра
партер
эстрадная
музыка
эстрадный певец
опера
оперный певец
дирижер
амфитеатр
music, п
box, п
dress-circle, п
balcony, п
piece of music
ballet dancer
audience, n
applause, n
applaude, v
orchestra, n
instrument, n
play, v
be a success
buy tickets
in advance
box-office, n
see over (the
theatre)
be impressed
exciting, a
thrilling, a
enjoy, v
be on, v
classics, n
музыка
ложа
бельэтаж
балкон
музыкальное
произведение
артист балета
зрители
аплодисменты
аплодировать
оркестр
инструмент
играть
иметь успех
покупать
билеты
заранее
киоск
осмотреть
(театр)
находиться под
впечатлением
волнующий
захватывающий
наслаждаться
идти (на сцене)
классика
Речевые фразы
What is on today? — Что сегодня идет (показывают)?
I would like a programme, please. — Пожалуйста,
дайте программу.
Did you enjoy the film? — Вам понравился фильм?
Let’s go to the pictures. — Давайте пойдем в кино.
316
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Do you like to go to the theatre?
2. How often do you go there?
3. What theatres are there in Minsk?
4. Which do you prefer: a ballet, an opera or a drama?
5. Do you enjoy visiting concert halls?
6. Who is your favourite pop singer?
7. Do you remember your first visit to the Belarusian
Opera and Ballet Theatre?
8. What was on? What performance did you see then?
9. Did you enjoy it?
10. Is it easy to get tickets for Minsk theatres?
11. Which of the two, the theatre or the cinema, is
more popular today? Why?
12. When did you go to the drama theatre last?
13. What play did you see? Was it a success?
14. Who played the leading part in it?
15. Who was the author of the play?
16. Were you sitting in the stalls or in the balcony?
17. What is the prevailing theme of modern theatre re-
pertoire?
18. Do you like classics on the stage?
II. Спросите своего друга:
— любит ли он музыку;
— какую музыку он предпочитает: классическую,
легкую, джаз и т.д.;
— умеет ли он слушать музыку;
— часто ли он ходит в филармонию;
— что он предпочитает: оперу или балет;
— кто его любимый артист кино;
— кто из белорусских артистов эстрады ему нра-
вится больше всех;
— хорошо ли он поет;
— на каком музыкальном инструменте он играет;
— как он относится к фольклору.
III. Прочитайте диалог и передайте его содержание
на родном языке.
317
Joan: We have a National Dance Week in June 16—22.
The best companies will show their art. Would you like to
see some of them?
Ron: Oh, that’s great. You know dancing is my hobby.
Last year I attended the concerts of two Britain’s flour-
ishing modern dance companies. One is the London Con-
temporary Dance Theatre, the other is Rambert Dance
Company at Bristol Old Vie. They showed their new pro-
grammes and I enjoyed them greatly.
Joan: Then it’s very difficult to surprise you. May be
you’re interested in some foreign dance ensembles which
are going to come?
Ron: Which ones do you mean?
Joan: One of the best-loved foreign visitors is the Spanish
Cumbre Flamenca. This company is a real thing and conside-
red the best in Spain. Cumbre Flamenca brings together the
guitar, song and dance of Andalusian gypsy culture.
Ron: Yes. Flamenca is familiar to me. When in Spain I
always go to the theatre and enjoy these breathtaking
dances.
Joan: Two more famous dance ensembles tour the
country throughout June, the Red Army Ensemble from
Moscow with over 100 of the most exciting dancers, sing-
ers and musicians, and the Georgian State Dance Theatre.
Ron: Really? It must be very interesting. As far as I
know the Georgian dance is very original. The men dance
there on their toes while the women provide decoration.
Joan: Yes, I think it’s worth seeing. I’ll see regional
press for some information on tour details and dates. I
hope we’ll enjoy it.
IV. Прочитайте текст и обсудите вопросы, следую-
щие за ним.
THEATRES, MUSIC HALLS AND CINEMAS
IN LONDON
Theatres are very much the same in London as any-
where else: the chief theatres, music halls and cinemas are
in the West End. If you are staying in London for a few
days, you’ll have no difficulty whatever in finding some-
where to spend an enjoyable evening. You’ll find opera,
ballet, comedy, drama, musical comedy and variety. Films
are shown in the cinemas during the greater part of the
day.
318
The best seats at theatres are those in the stalls and
circle. Then comes the pit, and last of all the gallery
where the seats are the cheapest. Boxes, of course, are the
most expensive.
At the West End theatres you can get unforgettable
impression of everything — an excellent orchestra, fa-
mous conductors, and celebrated singers. You can see
most of the famous English actors and actresses. As a
rule, the plays are magnificently staged: costumes, dres-
ses, scenery, everything being done on the most lavish
scale. Choose a good play, and you’ll enjoy yourself from
the moment the curtain goes up to the end of the last act.
Get your seat beforehand, either at the box-office of the
theatre itself or at one of the agencies. When you go to a
theatre you’ll probably want to sit as near to the stage as
possible. If you are at a cinema, you may prefer to sit
some distance from the screen. In fact, I would say, the
further away the better.
1. Are theatres and cinemas in London the same as in
Moscow (Minsk)?
2. What differences or similarities have you noticed?
V. Прочитайте текст и передайте его содержание
на английском языке.
CHARLIE CHAPLIN
This is a story that Chaplin liked to tell about himself. It
happened after the great actor had become world famous.
A theatre announced that a competition would be held
to see who could act like Charlie Chaplin. Those taking
part had to dress like Chaplin, walk like Chaplin and act
one of the roles in a Chaplin film.
When Charlie Chaplin heard about it, he decided, as a
joke, to take part in the competition himself. Naturally,
he kept his plan secret from everybody.
When the results of the competition were announced
Chaplin said: “I didn’t know whether to feel angry or only
surprised. I didn’t win the first prize”.
VI. Переведите тексты co словарем.
Art is a human activity in search of beauty. Art gives
people aesthetic pleasure: art enriches man and develops
the good in him. Literature, painting, sculpture, music,
319
dancing, the theatre — all these are forms of art. In Eng-
lish they are called fine arts as those in which mind and
imagination are chiefly concerned. We enjoy the sight of a
picture or sculpture. We derive aesthetic pleasure from a
piece of poetry, from a good musical composition.
Music is one of the most popular arts. It is an art re-
flecting reality in artistic images and sounds. Music is one
of the highest manifestations of human culture. The
power of music is magic. Music as well as literature and
the plastic arts originates from nature and peoples art.
There exist different art-forms and genres in music.
The most important of them are opera, symphony, cham-
ber music, folk music, jazz and pop-music, country and
Western music, choral, blues, etc.
The music of every nation has its peculiarities which
find expression in melody, rhythm, harmony. Music has a
long history. Each people, each new century brought with
it some changes. The 17th century — the period of rapid
growth of antifeudal democratic movement, put into the
foreground the gigantic figures of the Germans: Johann
Sebastian Bach, George Friederich Handel, the Austrians:
Joseph Haydn and Wolfgant Amadeus Mozart. In the
creative works of these titans musical art achieved pro-
found depth and richness of contents.
The end of the 18th century the epoch of revolution
liberation struggle, gave birth to Ludvig Van Beathoven.
Few people in history have shown such a unity in their
personality of world outlook and talent as he did. He be-
came a genius and the artistic greatness of his creative
works lies in the fact that he was inspired by the most ad-
vance ideas of his time.
In the 19th century a member of music-schools ap-
peared which gave to the world such genius as Franz Pe-
ter Shubert in Austria, Frederic Chopin in Poland, Robert
Shumann, Johannes Brahms, Richard Wagner in Ger-
many, Maurice Hector Berlioz, Gioachino Rossini in Italy,
Edvard Grieg in Norway.
Russian music had passed a long and glorious past. The
Father of Russian music is Mikhail Ivanovich Glinka
(1804—1857), he was the founder of Russian opera and
symphony music. Alexander Dargomizhsky a younger con-
temporary of Glinka was the precursor of the modern pe-
riod of national Russian music.
320
The first great Russian symphonist was Pyotr Ilyich
Tchaikovsky (1840-1893), whose music we enjoy very
much. The follower of Tchaikovsky’s tradition was
Rakhmaninov (1873-1943). He wrote chiefly for the piano.
Contemporaries of Tchaikovsky were Balakirev (1837-
1910), Mussorgsky (1839-1881).
Soviet music is more than 70 years old. Sergei Prok-
ofiev, the founder of the Soviet music school, Aram
Khatchaturian, Tikhon Khrennikov, Dmitry Kovalevsky
and many others have glorified in the music of our epoch.
The greatest star among all Soviet composers is Dmitry
Shostakovich. He had successfully tried his pen in all mu-
sical genres and symphony music. Symphony music is an
exciting world of great feelings of people, of deep serious
thoughts. With great artistic power does symphony music
express not only the most tender shades of man’s expedi-
ence, people’s joys and sorrows, their dreams of happi-
ness.
PROMINENT MEN OF ART
The Bolshoi Theatre is the pride and symbol of Russian
art. It comprises both Opera and Ballet troupes with many
celebrities in them.
Yelena Obraztsova is one of them. She is a brilliant op-
era singer. Her programme includes nearly all leading
parts in such operas as Carmen by Bizet, Tosca by Puc-
cini, Boris Godunov by Mussorgsky, The Barber of Seville
by Rossini, etc. Carmen is considered to be the summit of
Yelena Obraztsova’s art. Her talent reveals itself not only
in operas. She gives many concerts both at home and
abroad. The voice of the singer is very beautiful, her vel-
vety-soft mezzo-soprano can rise to true soprano heights,
it is light and has an immense emotional range.
Maya Plisetskaya, Galina Ulanova, Nadezhda Pavlova,
Vyacheslav Gordeyev, Lyudmila Semenyako are the pride
of the Russian ballet school. They were all winners of the
international ballet competitions. Most of them made their
debutes on the Bolshoi stage in the title role of different
ballets such as GiseUee by Adan, Cinderella by Prokofiev,
Carmen Suite by Bizet-Shchedrin, Swan Lake by Tchai-
kovsky, etc.
Igor Moiseyev is the director of the Folk Dance Ensem-
ble. It has been performing for nearly 70 years, yet with
11 Зак. 2112
321
every year it has been more and more difficult to get a
ticket to its concerts both at home and abroad. The
group’s best productions are The Russian Suite, At the
Skating Rink, The Festival of Labour, Aragon Jota and
Tarantella.
Alla Pugachyova, singer and composer, has been one of
the brightest lights on our variety stage for the past few
years. First she appeared at the international variety fes-
tival Golden Orpheus and sang a very original interpreta-
tion of Bulgarian composer D.Dimitrov’s Harlequin and
won the Grand Prix. Since that time her career as a pop
singer began.
She has done so much that it is amazing she could have
so much energy. She has recorded hundreds of songs for
radio and screen, many of which she herself wrote to po-
ems by Marina Tsvetayeva, Osip Mandelshtam, and the
Petersburg poet Ilya Reznik.
Pugachova is very emotional and expressive on the
stage. She turns each of her songs into a spectacle. For
analogues, there is Edith Piaf, who had the same emo-
tional force and total freedom. Yet Pugachova is unique.
She continues to look for her special style, and works hard
to improve her technique, which helps her to convey the
subtlest nuances of emotions.
Mikhail Boyarsky is a film star. His films are certain
to break all film-market records. Mikhail is also a talented
actor.
Be it a variety concert or a dramatic performance
Boyarsky never leaves behind his guitar. His restrained
manner of singing, his voice, not too strong and a bit
hoarse seems to say: I sing the way you could.
As a screen hero, as a rule, he is strong and manly,
with perfect control of his body excellent at fencing and
horse riding. As the legendary d’Artagnan, the actor won
the audience’s hearts with his charm and temperament.
VII. Скажите, кому принадлежат слова:
All the world’s a stage and all the men and women
merely players. (..As You Like It).
UNIT 17
Conversational Topic THE REPUBLIC OF BELARUS
The Republic of Belarus is a small, beautiful country
with the heroic past and difficult present. It is situated in
Eastern Europe. The Republic borders on Russia, the
Ukraine, Poland, Lithuania and Latvia. It has an area of
207,600 square kilometres and a population of more than
10 million. Belarusians constitute 77 per cent of the
population, 64 per cent live in cities, the largest of which
are Minsk (the capital), Gomel, Brest, Vitebsk, Grodno
and Mogilev.
Belarus is a broad plain. One third of the republic’s
territory is covered with forests. The largest of them are
called pushchas. The most beautiful are the Belo-
vezhskaya, the Nalibokskaya which have rich flora and
fauna. There are 3,000 rivers in the republic. They flow
into the Baltic Sea or into the Black Sea. The longest riv-
ers are the Dnieper, the Nieman, the Western Dvina, the
Pripyat and the Bug. There are 4,000 lakes in Belarus. The
largest of the lakes is the Naroch, the pride of the republic.
The climate in the republic is moderately continental,
the breathing of the Baltic sea is constantly felt here.
At the beginning of the 20th century Belarus was a
backward province of the Russian Empire — called the
North-Western region. About 80 per cent of its population
were illiterate. The Belarusians were not even regarded as
a nation at that time. In 1919 Belarus was proclaimed the
Belarusian Soviet Socialist Republic and in 1922 became a
member of the USSR.
During World War II Belarus suffered greatly. It lost
more than half of its national wealth. The fascists killed
every fourth person living there. But despite all this, Be-
larus has restored its cities, rebuilt its economy. Today
Belarusian industry produces tractors, big lorries, auto-
matic lines, computers, refrigerators, television sets, bicy-
cles, watches, fertilizers and textiles.
Agriculture specializes in milk and meat production.
The main crops cultivated here are grain, potatoes, flax,
herbs and vegetables.
Belarus is a republic of well developed science and cul-
ture. There are 37 state higher educational establish-
323
ments, the Academy of Sciences, about 400 professional
schools there. Secondary education is compulsory and free
of charge.
Nowadays the Republic of Belarus has become a sover-
eign independent state. The Declaration of State Sover-
eignty was adopted by its Supreme Soviet on July
27, 1990.
There are three branches of state power in the Republic
of Belarus — Legislative (Supreme Soviet), Executive
(Council of Ministers) and Judicial (Supreme Court). Ac-
cording to the existing constitution (1996) the head of the
state is the President.
Belarus is a member of the United Nations and a num-
ber of other international organizations.
Тематический словарь
country, n
be situated, v
border, v
area, n
divide, v
population, n
consitute, v
backward, a
illiterate, a
regard, v
proclaim, v
wealth, n
restore, v
rebuild, v
enterprise, n
produce, v
страна
располагаться
граничить
площадь
делить
население
составлять
отсталый
неграмотный
считать, рас-
сматривать
провозглашать
богатство
восстанавливать
отстраивать
предприятие
производить
flax, п
rye, п
herb, п
cultivate, v
adopt, v
recognize, v
sovereign, a
independent, a
the Supreme
Soviet
the Council of
Ministers
the Supreme
Court
legislative, a
executive, a
judicial, a
лен
рожь
трава
выращивать
принимать
признавать
суверенный
независимый
Верховный
Совет
Совет
Министров
Верховный
Совет
законодательный
исполнительный
судебный
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Where is Belarus situated?
2. What countries does it border on?
3. What is the territory and the population of the re-
public?
4. What are the largest cities in Belarus?
5. The climate in the republic is moderately continen-
tal, isn’t it?
6. What do you know about the republic’s past?
324
7. What can you say about Belarusian industry (agri-
culture)?
8. Is it true that Belarus is a republic of well developed
national culture?
9. What educational establishments are there in our
republic?
10. Is secondary education compulsory in Belarus?
11. When did the republic become an independent state?
12. Is our republic recognized as an independent state
by many countries of the world?
13. What are the highest bodies of state power in Be-
larus?
14. What is the capital of Belarus?
II. Спросите своего друга:
— знает ли он белорусский язык, историю своей
страны, основные памятники культуры, известных лю-
дей Беларуси;
— когда Беларусь была образована, освобождена от
фашистских захватчиков, стала независимым госу-
дарством;
— сколько в республике областных центров, высших
учебных заведений, проживает населения;
— какой процент жителей республики составляют
белорусы, живёт в городах.
III. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. The Republic of Belarus is situated in the centre of
Eastern Europe.
2. It borders on many countries.
3. Belarus stretches for 650 kilometres from West to
East and 560 kilometres from North to South.
4. Belarusians constitute the largest part of the popu-
lation.
5. It is an industrially developed country.
IV. Закончите следующие предложения.
1. The Republic of Belarus is situated ...
2. It borders on ...
3. The territory of Belarus is ...
4. The climate in the country is ...
5. At the beginning of the century Belarus was ...
325
6. The Republic of Belarus was founded in ...
7. It suffered greatly from ...
8. Belarusian industry produces ...
9. Belarusians cultivate ...
10. Now the Republic of Belarus is ...
V. Составьте предложения, правильно употребив
формы инфинитива страдательного залога.
to be situated, to be divided, to be called, to be re-
garded, to be proclaimed, to be produced, to be exported,
to be imported, to be rebuilt, to be restored, to be
adopted, to be recognized.
VI. Выразите свое согласие или несогласие со следую-
щими утверждениями. Дайте свое обоснование.
1. Belarusian people suffered much in the course of
their history.
2. The Chernobyl catastrophe is a tragedy for the whole
nation.
3. In recent years the economic situation in our repub-
lic has changed for the worse. The decline in industry and
agriculture is gathering pace. But we hope that these dif-
ficulties are temporary and they will come to an end soon.
4. The Belarusians are generally recognized as hard-
working, industrious and patient people.
5. Although the Belarusians belong to the East Slavic
ethnic group there is a strong mixture of Baltic and Scan-
dinavian elements in their racial, linguistic and cultural
background. A high proportion of the population is fair-
haired and blue-eyed.
6. The Belarusians want to turn their republic into a
nuclear free zone. They pursue the policy of peaceful co-
existence of states with different political and social sys-
tems.
VII. Переведите текст и обсудите вопросы, следую-
щие за ним.
LORD CREATED US CENTRIST
First of all, let us see what has been influencing the
formation of the Belarusian national character. We’ll
start with the natural and climatic conditions.
326
There is a precise definition for our climate, “mode-
rate”. We have no beat or biting frosts, no high tempera-
ture jumps in the summertime and winter. Lithuania is
not far away from Belarus, but it is a maritime area,
where land and sea meet, while the sea is quite different a
life. They’ve got storms, winds and unpredictability there.
And the characters there are different: austere and busi-
nesslike, they are formed by a transition from one element
to the other. Sharp contrasts outside, inside and in the
souls are not typical for Belarus.
Now to the landscape. Our rivers are flat, calm and not
very deep. They are homely and dear. All the rest of the
landscape features follow the same pattern. Hills, rather
than mountains. Fields, rather than deserts and prairies.
The Belarusian character has no somberness and tense
readiness for unexpected dangers. The nature of Belarus
does not know storms or any cataclysms in general. There-
fore, the Belarusians are trustful and on the whole opti-
mistic, they never expect a misfortune.
The Belarusians are accustomed to work hard, so as to
produce something on this soil, sand or clay, that is why
they are patient and hardworking. “Uparty Belarus”, or an
“obstinate Belarusian” is a very precise definition. The
environmental peculiarities require our universality. We
must be able of doing much, if not everything. Diligence
and universality are the qualities that have been and still
are helping us to survive. Moreover, the Belarusians are
undemanding and modest. To a certain degree they are ac-
customed to poverty. A Belarusian does not need very
much any external demonstrations, he is more oriented at
internal work.
The Belarusian music, songs and folklore may also say
a lot about the national character. They are merry, but
not too much, there is suffering about them, but no horri-
ble Russian misery. The word “destiny” is often mentioned
in our vocabulary, although the Belarusians can hardly be
named fatalists. Due to his calm and reserve a Belarusian
is more conservative and stable in his styles and ways of
life. Sometimes he may seem indifferent to everything
around him. But it is also to a certain degree. If there is
violence used against him, he has no other choice than to
reach for a weapon to defend himself. History proves it
too well.
327
1. What kind of people are the Belarusians?
2. What is their nature?
3. Is there anything peculiar about a Belarusian to
make him different from a Russian, Ukrainian, Pole or
Lithuanian?
VIII. Переведите текст co словарем.
FROM THE HISTORY OF BELARUS
Belarus is the Eastern Slavic nation (variously called
Byelorussia, White Russia, White Ruthenia). Historically
part of the Grand Duchy of Lithuania, Poland and Russia,
it regained its independence on the 27th of July, 1990.
Politically the rebirth of the nation, heralded by Kas-
tus Kalinovski in 1863, dates back to the Proclamation of
Belarusian Independence on March 25, 1918 and the es-
tablishment of Belarus as a political entity on January
1, 1919.
The original Belarusian tribes are the KryviCy.
KryviCy, Dryhvity, Radzimidy, Lucity and Sievieranie,
were related to the Baltic nations, and grouped in inde-
pendent principalities, of which the most powerful was
Polatsk, a port and fortress on the river Dvina, which
flows into the Baltic Sea. The princess of Minsk owed al-
legiance (находилась в вассальной зависимости) to the
principality of Polatsk, until they were united by mar-
riage and political expediency (целесообразность) into the
Grand Duchy of Lithuania and Belarus (1250).
The middle Belarusian language was the official state
language of the united Grand Duchy from the 13th to the
late 17th century, and the Code of Laws of 1588 — the
Lithuanian Statute was a compilation of that language.
During this period Belarusian culture flourished to its
highest, level and developed its distinctive quality in al-
most every field.
In the 16th century in the result of numerous wars, the
Great Dukes formed the Union with the Kingdom of Po-
land. The old principalities were remoulded into prov-
inces, though the status of the Kingdom of Grand Duchy
remained that of dual Monarchy with separate laws and
customs, known as the ReCpaspalitaya (Commonwealth)
until 1795. Cultural decline set in, the Belarusian lan-
guage was greatly influenced by Polish.
328
In the 18th century the territory of Belarus appeared
under Russian rule followed by russification. Nevertheless
the phenomenal advance of Belarusian studies in the 19th
century was clearly observed. The publication of the first
Dictionary of the Belarusian Language (1870) by I. Noso-
vic (1788—1877) helped to lay the foundations of modern
Belarus as a nation. A revival of the literary Belarusian
language, expressed by a remarkable school of poets —
Yanka Kupala and Jakub Kolas, Zmitrok Byadula, Maxim
Bagdanovich and Ales Harun — through the journal Nasa
Niva, led to a rebirth of national feelings, to the procla-
mation of the country’s independence.
UNIT 18
Conversational Topic MINSK
Minsk is the capital of the Republic of Belarus, its po-
litical, economic, scientific and cultural centre. It is one
of the oldest and most beautiful cities in our republic. Its
name was first mentioned in chronicles in 1067.
Minsk is situated on the river Svisloch and occupies an
area of 200 square kilometres. Its population is about 1,8
million.
During the Great Patriotic War Minsk was destroyed
by German invaders almost completely. In post-war years
the city was rebuilt anew. Modern Minsk is a city of nu-
merous plants and factories, modern buildings, tree-lined
streets, beautiful parks and gardens. It is also a big traf-
fic centre with a large network of railways, roads, airlines
and two Metro lines.
Minsk has a highly developed industry. There are hun-
dreds of industrial enterprises in the city which produce
tractors and automobiles, motor-cycles and bicycles, TV-
sets and radio-sets, watches and refrigerators, electronic
computers, textile, footwear, food and other goods. Our
Belarus tractors and MAZ trucks enjoy a high reputation
both in our country and abroad.
Minsk is also known as a city of science and students.
There are 16 state higher educational establishments
there, the biggest of which are the Belarusian State Uni-
versity and the Polytechnical Academy.
Alternative, non-state-owned schools of various kinds
have been opened in Minsk of late. Among are the is the
Institute of Contemporary Knowledge, the European Hu-
manitarian University, the International Institute of La-
bour and Social Relations and many others.
The cultural life of the people in the Belarusian capital
is varied and interesting. In Minsk there are 6 theatres, a
number of concert halls, a circus, dozens of cinemas,
many palaces of culture, libraries and clubs. The most fa-
mous theatres are the Opera and Ballet Theatre, the
Yanka Kupala State Academic Theatre, the Gorky Russian
Drama Theatre.
Among the most interesting museums one can mention
the Museum of the History of the Great Patriotic War,
330
the Art Museum, Yanka Kupala and Yakub Kolas muse-
ums.
Minsk is a Hero-City. It was honoured with the title in
1974 for people’s courage and heroism during the Great
Patriotic War.
The citizens of Minsk are proud of their city. It is
beautiful at any time of the year. A lot of tourists from
our country and abroad come to Minsk to see its sights.
Minsk actively develops its cultural, humanitarian, so-
cial and economic relations with its twin-cities, among
which there are Nottingham (Britain), Detroit (USA), Ly-
ons (France), Senday (Japan), Bangalor (India), Chanckun
(China) and Merida (Mexico).
Тематический словарь
city, n
town, n
capital, n
native, a
occupy, v
territory, n
population, n
be situated
plant, n
factory, n
building, n
park, n
traffic, n
network, n
centre, n
be founded
cultural, a
город
город
(небольшой)
столица
родной
занимать
территория
население
быть располо-
женным
завод
фабрика, завод
здание
парк
транспорт
сеть
центр
быть
основанным
культурный
industrial, а
scientific, а
enterprise, п
produce, v
tractor, n
automobile, n
refrigerator, n
footwear, n
food, n
goods, n
square, n
street, n
avenue, n
mention, v
honour, n
be honoured
be proud of
outskirts, n
sister (twin)-city
промышленный
научный
предприятие
производить
трактор
автомобиль
холодильник
обувь
питание
товары
площадь
улица
проспект
упоминать
честь
быть удостоен-
ным чести
гордиться
окраина
город- побратим
Речевые фразы
I’d like to go on an excur-
sion about the city.
Let’s go sight-seeing today.
Would you like to see the
sights of this town?
There are many places of
interest in Minsk.
Я хотел бы поехать на экс-
курсию по городу.
Давайте осмотрим досто-
примечательности сегодня.
Вы хотели бы осмотреть до
стопримечательности этого
города?
В Минске много достопри-
мечательностей .
331
Excuse me, how can I get to
the airport?
Would you tell me where to
get off for the Opera and
Ballet Theatre, please?
Is this the right trolley-bus
for the Circus from here?
It’s the next stop.
It’s four stops after this
one.
It’s three stops from here.
Извините, как добраться
до аэропорта?
Скажите, пожалуйста, где
мне выйти у театра оперы
и балета?
Я отсюда доеду до цирка
этим троллейбусом?
Следующая остановка.
Четвертая остановка после
этой.
Три остановки отсюда.
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на следующие вопросы.
I. What is the capital of the Republic of Belarus?
2. Is Minsk your native town?
3. Where is Minsk situated?
4. What is the population of the Belarusian capital?
5. When was Minsk founded?
6. When was Minsk liberated from the fascist occupation?
7. Minsk is an industrial and cultural centre of Be-
larus, isn’t it?
8. What industrial enterprises are there in Minsk?
9. What industrial goods are produced at the Minsk
factories and plants?
10. Does our city cooperate with foreign countries?
11. How many theatres and museums are there in Minsk?
12. Which of them have you visited?
13. Which of them do you like best?
14. How many higher educational institutions are there
in the Belarusian capital?
15. Do you know when Minsk was awarded the title of
the Hero-City and what for?
16. What do you like in the city of Minsk most of all?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1) The city was founded in 1067.
2) I am going to see the sights of this city.
3) Did you go sight-seeing in Moscow?
4) How can I get to the Historical Museum.
5) There are many residential areas in Minsk.
332
Ill Переведите предложения с русского языка на
английский.
1. В 1941 году в Минске было десять высших учеб-
ных заведений, 49 средних школ, 8 кинотеатров и 16
больниц. 2. 28 июня фашисты оккупировали столицу
Беларуси. 3. Когда Минск был освобожден, города
практически не было. 4. Только руины, пепелища и
деревянные дома на окраинах города увидели его осво-
бодители. 5. Фашисты готовились взорвать Дом Прави-
тельства перед уходом из города, но им не удалось
сделать это. 6. После войны в районе Комаровки вы
росли здания института физкультуры, политехничес-
кого института, клинический городок и Дом печати.
7. Трамвайная линия соединила центр города с промыш-
ленными окраинами. 8. В 1974 году Минску было при-
своено звание города-героя.
IV. Составьте свои диалоги по аналогии.
1
A: Excuse me, how can I get to the Belarusian State
University?
B: You’d better go by Metro there.
A: Where is the Metro station?
B: It’s over there, on the left.
2
A: Excuse me, does bus №51 go to the University?
N: Yes, you’ll get off in Independence Square.
A: Is it far from here?
N: No, it’s four stops after this one.
A: Many thanks.
3
A: Excuse me, am I on the right way to the Univer-
sity?
N: Yes, cross the square, turn to the right and you’ll
see it.
4
A: Excuse me, which is the quickest way to the rail-
way station from here?
N: Very sorry. I can’t tell you. I’m a stranger here
myself. You’d better ask someone else.
333
V. Прочитайте текст и перескажите его содержа-
ние на английском языке.
NOTTINGHAM—MINSK’S TWINNED CITY
Nottingham is Minsk’s twinned city. Nottingham is
situated on the left bank of the Trent River, by which it
has access to the sea. It is 123 miles by road north-west of
London. The population of the city is more than one mil-
lion.
Nottingham is an old city. The Anglo-Saxons were in
occupation from the 6th century onward and gave their
settlement the name of Snotingaham. In the Middle Ages
some 200 square miles of the country were covered by
Sherwood Forests, famous for its oaks and for the exploits
of Robin Hood.
Nottingham is a busy city of many industries and no-
table buildings. It is famous for its bicycle, pharmaceuti-
cal, cigarette and lace manufactures. Other important in-
dustries include engineering and telecommunications
equipment.
Outstanding modern buildings include the County Hall,
the University, the Council House, the Technical College,
etc. The former palace is used for the city museum and
art gallery.
Minsk and Nottingham often exchange different dele-
gations and have successfully developing contracts on dif-
ferent levels.
VI. Переведите текст co словарем.
FROM THE HISTORY OF MINSK
More than 900 years ago on the banks of the Nemiga
and Svisloch rivers came into existance the city of Minsk
or Mensk as it used to be called before.
The name of the city is believed to be associated with
the river Menka that flowed into lake Ptych not far from
the city. But the legends say that the city derives its
name from the world “mena” as in the ancient times there
was a barter market in the newly-founded settlement on
the right bank of the Svisloch.
Mensk was first mentioned as a town in the Principal-
ity of Polotsk in a chronicle in 1067 in connection with a
battle on the Nemiga between Prince Vseslav of Polotsk
334
and Prince Yaroslav’s sons: Yzyaslav, Vsevolod and Svya-
toslav. As a result of this battle Mensk was ruined with
all men killed, women and children taken to prison.
In 1084 Mensk was burnt yet another time by the
Great Russian Prince Vladimir Monomakh.
In the 12th century the Polotsk Principality was di-
vided among Prince Yzeslav’s sons. Mensk became the
centre of the independent principality.
In the late 13th century the Principality of Mensk be-
came part of the Great Duchy of Lithuania. The 14th—
15th centuries were very important in the life of Mensk
and its inhabitants It was the period when the Belarusian
nation was formed with its national language and culture.
But in 1569 the Lithuanian Princes united with the
Polish kingdom and formed a joined state RzeCzpospolita.
It was at that period that Mensk was renamed into Minsk.
In 1793 Belarus the Russian Empire. Three was made a
part of years later it was turned into a gubernia
(province) with Minsk as its centre.
Throughout the 17th—18th centuries the Upper Town
remained the town’s main administrative, trade and cul-
tural centre. Minsk rapidly grew and developed. But in
1812 the Napoleon troops burnt the city again.
In the 20th centure the foreign invaders not once occu-
pied the Belarusian capital: in 1918 it was occupied by
Germany, in 1919—1920 by Poland. The most horrible
disaster befell the city of Minsk in 1941—1944 in the
years of fascist invasion.
Not only wars were responsible for Minsk’s numerous
devastations. Fires caused great damage to the city too.
Especially damaging was the 1881 fire. Since then only
stone and brick buildings have been constructed in the
centre of Minsk.
And every time our people rebuilt the city, it became
more beautiful than before.
UNIT 19
Conversational Topic MY NATIVE TOWN
My native town is Grodno. It’s an ancient town. Not
long ago it celebrated its 850th anniversary.
The town of Grodno is situated on the river Neman.
The river divides it into two parts. The older part of the
town lies on the right bank of the Neman. Here you can
see the old castle where kings once lived. Now it is a mu-
seum of history and archeology. On the banks of the Ne-
man one can also see modern apartment houses, offices
and different architectural monuments. Among them
there is a 17th century Roman Catholic church.
Grodno is a fast-growing town. It’s a regional centre
with the population of over 250,000 people. There are
some big plants here and some smaller factories. The larg-
est enterprises are: the “Azot” Works, the Footwear Fac-
tory, the Synthetic Fibre Mill, the Fine Cloth Mill, etc.
There are several residential areas in our town. Every dis-
trict has schools, kindergartens, shops, everyday services.
The people of Grodno are very fond of their Zoo, the only
Zoo in Belarus. Here you can see animals from all geo-
graphical regions of the world.
Grodno is a big cultural centre. There are three institu-
tions of higher education, many schools, technical col-
leges, some cinemas, drama and puppet theatres.
There are also many public gardens and parks there.
The newly built streets are wide and spacious, lined with
trees and flowers. The streets of the old part of the town
are not very wide, but they are clean and green.
One of the main streets in Grodno is Ozheshko street.
Here one can see a small old house. It is the house where
Eliza Ozheshko, a famous democratic writer, lived and
worked. Now it is a museum and a memorial library of
foreign literature. Not far from it there is a monument to
Eliza Ozheshko.
It is interesting to know that Grodno has a twin-town
in France. It’s Limoges, an industrial centre with the
population of about 200,000 people.
336
Тематический словарь
native, а
ancient, а
celebrate, v
anniversary, n
places of interest
castle, n
church, n
residential area
enterprise, n
works, n
родной
древний
праздновать
годовщина
достопримеча-
тельности
замок, дворец
церковь
жилой район
предприятие
завод, мастерские
spacious, а
mill, п
museum, п
monument, п
twin-town, п
grow, v
develop, v
settlement, n
village, n
просторный
фабрика
музей
памятник
город-
побратим
расти
развиваться
поселок
деревня
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. What is your native town?
2. Is your native town a small ancient place or a big
modern city?
3. Where is it situated? Is it far from Minsk?
4. What river runs through the city?
5. What is your native town famous for?
6. Are there any architectural monuments in your
town? What are they?
7. What famous people lived there?
8. Which is the main street in your town?
9. Who is it named after?
10. Are there any industrial enterprises in your native
town?
11. What goods do they produce?
12. What can you say about cultural life of your town?
13. How do people spend their leisure time?
14. Are there any everyday services in the town?
15. Are you proud of your native town?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. I was born in the town of Polotsk. Polotsk is my na-
tive town.
2. It is an ancient town of about 10 centuries old.
3. There are many places of interest in our town.
4. Founded in 1960 the town has been growing and de-
veloping rapidly.
5. Grodno is a regional centre.
337
III. Составьте ситуации, используя следующие сло-
ва и словосочетания:
a) to come from, not far from, a very convenient place
to live, at the countryside, it takes me ... to get to Minsk,
another advantage of living here;
b) settlement, a picturesque place, a landscape, a vast
green carpet, to grow fast, urban-type houses, all com-
munal services, to transform the countryside, to be
proud of.
IV. Переведите предложения с русского языка на
английский.
Я живу недалеко от Могилева. Могилев расположен
на реке Днепр. Его население составляет более 300 000
жителей. Могилев — индустриальный город. Здесь
развита машиностроительная, химическая, пищевая и
легкая промышленность. В городе есть три вуза,
драматический театр, несколько музеев.
Поселок, в котором я живу, небольшой. Он нахо-
дится в двадцати минутах езды от города. Мы поль-
зуемся всеми преимуществами проживания в сельской
местности: у нас чистый воздух, частный дом со всеми
удобствами. Рядом — лес и река. В поселке есть торго-
вый комплекс и культурный центр, школа, детский сад,
поликлиника, административные здания.
V. Прочитайте и перескажите диалог в косвенной
речи.
Denis: Where do you come from, Nick?
Nick: Well, actually, I come from a place called Gorsk.
Denis: Mmm ... Sounds great. But I’ve never heard
of it.
Nick: Many people haven’t. It is in the north of our Re-
public. It was a small, sleepy sort of place a hun-
dred years ago. No industry, no enterprises.
Denis: And now it’s changed, hasn’t it?
Nick: Oh, yes, now it’s a city. It’s expanded a lot — new
shops, factories, offices, steel works, a lot of heavy
industry round about.
Denis: Well, every town is growing now. One day the
whole world is going to become one great city.
338
VI. Прочитайте тексты и поставьте несколько
вопросов к каждому из них.
GOMEL
Gomel is the second largest city in our republic and the
largest city in Belarusian Polesye. It’s population is about
400,000. It is situated three hundred kilometres to the
south of Minsk. The landscape of this part of the country
is very beautiful. The wide river Dnieper with sandy
banks and large forest areas are stretching for many
kilometres. Unfortunately, Gomel region suffered greatly
after the Chernobyl tragedy.
Gomel is a city of well-developed industry. The ma-
chine-tool plant is the oldest enterprise in the city.
BREST
Brest is often called the western gate of the country.
On June 22, 1941 Brest was the first to take upon itself
the concentrated fire of enemy divisions. Almost com-
pletely destroyed by the Nazis, Brest rose, rebuilt from
ruins after the war. Many streets in the city are named
after the heroes of the war, the defenders of the legendary
Brest Hero-Fortress.
Brest today is an important transport junction and a
major industrial centre. The city’s industry supplies the
country with computers, heat generators, gas stoves, car-
pets, knitted goods, etc. The population of the city is
more than 300,000.
VITEBSK
Vitebsk is one of the largest and oldest cities in Be-
larus. It is situated on the river Dvina. The city was
founded in 974. Its population is more than 300,000.
Today Vitebsk is an important industrial centre. Its
factories and plants produce modern metal cutting ma-
chine tools and television-sets, textiles, clothing, foot-
wear, carpets and other articles.
Vitebsk is a big cultural centre. There are dozens of
secondary and vocational schools, and four institutes here.
The Drama Theatre is one of the oldest in Belarus.
VII. Прочитайте текст и ответьте на вопросы,
следующие за ним.
339
BELARUSIAN TOWNS
There are many cities and towns in Belarus. Informa-
tion has come down to us from ancient times not only
about Minsk, but also about Grodno, Mstislavl, Zaslavl,
Pinsk and Nesvizh. In its long and difficult life Belarus
has seen and experienced a great deal; it more than once
suffered from foreign invaders. Its cities shared its fate.
There are also many young towns in Belarus. They
sprang up quite recently, but they stand side by side with
the old cities as if they had been there since ancient times.
One of such towns is Novolukoml, the power engineering
centre of the republic. The gigantic thermal power station
built there provides nearly half of the electric power re-
sources that Belarus has today.
Beloozersk is another young town which owes its birth
to a large terminal power station.
The chemical industry gave life to the town of Svetlo-
gorsk. Here a huge plant for the production of synthetic
fibres has grown. And near the young town there is a high
capacity district power station called after the settlement
of Vasilevichi which is situated not far away.
One more young town is Soligorsk, well known as a big
producer of mineral fertilizers. In August 1993 Soligorsk
celebrated its 35th anniversary. Only 35 years have passed
since the day when vast deposits of potash salt were dis-
covered and today the Belaruskaly Association supplies 15
per cent of the world output of potassium.
The town of Zhodino was founded in 1963. Since then
the town has been rapidly growing and developing. The
republic’s largest topping lorries and other motor vehicles
are manufactured in Zhodino by the BelavtoMAZ Produc-
tion Association. They are famous throughout the world.
Novopolotsk is one of the youngest towns in Belarus. It
is situated on the Dvina river. It came into existence as a
town of chemistry. There are four large industrial enter-
prises here: the chemical works “Polymir”, the vitamin
works, the measuring devices plant and the refinery. The
population of the town constantly increases. It is a town
of young people.
1. What are the most ancient towns in Belarus?
2. Are there any young cities and towns in the repub-
lic?
3. What are they famous for?
340
VIII. Переведите текст со словарем.
TRANSFORMATION OF THE COUNTRYSIDE
Most Belarusians, because of the natural formation of
the urban infrastructure, are more at home in the coun-
tryside than in the city. Though 64 per cent of the popu-
lation live in towns and cities nearly half of them have
moved there only recently. Their hearts and roots are still
at the place where they were born.
There is no other place like a countryside for those who
have learned in childhood to love its monotonous land-
scape with innumerable lakes, rivers, forests and fields,
its small quiet villages and modern settlements. I do love
all that. I like the village with its winding streets, local
people, green carpets of meadows. I like to stand on the
highest hill, where there is a monument to those killed in
action during World War II. I like to see how the Pripyat
flows unhurriedly to the Dnieper. The working men and
women who live on its banks are as tireless as the river it-
self. They mow the thick grass in the meadows, gather in
the rich grain harvest and build new plants.
A distinctive feature of modern countryside is its in-
dustrialization. Numerous workshops and even small fac-
tories are set up on collective farms, such as workshops
for the processing of vegetables and fruit, for the produc-
tion of furniture, clothes, overcoats, jackets and sheep-
skin coats. All this has entailed a change in the structure
of trades. Technologists and construction workers have
become particularly important men, as well as grain-
growers and machine operators.
Today’s countryside has its own infrastructure: roads,
service establishments, stadiums. New buildings are mush-
rooming here: urban-type two-storeyed houses with all mod-
ern conveniences, with a garage and a telephone. Over the
last few years a number of such urban-style settlements have
been built in which every house is an attraction.
Some people, however, prefer to live in wooden houses
with big orchards and gardens attached to them. It is
really very important not to lose the delights of the vil-
lage way of life. It is particularly dear to every villager to
hear a cock that crows every morning.
It is impossible to tear a peasant from the land, from
everything that has gone into his heart and mind since his
childhood. The roots of the real villager are always to be
found in the soil he loves.
341
UNIT 20
Conversational Topic FAMOUS PEOPLE OF BELARUS
The Belarusian land gave birth to many famous people
whose names are known all over the world.
The history of the Belarusian culture is more than one
thousand years old. The names of such Belarusian think-
ers as Euphrosyne Polotskaya and Kirill Turovsky have
been known since ancient times. Since the 12th century we
have known the name of the great Belarusian jeweler Lazar
Bogsha and his priceless creation — the Cross of St. Euphro-
syne, which was decorated with numerous precious stones.
The age of Renaissance enriched our culture with new
names of great Belarusian statesmen, writers and print-
ers. For example, Lev Sapega, the dynasty of Radzivil,
Mikola Gusovsky and many others. The name of the first
printer Francisak Skaryna and his followers Symon Budny
and Vasily Tyapinsky are known throughout the world. In
1990 we celebrated the 500th anniversary of the birth of
Dr.F.Skaryna, the first-printer and the first translator of
the Bible into the native Belarusian language.
It goes without saying Belarusian literature has made a
great contribution to world literature. The names of
Yanka Kupala and Yakub Kolas, Maxim Bagdanovich,
Kandrat Krapiva, Vladimir Korotkevich, Vasil Bykov are
world famous. These names are followed by a number of
other well-known writers and poets, such as K. Chorny,
P. Brovka.I. Shamyakin, M. Tank, V. Bykov, N. Gilevich,
A. Adamovich. Their works are translated into many
European languages. Many of Minsk streets are named af-
ter the Belarusian writers.
As for Belarusian art the names of K. Malevich, Mark
Shagal, Ya. Drosdovich,A. Isachev, M. Savitsky and
others are known far beyond the borders of our country.
The Belarusian culture is also famous for its ballet.
The Opera and Ballet Theatre in Minsk is the centre of the
national Belarusian school of ballet. V. Elizaryev is one of
the famous choreographers in the world. The national Be-
larusian theatre school is well-known too. The names of
G. Makarova, S. Stanyuta, N. Eremenko, L. Filatov and
other actors of the Y. Kupala Academic Theatre are also
of great popularity abroad.
342
It’s also a pleasure to mention the names of such fa-
mous Belarusian composers as N. Churkin, I. Luchenok,
V. Alovnokov, A. Bogatyrev, N. Aladov. The Belarusian vo-
cal groups “Pesnyary”, “Verasy”, “Charovnitsa” and dance
group “Khoroshky” have been a great success in Europe.
Many prominent names in the history of Belarus of the
20th century are connected with two main events, the Se-
cond World War and space exploration. All Belarusians
fought heroically defending their Motherland. But we are
especially proud of the heroes of the last war: K. Zaslonov,
E. Osipova, N. Gastello, V. Talalikhin, the defenders of Brest
fortress and many others. In the family of cosmonauts there
are also two Belarusians, A. Kovalyonok and P. Klimuk.
At the present day time, the time of revaluation of
values, it’s difficult to find heroes, especially among poli-
ticians. Time will put everything in its place and give eve-
rybody his due. But one thing is obvious: great times are
created by great men. Their names are sure to become his-
tory whatever it may be.
Тематический словарь
famous, a
creation, n
first printer
make contri-
bution
well-known, a
leading, a
prominent, a
outstanding, a
public figure, n
intellectual, n
space, n
exploration, n
politician, n
hero, n
знаменитый
творение
первопечатник
вносить вклад
известный
ведущий
видный,
известный
выдающийся
общественный
деятель
интеллигент
космос
исследование
политик
герой
create, v
become history
revaluation, n
value, n
give one's due
be named after
mention, v
include, v
constitute, v
generation, n
peace-loving, a
industrious, a
monument, n
создатель
войти в
историю
переоценка
ценность
воздать
должное
носить имя
упоминать
включать,
содержать
составлять, об-
разовывать
поколение
миролюбивый
трудолюбивый
памятник
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Are there many famous people in the Republic of
Belarus?
2. What are they?
343
3. Who is considered to be the classic of Belarusian
literature?
4. What other famous writers and poets do you know?
5. Are any of Minsk streets named after these writers?
6. Who are the leading Belarusian composers of the
present century?
7. Do you know the names of the heroes of World War
II?
8. Are there any Belarusians in the family of cosmo-
nauts?
9. Can you give the names of any political or public
figures of Belarus?
10. Who are the famous scientists in our republic?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. There are some prominent names in the history of
our country.
2. The scientists created new methods of analyses.
3. We are proud of our cosmonauts.
4. His name is sure to become history.
5. The University is named after the great scholar.
III. Переведите на английский язык.
Беларусь славится своим трудолюбивым и миролю-
бивым народом. На каждом промышленном предприя-
тии, в колхозе и совхозе, учебном или медицинском уч-
реждении трудятся десятки известных в своей отрасли
людей. Совместно с нашими ведущими учеными, писа-
телями, деятелями культуры, общественными деятеля-
ми они составляют гордость нашей нации, ее золотой
фонд. Имена наиболее прославленных из них увекове-
чены (perpetuate) в названиях улиц и городов. Много
прекрасных памятников установлено в их честь.
Одним из наиболее величественных является памят-
ник прекрасному белорусскому лирику М. Богдановичу
(1891—1917). Он прожил только 25 лет, но поднял
белорусскую литературу на мировой уровень. Его стихи
сохраняют национальный дух, выражают истинные
страдания народа. На стихи Богдановича написаны пес-
ни, которые поют до сих пор. Имя Богдановича широко
известно как в нашей стране, так и за рубежом.
344
IV. Прочитайте текст и перескажите его на
английском языке.
WHO WAS DR. SKARYNA?
In 1990 Belarusians were celebrating the 500th anni-
versary of the birth of Doctor Francisak Skaryna, the
first translator and publisher of the Bible (1517—1519) in
the Belarusian language. The impact of Skaryna’s work
has been profound both on the cultural development of
Belarus and on the Belarusian patriotic movement in the
20th century.
Belarusian printing owes its beginnings to Dr. Franci-
sak Skaryna, a prominent scholar and humanist. Dr.
Skaryna was born into a wealthy merchant family in the
old Belarusian city of Polatsk in 1490. After attending lo-
cal schools he studied at Krakow and other universities.
He received his degree in liberal arts, and later, at the
University of Padua, he received his degree in medicine.
He was a true Renaissance man — his intellectual inter-
ests embraced theology, literature, linguistics, poetry, art,
law, medicine, botany, and printing.
The most important of his achievements was the
translation and publication of the Bible into the Belaru-
sian language, first in Prague in 1517—1519, and later in
Vilnya. Skaryna’s Belarusian Bible was the second work
printed in a native Slavonic tongue.
Like other translators working elsewhere in Europe at
that time, he wanted to “make knowledge available to the
people in their own language”. He said, “I vow it shall be-
come a language of books, and not only of speech”.
V. Прочитайте и скажите, что нового вы узнали о
культуре и истории Беларуси.
In the 16th century in the town of Nesvizh there lived
and worked the world known philosopher Symon Budny.
Now a monument has been erected in his native town to
honour his memory.
AAA
The first book published on the territory of the present
Belarus was the book ♦ Малая падарожная кшжка» by
the first printer, Dr. Francisak Skaryna, a Belarusian
from Polatsk. The book was printed in the town of Vilnya
in 1522.
345
* * *
The collection of laws — the famous Statute of the
Great Principality of Lithuania — an excellent monument
of the 15 century, was written in the Belarusian language.
The statute was translated into the Russian, Polish, Ger-
man, Ukranian languages. Many European countries based
their collections of laws upon this Statute.
* * *
Not far from New York City in the USA there is a park
called Arrow Park. You can see standing there four monu-
ments to honour the memory of Alexander Pushkin, Taras
Shevchenko, Walt Whitman, and Yanka Kupala, poets
who sang so dramatically, so passionately about their peo-
ple’s hardships and sufferings, their joys and their sor-
rows.
* A *
Waclaw Zidlicky from Chechoslovakia knows Belaru-
sian very well, and he has done a lot in popularizing Be-
larusian literature.
Once speaking on TV in Minsk (in Belarusian, by the
way), he said that it was the word “siabry” that made him
get interested in the Belarusian language. He started
studying it and got to love it.
VI. Прочитайте текст и выразите свое отношение
к обсуждаемой проблеме.
EVERYTHING MUST BE BEAUTIFUL IN A PERSON ...
These words must be familiar to you. It is the begin-
ning of Anton Chekhov’s famous quotation: “Everything
must be beautiful in a person — face, clothing, spirit and
mind”.
What is more important in a person: his character or
his appearance? Most often you will hear that both should
be taken care of. Many people say that beauty is a harmo-
nious combination of outward appearance and high moral
qualities. Others think that character is the main thing,
and there is even a saying which is a reminder that ap-
pearances are often deceptive. As an old English saying
goes, “judge not according to the appearance”. The impor-
tance of character is also expressed in the following lines
written many years ago,” When wealth is lost, nothing is
346
lost; When health is lost, something is lost; When charac-
ter is lost, all is lost”.
So you can judge for yourself which is more important
and whether you should think more about your character
training or outward appearance.
VII. Переведите текст co словарем.
PEOPLE OF ART AND THEIR ACTIVITIES
In the past few years our literature has made new
strides forward. M. Tank, P. Panchenko, N. Gilevich and
others are as prolific as ever.
The novels by I. Melezh (The People of the Marshes,
Breath of the Thunderstorm), Ya. Bryl (Birds and Nets),
I. Shamyakin (Springs, Anxious Happiness, The Heart in
Hand), V. Bykov (Sotnikov, The Alpine Ballad, The Third
Rocket), M.Lynkov (The Never-to-Be Forgotten Days) are
well known in our republic and abroad. They are trans-
lated into many languages of the world.
Comedies and tragi-comedies by A. Makayonok (Pardon
Us, If You Please, The Tribunal. The Tablet Under Your
Tongue, etc.) are very intersting and humorous.
A. Makayonok is a talented playwright, possessing a crea-
tive manner of his own.
After these came a new generation of talented poets
and prose writers, enriching our writing. They contribu-
ted to our literature, making it still more brilliant. They
are R. Baradulin, a fine master of verse, A. Adamovich,
Ya. Sipakov, B. Sachanka and others.
We have plenty of artists who portray the natural
beauty of Belarus, its heroic past, and its no less heroic
present. The names of E. Zaitsev, V. Tsvirka, V. Volkov,
K. Krasovsky, M. Savitsky and many, many others are
known far beyond the borders of the Republic.
No less significant are the achievements in sculpture.
Leaving aside the older masters — A. Bembel (one of the
creators of Brest memorial), and Z. Azgur (his monument
to Ya. Kolas has been erected in Minsk), the younger ones
are also doing their bit. They are S. Vakar (his expressive
and very poetic monument to M. Bogdanovich stands in
front of the Opera and Ballet Theatre), I. Misko (his
monument to I. Buinitsky is in Prasaroky), A. Anikeychik
347
(his artistic monument to Ya. Kupala is watched by all
guests of Minsk) and others.
Belarusian music is on the upswing. A great many
popular songs, operas and symphonies have been created
by the well-know composers as A. Bogatyryov, author of
In the Polesye Pushcha, V. Alovnikov (his song My Dear
Homeland have become the callsign of the Belarusian ra-
dio). There are wonderfully melodious romances and songs
by A. Turankov, as well as V. Semenyaka’s operas, and
G. Vagner’s ballets. And even more popular younger com-
posers are D. Smolsky, S. Kortes and V. Glebov, a ta-
lented author of opera and ballet music. I. Luchenok’s
songs are known all over the country.
The Belarusian vocal group Pesnyary and Verasy folk
song and dance group have been great success in Europe,
the USA, Latin America and in Africa.
UNIT 21
Conversational Topic HEROISM OF THE BELARUSIAN
PEOPLE DURING THE GREAT PATRIOTIC WAR
On June 22, 1941 Belarus was among the first Union
republics to be attacked by Nazi Germany. From the very
first day to the last the Belarusian people fought heroi-
cally against the enemies. They all rose up to defend their
freedom and independence.
Over a million of Belarusians were in the Army. They
took part in the battles of Moscow and Leningrad, at
Stalingrad and the Kursk bulge, in the liberation of the
Caucasus, the Ukraine, the Crimea and the Baltic repub-
lics. Over 300,000 soldiers and officers, natives of Belarus
were awarded the orders and medals nearly 400 of them
were conferred the title of the Hero of the Soviet Union.
A massive movement was launched on the occupied ter-
ritories. It ammounted to 374,000 people. It is not by
chance that Belarus came to be called a partisan republic.
Belarusian partisans opened one more front and helped
the Army to win victory over the invaders.
Heroism and selfnessness became ordinary standards of
behaviour for millions of people in the field of battle and
in the rear. All our heroes cannot be mentioned, but here
are a few: Konstantin Zaslonov, who organized acts of
sabotage at the Orsha railway station; Nikolai Gastello,
who rammed his burning plane into a column of German
tanks near Radashkovichi; Anna Mazanik and Mariya
Osipova, who killed the Gauleiter of Belarus, the governor
Wilhelm Kubbe.
Among our heroes were F. Smolyachkov, who killed
125 Hitlerites; general Davator, who was in command of a
cavalry raid in the Nazi rear; the pilot A. Gorovets, who
in a single air battle brought down 9 enemy planes at the
cost of his own life; the defenders of the Brest Fortress
who kept rebuffing in a besieged fortress for a month and
many others.
In the summer of 1944 Belarus was completely cleared
of the enemy troops. But the victory over the fascist in-
vaders was not an easy one. We lost nearly every fourth
citizen of the Republic and more than half of our national
wealth.
349
The contribution of the Belarusian people to the defeat
of Nazism was enormous. Due to this fact the Republic of
Belarus was invited in 1945 to become a founding member
of a new international organization — the UNO (United
Nations Organization).
Тематический словарь
war, n
peace, n
fight, v
enemy, n
defend, v
freedom, n
independence, n
liberate, v
award, v
confer, v
launch, v
occupy, v
front, n
win a victory
invader, n
rear, n
война
мир
бороться
враг
защищать
свобода
независимость
освобождать
награждать
присваивать
начинать
захватывать
фронт
одержать победу
захватчик, за-
воеватель
тыл
battle, п
courage, п
selflessness, п
display, v
ram, v
be in command
bring down, v
fortress, n
rebuff, v
besiege, v
victory, n
deed, n
contribution, n
take into ac
count
the UNO
сражение
мужество
самоотвержен-
ность
проявлять
таранить
руководить,
командовать
сбивать
крепость
отбиваться
осаждать
победа
подвиг
вклад
принимать во
внимание
ООН
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. When did the Great Patriotic War begin?
2. When was Belarus attacked by the Hitlerite Ger-
many?
3. How long had the republic been occupied by the Na-
zis?
4. Did the Belarusians display mass heroism and cour-
age in the struggle with the enemy?
5. How many Belarusians were there in the Army during
the war?
6. How many of them were awarded the orders and
medals?
7. Why was Belarus called a partisan republic?
8. What fortress has become a symbol of courage?
9. What heroes of the war do you know?
10. What heroic deeds did they perform?
11. Did Belarus suffer greatly during the war?
12. How many people were killed in our republic?
350
13. When do we celebrate Victory Day?
14. Why did the Republic of Belarus become a founding
member of the UNO?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. In 1941 the Hitlerite Germany attacked our country.
2. Thousands of people courageously fought in towns
and villages.
3. Many people displayed heroism and courage during
the war.
4. They fought to win victory over the Nazis.
5. The Belarusians performed many heroic deeds.
III. Переведите на английский язык.
1. 30 апреля 1945 года группа солдат 1-го Белорус-
ского фронта ворвалась (burst) в рейхстаг. 2. Николай
Егоров и Мелитон Кантария первыми установили (plan-
ted) знамя победы над рейхстагом. Их героический
подвиг вошел (go down) в историю. 3. Это знамя стало
символом победы над нацистской Германией. 4. Егоров
и Кантария принимали участие в параде Победы в
Москве. На следующий день знамя было передано в
Центральный музей вооруженных сил (Central Museum
of Armed Forces). 5. Подвиг народа, проявленный во
время войны, будет жить в веках. 6. Наш народ и пра-
вительство делают все возможное, чтобы ужасы войны
не повторились. 7. Мы хотим жить в мире и дружбе со
всеми странами.
IV. Выразите свое согласие или несогласие со следую
щими утверждениями.
1. During the Great Patriotic War the entire nation
was fighting.
2. Nazis had blown up and burned down everything
they could.
3. The Victory came as a triumph for peace-loving peo-
ple all over the world.
4. The Soviet Army was the Army of liberation.
V. Прочитайте текст и поставьте вопросы по его
содержанию.
351
THE BREST FORTRESS DEFENDERS
The Brest Fortress heroic deed is known all over the
world. Cut off from the rest of the army the defenders of
the Fortress beat back numerous attacks of the enemy.
The people lost strength but would not give in. They stood
to death. Here are some examples.
One of the defenders, Vladimir Shablowski, a Belaru-
sian, was badly wounded and taken prisoner. When he and
other prisoners were crossing the bridge over the Bug
Shablovski shouted: “Everybody,, follow me!” and jumped
into the water. This fact became a legend.
Paralysing fascist forces of considerable length the
Brest Fortress heroic defenders who represented 33 na-
tions, withstood about a month’s siege. On the walls of
the Fortress one can read the inscriptions made by its de-
fenders: “There were three of us. It was hard but we did
not lose our courage and are, dying a hero’s death”, “I’m
dying but shall not surrender. Farewell, Motherland”.
The soldiers continued to fight on under their Commis-
sar Fomin, their commander Major Gavrilov and other of-
ficers. One day, heavily wounded, Fomin was captured and
shot. The Nazis broke into the fortress only after its de-
fenders had been killed. When the Nazis occupied the ru-
ins Major Gavrilov hid in a big cellar where he spent seve-
ral days without food or water. When his thirst got too
much for him he would press his mouth against the cold
brick wall. Finally he lost consciousness. But the moment,
the Nazis entered the cellar he came to and fought back
for a whole hour until he had no hand grenades left and
only one remaining bullet in his revolver. At that moment
he was shot from behind and captured. He went through
the entire hell of Nazi concentration camps. Pyotr
Gavrilov was later awarded the title of Hero of the Soviet
Union for his gallantry.
VI. Переведите текст co словарем.
FOR WHOM THE BELLS TOLL
The liberation of Belarus began in the autumn of 1943,
when the Germans were driven out of Gomel and a num-
ber of districts.
At daybreak on June 23, 1944 the Red Army began a
major operation code-named Bagration to liberate the
352
whole of the republic. July 3 saw the liberation of Minsk.
By the end of the month the whole of the republic was
free from the invaders.
It was not an easy victory that the people of Belarus
won over the fascists. Over 2,230,000 people were killed
and 380,000 people had been forcibly sent to Germany.
The fascists destroyed over 209 cities and towns, 9,200
villages, over 10,000 industrial enterprises. Minsk and
Gomel were 80 per cent destroyed, Polotsk — 96 per cent.
Nearly every fourth citizen of the Republic fell in the
fight against fascism. 136 Belarusian villages were burnt
down together with their inhabitants and couldn’t return
to life . Today you will find their names on the memorial
plagues of monuments, built in their honour.
The Mound of Glory is one of them. It was erected in
memory of the Battle of Minsk. Earth for this 35-metre
mound was brought from different Hero-cities. The
mound is crowned with an obelisk in the shape of four
bayonets (штыки). They symbolize the joint operations of
four army groups that were linked up here in 1944.
The 40 metres Obelisk in Victory Square is another
monument built in Minsk in 1954. The theme of the
monument is the victory of our country in the Great Pa-
triotic war as reflected by the four moulded bronze panels
around the plinth. The Eternal Flame, like a living heart,
beats at the foot of the obelisk reminding of all those who
gave their lives defending Motherland.
One more memorial complex is erected on the territory
of the Brest Fortress. Every visitor here feels as if time
had stood still: there are empty openings at windows of
burnt barracks, ruins of the fortress structures, walls of
building scarred with holes left by bullets, the smell of
smoke and burning. The names of the defenders of the
fortress are carved on the granite slabs of the memorial.
There is one more famous memorial exposing the hor-
rors of the war. The tragedy of Khatyn — a small Belaru-
sian village — broke out on March 22, 1943. Early in the
morning fascists arrived in lorries. They broke into the
peaceful homes, drove the inhabitants into a big shed and
set it on fire. There were 149 people in all, 76 of them
were children. The nazis set fire to all the houses in the
village.
A memorial complex was set up in Khatyn in 1969. The
main figure here is a bronze statue of one of the villagers
12 Зак. 2112
353
Yosif Kaminsky who is holding his dead son on his arms.
Twenty-six burnt village houses are presented by monu-
ments in the form of high brick chimneys with the bells
attached to them. Every two minutes the bells ring out
mournfully. There is a list of names of the members of
each family embedded in the monument.
Ivan Zhelobkovich
Sofia Zhelobkovich
Lena Zhelobkovich, 10 years
Lyonya Zhelobkovich, 4 years
Misha Zhelobkovich, 2 years
We have never seen or known the perished inhabitants
of Khatyn; nor have we ever heard their voices. But they
are still with us. Their voices didn’t burn in the fire: they
remained under the sky and have reached us.
“Kind people, remember: We loved life, our mother-
land, and you, our dear ones. We were burnt alive in fire.
Our request to all is this: Let grief and sorrow turn into
courage so that you may be able forever to preserve peace
and tranquility on Earth, so that life may never again
burn in flames!”
UNIT 22
Conversational Topic OUTSTANDING SCIENTISTS OF
THE WORLD
The world knows the names of many great scientists:
mathematicians, physicists, chemists, biologists, linguists,
historians etc. A lot of discoveries have been made by
them in different fields of science and engineering. The
role of science when it serves the interests of man and so-
ciety is very important. It’s a great productive force
which helps to develop the economy and solve social prob-
lems increasing in this way the well-being of people.
Among the names of great scientists who contributed
much to different fields of science and engineering one
should mention Isaac Newton, the founder of modern
mathematics, physics, spectroscopy, the discoverer of the
law of motion and the universal law of gravitation; Dmitri
Mendeleyev, the discoverer of the Periodic System of Ele-
ments; Mikhail Lomonosov, the great Russian scientist;
Alfred Nobel, the great Swedish inventor and industrial-
ist; Igor Kurchatov, Pierre and Marie Curie, the physi-
cists; Yuri Gagarin, the cosmonaut; I. Prigozhin, the
chemist; A. Kuprevich, Nobel laureate, biologist and others.
The list of outstanding people of the world is long. I’d
like to speak about the people whose names are closely
connected with the greatest event of the 20th century: the
flight of Man into space. Special tribute should be paid to
Russian scientists. Konstantin Eduardovich Tsiolkovsky is
one of them.
K. Tsiolkovsky (1879—1935) was born in a small Rus-
sian village near Ryazan. He dedicated all his life to the
problem of interplanetary travel. He worked out the the-
ory of cosmic flights. K. Tsiolkovsky believed that
“mankind will not remain on Earth forever”, and he
dreamt of that day.
The man who was standing behind Soviet space strat-
egy from the 1930s was Sergei Pavlovich Korolev. An
outstanding scientist, he devoted all his life to rocket re-
search, constructing artificial satellites. The first artifi-
cial sputnik launched on October 4, 1957 was the practical
accomplishment of his ideas.
355
Some years later the most remarkable event in the his-
tory of cosmonautics took place. On April 12, 1961 the
spaceship “Vostok”, piloted by Yuri Gagarin, went up. It
is due to Korolev’s genius and some other top engineers'
talent that Russia became the world leader in conquering
space.
Yuri Gagarin was the first man who made his historic
flight into space. The whole world applauded this hand-
some young man. He orbited the earth once, staying in
space for only 108 minutes, but he was the first to fly to
stars. Mankind will always remember him. In commemora-
tion of Gagarin’s flight April 12th has been made the In-
ternational Day of Cosmonautics.
With Gagarin’s flight to space Tsiolkovsky’s “utopian”
dreams came true. A new age of space exploration be-
gan.
Тематический словарь
science, n
scientific, a
scientist, n
engineering, n
discovery, n
merit, n
flight, n
space, n
research, n
exploration, n
artificial, a
satellite, n
inventor, n
наука
научный
ученый
техника
открытие
заслуга
полет
космическое
пространство
исследование,
изучение
исследование,
освоение
искусственный
спутник
изобретатель
carry out, v
work out, v
launch, v
spaceship, n
pilot, v
go up, v
due to, adv
conquer, v
genius, n
orbit, n
star, n
come true
commemoration, n
проводить
( исследования)
разрабатывать
запускать
космический
корабль
пилотировать
взлетать
благодаря
покорять
гений
орбита
звезда
сбываться
ознаменование
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Do you know any outstanding scientists of the world?
2. Which of them made great discoveries?
3. Who invented the electric candle?
4. Who discovered the Periodic Law of elements?
5. Who is the man standing behind the rocket indus-
try?
6. Who is the first Russian (American) cosmonaut?
356
7. What famous inventors do you know?
8. What distinguished writers lived in the 20 century?
9. Are there any world famous composers of the 20
century?
10. Are there any outstanding politicians and public
figures in our country?
11. What people are considered to be outstanding?
12. What qualities must they possess?
13. Is it enough to be talented to be called outstanding?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. Lomonosov made a number of discoveries in natural
sciences.
2. He was the first to compile a Russian grammar.
3. The most famous inventors were Polzunov and Kuli-
bin.
4. Tsiolkovsky worked out the theory of cosmic flights.
5. Newton carried out many experiments with prism.
III. Спросите своего друга:
— кого он считает выдающимися учеными современ-
ности;
— может ли он привести примеры, когда талант че-
ловека проявлялся не в созидании, а в разрушении;
— можно ли считать гуманистами создателей ядер-
ного оружия;
— возможно ли остановить прогресс;
— как он понимает роль личности в истории.
IV. Прочитайте и скажите, чем знамениты эти
ученые.
ISAAC NEWTON
Isaac Newton, one of the greatest men in the history of
science, was born in a little village in England in 1642.
When Isaac was nineteen he became a student of Cam-
bridge University. He began to study physics, astronomy
and mathematics.
Newton’s contribution to these sciences is so great that
he may be considered the founder of modern mathematics,
physics and spectroscopy. Newton discovered the law of
motion and the universal law of gravitation. He studied
357
the nature of light and colour and came to the conclusion
that white light is composed of many different colours
known to us as the spectrum. Such a phenomenon was
quite unknown before Newton’s work.
So long as humanity lives, Isaac Newton, the greatest
of men of science, will never be forgotten.
DMITRI MENDELEYEV
In 1869 the great Russian scientist Dmitri Mendeleyev
announced the discovery of the Periodic Law of elements.
So science received the key to the secrets of matter. All
the greatest discoveries which have been made since then
in the fields of chemistry and physics have been based on
this law.
The elements in Mendeleyev’s Periodic Table follow one
another in the order of their atomic weights. They are ar-
ranged in periods and groups.
Mendeleyev’s discovery made it possible for the scien-
tists to find 38 new chemical elements to fill the empty
spaces left in the Periodic Table. At the same time they
tried to find elements heavier than the last element in the
Periodic Table. In 1955 the American scientist Dr. Glenn
Seabord obtained element No 101 and named it Mendele-
vium in honour of the creator of the Periodic Law.
V. Прочитайте и скажите, каким образом имена
изобретателей отражены в наименованиях их изобре-
тений.
Charles Mackintosh (1766—1843), a Manchester textile
chemist developed a rubber solution (резиновый раствор)
for covering fabric which led to the production of water-
proof raincoats, or mackintoshes.
Samuel Finley Morse (1791—1872), an American por-
trait painter who invented the telephonic short sound (.)
and long sound (-) alphabet known as Morse code.
Adolphe Sax (1814—1894), a Belgian musician who
invented an instrument called the saxaphone after his
name Sax. It was only one of the whole family of new in-
struments, which were also called the saxophones.
Hans Wilhelm Geiger (1882—1945) a German physi-
cist. In 1906—1909 he designed a counter for detecting
radioactivity. This was the beginning of modern geigers or
geiger counters.
358
Rudolf Diesel (1858—1913), a German engineer who
invented the diesel engine in 1897 and so began a trans-
port revolution in cars, lorries and trains.
VI. Прочитайте текст о выдающихся деятелях сов-
ременности и скажите, каким образом они сочетали в
себе качества ученого и общественного деятеля.
MOHANDAS GANDHI AND MARTIN LUTHER KING
Two twentieth-century leaders who have continued to
influence non-violent social protest movements interna-
tionally are Mohandas Gandhi and Martin Luther King. Of
different races and cultures, born on opposite sides of the
world, in nations vastly different in wealth and technolo-
gy, these two men in their later years shared the philoso-
phy of non-violent, but direct action and expended their
lives in pursuit of peaceful solutions to social inequities.
An examination of their lives, consequently, reveals both
similarities and differences in their family backgrounds,
ideology, and plans for social action.
The family backgrounds of the two men show obvious
parallels and also striking differences. Gandhi was a
Hindu of the Baniyu (Trading) caste; his father, never-
theless, was chief minister of the small state of
Kathiawad. At the age of 19, Gandhi broke with the tradi-
tion of his family and went to study law in England,
where he had his first contact with Western culture. Al-
though he read and studied the Bible with interest, he be-
came more deeply convinced of the logicality and profun-
dity of the Hindu religion.
King was a Black American born into a family of
Christian ministers. His father was the paster of a church
which his father-in-law had founded many years before.
Unlike Gandhi, King decided to follow in the footsteps of
his father and grandfather and study for the ministry. It
was only after studying the philosophic works of Plato,
Aristotle, Hobbes, Marx, Neitzsche, and finally Gandhi
that he began to formulate his own philosophy. Early en-
vironment, family tradition, and study, at some points
similar but at most points different, shaped the characters
of Gandhi and King and formed their expectations for
their societies and their people.
359
A. SAKHAROV: MAN AND LEGEND
Andrei Dmitrievich Sakharov, an outstanding scientist
and public figure, was born in 1921. The biography of
A. Sakharov as one of the “secret” authorities in thermo-
nuclear physics mainly falls on the times of the “thaw”
(оттепель). In 1948 he began serious work on hydrogen
bomb and while working on the problem he came to the
conclusion that any atomic and nuclear weapon should be
banned. He wrote many articles on the problem which
were published abroad. He protested against the invasion
in Afganistan, against every violation of human rights.
Abroad Sakharov was recognized as a civil rights activist
and received the Peace Nobel’s Prize. At home he was per-
secuted, deprived of all his titles and orders and exiled to
the city of Gorky. In Gorky he continued to work for
peace, justice and human rights.
Only in 1985 A. D. Sakharov was allowed to come back
to Moscow. He was given back all his titles and was
elected a deputy of the Supreme Soviet. But he died in
December 1989.
A. D. Sakharov is remembered by everybody as an out-
standing humanist and philosopher. He realized even in
1968 that our society should develop in a new direction.
He foresaw the changes that are taking place now.
VII. Переведите текст co словарем.
ALFRED NOBEL — MAN OF CONTRASTS
Alfred Nobel, the great Swedish inventor and industri-
alist, was a man of many contrasts. He was the son of a
bankrupt, but became a millionaire, a scientist with a love
of literature, an industrialist who managed to remain an
idealist. He made a fortune but lived a simple life, and al-
though cheerful in company he was often sad in private.
A lover of mankind, he never had a wife or family to love
him; a patriotic son of his native land, he died alone on
foreign soil. He invented a new explosive, dynamite, to
improve the peaceful industries of mining and road
building, but saw it used as a weapon of war to kill and
injure his fellow men. World-famous for his works he was
never personally well-known for throughout his life he
avoided publicity.
360
Alfred Nobel was born in Stockholm on October 21,
1833 but moved to Russia with his parents in 1842, where
his father, Immanuel, made a strong position for himself
in the engineering industry. But soon he went bankrupt
and returned to Sweden where Alfred began his study of
explosives in his father's laboratory. He had never been to
school or University but had studied privately and by the
time he was twenty was a skilful chemist and excellent
linguist, speaking Swedish, Russian, German, French and
English. Like his father, Alfred was imaginative and in-
ventive, but he had better luck in business and showed
more financial sense. He was quick to see industrial
openings for his scientific inventions and built up over 80
companies in 20 different countries. Indeed his greatness
lay in his outstanding ability to combine the qualities of
an original scientist with those of a forward-looking in-
dustrialist.
But Nobel’s main concern was never with making
money or even with making scientific discoveries. Seldom
happy, he was always searching for a meaning to life, and
from his youth had taken a serious interest in literature
and philosophy. Perhaps because he could not find ordi-
nary human love — he never married — he came to care
deeply about the whole of mankind. He was always gener-
ous to the poor. His greatest wish was to see an end of
wars, and thus peace between nations, and he spent much
time and money working for this cause until his death in
Italy in 1896. His famous will, in which he left money to
provide prizes for outstanding works in Physics, Chemis-
try, Physiology, Medicine, Literature and Peace, its a me-
morial to his interests and ideals.
UNIT 23
Conversational Topic THE UNITED KINGDOM OF
GREAT BRITAIN AND NORTHERN IRELAND
The United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern
Ireland is situated on the British Isles. It consists of four
parts: England, Wales, Scotland and Northern Ireland.
England, Wales and Scotland occupy the territory of
Great Britain. Northern Ireland is situated in the north-
ern part of Ireland.
The territory of the United Kingdom is about 244,000
square kilometres, it takes the 75th place among other
countries in the world. The population is more than 57
million. About 80% of the population is urban. The capi-
tal of the country is London. Great Britain is separated
from the continent by the English Channel which is 34 km
wide in its narrowest point. The country is also washed by
the North Sea, the Irish Sea and the Atlantic Ocean.
The surface of Great Britain varies greatly. The north-
ern and western parts of the country is mountainous and
is called the Highlands. All the rest (south, east and cen-
tre) is a vast plain which is called the Lowlands. The
mountains are not very high. The rivers are not long. The
most important of them are the Severn, the Thames, the
Trent . There are many beautiful lakes in the mountainous
parts of the country.
The mountains, the Atlantic Ocean and the warm wa-
ters of the Gulf Stream influence the climate of Great
Britain. It is mild the whole year round.
Great Britain is a highly developed industrial country.
It is known as one of the world’s largest producers and
exporters of iron and steel products, machinery and elec-
tronics, chemicals and textile, aircraft and navigation
equipment. One of the chief industries of the country is ship-
building. 7 per cent of the population is engaged in farming.
Great Britain is a country with old cultural traditions
and customs. The most famous educational centres are
Oxford and Cambridge universities. They are considered
to be the intellectual centres of Europe. The education is
not free, it is very expensive.
The United Kingdom is a monarchy and the Queen is
the head of the state. But in practice it is ruled by the
362
elected government with a Prime Minister at the head.
The British Parliament consists of two chambers: the
House of Lords and the House of Commons. It sits in the
House of Parliament in Westminster.
There are three main political parties in Great Britain:
the Labour, the Conservative and the Liberal parties. The
Labour party with Antony Blair at the head is the ruling
party nowadays. There’s no written constitution in Great
Britain only precedents and traditions.
Тематический словарь
country, n
power, n
be situated
wash, v
island, n
urban, a
surface, n
vary,v
high, a
low, a
land, n
plain, n
vast, a
lake, n
navigation, n
shipbuilding, n
equipment, n
cotton, n
iron ore
oil, n
rubber, n
river, n
climate, n
mild, a
industry, n
heavy and light
industry
страна
держава
быть располо-
женным
омывать
остров
городской
поверхность
отличаться
высокий
низкий
земля, страна
равнина
огромный
озеро
судоходство
кораблестроение
оборудование
хлопок
железная руда
нефть
резина, каучук
река
климат
мягкий
промышленность
тяжелая и лег-
кая промыш-
ленность
occupy, v
territory, n
border on, v
population, n
density, n
develop, v
produce, v
export, v
Import, v
natural re
sources
raw, n
goods, n
steel, n
machinery, n
electronics, n
chemical, a
textile, n
aircraft, n
political set-up
authority, n
belong (to), v
government, n
chamber, n
ruling, a
занимать
территория
граничить
население
плотность
развивать
производить
экспортировать
импортировать
природные
ископаемые
сырье
товары
сталь
машинное
оборудование
электроника
химический
текстиль
самолеты
политическое
устройство
власть
принадлежать
правительство
палата
правящий
Географические названия
The United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern
Ireland — Соединенное Королевство Великобритании и
Северной Ирландии
England — Англия
Scotland — Шотландия
363
Wales — Уэльс
The Northern Ireland — Северная Ирландия
The English Channel — принятое в Великобритании
название пролива Ла-Манш
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. What is the official name of Great Britain?
2. Where is the U. K. situated?
3. What parts does it consist of?
4. What is the territory and the population of the
United Kingdom?
5. What city is the capital of the U. K.?
6. What is the surface of the country?
7. Are there any big rivers and lakes?
8. Why is the climate of the British Isles milder than
that of the Continent?
9. The United Kingdom is a highly developed industrial
country, isn’t it?
10. What goods does the British industry produce?
11. What industrial cities are there in Great Britain?
12. What outstanding people of Great Britain do you
know?
13. Are there any big educational establishments in
Great Britain?
14. Great Britain is a constitutional monarchy, isn’t it?
15. What is the name of the Queen of Great Britain?
16. Is her power limited by Parliament?
17. How many chambers does the British Parliament
consist of? What are they?
18. What are the main political parties in Great Bri-
tain?
19. Who is the Prime Minister of Great Britain?
20. Which political party does he represent?
II. Составьте предложения, употребляя выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. The British Isles are washed by the Atlantic Ocean
and the North Sea.
2. On the continent the country borders on France.
3. It occupies the territory of about 244,000 square
kilometres.
364
4. Great Britain is a highly developed industrial coun-
try.
5. The power in the country belongs to the Queen and
the two Houses of Parliament.
III. Спросите своего друга:
— знает ли он официальное название Великобрита-
нии;
— знает ли он, почему страну часто называют Англия;
— знает ли он, кто является премьер-министром Вели-
кобритании;
— интересуется ли он политическим устройством стра-
ны;
— что он думает о системе образования в стране;
— что он думает о промышленном развитии Велико-
британии;
— что он думает об уровне жизни англичан.
IV. Закончите следующие предложения.
1. The United Kingdom consists of ...
2. The British Parliament consists of ...
3. There are the following political parties in Great
Britain ...
4. There are some famous educational establishments
such as ...
5. The United Kingdom is situated on ...
6. The British Isles are washed by ...
7. The Queen’s rights are limited by ...
8. The territory of Great Britain is ...
9. The population is ...
V. Переведите предложения на английский язык.
1. Британские острова расположены на континен-
тальном шельфе (shelf). 2. Пролив Ла-Манш отделяет
Великобританию от континента. 3. Пролив неширокий,
не более 32 километров. 4. Великобритания — одна из
наиболее густонаселенных стран мира. 5. Считается,
что Шотландия такая же красивая, как и Швейцария.
6. Туристы со всего мира приезжают в эти страны, что-
бы полюбоваться красотой пейзажа. 7. Уэльс — один из
крупнейших шахтерских районов страны. 8. Велико-
британия получила большую прибыль (gain profit) от
эксплуатации своих колоний. 9. Северная Ирландия бы-
365
ла первой колонией Англии. 10. Сегодня Великобри-
тания — крупный производитель железа и стали,
электронного и машинного оборудования, текстиля.
VI. Выразите свое согласие или несогласие со сле-
дующими утверждениями.
1. Great Britain lies about the same distance from the
equator as the Crimea.
2. The climate of the country is much milder than that
of Belarus.
3. The English Channel separates England from France.
On a clear day the French coast can be easily seen from
the Downs.
4. The waters of the English Channel are very shallow,
and there are many fishing villages along the coast.
5. The highest body of state power in the United King-
dom is the Congress which consists of the Senate and the
House of Representatives.
6. Wales is one of the big mining districts in Great
Britain. In the towns and villages of Wales you can see
thousands of miners.
VII. Прочитайте диалог и скажите, что нового вы
узнали о Великобритании.
Teacher: I’ve told you that the scenery of Great Britain
is very diverse. You can find the fine combi-
nations of low- and highlands, plains and
mountains. And what are the highest regions
in the country?
Student 1: The highest regions are in Scotland and in the
North Wales. The highest peak in Scotland is
Ben Nevis, 1343 m. In Wales the highest peak
is Snowdon. There is also the Pennine chain
in North England with some wild mountains
for climbing. Here is Lake District which con-
sists of 16 lakes or «lochs» as they call them.
The largest lake is Windermere and the deep-
est one — Westwater.
Teacher: That’s right. Lakes and rivers are roads of
water which are not less important as rail-
ways or roads. And now who’d like to speak
about English rivers?
366
Student 2: There are many rivers in Great Britain, but
the greatest rivers are the Thames flowing to
the East, the Severn to the West and the
Trent to the North. The longest river is the
Severn — about 200 miles. The busiest river
is the Thames. It is also the most beautiful
river. The Trent is the fastest.
Teacher: And who can tell me about the most beautiful
lowlands in Britain?
Student 3: I think the South English plain is very attrac-
tive. It is not only beautiful but the richest,
the most fertile and that’s why the most
populated in the country.
VIII. Прочитайте текст и расскажите об истории
и достопримечательностях Великобритании.
ACROSS ENGLAND ТО SCOTLAND
Britain is a small, beautiful and crowded country,
separated from the continent by the English Channel and
the Strait of Dover.
Numerous historical and cultural places of interest on
its territory remind of the tremendous past of the coun-
try.
The island, inhabited by the Celtic tribes (the name
Britain probably derives from one of them) long before
our era survived the Roman conquest from the first till
the fifth centuries of our era, the Anglo-Saxon occupation
in the middle of the fifth century, the Danish attacks in
the 8th—10th centuries and the Norman invasion in 1066.
All these contributed to the evolution of the people who
became the English and to the formation of the language
that became the English language.
Let’s start our tour from the score of Britain, England,
from its nearest to the continent part, the Chalk country.
The striking feature of this part of England is the gleam-
ing whiteness of the Kentish shore which made the Roman
invaders name Britain Albion (Lat. — the white land). It
is here that the most ancient building of England, Dover
Castle, is situated. Within a few miles there is the jewel
of medieval architecture, Bodian Castle, now it is turned
into an observatory.
Here you can see Pevensey, a Roman fortress. It was
here that William of Normandy pitched his tent in the
367
year 1066. From here he marched to Hastings to meet
Harold, the Saxon King, and it was here that William be-
came the Conqueror and the Normans became the rulers of
England.
If you leave the crowded seashore, you’ll soon be in the
country. The flowers are so bright here, the fields so rich.
The villages are kept like models of bygone days or like
museums. Wherever you go, there is a tower or an ancient
church outlined against the sky.
One of the oldest cities of England is ancient Canter-
bury. Canterbury stands on the road of invaders and saw
the Romans, the Danes and the Normans passing that way
to colonize the country. It is Canterbury and its Cathedral
that is the seat of the Archbishop of the Anglican Church.
The Cathedral was built by the monks who in 597 of our
era came from Rome to peach the Christian faith in the
country. The Danes destroyed the cathedral, then the
Normans rebuilt it.
The names of famous men Chaucer and his Canterbury
Tales and Dickens associate with this ancient place.
Bath is of the greatest interest too as it is the most
important Roman relic in England. Bath is the oldest spa
(курорт с минеральными водами) in Britain, created by
the Romans in the 1st century of our era. The architec-
tural ensemble of the town is unique not only in England
but in all Europe.
Oxford and Cambridge are the two Great Universities
known all over the world. They are situated in the beauti-
ful cities of Oxford and Cambridge and date back to 12
and 13 centuries. The industrial England is chiefly in the
Midlands with the largest cities of Birmingham, Coventry,
Wolverhapton, Nottingham, Sheffield and Leeds.
At last we are in Scotland, the land of mountains lost
in clouds, valleys, plains and famous lochs. This is the
land of romance and most eventful history. Scotland has
her own national heroes, they fought in endless battles
against the English.
The Romans never managed to conquer the territory of
Scotland and they had to build the Great Roman Wall to
protect their camps in the northern part of England. One
can see this wall separating England from Scotland even
now.
368
Almost all Scotland’s history is associated with and re-
flected in many castles and forts that are to be seen all
over the country. Mary Stuart, the Queen of Scots, was
born in one of them, Robert Bruce defeated the English
here.
Scotland has her own national dress, the kilt, that
should be worn only by men, national instruments and
dances, national drink, Scotch. It has its own system of
education and law. Edinburgh and Glasgo are the two
great centres of Scotland. Robert Burns and Walter Scott
sang of the beauty of Scotland and its people in their
works.
13 Зак. 2112
UNIT 24
Conversational Topic LONDON
London is the capital of Great Britain, its political,
economic and commercial centre. It is one of the largest
cities in the world (together with Tokyo and New York)
and the largest city in Europe. Its population is about
8 million.
London is situated on the river Thames. The city is
very old. It has more than a 20century-old history. Tradi-
tionally it is divided into several parts: the City, West-
minster, the West End and the East End. They are very
different from each other.
The City is the oldest part of London, its financial and
business centre. Numerous banks, offices and firms are
concentrated here, including the Bank of England, the
Stock Exchange and the Old Bailey. Few people live in the
City but over a million come to work here. Two master-
pieces are situated within the City: St. Paul's Cathedral
and the Tower of London. St. Paul’s Cathedral was built
in the 17th century by Christopher Wren. The Tower of
London was built in the 11th century. It was used as a
fortress, a palace and a prison. Now it’s a museum.
Westminster is the aristocratic official part of London.
It includes Buckingham Palace where the Queen lives and
the Houses of Parliament stretching for nearly 1000 feet
along the north bank of the Thames.
The Clock Tower of the Houses of Parliament is famous
for its big hour bell, known as «Big Ben». Westminster
Abbey is the place where coronation of nearly all kings
and queens has taken place. Many of them are buried here
as well as some other famous people of the country
(G. Chaucer, Tennyson, Newton, Ch. Dickens, T. Hardy,
R. Kipling, etc.).
The West End is the richest and most beautiful part of
London. It is a symbol of wealth and luxury. The best ho-
tels, restaurants, shops, clubs, parks and houses are situ-
ated there. English aristocracy lives in this region. One of
the busiest streets in the West End is Oxford street. There
are many various shops here which attract customers
from different countries of the world.
Trafalgar Square is the geographical centre of London.
It was named in the memory of Admiral Nelson’s victory
at the battle of Trafalgar in 1805. The tall Nelson’s Col-
umn stands in the middle of the square.
Opposite the Nelson monument is the National Gallery
and the National Portrait Gallery. They contain the finest
art collections in the world. Not far from the National
Gallery is the British Museum famous for its rich library
(about 7,000,000 books).
The East End is an industrial district of London. There
are many factories and the Port of London there. The re-
gion is densely populated by working class families, those
people who have built the palaces of the West End. Old
residents of the East End are proud to be called cockneys
which means true Londoners, hereditary inhabitants of
the area. They love the district very much.
Тематический словарь
capital, n столица residence, п резиденция
centre, n центр official, а официальный
region, n район gallery, п галерея
street, n улица painting, п живопись,
district, n район картина
palace, n дворец masterpiece, п шедевр
royal, a королевский art, п искусство
fortress, n крепость collection, п коллекция
cathedral, n собор library, п библиотека
hotel, n гостиница wealth, п богатство
park, n парк inhabit, v населять
statue, n статуя resident, n житель
monument, n памятник attract attention привлекать
memory, n память внимание
victim, n жертва contain, v содержать
stretch, v простираться occupy, V занимать
museum, n музей advertisement, n объявление
the Bank of England — Английский банк
the Stock Exchange — Лондонская фондовая биржа
the Old Bailey — Центральный уголовный суд, находящийся в
Олд-Бейли.
У п ражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
I. What is the capital of Great Britain?
2. Is London a big city?
3. What is its population?
371
370
4. What river does London stand on?
5. What parts is London divided into?
6. Why is the City called the business centre of Lon-
don?
7. What places of interest does Westminster include?
8. Who is buried in Westminster Abbey?
9. What is the West End famous for?
10. Why is the central square in London named Trafal-
gar Square?
11. Where is the National Gallery situated?
12. What do you know about the British Museum?
13. The East End is a working class area, isn’t it?
14. What is situated in the East End?
15. Is London the city of big contrasts?
16. Would you like to live there?
17. What part of London would you like to live in?
II. Составьте предложения, употребив выделенные
слова и словосочетания.
1. London is more than 20 centuries old.
2. The City is the business centre of London.
3. No 10 Downing Street is the official residence of the
Prime Minister.
4. Trafalgar Square was named in the memory of the
victory at the battle of Trafalgar, 1805.
5. The museum contains a great collection of ancient
things.
III. Спросите своего друга:
— if he has ever been to London;
— if it is possible to see anything of London in one
day;
— if he is interested in churches and cathedrals;
— whether he knows the history of Britain:
— whether Great Britain took part in World War II;
— whether London was bombed during the war;
— what famous theatres he knows in London;
— what big University he knows in London;
— what places of interest he would like to see first.
IV. Закончите следующие предложения.
1. London is situated on the banks of the river ... .
2. The oldest part of London is ... .
372
3. Its population is ... .
4. The aristocratic official part of London is called ...
5. The symbol of wealth and luxury is ....
6. The industrial district of London is called ....
7. The well-known people of England are buried in ... .
8. Most Government offices in London are situated in
... street.
9. The official residence of the Prime Minister is in ...
10. One of the busiest shopping centres in London is in
... street.
11. The place where Monarch lives is called ...
12. The place of meetings and demonstrations in London
is called ...
13. In the middle of Trafalgar Square there is a ...
14. The museum which contains a great collection of
pictures of different schools is called ...
15. The largest park in London is ...
16. Old residents of the East End call themselves ...
V. Воспроизведите ситуации из текста, где были
употреблены следующие слова.
20 centuries old history, to be concentrated, a palace,
to include, to stretch, to be famous for, to take place, a
geographical centre, at the battle of, to be populated by,
to be called.
VI. Переведите предложения на английский язык.
1. Лондон — самый большой город в Европе. Он про-
стирается почти на 30 миль. 2. Вместе с окраинами и
пригородными районами город называется «Большой
Лондон». 3. «Сити» — это старейшая часть города.
Именно с этого места начал расти Лондон. 4. Во время
второй мировой войны «Сити» был сильно разрушен.
5. Трафальгарская площадь — это то место, где обычно
проводятся различные демонстрации. 6. Картинные га-
лереи Лондона — богатейшие в мире. 7. «Сохо» —
район города, где живут люди творческих профессий:
художники, писатели, артисты. 8. В Британском музее
содержится большое количество древних рукописей, мо-
нет, скульптур. 9. Лондон гордится своими прекрас-
ными мостами через Темзу. Из 15 мостов наиболее из-
вестны Лондонский мост, Тауэрский и Вестминстер-
ский.
373
VII. Прочитайте диалоги и скажите, что нового вы
узнали о Лондоне.
— Here we are in England. I’m glad the trip is over.
— How long are you planning to stay in London?
— Only three days. That’s why I’d like to make a trip
through the streets of London right now to get a general
impression of the city.
— Let me accompany you. I know the city well. And
the weather is so fine.
— Oh, that’s the first surprise of mine. We used to
think that there are fogs or rains in London nearly every
day of the year. But the weather is very good today. A
slight wind is blowing and the air is full of spring smells.
— We’ll see more of the city if we take a bus and begin
in the West End.
— Now we are moving along Oxford Street. You can
see numerous shops, banks, restaurants on both sides of
the street. The pavements are crowded with people. In the
roadway there is a constant stream of cars, taxis, buses.
It’s dangerous to cross the road until the traffic is
stopped.
— An unusual thing is that your drivers keep to the
left.
— Oh, yes. It’s very important. We have left-hand
traffic here. Remember this while crossing the street.
— And your buses differ greatly from our buses. They
are all red and double-decked. Are there also trolleybuses
and trams in London?
— Yes, in some parts of the city. — Don’t you find it’s
too noisy in the street?
— Oh, yes. The noise lasts till midnight. But people get
used to it very soon.
— Look right! Isn’t it the building of the Houses of
Parliament? I recognize it from the pictures.
— You are quite right. It is the Houses of Parliament,
the place where the Government has its seat. And can you
recognize Westminster Abbey?
— Unfortunately not.
— Here it is, on the left. I recommend you to come
here tomorrow and to see the Poets’ Corner.
— Sure I will. I’d like to visit the British Museum, the
National Gallery and Buckingham Palace to watch the
ceremony of the changing of the guard.
374
— But there’s bus stop just over there. We’ll ask the
conductor to put us down at Trafalgar Square and we'll
see the National Gallery.
— OK. And then we’ll spend the rest of the day in
some of the parks nearby.
— We are in Hyde Park, aren’t we?
— Yes, it’s the famous Hyde Park.
— It’s splended here! There are a lot of old trees, green
lawns and a few ponds. The ducks are swimming in the
pools. People in light spring clothes are walking around.
To my surprise they are walking not only along the paths
but also across the grass.
— Oh, people are allowed to do everything here. You
can sing, or dance, or cry, or preach and nobody will make
you a remark.
— I’ve heard a lot about the Speaker’s Corner.
— It’s a big open place where a man can stand on a
chair, or on a platform, or on the ground and speak every-
thing he likes. You can listen to him, ask questions or you
may pass him by without any reaction.
— By the way, are there any other parks in London?
— Quite a lot. Except Hyde Park there is Queen Park,
Kensington Gardens, St. James Park and others. People
call them «lungs of London».
— Really, it’s a wonderful place to spend time in.
VIII. Прочитайте текст и перескажите его содержа-
ние на родном языке.
People abroad often have very fixed ideas about the
British — they are cold, reserved, aristocratic, lazy, etc.
Many people believe that half Britain is always on strike,
and the other half wears a suit, a bowler hat and carries
an umbrella. But the British people are different from any
fixed idea you may have.
One thing British people share is a love of politeness. It
is important to be polite in Britain, even to people you do
not know. But their politeness is not always real.
English people are very tolerant, and you rarely see
anyone turning round when a funny-dressed person walks
through the streets. They are waiting patiently for buses,
for their turn to be served. But the British do not like
people who shout loudly in the street or push their way
375
through crowds with their elbows. People don’t put on
their best clothes on Sundays, but are relaxed and pleas-
antly untidy. And I like this.
IX. Переведите текст co словарем.
VISITING LONDON
London has a great deal to offer visitors. Whether your
tastes are modern or traditional, sofisticated or simple,
there’s plenty in London for you. Most visitors do some
shopping, and there is an enormous range of possibilities,
from the bargains of Pertticoat Lane to the jewellery and
furs of Bond Street. A simple walk along Oxford Street
will satisfy most ordinary needs or, if you want every-
thing from pins to pianos — under one roof, then Harrods
is the shop for you. You will probably want to mix your
shopping with a little sightseeing. You can visit the great
buildings, such as St. Paul’s and Westminster Abbey, or
you can watch the Changing of the Guard, or you can rest
your feet in one of the large central parks, and all free.
Not all the sightseeing is free, of course; you’ll have to
pay for jewels in the Tower, or for a boat trip along the
Thames. The British Museum and the Victoria and Albert
Museums have enormous collections of art from many dif-
ferent countries, and the National Gallery in Trafalgar
Square houses paintings by the old masters.
The more modern world can be seen in the Science Mu-
seum, the Planetarium and in the paintings and sculptures
of the Tate Gallery.
In the evening, when you have walked far enough for
one day, you can simply enjoy a drink in the atmosphere
of a London pub. But if you want organised entertain-
ment, you will always find a film, a concert or a play to in-
terest you among the hundreds that are put on every day.
Turning to the question of food it must be admitted
that the English have no great reputation as cooks but
visitors to London can taste food from all over the world;
from Mexican to Russian, from Scandinavian to Japanese.
In particular, there are hundreds of Indian, Pakistani,
Chinese and Italian restaurants, most of which serve good,
relatively cheap meals.
This brief survey should give you some idea of the
great variety of things to do in London. There is literally
something for everyone at almost any time during the day.
376
London is the first place on the list for a lot of visi-
tors, and the only place for some. But there are some
other cities and towns beyond London that are also very
popular with visitors to Britain, such as Bath, Cambridge,
Canterbury, Chester, Edinburgh, Exeter, Norwich, Ox-
ford, Stratford-upon-Avon, York.
The reason people know about them is that all of them
have lots to do and see and they all have beautiful build-
ings of some kind, e.g. castles, cathedrals (an important
kind of church, usually large) or university colleges. An-
other reason is that you can get lots of beautiful and in-
teresting places near these cities and towns.
There’s a third group of cities and towns to think
about — those you pass on your way to more famous
places. If your route goes through an industrial city, you
could stop to go shopping or perhaps to visit an excellent
museum (such as in Birmingham or Glasgow). You might
also enjoy exploring the market in market towns or walk-
ing round tiny villages.
UNIT 25
Conversational Topic ECOLOGICAL PROBLEMS
Since ancient times Nature has served Man, being the
source of his life. For thousands of years people lived in
harmony with environment and it seemed to them that
natural riches were unlimited. But with the development
of civilization man’s interference in nature began to in-
crease.
Large cities with thousands of smoky industrial enter-
prises have appeared all over the world today. The by-
products of their activity pollute the air we breathe, the
water we drink, the land we grow grain and vegetables.
Every year world industry pollutes the atmosphere with
about 1000 million tons of dust and harmful substances.
Many cities suffer from smog. Vast forests are cut and
burn in fire. Their disappearance upsets the oxygen bal-
ance. As a result some rare species of animals, birds, fish
and plants disappear forever, a number of rivers and lakes
dry up.
The pollution of air and the world’s ocean, destruction
of the ozone layer is the result of man’s careless interac-
tion with nature, a sign of ecological crises.
As a result of the Chernobyl tragedy the Belarusian
people faced the most horrible ecological disaster. About
18 per cent of the territory of Belarus was contaminated
with radioactive substances. A great damage has been
done to the republic’s agriculture, forests and people’s
health. The consequences of the atomic power station ex-
plosion are tragic for the Belarusian nation. Only a small
per centof Belarusian land remains uncontaminated. To-
day we have a great increase in children cancer and leu-
kaemia. New spots of radioactive contamination are being
discovered every year.
Not only Chernobyl but many of our “peaceful” facto-
ries and towns cause a great damage to the environment.
Dangerous dust and blow-outs of the enterprises are being
carried out by winds for long distances destroying the life
around.
People all over the world are worried about what is
happening to the environment. They understand that the
Earth is their common home, a big green home. The envi-
378
ronmental protection should be our universal concern. Se-
rious joint measures to create a system of ecological secu-
rity should be taken.
Some progress has been already made in this direction.
As many as 159 countries — members of the UNO - have
set up environmental protection agencies. Numerous con-
ferences have been held to discuss questions of ecologi-
cally poor regions including the Aral Sea, the South Urals,
Kuzbass, Donbass, Semipalatinsk and Chernobyl. An in-
ternational environmental research centre has been set up
on Lake Baikal. The international organization Greenpeace
is also doing much to preserve the environment.
But these are only the initial steps that must be carried
forward to protect nature, to save life on the planet not
only for the sake of the present but also for the future
generations.
Тематический словарь
nature, n природа dry up, v высыхать
source, n источник rare, а редкий
environment, n окружающая animal, n животное
среда destruction, n разрушение
interference, n вмешательство disaster, n несчастье, беда
interaction, n взаимодействие damage, n вред
increase, v возрастать consequence, n последствие
by-product, n побочный explosion, n взрыв
продукт protection, n защита, охрана
power-station, n электростанция concern, n забота
contaminate, v загрязнять security, n безопасность
cause damage причинять вред research centre научно-иссле-
pollute, v загрязнять довательский
breathe, v дышать центр
harmful, a вредный save, v спасать
careless, a небрежный measure, n мера
substance, n вещество to take mea- принимать
upset, v нарушать sures меры
oxygen, n кислород to take care (of) заботиться
prevent, v предотвращать
Упражнения
I. Ответьте на вопросы.
1. Is nature the source of people’s life?
2. For thousands of years people lived in harmony with
nature, didn’t they?
379
3. Has man’s interference in nature increased with the
development of civilization? What has it led to?
4. Why did some species of animals, birds, plants dis-
appear from the Earth?
5. What is the result of man’s careless interaction with
nature?
6. What do you know about the Chernobyl ecological
disaster?
7. What are the consequences of this tragedy?
8. Environmental protection is a universal concern of
everyone, isn’t it?
9. Has anything been done to solve ecological prob-
lems?
10. Is international cooperation necessary to create a
system of ecological security? Why do you think so?
II. Спросите своего друга:
— знает ли он что-либо об экологических проблемах
нашей республики;
— что является источником загрязнения окружаю-
щей среды;
— какие последствия небрежного вмешательства че-
ловека в природу можно наблюдать сейчас;
— что он знает об экологической обстановке в зоне
Чернобыльской аварии;
— какова экологическая обстановка в районе Араль-
ского моря (Белого моря, озера Байкал, Кузбасса, Дон-
басса);
— почему охрана окружающей среды является все-
общим делом;
— какие меры принимаются для предотвращения
экологической катастрофы.
III. Переведите предложения с русского языка на
английский.
1. Взаимодействие человека и природы неотделимо
от самой истории человечества. 2. Экологические изме-
нения — одна из важнейших проблем, с которой столк-
нулось человечество. 3. Загрязнение воды и воздуха яв-
ляется результатом небрежного отношения человека к
природе. 4. Планета Земля — наш общий дом, поэтому
охрана окружающей среды должна стать нашей общей
380
заботой. 5. Международное сообщество предпринимает
конкретные меры для охраны природы.
IV. Переведите текст и ответьте на вопросы, сле-
дующие за ним.
CONTROL OF POLLUTION IN GREAT BRITAIN
Government measures to control environmental pollu-
tion are long established, and are complimentary to the
planning system to conserve the country’s heritage.
The Control of Pollution Act 1974, which applies to
England, Scotland and Wales, sets out a wide range of
powers and duties for local authorities, including control
over wastes, air and water pollution and noise. It contains
important provisions on the release of information on en-
vironmental conditions to the public. The Act also in-
creases the penalties for a large number of pollution of-
fences. The provisions relating to noise and air pollution
are fully in force, as are a substantial number of those
relating to waste on land. Similar legislation applies in
Northern Ireland.
1. What are the government measures to control envi-
ronmental pollution in Great Britain?
2. Are there any similar measures taken in our coun-
try?
V. Прочитайте текст и озаглавьте его.
In the past wars left their scars only where they were
waged, and did not affect the atmosphere or the World
Ocean. The impact of nuclear weapons is global and will
affect land, air and sea environment. Nuclear explosions
on the ground will cause irreversible changes in the
chemical composition of the upper atmosphere. Life on the
Earth is impossible without ozone. This gas, concentrated
chiefly in the stratosphere (at an altitude of 10— 50
kilometres), creates an “ozone shield” which protects life
on the planet from the deadly impact of harsh ultraviolet
radiation from the Sun.
Observations of anamalous phenomena in the atmos-
phere and data on weather and climatic changes in the pe-
riod between 1958 and 1962, wheii the most powerful at-
mospheric nuclear tests were held, indicate that nuclear
381
conflict would bring about an ecological disaster and the
death of civilization on the Earth.
VI. Переведите текст co словарем и скажите, что
нового вы узнали о насущных проблемах экологии.
THE ACUTE PROBLEMS OF ECOLOGY
Our ancestors considered the Earth’s resources to be
boundless and endless. We have no right to blame our an-
cestors for their ecological ignorance: they fought to live.
Even in the 19th century when the word “ecology” was
born people continued to use nature as consumers, consi-
dering Man to be “lord and king” of nature and not the
child.
In the 20th century with the rapid growth of science
and technology human achievements in conquering nature
became so great that man’s economic activities began to
produce an increasingly negative effect on the biosphere.
People’s striving to reach an immediate objective, their
consumer attitude to nature in disregard of natural laws
break natural balance. According to the International
Union for the Protection of Nature 76 species of animals
and some hundred species of plants have disappeared from
the planet in the course of the last 60 years. 132 mammal
and 26 bird species face extinction not so much due to
hunting as due to the pollution of the biosphere.
The destruction of nature gradually led to the loss of
the most essential element of existence, a healthy biologi-
cal habitat. Environmental pollution increases the cases of
disease, raises the cost of medical services, reduces the
life-span of a man. By now the pollution and poisoning of
the soil, water and air have reached a critical level.
Environmental pollution has become a significant ob-
stacle to economic growth. The discharge of dust and gas
into the atmosphere returns to the Earth in the form of
"acid rain" and affects crop, the quality of forests, the
amount of fish. To this we can add the rise of chemicals,
radioactivity, noise and other types of pollution.
Economic, social, technological and biological processes
have become so interdependent that modern production
must be seen as a complex economic system. It is wrong to
see economy and ecology as diametrically opposed: such an
approach inevitably leads to one extreme or the other.
382
КЛЮЧИ К УПРАЖНЕНИЯМ
ФОНЕТИКА
С. 16.
a) like, fine, cosy, rose, late, name, open, ice, town,
make;
6) front, pencil, cut, went, did, fond, fresh, book, fog,
butter, switch, tram, best, cap, dress, tent;
в) or, ski, teeth, theme, form, car, see, do, fork, forty,
first, teacher, read, turn.
C. 22.
luck — lack, pull — pool, pan — pen, bad — bed,
man — men, bird — board, send — sand, seats — seeds,
live — leave, feel — fill.
C. 32.
[ei], [«], [а:], [a], [o], [a:], [аэ], [э], [i:], [e]; [a], [io], [i],
[ai], [i], [a], [aia], [i:], [ai], [i]; [j]; [ou], [о], [л], [э:], [и:];[л],
[u], [ju:].
C. 32.
our — hour, meat — meet, peace — piece, cent — sent,
knew — new, too — two, sea — see, there — their, whole —
hole, fool — full, be — bee, flower — flour, week —
weak.
C. 39.
2) s—[s] — see, keeps, vessel, list, space, scene,
register;
c—[s] — space, mice, fence, pencil, chance;
g—[g] — gate, girl, ago, guest, guide.
3) [k] — chemistry, technique, scheme, equipment,
kitchen, Kate, clever, economic, cow, box, cycle, car,
scan, except, succeed.
383
ГРАММАТИКА
Существительное
У пр. 11.
а) 1. Му friend’s son. 2. Му friend’s sons. 2. Му
friends’ son. 4. My friends’ sons. 5. Our teacher’s book.
6. Our teacher’s books. 7. Our teachers’ book. 8. Our
teachers’ books. 9. My sister’s friend. 10. My sister’s
friends. 11. My parent’s friend. 12. My parents’ friends.
13. This student’s dictionary. 14. This student’s dicti-
onaries. 15. These students’ dictionary. 16. These students’
dictionaries. 17. Felex’s family. 18. The doctor’s name.
6) to draw with a pen, to tell Dima, to give money to
the friends, to write a letter to the parents, to write about
the weather, the expression of the face, to cut with a
knife, to open the eyes, to defend the independence of the
country, to show the translation to the teacher, the exercise
done by the students, the dinner made by mother, to be
interested in art, to go to the park, to look at the picture.
Артикль
Упр. 2.
a) 1) the, the, the, —; 2) an, the; 3) a, —, the, the;
4) a, the, an; 5) —,—; 6) —,—; 7) the, the; 8) the; 9) the;
10) _, —, —; 11) 12) —; 13) —; 14) the;
6) 1) 2) the; 3) —; 4) a;
5) the; 6) the, —,—,—; 7) —,—,—,—,—; 8) a,—; 9) —;
10) the,—; 11) a, the; 12) the; 13) a.
Упр. 3.
1. Autumn is a rainy season in Belarus. 2. Water and
air are necessary for life. 3. In the evening I drink tea or
milk but not coffee. 4. The milk is too hot, don’t drink it.
5. He asked for a glass of water. 6. It’s a very simple
question. A pupil can answer it. 7. Show me the article
you have written. 8. The Ivanovs have gone to the South
this morning. 9. It’s a pity I can’t have dinner with you.
Прилагательное
Упр. 8.
1) the longest; 2) the coldest; 3) larger; 4) new; 5) more
beautiful; 6) the best; 7) the worst; 8) longer; 9) colder;
384
10) more difficult; 11) the highest; 12) stronger; 13) the
longest; 14) better.
Упр. 9.
1. The hottest days are in summer. 2. The most rainy
weather is in autumn. 3. The more I read the more I
know. 4. March is not so cold as February. 5. Mathematics
is the most difficult subject at school. 6. Vitebsk is
farther from Minsk than Orsha. 7. It is as cold today as it
was yesterday. 8. Better late than never. 9. This film is as
interesting as that one. 10. Ann is the best student in the
group. 11. This song is very popular now.
Местоимение
Упр. 2.
a) 1) somebody; 2) some, somewhere; 3) anything;
4) anybody; 5) anything, nothing; 6) nothing, anything;
7) nobody;
6) 1) many; 2) many; 3) much; 4) much, little; 5) many;
6) a little; 7) little; 8) much; 9) a few; 10) more; 11) less;
12) much; 13) many.
Упр. 3.
1) my, yours; 2) your, mine; 3) mine, them; 4) me; 5) I
(he, she ...), him (her, them, ...); 6) himself; 7) our;
8) themselves; 9) which; 10) some, any.
Упр. 4.
1. These pencils are mine, take them if you want.
2. Help us, please. 3. I know him and his brother. 4. We
often meet them here. 5. He always makes dinner himself.
6. We have much work to do today. 7. There are few
children in the skating-rink. 8. We have little brown
bread for supper. 9. Wait a little. I'll ask somebody to buy
some milk and bread. 10. Somebody rang you up today
and wanted to tell you something interesting. 11. Nobody
knows anything about it. 12. She didn’t answer anything
(answered nothing). 13. I saw nobody there.
385
Глагол
to be, to have
Упр. 10
a) 1. is, isn’t, 2) to be, am, 3. is, 4) are, am, 5. have,
have, 6. had, am, 7. shall/will have, am, 8) were, are, 9.
is, will be, 10. are, aren’t, am, 11. are, is
b) 1. has, is, 2) was, 3) is, 4) have, 5) is, 6) is/was,
7) was, 8) are, 9) had, 10) is, 11. is, 12) has, is, 13) is,
14) are, 15) is
there + be
Упр. 4
a) 1. It is, it is, 2. there was, there are, 3. It is, it is,
4. it is, 5. there are, 6. it is, there is, 7. there are,
8. there will be
b) 1. There is, 2. it is, 3. it is, 4. there is, 5. it is,
6. there is, 7. there is, 8. it’s, 9. there is, 10. it is,
11. there is, 12. there is, 13. it is, 14. there are, 15. it is,
16. it’s, 17. Is there, 18. It’s, 19. There is, 20. It’s,
21. There are, 22. It’s
Indefinite Tenses
Упр. 6
1. Does Den study..., doesn’t study, 2. do they buy,
they don’t buy, 3. does the teacher ask, the teacher
doesn’t ask, 4. Did he enter, he didn’t enter, 5. did your
friend see, he didn’t see, 6. did they get, they didn’t get.
7. will Nick work, Nick won’t work, 8. shall we make, we
shan’t make, 9. will her cousin go abroad, Her cousin will
not go abroad.
Упр. 10
1. look, 2. doesn’t, 3. close, 4. gets, switch, listen,
5. goes, doesn’t go, prefers, 6. Don’t you mind, depends,
concerns, don’t want, pass, 7. tells, spends, listens,
8. entered, left, 9. learned, 10. crossed, went, 11. come,
12. enter, 13. rains, 14. writes, 15. will you stop..., don’t
keep.
Continuous Tenses
Упр. 5
1. is speaking, 2. is playing, 3. is working, 4. am
watching, 5. were skiing, 6. were you discussing, 7. were
dancing, 8. shall be learning, 9. was washing up, 10. was
laying
386
Упр. 7
1. Не is leaving for England in two days. 2. I’m going
to the dentist on Monday. 3. We are having dinner at our
friends’ on Sunday. 4. The train is arriving at 12. 5.
Denis is getting married in August. 6. What are you
doing tomorrow evening? 7. When is Ann coming? 8. Are
you meeting her at the station? 9. Are you leaving
already? 10. I’m going to the theatre tomorrow. 11. You
aren’t working tonight, are you? 12. Are you coming to
our place on Saturday? — Sorry, but I’m playing,
football. Don’t you want to join us? 13. They are going to
Spain for the holidays. 14. Are you ready? The guests are
coming any minute. 15. They’ve bought a new flat and are
moving into it next week.
Perfect Tenses
Упр. 6
1. Have you seen, 2. Has he been, 3. Have you tasted,
4. have not done, 5. haven’t met, 6. had left, 7. had
already begun, 8. had visited, 9. will have come. 10. shall
have finished, 11. will have set, 12. haven’t seen,
13. Have you ever driven..., have driven, 14. have just
arrived, is, 15. had changed, will hare started
Perfect Continuous Tenses
Упр. 4
1) have been reading, read, 2) has been living, was,
3) had been skating, 4) have been lying, 5) will have been
learning, 6) have they been working, 7) has Ann been
translating, 8) has been raining, 9) have you been driving,
are been driving, 10) have been looking for, 11) had you
been saving, 12) had been travelling, 13) shall have been
watching, 14) had been working
Сравнительная характеристика
форм настоящего времени
Упр. 2
1) с 2) а 3) а 4) а
Упр. 3
1) а 2) с 3) с 4) в
Упр. 4
1) do not build, use 2) drinks, is drinking, 3) is
raining, haven’t got 4) is reading, 5) have never won
387
(win), 6) are having, are talking, 7) do you believe, don’t
believe, do you read, 8) do you hear, is blowing, 9) am
looking, don’t see, 10) borrows, remembers
Упр. 6
My father
Our teacher
He
It
works at a plant.
is working now. Don’t call him.
has been working here for many years.
speaks several foreign languages.
has been speaking on the telephone for
10 minutes already.
is speaking to the Headmaster now.
waits for me at the entrance door
(usually).
is waiting till I finish writing the letter,
has been waiting for me for about an
hour.
rains very often in autumn.
is raining today. Take an umbrella.
has been raining for 3 hours.
Упр. 7
1) opens, closes, 2) take place, 3) doesn’t grow, 4) don’t
est, 5) is boiling, 6) is not raining, is shining, 7) is
waiting, 8) do you believe, 9) don’t remember, 10) do you
see, 11) have just done, 12) have already had, 13) has
gone, 14) have drunk, 15) has driven, has never driven,
16) have you ever been, have never gone, 17) has been
raining, 18) have you been learning, have been learning,
19) is still looking for, has been looking for, 20) is still
watching, has been watching, 21) goes, has been going, is
going, 22) have you heard, haven’t seen, 23) get, 24) are,
25) doesn’t come, 26) make
Сравнительная характеристика форм
прошедшего времени
Упр. 2
1) б, 2) а, 3) а, 4) б
388
Упр. 3
1) was having, got out, went; 2) was travelling; 3) were
doing; 4) were playing, heard, hid, took; 5) didn’t allow,
was blowing; 6) heard, went, opened, didn’t recognize,
was wearing; 7) were sitting, were watching, was
knitting, were reading, smiled, said.
Упр. 4
1) had parked; 2) had been driving; 3) had finished;
4) had been doing; 5) had lived; 6) had written; 7) had
fulfilled; 8) hadn’t arrived; 9) had been sleeping.
Упр. 5
1) filled, went, 2) was looking for, found, 3) was
walking, opened, threw, 4) found, was digging, had
belonged, 5) flew, did you see, 6) left, cut, 7) had been
working, retired, went 8) didn’t you lend, was reading,
9) were, didn’t disturb, 10) hadn’t seen, 11) went, was,
had never been, 12) arrived, had gone, 13) was, got, had
gone, 14) had... worked, had been working, 15) had been
lying, 16) had known, 17) was waiting, had been waiting,
was, was, 18) woke, was sitting, had just turned, had been
watching, 19) had been waiting, realized, had arrived, was
hurrying.
Упр. 6
1. He entered the University last year. He entered the
University after he had worked at a plant.
2. He wrote the report yesterday. He had written the
report before going to the meeting.
3. He broke his leg when a child. He had broken his leg
and couldn’t take part in the competition.
4. He had arrived in Minsk by 2 o’clock. He arrived in
Minsk two hours ago.
Сравнительная характеристика форм
будущего времени
Упр. 2
1) в, 2) б, 3) а, 4) б
Упр. 3
1) shall call, will translate, 2) will do, shall be, 3) shall
be sitting, 4) shall go, 5) shall cut, 6) shall ask, 7) shall be
waiting, 8) shall make 9) will be putting, 10) will be, will
learn, 11) shall know
389
Упр. 4
1) shall have finished, 2) shall have saved, 3) shall have
been translating, 4) will have been working, 5) will have
been married, 6) shall have been living, 7) shall have lost,
8) will have left.
Упр. 5
1) I shall work in the library tomorrow. I shall be
working in the library from 2 till 3 o’clock tomorrow.
2) My friend will read the book in some days. My friend
will have read the book by the evening. 3) He will have
passed his exams by three o’clock tomorrow. He will pass
his exams next week. 4) You will listen to your favourite
music tomorrow. You will be listening to your favourite
music at 2 o’clock tomorrow.
Обзорные упражнения
Упр. 4
1) did you learn, taught, 2) was, went, fell, 3) has
broken, haven’t done, was, 4) did...write, 5) has written,
6) have lost, 7) lost, came, 8) got, 9) have improved,
10) was discovered, 11) did, has forgotten, 12) failed, has
passed, 13) did he arrive, arrived, 14) did you lock,
15) read, enjoyed, 16) haven’t seen, 17) hasn’t smo-
ked
Упр. 5
a) 1) does he do, plays, watches, 2) is raining, have
not, 3) leaves, 4) speaks, don’t understand, 5) is making,
makes, 6) wears, 7) don’t like, 8) am wearing, 9) is
reading, 10) am redecorating, 11) is boiling, 12) Are you
enjoying, am enjoying, want, 13) do you get, 14) go, am
going
6) 1) did you damage, ran, were driving, were going,
2) was getting, started, fell, 3) called, 4) heard, went,
opened, didn’t recognize, was wearing, 5) was crossing,
stepped, fell, was lying, saw, saw, stopped.
в) 1) have worked, 2) have heard, 3) have been
planting, 4) have been polishing, 5) has been teaching,
6) have taught, have never met,
г) 1) shall post, 2) will dance, 3) shall be sitting, won’t
be reading, will be looking, 4) will go up, 5) will change,
6) will come
390
Упр. 6
1) had lived, went, 2) has lost, 3) wrote, 4) have not
seen, 5) have closed, 6) have not finished,. 7) did, was,
8) went, 9) has ... come, 10) have ... been, spent, did ...
have, stopped, 11) has begun, 12) have ... had, had,
13) began, lasted, enjoyed.
Упр. 8
1) has ... come, has, did he come, came, 2) has a rest,
3) has been waiting, didn’t you come, 4) have you been
translating, have you translated, 5) had returned, 6) shall
be having, 7) had been studying, 8) studies, went, read,
learned, translated, 9) have you ever been, have, was, will
be, 10) will write, have 11) will have been working,
12) had you learnt, 13) met, studied, have known,
14) have decided, shall/will miss you, go.
Упр. 9
1) has been, likes, 2) asked, told, have been waiting,
hasn’t come, 3) will you do (are you doing), depends, is,
shall go, is, shall stay, 4) had, were negotiating, 5) will ...
say, won’t say, won’t lend, 6) have been, am going, will
let 7) had been waiting, was wearing, 8) haven’t seen,
have you been, returned, had you stayed, had lived, 9) had
got, knew, had been, working, haven’t seen, left,
10) opened, saw, was listening, wondered, had heard
asked, invited, turned, ran, was doing, have never seen,
11) have been standing, had already gone, 12) is slowly
sinking, are trying, have been working, have found, will
have sunk.
Упр. 10
1. The telephone is ringing. Will anybody answer?
2. Ann been ill all this week. She caught a cold when she
was on a business trip. 3. I fell asleep when I had seen all
the films on TV. 4. If you help me, I’ll finish this work
today. 5) If it doesn’t stop raining, we shan’t go for a
walk tomorrow. 6) I have never been to London. I’m going
to visit the capital of Great Britain next summer.
7) When the parents returned home, the child was
sleeping. 8. Excuse me, how do I get to the nearest
department store? 9) Where do they sell ready-made
clothes? 10) How much does this coat cost? 11. How’s
life? I haven’t seen you for ages. I’ve worked in England
391
for two years. 12. Happy holidays to you. — The same to
you. When are you going to come back to Minsk? I’ll be in
Minsk at the end of August.
Модальные глаголы
Упр. 3
1) Could (can), 2) shall not be able, 3) could, 4) could;
5) can, 6) can, could, 7) could, couldn’t, 8) could’t,
9) shall be able, 10) could (can), 11) can, 12) could,
13) was able to, 13) shall not be able to, 14) can
Упр. 4
10 needn’t; 2) had to, 3) must, 4) had to, 5) must,
6) must, have to, 7) mustn’t, 8) needn’t, 9) needn’t
Упр. 6
1) must (may), 2) mustn’t, 3) could (can), 4) mustn’t,
5) mustn’t, 6) may, 7) must, 8) may, may, 9) may, may
not, 10) may, 11) cannot
Упр. 7
1) can, cannot, 2) was able to, 3) could, 4) will be able
to, 5) needn’t, 6) mustn’t, 7) had to, 8) was to, 9) should,
10) should, 11) must, 12) must
Упр. 8
1. Can you help me now? — Sorry, I can’t. I must go
home, I’ll have to stay with my sister’s son at home She
had to go on business trip yesterday. I’ll be able to help
you tomorrow if you can wait. When are you to be at
home? I promised to come home at seven in the evening.
How often do you have to take care of your nephew? —
When I can, I’m always ready to help my sister because
she has to bring up her son alone. May I come to your
place tonight? — Certainly, you may.
Страдательный залог
Упр. 5
1) б, 2) б, 3) а, 4) а
Упр. 6
1. The books must be returned to the library. 2. The
exercise can be done without any difficulty. 3. His parents
should be taken care of. 4. The work must be done in
time. 5. The translation shouldn’t have been done in
392
writing. 6. The dinner must be ready at 2. 7. The letter
must be rewritten again. 8. This poem will have to be
learnt by heart. 9. The exams are be taken in autumn.
Обзорные упражнения
Упр. 1
a) 1. will be built, 2) was painted, 3) is written, 4) is
produced, 5) am searched; 6) have been published, 7) will
be cut off, 8) was broken 9) is switched, 10) was invented
11) is being translated
b) 1. have been signed (will be signed), 2) will be
translated, 3) is being constructed (has been constructed),
4) will have been built (had been bilt), 5) are exported, 6)
Hasn’t ...been translated, had translated
Упр. 4
1) is known, has never been played, 2) was being
shown, had not been told, 3) is not being played, 4) were
working, 5) had been introduced, were dancing, were
singing, 6) was told, will be examined, 7) had discussed,
8) was raining, were broken; 9) will have been repaired,
10) is taught; 11) was given, is called, calls, 12) was
introduced, shall not recognize, 13) have not seen
Согласование времен
Упр. 2
1) б 2) б 3) б 4) в
Упр. 4
1) that she is ill, 2) were fond of music, 3) he would
help, 4) would enter, 5) you studied at the Linguistic
college, 6) were 18 years old 7) it would be difficult to
keep my promise, 8) we would be travelling along the
Caucasian mountains during our holidays.
Упр. 5
1) I was sure that he would be glad to see you. 2) I
knew that they had received our letter. 3) We thought
that they had gone to the South, 4) She understood that
she had not been right, 5) I hoped that the weather would
change. 6) She told that she wanted to visit the
Hermitage, 7) They promised that they would take part in
that experiment. 8) We hoped that we would come to the
station just in time.
393
Наклонение
Упр. 5
1) в, 2) в, 36, 4) б
Упр. 6
1) в, 2) б, 3) а, 4) а
Упр. 7
1) в, 2) б, 3) б 4) б
Упр. 8
а) 1) had brought, 2) shouldn’t come, 3) hadn’t
written, 4) had, 5) should have, 6) were, 7) drove,
8) would answer, 9) passed, 10) pressed, 11) had known,
12) wouldn’t come, 13) were, 14) had worked, 15) should
have stayed, 16) might have understood
6) 1. should take, 2) should revise, 3) should sign, 4)
shouldn’t sit up, 5) should pass, 6) should do, 7) shouldn’t miss
в) 1. could, 2) came, 3) met, 4) had spent, 5) could
have helped, 6) would be, 7) had known
Герундий
Упр. 3
1) of, 2) for, without, 3) on, 4) of, 5) to, 6) in, 7) -, 8)-
Упр. 4
1) speaking. 2) congratulating, 3) talking, 4) being
frightened, 5) climbing, 6) knowing, 7) being
Упр. 5
1) doing it, 2) discussing this question now, 3) visiting
the exhibition, 4) seeing, 5) reminding him about it,
6) crying, 7) their telling us about it, 8) preparing for the
report, 9) persuading him.
Упр. 6
1) Seeing the clown the audience burst out laughing.
2) The boy didn’t deny his loosing the book. 3) The
teacher insisted on the new words being written down.
4) This book is worth reading. 5) I don’t approve your
missing lessons. 6) I’m tired of being treated like a child.
7) I don’t feel like going for a walk now. 8) I’m ashamed
of having made so many mistakes in my last translation.
Обзорные упражнения
Упр. 1
a) 1. being, 2. having lived, 3. knowing, 4. lying,
5. published
394
б) 1. being late, 2. spending, gathering, 3. seeing,
4) discussing, going, arguing, 5. feeling, living
в) 1. to read, 2. to graduate, become, 3. to pass, to
work, to keep, to go
г) 1. to see, 2. waiting, 3. seeing, 4. to lock, going,
5. not to speak, 6. to explain, to listen, 7. showing, 8. to
understand, 9. playing, doing, 10. going, saying,
11. writing, waiting, 12. to give up smoking, 13. to drive,
to be driven, 14. to start looking, 15) discussing, reaching,
16. spending, reaching, 16. spending, earning, 17. to eat.
Упр. 2
1. to lend, to take, 2. to open, 3. to avoid being, to be,
waiting, 4. to get up, 5) ringing, to be coming, to open,
6. to go, to give, 7. to drive, 8. to sit, to hear, blowing,
9. writing, to do, to go, and see, 10. to come, standing
Наречие
Упр. 2.
1) happy, happily; 2) coldly, cold; 3) perfect, perfectly;
4) helpless, helplessly; 5) exact, exactly; 6) late, lately.
Упр. 3.
1) often get; 2) there tomorrow; 3) ever been; 4) never
been; 5) just returned; 6) this film yet; 7) usually gets up;
8) always cooks; 9) is always; 10) enough money; 11) well
enough.
Упр. 4.
1. She reads much. 2. Did you go anywhere yesterday? —
No, we didn’t go anywhere (went nowhere), we were at
home yesterday. 3. I met him somewhere but I don’t
remember where it was. 4. We think that he is clever
enough to understand us. 5. I shall never forget my school
years. 6. The more you read the sooner you enrich your
vocabulary. 7. Sooner or later his dream will come true,
but the sooner the better for him. 8. He works hard at all
subjects at school. 9. The plane was flying so high that I
could hardly see it. 10. Speak louder, I don’t hear
anything (hear nothing).
Предлог
Упр. 6.
1) with; 2) by; 3) with; 4) with, by; 5) with; 6) with;
7) with; 8) with; 9) with;
395
Упр. 7.
1) up, up; 2) on, to; 3) to, of; 4) on, to; 5) of; 6) with;
7) at, in; 8) off; 9) to; 10) on.
Упр. 8.
of, with, in, on, of, from, in, in, in, in, on, on, by, to,
in, during, in, of, of, —.
Упр. 9.
to the South, in the South, to school, to the University,
to the cinema, to the shop, at school, at the University, at
the cinema, at the shop, about the novel, about the writer,
about the actress, about the picture; the books of the
writer, the pictures of the artist, the streets of the town,
the population of the republic, on the 21st of August
1991, on the first of January 1990.
Упр. 10.
1. My mother lives in the country but in winter she
comes to our place and usually stays with us for a week or
two. 2. On my way from the University I must buy tickets
to the cinema. I also want to drop in the shop and to buy
something for supper. 3. We have a nice two-room flat in
the centre of the town. It is on the first floor in a new
house. 4. The University is not far from our house.
5. There is no place between the sofa and the book-case.
6. There are no doctors among my friends. 7. My grand-
father is sitting in the armchair in front of the TV set.
8. To my mind, your flat is too small for your family.
Союз
Упр. 3.
1) who; 2) when; 3) whom; 4) who; 5) that; 6) that;
7) where; 8) that.
Упр. 5.
1) both ... and; 2) both ... and; 3) neither ... nor;
4) either ... or; 5) either ... or; 6) either ... or; 7) both ...
and; 8) both ... and; 9) either ... or; 10) neither ... nor.
Таблица нестандартных глаголов
Неопределенная форма (The Infinitive) Прошедшее время (Past Indefinite) Причастие прошедшего времени (Participle II) Основное (значение
be [bi:] was, were [woiz]/[wai] been [bi:n] быть
become [Ы'клт] became [bi'keim] become [bi'kam] становиться
begin [bi'gin] began [bi'gin] begun [bi длп] начинать
break [breik] broke [brouk] broken [broukn] (с)ломать
bring [brig] brought [brat] brought [brat] приносить
build [bild] built [bilt] built [bilt] строить
burn [ban] burnt [bant] burnt [bant] жечь
buy [bai] bought [bait] bought [bat] покупать
catch [kxtj] caught [kat] caught [kat] ловить
choose [tjuiz] chose [tjouz] chosen ['tfouzn] выбирать
come [клт] came [keim] come [клт] приходить
cost [kost] cost [kast] cost [kast] стоить
cut [kAt] cut [kAt] cut [kAt] резать
do [du] did [did] done [dAn] делать
draw [dro] drew [drUl] drawn [dran] рисовать
dream [dn m] dreamt [dremt] dreamed [drumd] dreamt [dremt] dreamed [dn md] мечтать
drink [drigk] drank [draigk] drunk [dragk] пить
drive [draiv] drove [drouv] driven ['driivn] ехать
eat [it] ate [et] eaten [’i:tn] кушать, есть
fall [fal] fell [fel] fallen ['fal(a)n] падать
feel [fid] felt [felt] felt [felt] чувствовать
fight [fait] fought [fat] fought [fa.t] сражаться
find [faind] found [faund] found [faund] находить
fly [flai] flew [flu:] flown [floun] летать
forget [fa'get] forgot [fa'gat] forgottenffa'gatn] забывать
forgive [fa'giv] forgave [fa'geiv] forgiven [fa'givn] прощать
freeze [friz] froze [frouz] frozen ['frouzn] замораживать
get [get] got [gat] got [gat] получать
give [giv] gave [geiv] given ['givn] давать
go [gou] went [went] gone [дэп] идти
grow [grou] grew [gru:] grown [groun] расти
hang [haig] hung [Ьлд] hanged [haigd] hung [Ьлд] hanged [haigd]] висеть, вешать
397
Неопределенная форма (The Infinitive) Прошедшее время (Past Indefinite) Причастие прошедшего времени (Participle II) Основное значение
have [hxv] had [hard] had [hard] иметь
hear [hia] heard [had] heard [had] слышать
hide [haid] hid [hid] hidden fhidn] прятать(ся)
hold [hould] held [held] held [held] держать
hurt [hat] hurt [hat] hurt [hat] причинять
боль
keep [ki:p] kept [kept] kept [kept] хранить
know [nou] knew [nju:] known [noun] знать
lay [lei] laid [leid] laid [leid] класть, поло-
жить
lead [li:d] led [led] led [led] вести
learn [lan] learnt [lant] learnt [lant] учить
learned [land] learned [land]
leave [li:v] left [left] left [left] оставлять
lend [lend] lent [lent] lent [lent] одолжать
let [let] let [let] let [let] позволять
lie [lai] lay [lei] lain [lein] лежать
lose [1U.Z] lost [lost] lost [lost] терять
make [meik] made [meid] made [meid] делать
mean [mi:n] meant [ment] meant [ment] подразумевать
meet [mi:t] met [met] met [met] встречать
pay [pei] paid [peid] paid [peid] платить
put [put] put [put] put [put] класть
read [ri:d] read [red] read [red] читать
ring [rig] rang [rarg] rung [глд] звонить
rise [raiz] rose [rouz] risen ['rizn] подниматься
run [ГЛП] ran [ram] run [глп] бежать, течь
say [sei] said [sed] said [sed] говорить.
сказать
see [si:] saw [so:] seen [si:n] видеть
sell [sei] sold [sould] sold [sould] продавать
send [send] sent [sent] sent [sent] посылать
set [set] set [set] set [set] садиться
(о солнце)
sew [sou] sewed [soud] sewed [soud] шить
sewn [soun]
shake [Jeik] shook [Juk] shaken ['Jeik(a)n] трясти
Неопределенная форма (The Infinitive) Прошедшее время (Past Indefinite) Причастие прошедшего времени (Participle II) Основное значение
shave [Jeiv] shaved [Jeivd] shavd [Jeivd] shaven ['Jeivn] брить(ся)
shine [Jain] shone [Jan] shone [Jan] светить
shoot [Ju:t] shot [Jot] shot [Jot] стрелять
show [Jeu] showed [Joud] shown [Joun] показывать
shut [Jat] shut [JAt] shut [JAt] закрывать
sing [sig] sang [sxg] sung [sag] петь
sit [sit] sat [sxt] sat [sat] сидеть
sleep [sli:p] slept [slept] slept [slept] спать
speak [spi:k] spoke [spouk] spoken [ spouk(an)] говорить
spend [spend] spent [spent] spent [spent] тратить
spread [spred] spi ead [spred] spread [spred] распростра- няться
stand [stamd] stood [stud] stood [stud] стоять
steal [stil] stole [stoul] stolen ['stoul(a)n] воровать
sweep [swi:p] swept [swept] swept [swept] мести
swim [swim] swam [swim] swum [swam] плавать
take [teik] took [tuk] taken ['teik(a)n] брать
teach [ti:tj] taught [tat] taught [tat] учить к.-л.
tell [tel] told [tould] told [tould] рассказывать
think [Oigk] thought [Bat] thought [Bat] думать
throw [Brou] threw [Bru:] thrown [Broun] бросать
understand understood understood понимать
[Anda'stamd] [andsstud] [Ands'stud]
wake [weik] woke [wouk] waked [weikt] woken ['wouk(a)n] waked [weikt] просыпаться
wear [web] wore [wa] warn [worn] носить (одежду)
win [win] won [WAn] won [wan] выигрывать
write [rait] wrote [rout] 1 written ['ritn] писать
398
ПРИЛОЖЕНИЕ 1
TEXTS FOR LISTENING
AND COMPREHENSION
1. CAN YOU MAKE YOURSELF UNDERSTOOD?
Some months ago Mr. X. went to England on a busi-
ness trip. When he returned he told me the following
story.
When I came to England I was very nervous, as I
wasn’t sure that I would be able to make English people
understand me. I put up at a hotel and understood the
reception clerk when he asked me to fill in an arrival
form. Then I asked the porter to take my luggage up to
my room. So far I made myself understood quite well.
When I came up to my room I said to the maid: “I want
to brush my shoes and coat and to press my shirt”. I
couldn’t understand why my words made her smile. A few
minutes later she brought me several brushes and said:
“I’ll bring in the iron some minutes later”. I said: “I didn’t
want to brush my coat and shoes and to press the shirt
myself”. I wanted her to make my things clean but I
didn’t know how to make it clear. I got tired and angry
trying to get her to understand what I meant. Finally the
maid said: “I suppose you want to have your shoes and
coat brushed and your shirt pressed.” “Yes”, said I, “that’s
just what I wanted you to do”.
I was glad I didn’t say “I want to wash my hand-
kerchiefs”. If I did, she could bring a wash-tub into my
room.
2. THE BLIND MAN AND THE GREAT ARTIST
Every day in one of the streets of Vienna you could see
a blind man playing the violin. His dog sat near him with
a cap in his mouth. People, who were passing them,
dropped coins into the cap.
One day, when the weather was very cold, the man was
playing for a long time, but nobody wanted to give him
anything. The poor man thought that he would have to go
to bed without supper. He was so tired and so weak that
he stopped playing. At that moment a young man came up
to him and asked him why he stopped playing. The blind
man said he had played for two hours but nobody had
400
given him anything. “Give me your violin. I shall help
you”, said the man. And with these words he began to
play. He played so well that people began to gather and
soon there was a big crowd. Everybody was eager to listen
to the fine music and to thank the young man for the
pleasure.
Soon the cap was full of money.
“I don’t know how to thank you”, said the blind man.
“Who are you?”
“I am Paganini”, was the answer.
3. A STRANGE PICTURE
A rich American went to Paris and bought a very
strange picture painted by a fashionable modern artist.
The American thought the picture was very fine because
he had paid a lot of money for it. But when he came to his
hotel and wanted to hang the picture up on the wall, he
could not tell which was the top and which the bottom of
the picture. The American turned the picture this way and
that, but still could not decide which was the top and
which was the bottom.
So he thought of a plan. He hung the painting in the
dining-room and invited the artist to dinner. When the
artist came, the American said nothing to him about the
picture.
When the artist began to eat his soup, he looked at the
picture many times. When he began to eat his fish, he put
on his glasses and looked at the picture again. Before he
began to eat his fruit, he got up and walked over to the
picture to look at it more closely. At last when they began
to drink their coffee, he understood that the picture was
upside down.
“Why, my friend”, he said, “my picture is hung upside
down”.
“Oh, is it?” said the American. “Why didn’t you tell me
so at once?”
“Well, you see, I was not sure myself at first”, said the
artist.
4. A SLAVE
Murillo was a great painter in Spain. He painted beau-
tiful pictures and he had many students.
14 Зак. 2112
401
Once he came to his studio and found a very beautiful
picture there. He asked his students who had painted that
picture but nobody answered. Then he asked his slave
Sebastian if he had seen somebody in the studio the night
before. The slave did not answer. When the night came
and everybody went away Sebastian began to paint. He did
not think of the time. Suddenly he heard a noise behind
him. When he turned round he saw Murillo and his
students watch him quietly.
“Sebastian”, cried Murillo, “you are a very good
painter. How did you learn to paint?”
“You gave lessons to your students, and I heard them”,
answered the slave. Murillo understood that the slave was
a very gifted painter, so he gave him freedom and be-
gan to work with his “slave” who was not a slave any
longer.
5. A LACONIC ANSWER
There was a time when the people of Greece were not
united but instead there were several states each of which
had its own ruler.
Some of the people in the southern part of the country
were called Spartans and they were famous for their
simple habits and their bravery.
The name of their land was Laconia, so they were
sometimes called Lacons.
One of the strange rules which the Spartans had was
that they should speak briefly and never use more words
than were needed.
A short answer is often called laconic that is such an
answer as a Lacon would give.
There was in the Northern part of Greece a land called
Macedonia. This land was at one time ruled by a king
named Philip. Philip of Macedonia wanted to become
master of all Greece. So he raised a great army and made
war upon the other states, until nearly all of them were
forced to call him their king. Then he sent a letter to the
Spartans in Laconia and said: “If I go down into your
country, I will level your great city to the ground.”
In a few days an answer was brought back to him.
When he opened the letter he found only one word written
there.
That word was “If”.
402
в. THE KING AND THE CRITIC
There was a king who thought that he could paint very
well. His pictures were bad, but the people to whom he
showed them were afraid of the king. They all said that
they liked his pictures very much.
One day the king showed his pictures to a great painter
who lived in his country and asked:
“I want to know what you think of my pictures. Do you
like them? Am I a good painter or not?”
The painter looked at the king’s pictures and said:
“My king, I think that your pictures are bad, and that
you will never be a good painter.”
The king got very angry and sent the painter to prison.
After two years the king wanted to see the painter
again.
“I was angry with you», he said, «because you did not
like my pictures. Now forget all about it. You are a free
man again and I am your friend.”
For many hours the king talked with the painter, and
even asked him to dine. After dinner the king showed his
pictures to the painter and asked: “Well, how do you like
them now?”
The painter did not answer anything. He turned to the
soldier who was standing near him and said:
“Take me back to prison.”
7. A BROKEN VASE
The young man was going to marry a beautiful girl.
One day the girl said to him that the next day she would
celebrate her birthday and invited him to her birthday
party. The young man was eager to make her a present, so
he went to a gift shop. There he saw many beautiful
things. Of all the things he particulaly liked the vases.
But they were very expensive, and as he had very little
money he had to leave the shop without buying anything.
Walking to the door he suddenly heard a noise: one of the
vases fell on the floor and broke to pieces. A brilliant idea
came to his mind. He came up to the counter and asked
the salesman to wrap up the broken vase he wanted to
buy. The salesman got a little surprised but did what the
young man had asked him to do.
The young man took the parcel and went straight to
the girl’s place. By the time he entered the room the
403
guests had already gathered. Everybody was enjoying the
party. Some of the people were dancing, others were
talking, joking and laughing. Saying “Many happy returns
of the day”, the young man told the girl that he had
bought a Small present for her. With these words he began
to unwrap the parcel. Suddenly he got pale and said. “I am
afraid, I have broken it. There were so many people in the
bus...” But when he unwrapped the parcel, he saw that the
salesman had wrapped up each piece of the vase
separately.
8. A FUNNY STORY
Once a man went to a shop and bought a pair of
trousers. When he came home, he put the trousers on.
Then he saw that they were too long for him.
So he went to his wife and said:
“Please make my trousers shorter, they are too long for
me, I cannot put them on.”
But the wife said: “I have no time now. I must wash
the plates. It is late now, I shall do it tomorrow.”
The man went to his daughter and asked her:
“Can you make my trousers shorter? I cannot put them
on.”
“No, I cannot,” said the daughter. “I must do my les-
sons now. i shall do it tomorrow”.
The man went to his sister, but she could not help him.
She said: “I must make my dress now. I shall do it
tomorrow”.
So the man went to bed and left his new trousers on a
chair near his bed.
His wife washed all the plates, came into the room,
took the trousers, made them shorter and put them back
on the chair. When his daughter did her lessons, she came
into his room, took the trousers and made them shorter.
Late in the evening his sister came too and made the
trousers shorter.
The man got up at 7 o’clock in the morning. His wife
told him, “I have made your trousers shorter; you can put
them on”. But when the man put them on, he saw
that they were too short for him and he could not wear
them.
404
9. TEA-LEAVES
There was a time when drinking tea was almost
unknown in European countries; many people had never
even heard of tea. This anecdote is about an old woman
and her son, who lived before tea-drinking became popular
in England.
He was a sea captain, and every time he returned from
a far-away country, he brought his mother a gift. He tried
to bring something unusual, that she could show to her
friends.
Once the young man came back from India with a box
of tea for his mother. She didn’t know anything about tea,
but she was proud of her son, and she invited all her
friends to come and try what he had brought her. When
her son came into the room, he saw cakes and fruit and
jam on the table, and a big plate full of brown tea-leaves.
His mother and her friends were sitting round the table,
eating the leaves with butter and salt. Though they all
smiled, it was clear that they didn’t enjoy eating the
leaves.
“Where is the tea, Mother?” the captain asked.
His mother showed him the plate in the middle of the
table.
“We are having tea for lunch”, she said.
“No, no, those are only the tea-leaves”, said the cap-
tain. “Where is the water?”
“The water!” his mother said. “I threw the water away,
of course!”
10. ECONOMY WASTED TRIP
An Englishman who was in France wanted to go back
to England by sea. But he had very little money. He had
so little money that he could pay only for the ticket. As
he knew that the trip would last only two days, he decided
not to eat during these days.
As he took a ticket and got on the ship the next
morning he tried not to hear the bell for breakfast. When
dinner time came, he was very hungry; but he didn’t go to
the dining-room. In the evening he was still more hungry,
but when the waiter came to invite him to have supper,
the Englishman said that he was ill.
The next day the Englishman was half-dead and
couldn’t stand the hunger any longer. “I shall go and eat
405
even if they kick me out into the sea”, said he to himself.
So he went to the ship dining-room and had his dinner. In
the evening he had supper but was very much afraid of
his future because he didn’t pay for the meals. At last he
addressed the waiter and said: “Bring me the bill, please”. —
“What bill?” asked the waiter. — “For the supper and
dinner I had in your dining-room”. — “Don’t trouble, Sir.
You paid for your meals when you bought the ticket”.
11. A GOOD LESSON
One day a well-known singer was invited to the house
of a rich lady to sing to her guests at a dinner-party. But
instead of inviting the singer to dine with her guests, the
lady ordered dinner for him in the servants’ room. The
singer said nothing. He dined well and after dinner said to
the servants: “Now, my good friends, I am going to sing
to you”.
The servants were very much surprised but said they
were awfully glad to have a chance to hear the great
singer. He sang a good many beautiful songs and the
servants enjoyed listening to him.
Later the lady sent one of her servants to bring the
singer up to the drawing-room, where all her guests were
waiting for him.
“But I cannot sing twice in one evening, Madam”, said
the singer to the lady when she met him at the door
leading into the drawing-room.
“What do you mean?” asked the lady.
“I mean I have already sung for about an hour to your
servants, Madam”, answered the singer, “it was a pity you
were not there, for I always sing to the people with whom
I dine”. And with these words he left the house.
12. A HOT SUMMER WEEK-END
It was a week-end in summer and all the down trains
were overcrowded. An old man was walking along the
platform, looking for a vacant seat. Suddenly he saw one
in a non-smoker. The old man got in. A small bag was
lying on the seat and a well-dressed gentleman was sitting
beside it.
“Is this seat vacant?” asked the old man.
“No, it is occupied by a man who has gone to buy a
newspaper. He will soon come”.
406
“Well”, said the old man, “I’ll sit here until your man
comes back”. Ten minutes passed.
“There is only one minute left before the train starts.
Your man will miss the train if he doesn’t hurry”, said
the old man.
The train started.
“Your man has missed the train”, said the old man,
“but let him not lose his bag”.
With these words he took the bag and was about to
throw it out of the window.
The well-dressed gentleman jumped up and cried out:
“Don’t! It’s my bag”.
13. A FUNNY STORY
A nervous man, who lived in one of suburbs of a big
town in England, was walking home from the railway
station. The road was dark and lonely. Suddenly he heard
footsteps approaching him from behind and thought he
was being followed. He walked quickly. The footsteps
continued to follow. The man started running. The
footsteps still followed him. The man jumped over a wall
and, running into an old cemetery, threw himself on the
grass near one of the graves.
“If he comes here”, he thought, “there will be no doubt
he wants to rob me”.
The man behind was following. He also got over the
wall and came up to the grave. The nervous man stood up
and asked:
“What do you want? Why are you following me?”
“I say”, answered the other man, “do you always go
home like this? Or are you having some special sort of
jumping, exercises tonight? I am going to Mr. Ro-
bertson’s and the man I at the railway station told me to
follow you, as you lived next door. Excuse my asking you,
but will you have some more gymnastics or will you go
straight home?”
14. A SAD STORY
Three men were spending their holiday in New York.
They were living in a hotel which had forty-five floors and
their room was on the last floor.
Returning to the hotel late one night, they were told by
the lift man: “I am very sorry, but the lifts in our hotel
407
aren’t running. They stop working at twelve o’clock. You
must walk up to your room”.
“We are still young”, one of the men said. “I suppose
we, can climb up to the forty-fifth floor”. So the men took
off their coats and put them in the coat-room. As they
were walking past the tenth floor one of the men said: “I
am becoming a little tired. I have an idea how to make the
climb easier. I shall tell happy or funny stories the next
five floors: then Bill will sing songs the next fifteen
floors, and Tom will tell sad stories the last fifteen
floors”.
They continued climbing, and soon all of them were
feeling very tired. But they did not want to show to each
other that they were tired, so the first man told happy
stories, and jokes and the second sang happy songs. When
they arrived at the thirtieth floor, the first man said:
“Now, Tom, you can begin telling sad stories”.
“Yes”, Tom said, “I must tell you a very sad story. The
key to our room is lying in my coat pocket, in the coat-
room!”
15. A FISH BONE
One day, some Americans were having dinner at a hotel
in London. When the fish was put on the table, a young
man said: “Let’s examine the fish carefully. Perhaps we’ll
find a diamond in it”. Everybody began to laugh, but an
old man said quietly: “Yes, I’m sure we have all heard
such stories. Let me tell you what happened to me once”.
“When I was a young man”, he began, “I worked for a
big company in New York: and I was sent to England to
do some work there. I was in love with a beautiful girl,
and before I left for England, we decided that we would be
married when I returned home.”
I stayed in England for two months. I sent letters or
postcards to the girl almost every day, but after the first
two weeks I didn’t receive any answers. But I didn’t think
anything was the matter, and before I left for home, I
bought a beautiful diamond ring for her.
On the ship one morning, a telegram was brought to
me. It was from a friend in New York, who told me that
the girl had changed her mind and was going to be
married to another man. I was so angry that I threw the
diamond ring into the sea.
408
My friend came to the port to meet me, and he invited
me to dinner. When we were sitting down at the table and
I was eating fish, I suddenly felt something hard in my
mouth. What do you think it was?
“The diamond!” all the Americans cried.
“No”, the old man answered. “It was a fish bone”.
16. ABOUT CONAN DOYLE
There is probably no one among book-lovers who has
not heard of Sherlock Holmes, the skilful and clever
detective in the stories by Arthur Conan Doyle. Sherlock
Holmes’s method of analysing the most difficult problems
was to notice the smallest facts, even if they seemed
unimportant. His method never failed; the criminal
always had to give up, and to become the prisoner of the
great detective.
Conan Doyle once arrived in Paris, after spending a
month in the south of France. There was a long row of
cabs outside the gate of the railway station. Conan Doyle
got into the first cab and ordered the driver to take him
to a good hotel. The driver was silent all the way to the
hotel, but when Conan Doyle paid him, he said, “Thank
you, Sir Arthur Conan Doyle”.
“How do you know who I am?” Conan Doyle asked in
the greatest surprise.
“I have never seen you before”, the man answered, “so I
can’t pretend that I recognized you. But I read in the
newspapers that you were expected in Paris after your
vacation in the south of France. The train you arrived on
came from the south of France. I could tell from your
clothes, especially your hat, and also from the strange
way you pronounce French words that you were English.
These facts helped me to guess that you were probably Sir
Arthur Conan Doyle”.
“Fine work! Wonderful!” Conan Doyle cried. “You
analysed the facts quite correctly. It’s a pity you aren’t a
detective!”
“Of course”, the driver added, “your name is on both your
travelling bags. I can’t pretend that that fact didn’t help”.
17. HIS FIRST MONEY
Somebody once asked Mark Twain whether he could
remember the first money he ever earned.
409
“I remember quite well”, the famous writer answered.
“It happened at school. Schoolboys in those days had very
little respect for their teachers and even less for their
desks. The boys used pens and pencils and even knives to
draw stars and faces, or to write their names on their
desks. At last, the school principal said: «The next time
anybody does such a thing, he will have to pay five
dollars, or he will receive a beating in front of the whole
school”.
“Soon after that, I had to go to my father and ask him
to give me five dollars. I was honest enough to explain
that I could agree to receive a beating instead, but he
said: “No, I can’t allow you to connect our name with such
things. So I’ll pay the five dollars. But you must suffer
for what you have done. I'll give you the beating here, at
home”.
“So he beat me, and then gave me the five dollars to
take to school. But I decided that the beating didn’t hurt
so much, and another beating at school wouldn’t be worse.
So I told them to give me a beating in front of the whole
school, and I kept the five dollars. And that was the first
money I ever earned”.
18. ONE MORE FUNNY STORY
One of Mark Twain’s hobbies was fishing. He went
fishing whenever he had a chance, even in the closed
season, when fishing was not allowed anywhere in lakes
and rivers. Like all fishermen, he sometimes invented
stories about the number of fish he caught.
One hot day during the closed season, Mark Twain was
fishing as usual, under a low bridge. A man who was
walking across the bridge happened to notice Mark Twain
and began to watch him. At last he asked: “Have you
caught many fish?”
“Not yet”, Mark Twain answered. “I have only just
begun. But yesterday I caught thirty great big fish here”.
“You were very lucky”, the man said. “Do you know
who I am?”
“No”, Mark Twain said. “I don’t think I ever happened
to meet you before”.
“I’m the fishing inspector in this place. Do you know
that this is the closed season?”
410
Mark Twain thought quickly. He understood how
foolish he had been. «Do you know who I am?» he asked
aloud.
“No, of course not», answered the inspector.”
“I am the biggest liar on the Mississippi”, Mark Twain
told him.
ПРИЛОЖЕНИЕ 2
TEXTS FOR READING AND RETELLING
a) Ask 10 questions on the texts.
b) Give a short summary of the texts, making use of
the following plan.
The plan for rendering the text Some expressions to be used while rendering the text
1. The title of the text The title of the text is ...
2. The author of the text (story, article) The author of the text is ... The text is written by ...
3. The main idea of the text The main idea of the text is ... The text is about ... The text is devoted to ... The text deals with ...
4. The contents of the text (some facts, names, figures) a) The author starts telling the readers (about, that) ... b) The author writes (states, stresses, thinks, points out) that... The text describes ... The main characters of the text are ... c) According to the text ... Further the author says that ... The text goes on to say ... d) In conclusion ... Tlie author comes to the conclusion that
5. Your opinion of the text I found the text interesting (important, of no value, too hard to understand).
411
1. A LETTER
December 23, 1995
Dear Mary,
Here in London I’ve already made friends with many
college students. But I miss you and my parents that’s
why I’m going to write letters to you every day. I’ll try to
tell you as much as possible about Great Britain, its
history, customs, traditions and universities. I’d like to
start with some holidays in this country because they
bring something special, exciting into everyday life.
There are only six public holidays a year in Great
Britain. They are: Christmas Day, Boxing Day1, Good
Friday1 2, Easter Monday3 , Spring Bank Holiday and Late
Summer Bank Holiday4. Besides public holidays there are
other festivals and celebrations that people look forward
to and love to remember afterwards.
DECEMBER 26 IS CHRISTMAS DAY
At Christmas people remember the birth of Jesus.
There are many traditions connected with Christmas, and
even every family celebrates the feast in a particular way.
In Britain on Christmas Eve children hang a sock or
stocking at the end of their bed in the belief that “Father
Christmas” or “Santa Claus” will fill it with toys and good
things during the night. When they wake up on Christmas
Day they are rarely disappointed.
Christmas dinner is usually a family gathering at
which the main dish is chicken or turkey with many
trimming, followed by Christmas pudding.
For small children one of the most exciting prepe-
rations is helping to decorate a fir tree with shining bells,
balls, lights and artificial snow. The tree will stand in a
corner of the home for about two weeks.
It has already become a custom to erect a Norwegian
Christmas tree in Trafalgar Square, London. Every year
since 1946 the people of Norway have sent a huge fir tree
to the citizens of London as a way of saying “Thank you”
1 Boxing Day — день рождественских подарков (второй день рож-
дества )
2 Good Friday — великая пятница (пятница на страстной неделе)
8 Easter Monday — второй день пасхи
4 Spring Bank Holiday and Late Summer (August) Holiday — офи-
циальные выходные дни.
412
for the kindness they showed to Norwegian troops during
World War II. The tree stands in the centre of Trafalgar
Square, lit up by six hundred light bulbs.
The customs of sending cards at Christmas like that of
decorating fir trees, was introduced in Queen Victoria’s
reign (1837—1901). The first printed cards were produced
in 1843 and cost one shilling. More than 900 million cards
of countless designs are sold each year, but homemade
ones are often the most appreciated.
The 26th of December is Boxing Day. It is a traditional
day for presenting gifts of money to people who had been
of service during the year — servants, dustmen, postmen,
etc.
The season of Christmas festivities used to continue
until the Twelfth Night, 6th January, and this is usually
when school holidays end. In Western Europe and America
6th January is the Twelfth Night after Christmas,
whereas Russian Christians are only starting to celebrate,
as their Christmas comes on 6th January. The difference
is big, isn’t it?
How are you getting on, Mary?
I’m looking forward to hearing from you soon. Merry
Christmas!
Give my regards to our friends.
Sincerely yours,
Boris
2. ST. VALENTINE’S DAY
St. Valentine’s Day is celebrated on the 14th of
February. It’s great fun to send or receive a Valentine
card, but most people have no idea who St. Valentine was.
Not everybody knows why unsigned greetings of love are
sent on this feast day. It seems likely that he was
Valentinus, a priest who was put to death by the Emperor
Claudius for being a Christian. The Church probably chose
14th February as his feast day in the hope of rollicking ,
the Roman spring festival, when young men and girls
celebrated because spring was coming.
About mid-February the woods begin to echo with
birdsongs again after the silent days of winter. Skylarks
are heard singing high above meadowland. So this
outburst of birdsong in early spring was also said to be
connected with St. Valentine. People imagine that on this
413
feast day for exchanging loving greetings, birds too chose
their mates before nest-building.
Shops sold ready-made Valentines, brightly coloured,
lace-edged and boxed. Young people might even buy and
send more than one, just for fun of it.
Nowadays about a million cards are sent by post in the
United Kingdom every St. Valentine’s Day.
3. UNIVERSITIES AND HIGHER EDUCATION
IN GREAT BRITAIN
Most people in Great Britain start life in universities
and colleges at the age of 18. There are more than forty
universities in Britain: 36 are in England, 8 in Scotland
and one in Wales. The two oldest Universities in England
are Oxford and Cambridge.
Oxford is a beautiful city on the river Thames about
fifty miles from London. Most of the 39 Oxford colleges
are fine buildings of grey and yellow stone. The university
was founded in the 12th century and more than 8
thousand students study here at present.
Cambridge is situated at a distance of seventy miles
from London on the river Cam. Cambridge University
(now 29 colleges and 11 thousand students) was founded
at the beginning of the 13th century.
Oxford and Cambridge Universities are known for their
specific system of education. They preserve an antique
way of life and great emphasis is laid on «tutorials»8 Each
student has a tutor5 6 (a Don) who gives personal
instructions to the students numbering not more than
four. Every week the tutor and his students meet to
discuss the work they have done, to criticize it in detail
and to set the next week’s work. The students of Oxford
and Cambridge (or Oxbridge, as they are sometimes jointly
called) make up one of the most elite [ei’li:t] elites in the
world. Many great men studied there: Bacon, Mil ton,
Cromwell, Newton; many prominent politicians and mem-
bers of the Royal family were educated here too.
Until the nineteenth century England had no other
universities, apart from Oxford and Cambridge. The
universities founded between 1850—1930, including Lon-
5 Tutorial [tju’torial] system — система прикрепления студентов к
преподавателям-консультантам.
6 Tutor — преподаватель-консультант (в университетах Англии).
414
don University are known as redbrick universities (be-
cause of the favourable building material of the time).
Redbrick universities were built to provide a libe-
ral7 education and to give technological training for the
poorer boys. Oxford and Cambridge graduates scorned
them.
The universities founded after World War II are called
♦the new universities» (Kent, Essex, York, etc.).
All British universities are private institutions. Every
institution is independent, autonomous and responsible
only to its governing council, but they all receive financial
support from the state. The admission to the universities
is by examinations or selection (interviews).
Students who pass examinations at the end of the three
or four years of study get Bachelor’s degree8. The first
postgraduate degree is normally that of Master9 conferred
for a thesis based on at least one year’s fulltime work.
Universities are centres of research and many postgra-
duates10 11 are engaged in research for the higher degree, the
degree of Doctor.
A university consists of a number of faculties: arts11,
science12, medicine, agriculture, education, law and
theology13. The teaching is organized in departments, such
as engineering, economics, commerce, History, French,
etc.
At the head of each faculty there is a professor. Others
teachers are lectures, some of the senior teachers have the
title of reader14 or senior lecturer.
Over a third of all full-time students in Britain are
living in halls of residence (общежитие), slightly under
half are in lodgings and the remainder live at home. The
students receive grants.
Education in Britain is not free of charge, it is rather
expensive.
7 liberal — (зд.) гуманитарный
8 Bachelor’s degree — степень бакалавра
9 the degree of Master — степень магистра
10 postgraduate [‘poust’grxdjuit] — аспирант
11 arts — (зд) гуманитарный
12 science — (зд.) естественный
13 theology [Si’aladji] — теология
14 science — (зд.) естественный
415
4. THE HISTORY OF LONDON
London is without doubt one of the most fascinating
cities in the world. It has a long history. The birthplace of
London is the Old City.
London was born on the banks of the Thames hundreds
of years before our era. There was a small settlement
named Llyn-din. To this place in the year 55 before our
era Julius Caesar came from Rome.
At first the Romans were driven out by the Britons,
but they came back again. Britain was conquered, and for
400 years remained Roman province. Llyn-din became
Londinium.
The Romans built long straight roads along which the
Roman soldiers marched. The Romans made Londinium a
large and rich city with good streets, beautiful palaces,
shops and villas. Trade was growing.
In the 5th century the Romans left Britain. The Saxon
ordes and the Danes came to the British shores. They
conquered the land and ruined the city. During nearly 400
years Londinium lay in ruins.
In the 8th century and later the Saxon kings began to
rebuild the ruined city of Londinium. Soon 2 miles west
from it, another centre, Westminster Abbey, was founded.
In 1066 William the Conqueror, the Duke of Norman-
dy, came to Britain. He settled in Londinium. It became
London — the capital of Norman Britain. For 500 years
the Normans were masters of Britain. They brought with
them Latin and French civilization. Many Latin and
French words penetrated into the old English language.
Westminster Abbey was finished and William was the
first king to be crowned there. Since then for nearly 1000
years, all English monarchs have been crowned in the
Abbey. Many of them are buried there too.
At that time the Tower of London was built on the
Thames.
5. ROBIN HOOD AND THE GOLDEN ARROW
Robin Hood was a legendary hero who was well known
and loved by the poor people of England. He lived in a
forest far from the towns, and when the poor were
oppressed by the rich, he helped them by giving them food
and shelter. The sheriffs tried to arrest him but they did
not succeed in doing so. Once the sheriff of N. decided to
organize a shooting contest in order to catch him because
416
he knew Robin Hood to be a very good shot and was sure
that he would take part in the contest by all means. The
prize was a golden arrow.
On learning about the forthcoming contest Robin Hood
gathered his men and discussed whether they should take
part in it. Finally it was decided that although the risk of
participating in the contest was great, they should all go,
Robin Hood among them.
The day of the contest was fine and clear. The town
was decorated with flags, and field for the contest was
full of people. The sheriff looked for Robin Hood and his
men everywhere. He knew that they were always dressed
in green. To his disappointment, however, he could not
find anybody who looked like them. The contest was won
by a fellow dressed in red, who had come from a village
with a whole company of young men. After receiving the
prize the fellow left the town, and nobody ever thought
that it was Robin Hood. While leaving the town Robin
Hood shot an arrow through the sheriff's open window.
There was a paper attached to it with the following words:
“Robin Hood thanks the sheriff for the Golden Arrow.”
6. WILLIAM SHAKESPEARE
William Shakespeare is the world’s greatest poet and
dramatist. He was born on April 23, 1564 in Stratford-on-
Avon. His mother, Mary Arden, was a daughter of Robert
Arden, a farmer. His father, John Shakespeare, was a
merchant and he had several houses in Stratford. Two of
them were side by side and it was in one of them that
William was born. Little is known about William’s
childhood. He got his education at the Grammar School.
He got married in 1582 to Anne Hathaway and had three
children, a boy and two girls. William lived in Stratford
until he was about twenty-one, when he went to London.
Later, Shakespeare became an actor and a member of
one of the big acting companies. Soon he began to write
plays for this company and in a few years became a well-
known author. Shakespeare wrote 37 plays. Among them
are tragedies such as Hamlet, King Lear. Othello,
Macbeth, comedies such as All’s Well that Ends Well,
Twelfth Night, What You Will, etc. Shakespeare spent the
last years of his life in Stratford, where he died in 1616.
He was buried in the church of Stratford. A monument
417
was built to him in the Poet’s Corner in Westminster
Abbey.
Shakespeare was a great humanist. His belief in the
high and noble features of man’s mind and heart was the
foundation of his great humanism.
Shakespeare’s belief in man was the source of his
optimism which we can feel in even his blackest tragedies.
Of course, it is not expressed in the positive endings when
the Montagues and Capulets (Romeo and Juliet) shake
hands or Fortinbras (Hamlet) ascends the throne. The
optimism of Shakespeare’s tragedies has much deeper
roots. His optimism is his belief in the triumph of the
principle of harmony. Romeo and Juliet died but their
ideal of free and happy love remained. Othello stabbed
himself to death, but still retained his faith in harmony
and happiness. Lear died but even as he died, he knew
that truth existed in the world, personified for him by
Cordelia (King Lear).
7. THEATRES AND FESTIVALS IN GREAT BRITAIN
Of the large number of London theatres only three or
four are at present performing Shakespearean plays, and
even not every night. The reason for that is that the
London theatre is very commercialized. Everything is
done for the sake of entertainment and profit.
One of the place where the public can see old and well-
known or experimental plays is in the so-called “Club”
theatres where the money problem is not important since
the actors are paid little or nothing. A play is produced
for one or two weeks and any profits from this go to pay
for the next production. There are several “Club” theatres
like this in the London suburbs and all over England. The
members are often professionals (out-of-work or ex-
actors), but there are also amateurs who have a completely
different job in the daytime.
Interesting plays can also be seen at numerous festivals
held all over Great Britain. It has become a tradition not
only in big cities but in small towns as well to hold a
number of art, music and theatre festivals every year.
Some festivals have international fame. Edinburgh15 —
the Scottish capital — hosts the famous Edinburgh
International Festival which was established in 1947 and
15 Edinburgh ['edinbara] — Эдинбург
418
has been held annually ever since. Every summer crowds
pour into the city16 to participate in this festival which
lasts three weeks. On most evenings during the festival
there are as many as six events to choose from the official
programme: plays, ballets, concerts — all given by fine
artists from all over Britain and some from abroad.
8. AT THE NATIONAL GALLERY
If you stand today in Trafalgar Square with you back
to the Nelson Column, you will see a building of classical
architecture. This is the National Gallery. It has been in
this building since 1838. The British National Picture
Gallery is younger than the great galleries in Rome, Paris,
Amsterdam and so on.
Most of the landowners and politicians had their own
collections of pictures in their country houses. They were
not interested in a public collection in London.
In 1777 when one of the greatest private collections of
pictures was to be sold, some of the members of Par-
liament wanted to buy it for the Nation. But this found
no support in the House of Commons. The wonderful
pictures went to Russia.
In time things changed and more people wanted to open
a National Gallery. Now pictures showing British life and
nature and British people are in this gallery.
The world schools of painting are also well represented
here: Italian, French, Spanish, etc.
During the last war the walls of the building of the
National Gallery were destroyed in some places. But the
pictures were taken to Wales and put down in a deep cave
at the foot of the mountain. They were saved.
9. TRADITIONS AND CUSTOMS
Every nation and every country has its own customs
and traditions. In Britain traditions play a more impor-
tant part in the life of the people than in other countries.
Englishmen are proud of their traditions and carefully
keep them up. It has been the law for about three hundred
years that all the theatres are closed on Sundays. No letters
are delivered, only a few Sunday papers are published.
To this day an English family prefers a house with a
garden to a flat in a modern house with central heating.
16 crowds pour into the city — толпы заполняют город
419
English people like gardens. Sometimes the garden in
front of the house is a little square covered with cement
painted green in imitation of grass and a box of flowers.
Holidays are especially rich in old traditions and are
different in Scotland, Ireland, Wales and England.
Christmas is a great English national holiday, and in
Scotland it is not kept at all, except by clerks in banks; all
the shops, mills and factories are working. But six days
later, on New Year’s Eve the Scotch begin to enjoy
themselves. All the shops, mills and factories are closed
on New Year’s Day.
People invite their friends to their houses and «sit the
Old Year out and the New Year in». When the clock
begins to strike twelve, the head of the family goes to the
entrance door, opens it wide and holds it until the last
stroke. Then he shuts the door. He has let the Old Year
out and the New Year in.
10. BRITISH FOOD
British food has a bad reputation in Europe. This is not
entirely justified. Traditional home-cooked British food is
as good as European cooking. A good example is the
traditional British Sunday lunch, consisting of roast beef,
roast potatoes and pudding. There is also a large variety
of excellent British cheeses. British people eat a lot of
meat but they rarely eat raw ham. Although not many
people in Britain eat rice as a first course, they sometimes
eat it as a second course. Wine is expensive, so not many
people drink it with their meals. Mineral water is not very
common, either. One of the most popular drink with meals
in Britain is tea.
The meal for which Britain is most famous is the
traditional breakfast, which usually consists of cornflakes
with milk, toast with marmalade or honey and tea. Some
people also eat sausages, eggs and bacon for their breakfast.
For lunch they usually have soup, fruit juice, cold
meat and salad, or fish, or roast meat and vegetables,
then goes an apple tart, or a hot milk pudding, cold fruit
salad, or ice-cream.
From four to six there is a very light meal called
afternoon tea. It consists of a cup of tea and a cake. This
became a kind of ritual. At this time “everything stops for
tea” in England. The whole nation is at ease drinking tea.
420
Dinner (usually at 6 p.m.), is much like lunch and is in
many families the last main meal of the day. For supper
they have tea or coffee with biscuits. Almost every meal
finishes with tea (with or without milk), cheese and butter.
The English people like fish and chips. Everybody
seems to have a fish and chip supper at home at least once
a week. There are fish and chip shops in the side streets
of every English town.
If you want to «eat out» in a restaurant in Britain,
there is an enormous variety of both British and foreign
restaurants to choose from.
11. AT THE PUB
For company and conversation the English go to the
“pub”. The cafes in England sell only coffee, tea and “soft”
drinks. You go to a cafe for a meal or for a quick cup of
tea, but not to sit and watch the world go by. When you
want to relax after a day’s work, you go to the local
public house17.
Everybody goes there, except children, who are not
allowed in. If you go up to the bar, you may find every
kind of person: doctors, schoolmasters, workmen. They all
go there, to talk and to drink their usual drink.
The people who want to sing ask someone to play the
tunes on the old piano. They group themselves round it
and they buy drinks for the pianist. That is the custom.
The one who plays has free drinks as long as he plays.
Good humour and good temper give English pubs their
character. If you go there regularly the landlord will try
to get to know you. He will remember what you usually
drink and may well become a personal friend. The pub is
the place where you meet people. You get to know other
«regulars», you buy drinks in turn, which is called «to
stand around» and you talk. You talk about the weather
or how the English cricket team is doing in the Test
Match against Australia. And although they see each
other almost every night for years, the regulars who meet
there will never go into each other’s homes.
12. THE FIRST LANGUAGE IN THE WORLD
Nobody knows what the first language was. But
scientists feel sure that nobody speaks it today because all
17 the local public house — местный бар
421
languages change and keep on changing as long as people
use them. One language may change in different ways in
different places and grow into several languages.
Children don’t always use words exactly the way their
parents do. They make small changes in the sounds or in
the meaning. In time these little changes add up to big
changes. If we could meet the people who spoke English
five hundred years ago, we probably couldn’t understand
much what they said.
English itself is a mixture of several languages.
Scientists believe that these languages and many others all
grew out of the same language which they call Indo-
European. Nobody speaks it now. But some of its
descendants are Latin, German, English, French, Greek,
Russian and many of the different languages spoken in
India.
Most civilizations and cultures — in their writings,
traditions, folk stories — have some traces of the old
language. Only sometimes the ancients tried to learn
something about the languages by experiments. The Greek
historian Herodotus wrote about the Egyptian king named
Psammetichos. He decided to learn which of the world’s
languages was the oldest. For this he isolated two small
children who could not speak yet. Sooner or later they had
to begin to speak, but they didn’t have any language to
imitate, so they would speak the most primitive of the
languages, the king thought. One day the children said
the word “bekos”, it was similar to the Phrygian18 word
for “bread”. That was why Phrygian (a language once
spoken in Asia Minor19) was thought to be the first
language in the world, at least by king Psammetichos.
13. AMERICAN ENGLISH
Britain and America were once described as nations
divided by a commom language. Just what is the diffe-
rence between the English spoken in Britain and America?
The first English settlers to reach America arrived in
Virginia in 1607 and in Massachusetts in 1620. They all
spoke English of the early seventeenth century — the
language of Shakespeare and Milton. Most of them came
originally from the south and south-east of England.
18 Phrygian ['fridsian] — фригийский язык
ls Asia Minor — Малая Азия
422
Although some of them had spent some years of exile in
Holland they spoke with the accents of the southern part
of their home country. To a large extent they kept that
form of speech, but they soon learned to give old words
new uses. They also took words from the local Indian
languages for plants and animals that were new to them.
Until the Declaration of Independence in 1776 over
two-thirds of the settlers in what later became the U.S.
came from England. After that date many other people
came to make a new life for themselves in the New World.
These included Irish, French, Germans, Dutch, Italians,
Slavs, and Scandinavians. All these people gave new words
to the language of North America. The Negroes who had
been taken from Africa as slaves to work on the rice and
cotton plantations added words and structures from their
own native languages. Some people today think that the
very American expression O.K. comes from a similar
expression which was brought to America by the Negroes.
Although all these people contributed in various ways
to the language which was to become American English,
there is one man who can be singled out as the person who
did most to give American English an identity of its own.
He was Noah Webster (1758—1843). He is largely
responsible for the differences which exist today between
British and American spelling.
14. US SYSTEM OF GOVERNMENT
The United States is a federal union of 50 states plus
one independent district — the District of Columbia.
Forty-nine states, including Alaska, form the continental
United States. The 50th state is separated from the
continental part. It is the state of Hawaii20 — a group of
islands situated in the mid Pacific Ocean.
Washington, D. C.21 is the seat of the Federal Go-
vernment of the United States. The Federal Government is
made up of three branches — the Executive, the Le-
gislative and the Judicial Branches.
The function of the Executive Branch is to carry out
the laws of the nation. It consists of the President, Vice-
President and the President’s Cabinet. The members of
the Cabinet are chosen by the President.
20 Hawaii [ha’vaii] — Гаваи (острова и штат)
21 D. С. — District of Columbia [кэ’1лтЬ1Э] — округ Колумбия
423
The Legislative Branch, Congress, is where the laws are
made and adopted. Congress is made up of two houses: the
Senate and the House of Representatives. There are 100
Senators elected, two from each of the 50 states,
regardless of their population. The members of the House
of Representatives are elected for only 2 years and their
number in the Congress depends upon the state’s
population.
The Judicial Branch is headed by the Supreme Court
which settles any disputes involving the national govern-
ment or disputes between two or more states.
15. PHILADELPHIA — HISTORICAL CITY OF INDEPENDENCE
Philadelphia, which was founded in 1682 by William
Penn, a prominent statesman, was a large city in Colonial
America. Even now some parts of the old city remind one
of the past. Visitors can walk along the old streets, see
the old houses and public buildings.
Here in 1774 the first Congress of delegates from all
the colonies was held. Among the delegates were men of
great fame, such as George Washington and John Adams,
the first and second Presidents of the USA. The main
decision of the first Continental Congress was to unite the
efforts of all the colonies against Great Britain.
The second Continental Congress, held in Philadelphia
a year later, decided to organize an army to defend the
colonies. George Washington was chosen commander-in-
chief and the War for Independence began. The Congress
named a committee of five to draw up the Declaration of
Independence. The work was actually done by Thomas
Jefferson, then 33 years old. On July 4, 1776 the Congress
adopted the Declaration of Independence. Celebration of the
fourth of July as Independence Day began the next year.
Philadelphia was the city where the US Constitution
was adopted in 1788—1789. In 1790 the first Congress
met in Philadelphia and decided that Philadelphia would
be the capital of the USA while the federal capital in
Washington, D. C. was being built. It remained the capital
for the next 10 years.
16. TV AND CHILDREN
Only in recent years scientists and doctors began
serious study of the influence of television on children
and young people.
424
Some psychologists say that after parents, television
has the greatest influence on children today.
Of course, watching TV has its good and bad sides.
From TV children get information about the world, they
learn new words and begin to use them in their speech.
But TV also influences the development of a child in a
negative way. When children spend all day in front of TV
sets they cannot usually find time to read, to play games
in the yard, to talk to their parents and friends.
Some teachers say that children who watch TV every
day talk too much at school at the lessons. They cannot
talk at home while watching TV and so they begin to talk
at school.
TV influences the creative abilities of pupils. In
America there was such an experiment. 250 good pupils
could watch TV for many hours every day. After three
weeks the pupils were tested. The results were unusually
low.
Pupils who watch TV very much cannot understand an
easy story without pictures, tables or illustrations.
Television usually makes children passive. When a
child watches TV he lives the lives of TV heroes, he
travels with them, does every thing with them. But he is
not doing anything, he is just sitting in an armchair and
watching TV.
When a child watches TV, everything seems very easy
to him. And real life begins to seem easy. He cannot work
hard, because watching TV does not need hard work.
There is also serious concern about the negative effect of
some TV shows in which scenes of violence and crime are
predominant.
17. RUSSIAN COINS
In the past, scientists thought that for many centuries
only leather and furs were used in ancient Russia as
money. But now it is known that silver money was also
used.
In the XII—XIV centuries almost all the coins
disappeared in Russia. It happened because Russia was at
war with the German Knights and the Mongol-Tartars at
the same time. After the war the Russians had to fight
with the Mongol-Tartars. So normal trade and economic
ties with both the West and the East were broken. People
began to hide money not to pay it to the Mongol-Tartars,
425
that’s why archaeologists to this day find a lot of coins
from that period.
In the XIV century some Russian principalities began
to make their own silver coins. The coins weighed as much
as one rouble. In ancient Russia the word «rouble» meant
a silver piece which weighed 200 grammes. The coins were
called denga22. Now we use this word as dengi and it
means «money». It was difficult to use them in the
country as there were more than 25 cities which made
money and coins were different in different cities.
In 1534 a single monetary system was introduced in
Russian state. It showed that the long process of
unification of the country was over. A new coin — a
silver copeck — was made. In the 17th century Peter the
Great began to rule the country and made many changes
in Russia, and one of them was a new monetary system. A
silver rouble became the main coin, there were 10 copecks
and 5 copecks.
In 1769 the first Russian paper money appeared. When
World War I began all gold and silver coins disappeared
and only paper money was used at that time.
18. THE INITED NATIONS
The name “United Nations” was coined23 by U.S.
President Franklin D. Roosevelt to describe the countries
fighting together in World War II when tjie
representatives of 26 states met and signed the
Declaration of common intent on New Year’s Day in 1942.
Representatives of five powers: the USA, the Soviet
Union, China, France and Great Britain worked together
to draw up principles and proposals for the future
organization. These proposals, modified after delibe-
ration24 at the conference on International Organization in
San Francisco which began in April 1945, were finally
agreed on and signed as the U.N. Charter by 50 countries
on 26 June, 1945. Belarus was among the founding
member states. Poland, not represented at the conference,
signed the Charter later and was added to the list of
original members. In autumn, after the Charter was
ratified by China, France, the U.S.S.R., the U.K. and the
22 denga [‘denga]— (зд.) деньги
23 coin, v — придумывать, создавать новые слова, выражения
24 deliberation — обсуждение
426
U.S. and by a majority of the other participants, the U.N.
officially came into existence. The date was October 24,
now it is universally celebrated as United Nations Day.
The essential functions of the U.N. are to maintain
international peace and security, to develop friendly
relations among nations, to cooperate internationally in
solving international economic, social, cultural and human
problems, promoting respect for human rights and
fundamental freedoms and to be a centre for coordinating
the actions of nations in attaining these common goals.
19. CAN WAR BE ABOLISHED?
Is it possible to persuade mankind to live without war?
War is an ancient institution which has existed for at
least six thousand years. It was always wicked and usually
foolish, but in the past mankind managed to live with it.
Modern science has changed this. Either Man will
abolish25 war, or war will abolish Man. For the present, it
is nuclear weapons that cause the gravest danger, but
bacteriological or chemical weapons may soon offer an
even greater threat. If we succeed in abolishing nuclear
weapons, our work for peace will not be done. It will never
be done until we have succeeded in abolishing war. To do
this, we need to persuade mankind to look upon
international questions in a new way. It is not easy to
change age-old mental habits, but this is what must be
attempted.
There are those who say that the adoption of this or
that ideology would prevent war. I believe this to be a
profound error.
The movement of world opinion during the past two
years has been very largely such as we can welcome. It has
become a commonplace26 that nuclear war can be avoided.
Of course very difficult problems remain in the interna-
tional sphere, but the spirit in which they are being
approached is a better one than it was some years ago. We
are beginning to realize that negotiations should reach
agreements even if both sides do not find these agree-
ments wholly satisfactory. We are beginning to under-
stand that the important conflict nowadays is not between
East and West, but between Man and the H-bomb.
25 abolish, v — уничтожить, побеждать
26 it has become a commonplace — стало общепринятым
427
СПИСОК ИСПОЛЬЗОВАННОЙ ЛИТЕРАТУРЫ
1. Английский язык: Повторительный курс (для неязыков. ву-
зов). — М.. 1968.
2. Беляева М.А, Грамматика английского языка. — М., 1984.
3. Бонди Е.А. Английский язык. Повтор, курс. — М., 1988.
4. Бонди Е.А., Царев П.В. Учебное пособие по английскому язы-
ку для поступающих в вузы. — М., 1975.
5. Бонк Н.А., Котий Г.А., Лукьянова Н.А. Учебник английского
языка, ч. I, II. — Мн., 1991.
6. Клементьев Т.Б. Повторяем времена английского глагола. —
М., 1990.
7. Кованова Т.Ф., Сикорская Н.П. Пособие по английскому языку
для поступающих в вузы. — Мн., 1975.
8. Крылова И.П., Крылова Е.В. Английская грамматика для
всех. — М., 1989.
9. Кудрявцева Л. Н. Учебник английского языка для делового об-
щения. М., 1991.
10. Курашвили Е.И., Михайлова Е.С. Английский язык: Вводно-
фонетический курс. — М., 1982.
11. Шевякова В.Е. Вводный фонетический курс английского язы-
ка. — М., 1967.
12. Bliemel W. English for Adults. — Oxford, 1980.
13. Carrier M. Contacts For Foreign Students Learning English. The
Teaching Workshop Series. — London, 1978.
14. Cook V.J. English for Life: Students’ Book. — Oxford, 1982.
15. Forum. Vol. 32. No 1, 1994
16. Graham Carolyn. Jazz Chants. — New York, 1978.
17. Jones L. Notions in English. — Cambridge, 1982.
18. Joy M. Highdays and Holidays. L,. 1981.
19. Johnson K., Morrow K. Approaches. — Cambridge, 1979.
20. Life and Relationship. — London, 1979.
21. Mackin R., Carver D. A Higher Course of English Study. —
Oxford, 1975.
22. Matveyev N.K. English for Beginners. — M., 1984.
23. Moscow News. 1987—1994.
24. Murphy Roymond. English Grammar in Use. Cambridge Univer-
sity Press, 1995.
25. Seal B. Activities. English for Short Courses. Structure Drills. —
London, 1980.
26. Soars John and Lir. Headway. Intermediate. — Oxford, 1987.
27. Speak English. — Minsk, 1985.
28. Thorn M. Thinking English. — Cassel, 1984.
29. Thomson A. J., Martinet A. V. A Practical English Grammar.
Oxford University Press, 1966.
30. Zhulkevskaya G.V., Karpysheva N.M. In the United Family. —
Minsk, 1987.
ОГЛАВЛЕНИЕ
Предисловие .......................................... "
Английский алфавит.................................... 5
ФОНЕТИКА
УРОК 1
Общие сведения о звуковом строе и орфографии английского
языка ................................................ 6
УРОК 2
Особенности фонетического строя английского языка. 11
Произношение гласных............................... 11
УРОК 3
Особенности фонетического строя английского языка. 16
Произношение согласных............................. 16
УРОК 4
Правила чтения гласных букв и буквосочетаний......... 22
Правила чтения гласных............................. 22
Чтение гласной в безударном слоге.................. 22
Чтение гласной в ударном слоге..................... 23
УРОК 5
Правила чтения согласных букв и буквосочетаний...... 33
УРОК 6
Английская интонация................................ 39
ГРАММАТИКА
Части речи.......................................... 46
Существительное (The Noun).......................... 47
Общие сведения................................... 47
Категория числа существительных................ 48
Категория падежа существительных................. 50
Артикль (The Article)............................... 55
Общие сведения................................... 55
Употребление неопределенного артикля............. 56
Употребление определенного артикля............... 56
Отсутствие артикля............................... 58
Прилагательное (The Adjective)...................... 61
Общие сведения................................... 61
Степени сравнения прилагательных................. 62
429
Местоимение (The Pronoun)............................................ 65
Общие сведения.................................................... 65
Личные местоимения................................................ 66
Притяжательные местоимения...................................... 67
Указательные местоимения.......................................... 68
Возвратные местоимения............................................ 69
Вопросительные местоимения........................................ 69
Неопределенные местоимения........................................ 70
Числительное (The Numeral)......................................... 73
Хронологические даты.............................................. 74
Дробные числительные.............................................. 75
Глагол (The Verb).................................................... 76
Общие сведения..................................................... 76
Глаголы to be, to have............................................. 80
Оборот there + be.................................................. 89
Система видо-временных форм глагола в изъявительном накло-
нении действительного залога......................................... 95
Сравнительная характеристика форм настоящего времени ... 119
Сравнительная характеристика форм прошедшего времени.. 125
Сравнительная характеристика форм будущего времени.. 143
Модальные глаголы................................................... 143
Сап............................................................... 144
Must.............................................................. 145
То have (to)...................................................... 145
То be (to)........................................................ 146
May............................................................... 146
Should, ought to.................................................. 147
Need.............................................................. 147
Страдательный залог (The Passive Voice)............................. 151
Перевод глаголов в страдательном залоге на русский язык 155
Согласование времен (The Sequence of Tenses)........................ 162
Прямая и косвенная речь (Direct and Indirect Speech). 163
Наклонение (The Mood)............................................... 168
Неличные формы глагола (The Verbals)................................ 174
Инфинитив......................................................... 175
Причастие......................................................... 179
Герундий.......................................................... 185
Наречие (The Adverb)................................................ 192
Классификация наречий по значению................................. 192
Предлог (The Preposition)........................................... 195
Союз (The Conjunction).............................................. 200
Предложение и его структура......................................... 203
Структура вопросительных предложений.............................. 205
Структура отрицательных предложений............................... 207
ЛЕКСИКА
UNIT 1. Conversational Topic About Myself.............................. 212
UNIT 2 Conversational Topic My Family.................................. 219
UNIT 3. Conversational Topic Our House and Flat........................ 226
430
UNIT 4. Conversational Topic My Working Day.............................. 233
UNIT 5. Conversational Topic My Free Time............................. 239
UNIT 6. Conversational Topic *My Household Duties1 ...................... 244
UNIT 7. Conversational Topic Shopping.................................... 250
UNIT 8. Conversational Topic My Friend ................................. 256
UNIT 9. Conversational Topic Seasons and Weather ................. 264
UNIT 10. Conversational Topic School...................................... 271
UNIT 11. Conversational Topic My English Studies.................. 277
UNIT 12. Conversational Topic My Favourite Writer................. 283
UNIT 13. Conversational Topic My Future Profession................ 299
UNIT 15. Conversational Topic Sport in My Life........................... 305
UNIT 16. Conversational Topic Art in Our Life...................... 313
UNIT 17. Conversational Topic The Republic of Belarus.............. 323
UNIT 18. Conversational Topic Minsk...................................... 330
UNIT 19. Conversational Topic Mу Native Town............................. 336
UNIT 20. Conversational Topic Famous People of Belarus........... 342
UNIT 21. Conversational Topic *Heroiem of the Belarusian People
Dur ing the Great Patriotic War................................. 349
UNIT 22. Conversational Topic Outstanding Scientists of the World.... 355
UNIT 23. Conversational Topic The United Kingdom of Great Britain
and Northern Ireland.................................................... 362
UNIT 24. Conversational Topic *London.................................... 370
UNIT 25. Conversational Topic Ecological Problems........................ 378
Ключи к упражнениям................................................. 383
Таблица нестандартных глаголов...................................... 397
Приложение 1........................................................ 400
Приложение 2........................................................ 411
Список использованной литературы.................................... 428
1 Знаком * обозначены темы, знание которых необходимо для по-
ступающих в языковые вузы на факультеты иностранных языков.
431
Учебное издание
Хведчевя Людмила Владимировна
Хорень Регина Васильевна
АНГЛИЙСКИЙ ЯЗЫК
ДЛЯ ПОСТУПАЮЩИХ В ВУЗЫ
Редактор Л. Д. Касьянова
Художник-оформитель и художественный редактор А Г Звонарев
Технический редактор Л. И Счислснок
Корректор С. В. Трофимук
Набор и компьютерная верстка И. В. Скубий
Подписано в печать с оригинала-макета издательства «Вышэйшая
школа 15.09.98. Формат 84x108/32. Бумага тип № 2. Офсетная пе
чать Гарнитура Школьная. Усл печ. л. 22,68. Уч.-изд. л. 23,43
Тираж 35 000 экз. Зак. 2112.
ГП «Издательство "Вышэйшая школа”». Лицензия ЛВ № 5
от 22.12.97. 220048, Минск, проспект Машерова, 11.
Отпечатано с оригинала-макета заказчика в типографии
издательства «Белорусский Дом печати». 220013, Минск,
проспект Ф. Скорины, 79.